Konica Minolta Bizhub C252 - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

 

 

 

 

Search Results: 1 - 50 of 57 

Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide German Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Italian User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Spanish Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22
User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Italian Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22
User`s Guide French User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Greek User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Czech User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Danish User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovenian User Manual bizhub C252 1.1.1 2007-06-12
User`s Guide English Network Fax Operations 1.1.0 2006-08-22
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Polish User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide German User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C250, C250P, C252, C252P CEM 2006 - T012B 2006-10-17
ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05
Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15
User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05

 

Search Results:  51 - 57 of 57

Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05

Search Results:  51 - 57 of 57

 

 

 

 

Autres documentations et logiciels Konica Minolta :

Konica-Minolta-ineo-250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-12-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-s-Guide-ColorCentro-IC-601-Ver1.0-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-11-Manuels

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 20:31  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-D-162..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17  5.3M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:15  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:14  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:13  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:12  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:11  5.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:10  3.5M

Konica-Minolta-IC-305-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-1600W-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C280-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C220-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C20P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1051-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350EN-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-2550-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10P-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-200-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C253P-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-C252-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-600-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-8-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-C252-2-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C451-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Konica-Minolta-FAX-1610-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-600-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C280-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C353-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-1200-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-451-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-750-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-5501-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C200-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-350-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160f-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-650-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-303-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Manuels

Konica-business-hub-C284-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Italie-4-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-CN5001Pro-Allemand-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-213-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1250-P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-550-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-1051-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-D131F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C30P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-ineo-283-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-751-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-35P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-654-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRESS-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-165-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8460CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7460CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-160f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C5501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-421-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-500-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Cabinet-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-AU-201-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C35P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-CF2001-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-4-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-mc1650ENUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub423SeriesAdvancedFunctionOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35FacsimileUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35Printer_Copier_ScannerUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC550UserGuideBoxOper.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Short-Guide-Poster-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePro-1300W-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-302-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bihub-423-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-203-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-211-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-1600f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-164-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC452_C552_C552DS_C652_C652DSCopyOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

 

http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html

Fiery® Print Server Workflow Examples © 2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45087253 1 September 2009 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 5 Terminology and conventions 5 About this document 6 MIXED MEDIA 7 What is Mixed Media? 7 Example: Workflow with Mixed Media 7 Items required for this example 8 IMPOSITION 11 What is imposition? 11 Example: Workflow with imposition 11 Items required for this example 12 PPML WITH IMPOSITION 15 What is PPML and how do you impose it? 15 Example: PPML workflow with imposition 15 Items required for this example 16 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 19 What is variable data printing? 19 Variable data printing languages 19 Sending variable data jobs to the Print Server 19 What is FreeForm and how is it used with variable data print jobs? 20 Example: Variable data workflow using FreeForm 20 Items required for this example 21 CONTENTS 4 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 24 What is FreeForm 2 and how is it used with variable data print jobs? 24 What is Mixed Media and how can it be used in variable data print jobs? 25 Example: Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media 25 Items required for this example 26 HOT FOLDERS 29 What is a Hot Folder? 29 Example: Workflow with Hot Folders 29 Items required for this example 30 COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 33 What is Compose? 33 What is Paper Catalog and how is it used with Compose? 34 Example: Workflow with Compose and Paper Catalog 35 Items required for this example 36 INDEX 39 INTRODUCTION 5 INTRODUCTION This document provides examples of complex printing scenarios and an overview of the Print Server features used in the examples. The example workflows illustrate how you can combine features to create jobs. Each workflow includes cross-references to help you locate more information about performing each task. For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Copier The copier or printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information Important information Important information about issues that can result in physical harm to you or others INTRODUCTION 6 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Mixed Media concepts and how Mixed Media is used in an example workflow • Variable Data Printing (VDP) concepts with FreeForm and how VDP is used in an example workflow using FreeForm • Imposition concepts with PPML (Personalized Print Markup Language) and how imposition is used in an example variable data printing workflow using Impose and PPML • Printing to a Hot Folder on the network and an example workflow using Hot Folders • Compose and Paper Catalog concepts and how to create a job with Compose and Paper Catalog MIXED MEDIA 7 MIXED MEDIA This chapter provides an overview of Mixed Media and an example workflow that includes Mixed Media. NOTE: Mixed Media is not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Mixed Media is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is Mixed Media? The Mixed Media feature allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media. For example, you can use Mixed Media to specify a heavy stock for the cover, add blank pages, insert colored media on designated pages, and specify duplex pages within a single print job. Specify Mixed Media settings when you print a job from an application with the printer driver. Define and modify the Mixed Media settings of jobs already sent to the Print Server from Command WorkStation or define Mixed Media settings in the Hot Folders application. For more information about Mixed Media, see Utilities. Example: Workflow with Mixed Media A geology professor at Ocean Crest University wants to print her new course book for the fall semester. The new course book consists of eight chapters. She wants her students to be able to find the information they want easily and quickly. To ensure this, each chapter divider in the book is printed on heavy media. The chapter text is printed on plain media and the front and back covers are printed on heavy media. The professor sends her request, along with the book file in PDF (Portable Document Format) (Geology101.pdf ), to the university’s in-house production department. MIXED MEDIA 8 The following diagram illustrates the components of the course book. Items required for this example • Geology101.pdf • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Mixed Media • Heavy media for the front and back covers • Heavy media for chapter dividers • Plain media for the chapter text Front cover printed on heavy media Back cover printed on heavy media Chapter dividers on heavy media Chapters printed on plain media Completed course book MIXED MEDIA 9 Mixed Media workflow Print Server 1 2 3 8 7 6 5 4 Print Server Step Task For more information 1 The professor creates the PDF and sends the file to the university’s in-house production department. 2 The operator in the production department downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help MIXED MEDIA 10 To use Mixed Media in Command WorkStation, your downloaded file must be a non-raster file. To remove raster information from a file in Command WorkStation, right-click the file and select Remove Raster Data. You can duplicate this workflow with a PostScript file instead of a PDF. 3 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation, chooses Properties from the Actions menu, and clicks the Media icon on the Job Properties toolbar. The operator applies the following settings: a) From New Page Range in Mixed Media, the operator types 2, 32, 64, 98, 124 for the defined media pages (the pages that divide the chapters), specifies a heavy media, indicates which tray contains the heavy media, clicks Add Definition, and then clicks Close. b) From New Insert in Mixed Media, the operator specifies inserting a blank page after the last page to distinguish the end of the print job, clicks Insert, and then clicks Close. c) The operator specifies front and back covers that print on front only, cover stock, and which tray contains the media, and then clicks OK (if applicable). d) The operator clicks the Layout icon and specifies duplex, clicks OK, and then saves the file. Utilities 4 The operator processes and holds the job. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator previews the job. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator prints the job. NOTE: The operator can also print one set as a proof before printing multiple copies. Command WorkStation Help 7 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 8 The job is printed with a front and back cover and dividers for each chapter. Step Task For more information IMPOSITION 11 IMPOSITION This chapter provides an overview of imposition and an example workflow using imposition. NOTE: Imposition is not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Imposition is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is imposition? Imposition is the process of arranging individual pages of a book, booklet, or brochure on a large sheet. The pages are laid out such that when the sheet is printed, folded, and cut, the pages are in the correct orientation and order. The Print Server supports Impose. Impose is a server-based imposition application that allows you to edit and assemble entire documents on the Print Server before you process the files. For more information about imposition, see Command WorkStation Help. Example: Workflow with imposition The manager of Company ABC wants to make sure that she has enough business cards to distribute when she is managing her company’s booth at the Consumer Electronics Show. She sends a request to a local print shop to print 600 cards. The print shop imposes her business cards on an 11x17 page. Since the card design incorporates text on the back, the job must be duplexed. Company ABC’s standard business card size is 2 x3.25. The print shop calculates that they can impose 25 cards on one 11x17 page. IMPOSITION 12 The following graphic illustrates how the business cards are imposed. Items required for this example • Card.pdf • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Impose (requires a dongle) • 11x17 heavy media, such as card stock • Paper cutter 11x17 page 2x3.25 business card 5 rows 5 columns { IMPOSITION 13 Imposition workflow Print Server 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 Step Task For more information 1 Company ABC creates the 2x3.25 business card, saves the file as Card.pdf, and then sends the file to the print shop. Printing 2 The operator at the print shop downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help IMPOSITION 14 When you use Impose, your downloaded file must be a non-raster file. To remove raster information from a file with Command WorkStation, right-click the file and select Remove Raster Data. 3 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation, chooses Impose from the Actions menu, and then applies the following settings. a) From the Settings pane, the operator selects Gangup and selects Repeat. b) The Operator specifies 11x17, landscape, and duplex. c) Under Layout, the operator specifies five rows and five columns. d) Under Scale, the operator specifies the scale at 100%. e) The operator turns on printer’s marks and sets the offset X and Y to 0.125 pt. f) The operator saves the job. Utilities 4 The operator selects Card.pdf.dbp in Command WorkStation and selects Preview. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator prints the job. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 7 The cards are printed on an 11x17 page. 8 The operator follows the printer’s marks and cuts the business cards. Step Task For more information PPML WITH IMPOSITION 15 PPML WITH IMPOSITION This chapter provides an overview of PPML and imposition, and an example workflow of an imposed job using PPML. NOTE: Imposition and PPML are not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Imposition is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. To determine if PPML is supported for your particular Print Server, see Printing. What is PPML and how do you impose it? Personal Print Markup Language (PPML) is an XML-based language for variable data printing. PPML enables faster printing of variable data jobs by allowing a printer to store text elements and graphic elements and reuse them as needed. PPML is a non-vendor-specific language and is considered to be an open industry standard. You can create the master and variable elements of a job as a PPML file in a variable data printing application, such as Pageflex Persona, and then print the job to the Print Server. Impose PPML as you would any other job (see page 11). Impose the PPML job on a sheet to print the pieces in a particular order so that when the job is printed, it is cut and stacked in the correct order. For more information about PPML, see Variable Data Printing. Example: PPML workflow with imposition Dr. Jones is a veterinarian who has just moved his practice to a new neighborhood and wants to inform his current customers, and possible new ones, of his new location, phone number, and hospital hours. He decides to send out 30,000 5x8 mailer cards. The front of each card has a picture of his dog, Max, with information about his practice, and the back of the card has each customer’s name and address with a bar code. Dr. Jones sends his order to a print shop along with the PDF of his mailer and the Microsoft Excel file database, including address information about his customers and neighborhood residents. The print shop creates the merged master and variable document in Pageflex Persona to create the JonesMailer.ppml file. For more information about Pageflex Persona, see the documentation that accompanies the application. PPML WITH IMPOSITION 16 To save time and money, four cards are printed on both sides of a single 11x17 page. To expedite the mailings and reduce costly postage charges, the cards are imposed so that after the pages are cut, the cards easily stack with the zip codes in the correct sort order. The following diagram illustrates how the job is imposed and sorted. Items required for this example • Windows computer with Pageflex Persona • JonesMailer.ppml • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Impose PPML WITH IMPOSITION 17 PPML workflow with imposition Print Server 1 2 3 6 5 4 7 Step Task For more information 1 The operator at the print shop creates the merged master and variable document in Pageflex Persona to create the JonesMailer.ppml file. For more information about Pageflex Persona, see the documentation that accompanies the application. 2 The operator at the print shop downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help 3 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation and chooses Impose from the Actions menu. a) The operator selects Gangup and Cut and Stack. b) The operator specifies 11x17, landscape, and duplex. c) Under Layout, the operator specifies two rows and two columns. d) Under Scale, the operator specifies the scale at 100%. e) The operator turns on printer’s marks. Command WorkStation Help PPML WITH IMPOSITION 18 Check the Impose Control Strip to match the set information. This is useful if certain pages of your job do not print correctly and you must reprint specific pages. Print one document to verify that the master and variable information matches. Make sure that the scale size in Impose is set to 100%, otherwise the cards do not print with the specified 5x8 size and are adjusted to print to the scale value entered. 4 The operator prints the job. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 6 The mailers are stacked and ready to cut. 7 The operator checks the Impose Control Strip to match the set information. Command WorkStation Help. Step Task For more information VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 19 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM This chapter provides an overview of variable data printing, and an example workflow that uses FreeForm to create a variable data job. What is variable data printing? Variable data printing links a copier to databases that contain the content for printed documents. Content consists of text and images (including graphics and photographs) in electronic form. Variable data printing is used for direct-mail advertising or other targeted mailings. It typically combines a set of master elements that are common across copies of a document with a set of variable elements that change from copy to copy. An example is a brochure that greets customers by name and may include other personal information about the customer obtained from a marketing database. Background elements, illustrations, and text blocks that do not change across copies of the brochure comprise the master elements. The customer name and other customer-specific information comprise the variable elements. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Variable data printing languages The Print Server may be compatible with the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm and FreeForm 2 • Personalized Print Markup Language (PPML) • Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) NOTE: To determine what variable data printing languages are supported for your particular Print Server, see Printing. Sending variable data jobs to the Print Server You can create the master and variable data in most software programs, and assign the master and variable data from Command WorkStation, Hot Folders, or the printer driver. If you create your master and variable data in PPML or Creo VPS format from a supported thirdparty application, such as Pageflex Persona or Atlas PrintShop Mail, you can send your variable job directly to the Print Server through these applications. You can also download your file using Hot Folders. For more information about how to send variable data printing to the Print Server, see Variable Data Printing. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 20 What is FreeForm and how is it used with variable data print jobs? FreeForm allows you to use print options to define and store master-element documents, called FreeForm masters, on the Print Server. You can send a variable-element job to the Print Server with instructions to combine the job with a particular FreeForm master. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Example: Variable data workflow using FreeForm Ocean Crest University wants to promote their three schools through a mailing to prospective students. The students will be able to request information about the different campuses and programs. Students can reply via a postage-paid business reply card integrated into the mailer. The document is personalized with the prospective student’s name, address, and a personal web link. The design is graphic-intensive to attract the attention of the reader. It is printed on 11x17 paper and folded three times, in order to qualify for the standard “letter” mail rate at the post office. To create this mail piece, the in-house production department decides to use the caching capabilities of FreeForm. FreeForm allows them to store a rasterized version of the graphic intensive layout in memory, since these elements are common to all pages (send and process once). The variable text (address, name, and web link) is printed separately and merged with the layout at the Print Server. The production department creates the master document with all the common elements and saves the file in PDF format (College_Master.pdf ). Next, they create the variable document in Microsoft Word (College_Variable.doc) and link the variable information to their database file (College_data.xls). NOTE: No specialized variable printing software is used to build this job. You can use any page layout application to create the FreeForm master and any mail merge function, such as Microsoft Word Mail Merge, to build and print the variable data. For more information about how to use the Mail Merge feature in Microsoft Word, see the documentation that accompanies Microsoft Word. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 21 The following diagram illustrates the components of the mailer. Items required for this example • College_Master.pdf • College_Variable.doc • College_data.xls • Print Server • Print Server printer driver with FreeForm • Windows computer with Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel installed Master file Database file VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 22 Variable data printing workflow using FreeForm Print Server Print Server 1 2 5 4 3 6 Step Task For more information 1 The operator in the production department opens College_Master.pdf in Acrobat. 2 The operator prints the file to the Print Server, specifying 11x17 and duplex, and choosing 1 for Create Master in the printer driver. Printing VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 23 You cannot send FreeForm jobs to the Direct connection. If Two-Way Communication is enabled in the printer driver, the printer driver detects what masters already reside on the Print Server. Use stored FreeForm masters as often as needed with multiple sets of variable elements. For more information about Two-Way Communication, see the printer driver Help. If the administrator clears the Print Server, all FreeForm masters are deleted. For more information about administrator functions, see Configuration and Setup. 3 The operator opens the College_Variable. doc in Microsoft Word. The variable document also opens the College_data.xls file, since the two documents are linked. If the documents are not linked, Word prompts the operator for the location of the Data Source File. The operator selects Data Merge in Word. Microsoft Word documentation 4 The operator prints the file to the Print Server, specifying 11x17 and duplex, and choosing 1 for Use Master in the printer driver. The master file and variable file are combined on the Print Server. Printing 5 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 6 The mailer includes the combined master and variable data. Step Task For more information VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 24 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA This chapter provides an overview of how to use Mixed Media with FreeForm 2 variable data printing jobs, and provides an example workflow that uses variable data printing and Mixed Media. NOTE: Mixed Media and FreeForm 2 is not supported for all Print Servers. See Utilities to determine if Mixed Media is supported for your particular Print Server. See Printing to determine if FreeForm 2 is supported for your particular Print Server. What is FreeForm 2 and how is it used with variable data print jobs? FreeForm 2 extends the functionality of FreeForm (see “Variable Data Printing with FreeForm” on page 19). FreeForm 2 requires a third-party variable data printing application that supports FreeForm 2 technology, such as Atlas PrintShop Mail. Using the third-party printing application and FreeForm 2, you can create multiple page masters, allowing more customization to your documents. You can still use any master created in another application, and then use a third-party application that supports FreeForm 2, such as PrintShop Mail, to combine the design and database information. Multiple masters allow you to define more than one master file for your job, while drawing from the same database of variable information. For example, if you own a movie rental company, you may maintain a database of customer names, addresses, and the last five movies the customer rented, categorized by genre. As a promotion, you want to send a coupon booklet with a new movie rental release pictured on the front cover. You want to customize your mailer with a movie of a similar genre as the last movie the customer rented. The variable information, such as the customer names and addresses, is always drawn from the database. However, the different movie images are defined by the multiple masters. For more information about FreeForm 2, see Variable Data Printing. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 25 What is Mixed Media and how can it be used in variable data print jobs? The Mixed Media feature allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media. For more information, see “What is Mixed Media?” on page 7. Variable data printing links a copier to databases that contain the content for printed documents. For more information, see “Variable Data Printing with FreeForm” on page 19. Use variable data print jobs with Mixed Media to create custom jobs, such as mailers. For example, use the variable information to create booklet mailers that greet customers by name, and print the booklet cover on a different medium than the body of the mailer. The Mixed Media you specify for your job is applied for every record, relative to the record start. For example, if Mixed Media is set to print Page 1 with cover stock, the first page of every record is printed on cover stock. Example: Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media To announce its new line of children’s styles, Banana Rama is creating a promotional mailer that targets customers by ethnicity, gender, and age. The company has compiled a database of customers by name and attributes, such as ethnicity, gender, and age. For the promotional mailer, Banana Rama also draws from a content database consisting of images of children of different ages, gender, and ethnicity wearing the new Banana Rama clothes; images of typical gadgets enjoyed by these children; and background graphics. Using a variable data application, such as PrintShop Mail and images that match the targeted individual, Banana Rama creates, in one print run, a mailer targeting parents of girls aged 7 to 10 years and customized mailers targeting parents of boys in different age groups. The mailers feature images of children in the targeted age group wearing Banana Rama clothing and playing with their favorite toys. Each promotional mailer includes a cover sheet with the customer’s name and a discount coupon. The Banana Rama girls’ clothing line is more extensive, so the mailer targeting girls includes additional pages advertising the girls’ fashions. Since the promotional mailer may vary in length, depending on whether it is targeted toward a boy or a girl, a blank page is added between each mailer to indicate when a new mailer starts. The print shop that received Banana Rama’s mailer request uses Atlas PrintShop Mail to create the master and variable document as a .psm project file. For more information about PrintShop Mail, see the documentation that accompanies the application. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 26 The following diagram illustrates the components of the mailer. Items required for this example • Atlas PrintShop Mail • FreeForm 2 • BananaRama.psm • BananaRama_V.ps • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Mixed Media • Cover stock • Plain media Girls template Boys template Letter/coupon template Graphics Database VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 27 Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media Print Server Print Server 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 Step Task For more information 1 The print shop operator opens the BananaRama.psm file in PrintShop Mail, specifies FreeForm 2, and then prints the file to the Print Server. In the Print dialog box, the operator sends both the master and variable data. The Print Server receives a master and variable PostScript document. Variable Data Printing For more information about PrintShop Mail, see the documentation that accompanies the application. 2 The operator selects the BananaRama_V.ps file from Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help 3 The operator chooses Properties from the Actions menu and clicks the Media icon on the Job Properties toolbar. The operator applies the following settings: a) The operator specifies a front cover, cover stock, and the tray for the media, and then clicks OK. b) From New Insert in Mixed Media, the operator specifies inserting a blank page after the last page, indicates the tray for the media, clicks Insert, and then clicks Close. Utilities VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 28 4 The operator processes and holds the job. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator previews the job. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator prints the job. Command WorkStation Help 7 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 8 The job prints with the merged variable and master information with a blank sheet between records. Step Task For more information HOT FOLDERS 29 HOT FOLDERS This chapter provides an overview of Hot Folders and an example workflow using Hot Folders. NOTE: Hot Folders is not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Hot Folders is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is a Hot Folder? Hot Folders is a software application that streamlines network printing tasks. A Hot Folder is a folder to which you can assign a group of print options, along with a Print Server print queue. To print a document, drag and drop the file onto the Hot Folder. You can create multiple Hot Folders, each with different settings and different Print Server connections. Depending on the configuration of the Hot Folder, jobs are routed to a Print Server with settings that you have configured. Hot Folder software runs as a background utility, continuously monitoring Hot Folders for new jobs. For more information about Hot Folders, see Hot Folders Help. Example: Workflow with Hot Folders Greg works for Company ABC and wants to print 25 copies of his new business cards. Company ABC has configured a network Hot Folder called “BusinessCards,” so that their employees can drop their business card .pdf file directly onto the Hot Folder for printing. Greg creates his business cards using the required company business card template, and saves the file as GregCard.pdf. The business card template ensures that the cards are printed optimally, using the imposition settings specified in the BusinessCards Hot Folder. After the cards are printed, an operator in the company print shop cuts the cards and places them in interoffice mail for the employee. Company ABC business cards are 2x3.25 inches in size. HOT FOLDERS 30 The following graphic illustrates how the business cards are imposed. Items required for this example • GregCard.pdf • Print Server • Hot Folder configured on the network • 11x17 heavy media, such as card stock • Paper cutter 11x17 page 2x3.25 business card 5 rows { 5 columns HOT FOLDERS 31 Imposition workflow Print Server 1 2 3 4 7 6 5 HOT FOLDERS 32 Step Task For more information 1 The operator at Company ABC creates a Hot Folder on the network, names it “BusinessCards,” and applies the following Hot Folder settings. a) From Job Properties, the operator specifies 25 copies. b) From Layout, the operator selects Impose and clicks Edit Impose Template. c) From the Settings pane, the operator selects Gangup and selects Repeat. d) The Operator specifies 11x17, landscape, and duplex. e) Under Layout, the operator specifies five rows and five columns. f) Under Scale, the operator specifies the scale at 100%. g) The operator turns on printer’s marks and sets the offset X and Y to 0.125 pt., saves the template, and closes Impose. h) The operator makes sure the template is selected and clicks OK. Hot Folders Help 2, 3 Greg drops the file GregCard.pdf on the BusinessCards Hot Folder. Hot Folders Help 4 The job prints. 5 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 6 The cards are printed on an 11x17 page. 7 The operator follows the printer’s marks and cuts the business cards. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 33 COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG This chapter provides an overview of Compose and Paper Catalog and provides an example workflow using both applications to create a printed piece that incorporates colored covers and operator-specified chapter starts. NOTE: Compose and Paper Catalog are not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Compose and Paper Catalog are supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is Compose? Compose allows you to prepare a job (spooled or held in Command WorkStation) for printing. For a single job, use Compose to: • Preview a job as thumbnails and full screen previews. • Set chapter starts and identify and apply finishing options. • Specify different media for front and back covers, body pages, and sections. • Insert blank sheets or other documents. • Edit a document using Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop. Compose is a dynamic application that displays and enables options based on the Print Server selected for the job. For example, if a job contains mixed media settings that were set in the printer driver or Command WorkStation, these settings appear when you view the job in Compose. For more information about Compose, see Command WorkStation Help. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 34 What is Paper Catalog and how is it used with Compose? Paper Catalog is a system-based paper warehouse database. Paper Catalog stores the attributes of any media stock available in a production print shop. The Paper Catalog database resides on the Print Server and is not affected when you restart or clear the Print Server. Paper Catalog allows administrators to: • Define multiple media attribute combinations and assign unique names to each combination. • Assign color profiles for each media. • Select predefined media when a job is submitted. • Specify which Paper Catalog columns are available for users. • Centrally maintain a Paper Catalog database. Paper Catalog allows operators to: • Select predefined media when a job is submitted. Once the administrator defines the Paper Catalog, the operator chooses the media for the job from Compose. When the operator views the job with Compose thumbnails, the operator clearly sees the settings applied for that paper catalog entry, such as the color of the media. For more information about Paper Catalog and additional ways to access it, see Utilities and Paper Catalog Help. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 35 Example: Workflow with Compose and Paper Catalog The Company ABC Human Resources Manager has created a new benefits handbook. The handbook is a single PDF document without blank pages between chapters. The manager wants the front and back covers of the published piece printed on heavy gold media and she wants each chapter to start on a right-hand page. The Human Resources Manager sends her request, with the attached book file in PDF format (Benefits.pdf ), to the company’s in-house production department. The production department uses Compose to reformat the book, adding front and back covers and designating chapter starts. Gold is Company ABC’s signature color. All published company documentation must have gold covers. The production department administrator has already added gold covers to the Paper Catalog. The following illustration shows the components of the handbook. Front cover printed on gold heavy media Back cover printed on gold heavy media Chapters printed on plain media Completed handbook COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 36 Items required for this example • Benefits.pdf • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Compose and Paper Catalog • Company ABC Gold cover stock for the front and back covers • Plain media for the chapter text The administrator first defines Company ABC Gold cover stock in the Paper Catalog database. The administrator also assigns the media to the appropriate tray in Tray and Paper Association. For more information, see Paper Catalog Help. For information about the Paper Catalog database, see Command WorkStation Help. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 37 Compose workflow using Paper Catalog Print Server 1 2 3 5 8 7 6 4 COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 38 Step Task For more information 1 The production department administrator defines Company ABC gold cover stock in the Paper Catalog. She assigns the media to the appropriate copier trays, using Paper Tray Association. Command WorkStation Help 2 The Human Resources Manager creates the PDF and sends the file to the company’s in-house production department. 3 The operator in the production department downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help 4 The operator right-clicks the job, chooses Properties, specifies that the job prints duplex and indicated that the job is stapled. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation, chooses Compose from the Actions menu, chooses Thumbnail view, and then applies the following settings: a) The operator selects all the pages of the job, right-clicks and chooses Assign Media, and selects letter-size media. b) The operator right-clicks the first page of the job, chooses Assign Media, and selects Co. ABC Cover from Choose Paper Catalog. She repeats this for the last page of the job. c) The operator selects the first page of the first chapter and clicks Chapter Start. She repeats this for each chapter in the handbook. d) The operator clicks Reader view to display the thumbnails as a user would see the pages when reading it as a book, and then checks the thumbnails to make sure that the pagination is correct. e) The operator clicks Save. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator prints the job. NOTE: The operator can print one set as a proof before printing multiple copies. Command WorkStation Help 7 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 8 The job is printed with gold front and back covers, as specified from Paper Catalog, and the first page of each chapter prints on a right-hand page. INDEX 39 C Compose and Paper Catalog components of job 36 described 33 diagram 37 procedure 38 workflow example 35 Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) 19 F FreeForm components of job 21 described 20 diagram 22 procedure 22 workflow example 20 FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media components of job 26 defined 24 diagram 27 procedure 27 workflow example 25 H Hot Folders components of job 30 described 29 diagram 31 procedure 32 workflow example 29 I Impose described 11 non-raster file requirement 14 imposition components of job 12 described 11 diagram 13 procedure 13 workflow example 11 M master elements 19 Mixed Media components of job 8 described 7 diagram 9 non-raster file requirement 10 procedure 9 workflow example 7 multiple master pages, defining 24 P Personal Print Markup Language (PPML) 15, 19 PPML and imposition components of job 16 described 15 diagram 17 procedure 17 workflow example 15 printing scenarios business card template for company, Hot Folders 31 business cards, imposed 13 course book printed in plain and heavy media with chapter dividers 9 handbook with plain and heavy media 37 mailer cards, imposed and sorted 17 personalized mailer with business reply card 22 promotional mailer using variable demographic data 27 R raster information, removing 10, 14 V variable data printing described 19 languages compatible with 19 using FreeForm 20 FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media 24 workflow examples 20, 25 INDEX Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Color Printing © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093733 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 Key features of ColorWise 9 Color management in Command WorkStation 10 COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 11 About this chapter 11 Managing color on the Fiery PRO80 12 Descriptions of ColorWise print options 13 Auto Trapping 13 Black Detection 13 Black Overprint 14 Black Text and Graphics 15 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method 16 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link 17 Combine Separations 18 Composite Overprint 19 Gray (RGB) and Gray (CMYK) 20 Output Profile 20 PDF/X Output Intent 21 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent 22 RGB Source or Device Link 23 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source 24 Spot Color Matching 25 Substitute Colors 26 CONTENTS 4 Specifying ColorWise print options 26 Setting default values in Command WorkStation 28 Setting print options in the printer driver 29 COLOR PROFILES 36 Color files 36 Installing additional ICC profiles on your computer 37 Other color files 42 Managing profiles on the Fiery PRO80 45 CALIBRATION 46 Calibration methods 46 Calibrating with Command WorkStation 47 Printer calibration with Fiery PRO80 calibration 48 Calibrating from the printer touch panel 49 Calibration with Web LCD enabled (default) 49 Calibration with Web LCD disabled 51 Managing calibration sets 52 Using the output profiles and calibration sets 53 Adding custom calibration sets 55 Adding custom calibration sets and output profiles 55 Understanding calibration 62 An overview of calibration 62 How calibration works 62 Scheduling calibration 63 Checking calibration status 64 SPOT-ON 65 Using Spot-On 65 CONTENTS 5 IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 68 Simple ASCII Import File Format 68 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page 69 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page 69 Example of 1D Status T density for an arbitrary page 70 INDEX 71 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document explains how to manage color output on the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server and provides information about calibration and color profiles. This document is part of a set that includes documentation for users and system administrators. For a complete description of your Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server, see the other documents available at your site. For more information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document is organized to supply you with key information about managing the color output of your Fiery PRO80. To manage color in general, you use Command WorkStation. You can also manage color for a specific job by setting print options in the printer driver or in the job properties in Command WorkStation and Hot Folders. This document covers the following topics: • Setting values for ColorWise print options • Managing color profiles and other color files • Calibrating the Fiery PRO80 to achieve consistent color output • Managing spot colors • Importing calibration measurement data from a text file NOTE: The Glossary in the Fiery Color Reference defines words in bold, for example, output profile, that appear throughout this document. Color terms and concepts, such as “color space,” “spot color,” “gamut,” and “source profile,” are used throughout this document. If you are new to desktop color, or if any terms are unfamiliar, see the Fiery Color Reference. A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 Key features of ColorWise ColorWise is the color management system (CMS) built into the Fiery PRO80 and designed to provide both casual and expert users with the best color output for a variety of purposes. The ColorWise default settings provide high-quality, out-of-box color from many Windows and Mac OS applications. This allows casual users to achieve quality output without knowing about or changing any color settings on the Fiery PRO80. ColorWise also allows expert users to obtain the best color output. ColorWise features allow you to modify printing results. Depending on your particular needs, you can: • Set the behavior of CMYK printing to emulate offset press standards. • Match PANTONE and other spot colors for the best match when printing using four-color press conditions or presses with extra, custom plates. • Select a rendering intent for RGB printing. Rendering intents allow for rich, saturated printing of presentation graphics, smooth, accurate printing of photographs, and relative or absolute colorimetric rendering for specialized needs. • Define the source of incoming RGB color data for better color conversion of RGB data with no source information. • Determine whether RGB data is converted into the full gamut of the printer or is first converted into the gamut of another device, such as a press standard. This feature is useful for making one device behave like another for RGB data. It also allows you to evaluate the appearance of an RGB file under different printing conditions without having to convert the RGB file to CMYK first. ColorWise color management (ColorWise) offers an open color architecture, allowing users to customize the Fiery PRO80 to meet new printing needs as they arise. ColorWise supports ICC profiles, which are industry standard color profiles that describe the color behavior of a device. Note that ICC specification version 4 profiles (profile version 4.2.0.0) are supported as well as version 2. Downloading ICC profiles to the Fiery PRO80 enables the Fiery PRO80 to simulate a custom press (or another printer), as well as accurately print colors from a particular monitor or scanner. In addition, you can create customized ICC profiles for the printer. INTRODUCTION 10 Color management in Command WorkStation Designed to give flexible control of color printing, Command WorkStation includes the following color management tools: • Color management Command WorkStation allows you to set the default settings of the ColorWise print options for the Fiery PRO80. These default settings are applied to all print jobs sent to the Fiery PRO80, unless a user overrides them for an individual job by changing settings in the printer driver or in Job Properties. • Profiles Command WorkStation allows you to manage all of the ICC profiles used in Fiery PRO80 workflows. You can also create custom profiles by editing existing CMYK source or output profiles and saving them as new profiles. The AutoGray feature allows you to adjust the gray balance of output profiles. • Calibrator For consistent color, calibrate the Fiery PRO80 on a regular basis. Command WorkStation includes an easy-to-use calibrator, which allows you to calibrate using either the scanning unit that is part of the printer or an optional spectrophotometer or densitometer (see “Calibration” on page 46). Command WorkStation also allows you to use any Status T densitometer by importing data in a standard file format (see “Importing Density Measurements” on page 68). In this case, it is important to note that the quality of the instrument used determines the quality of the calibration. • Spot-On (spot colors) Spot-On is a spot color (named color) manager. If Spot-On is available for your Fiery PRO80 and is enabled, you can adjust and manage lists of spot colors and their CMYK equivalents. The matching lists of spot colors and CMYK values are known as spot color dictionaries. Spot-On allows you to edit spot color definitions on the Fiery PRO80 and create custom spot color definitions and dictionaries. Installing and starting Command WorkStation on a Windows or Mac OS computer is described in Utilities. Command WorkStation can be installed from the User Software DVD or from the Fiery PRO80 over the network. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 11 COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS The ColorWise color management system provides print options that affect the output of objects in various color spaces. By specifying the appropriate settings for each print option, you can obtain the expected results for your jobs. About this chapter This chapter provides an overview of the ColorWise management system, which controls color on the Fiery PRO80 (see page 12), and detailed explanations of each print option. For the location of each print option, see the following table. This chapter also provides information about PostScript printer drivers and instructions for setting the ColorWise print options for Windows and Mac OS computers. For information about printer drivers, see page 29. ColorWise print option See Auto Trapping page 13 Black Detection page 13 Black Overprint page 14 Black Text and Graphics page 15 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method page 16 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link page 17 Combine Separations page 18 Composite Overprint page 19 Gray (RGB and CMYK) page 20 Output Profile page 20 PDF/X Output Intent page 21 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent page 22 RGB Source or Device Link page 23 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source page 24 Spot Color Matching page 25 Substitute Colors page 26 COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 12 Managing color on the Fiery PRO80 Applications allow you to generate color data for the Fiery PRO80 in many different color spaces. The most common type of color data produced from office applications is RGB, while prepress applications generally produce CMYK data. Desktop applications also generate spot colors, such as PANTONE colors. To complicate matters, a single page may contain a mix of RGB, CMYK, and spot colors. The Fiery PRO80 allows you to control the printing of mixed-color documents with features that apply specifically to RGB, CMYK, or spot color data. The following diagram illustrates the print options in the Fiery PRO80 color management process that affect color data conversions. You can access these print options when you send a print job to the Fiery PRO80. Most of these options and settings are described in subsequent sections of this chapter. RGB Source or Device Link is the only color option that applies strictly to RGB color data. The other options that affect RGB color also affect the more rarely used Lab, XYZ, and other calibrated color spaces. NOTE: With PostScript 3, a PostScript job can include calibrated CMYK (or CIEBasedDEFG) data. The RGB/Lab Rendering Intent print option, which normally affects only RGB data, affects calibrated CMYK data as well. The RGB Source or Device Link setting does not affect calibrated CMYK data. RGB data ➪ RGB Source Gray (RGB) RGB/Lab Rendering Intent Brightness Black Text and Graphics Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source Output Profile CMYK data ➪ CMYK/Grayscale Source CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method Gray (CMYK) Brightness Black Text and Graphics Combine Separations Output Profile ➪ ➪ Spot color data ➪ Spot Color Matching Fiery PRO80 color processor Color data sent to printer COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 13 Descriptions of ColorWise print options The following sections provide detailed explanations of the ColorWise print options and how these options affect print jobs. NOTE: For information about the following print options, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. • Halftone Simulation • Paper Simulation • 2-Color Print Mapping Auto Trapping Trapping is a technique where the size of objects is modified so that colors printed next to each other overlap slightly, to prevent white spaces between two colors. These white spaces, or “halos,” can be caused by factors such as misregistration, the physical properties of the toners, and the stiffness of the media. This illustration shows the same image with and without trapping. If you enable the Auto Trapping option, trapping is applied to all of the objects in a job. The Fiery PRO80 is shipped with trapping values that are optimized for a Fiery-driven print device using regular paper. If these values do not provide the results necessary for the media that you use, and if Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is configured on the Fiery PRO80, you can modify the values to meet your requirements. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Black Detection The Black Detection option allows you to specify whether or not to detect black-and-white pages before printing your job. • Off: Select Off if your job consists of black-and-white text pages combined with a significant number of color pages. • On: Select On if you are printing a predominantly black-and-white job. Black-and-white only pages will print with the proper billing information. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 14 Black Overprint The Black Overprint option allows you to specify whether or not black text or black text and graphics, defined as RGB=0, 0, 0, or as CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%, overprints colored backgrounds. • Text: Black text overprints colored backgrounds, eliminating white gaps and reducing the halo effect or misregistration of colors. You can choose this setting only if the Black Text and Graphics option is set to Pure Black On. • Text & Graphics: Black text and graphics overprint colored backgrounds, eliminating white gaps and reducing halo effects or misregistration of colors. You can choose this setting only if the Black Text and Graphics option is set to Pure Black On. • Off: Black text or text/graphics knocks out colored backgrounds. NOTE: Before sending the print job to the printer, PostScript applications may perform their own black overprint conversions. One example of how you might use this setting is a page that contains black text on a light blue background. The background blue is CMYK=40%, 30%, 0%, 0%. The black text is CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%. • With Black Overprint set to Text or Text & Graphics, the final text or text/graphic portions of the page are overprinted, or combined with the underlying color. Black colors generated by applications (for example, RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) are printed using the black toner. This means that black text and line art does not exhibit halftone artifacts (as long as the printer is calibrated correctly). No transition in cyan and magenta toners occurs. The quality of the output is improved, because it does not show artifacts near the edges of the black text. • With Black Overprint Off, the border of the text or text/graphics is on an edge that has cyan and magenta toners on one side (outside the text) and black toner on the other side (inside the text). This transition may cause visible artifacts due to the practical limitations of the printer. NOTE: The reproduction of CMYK components is affected by the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting and calibration curve when CMYK is not 0%, 0%, 0%, 100%. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 15 Black Text and Graphics The Black Text and Graphics option affects black text and vector graphics. Under most circumstances, set this option to Pure Black On. When Black Text and Graphics is set to Pure Black On, black colors generated by applications (for example, RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) are printed using black toner only. The black text and line art do not exhibit halftone artifacts (as long as the printer is calibrated correctly) and are not misregistered, since one toner is used. In addition, this setting eliminates blasting. This option must be set to Pure Black On if you want to set the Black Overprint option to Text or Text/Graphics. For some jobs, it is preferable to set this option to Normal, for example, if the page includes gradient fills that use black. The following table describes the behavior of the Black Text and Graphics option with black data defined in different color spaces. NOTE: Use the Black Text and Graphics option only when printing composites, not when printing separations. NOTE: PostScript applications, such as QuarkXPress, may convert elements defined as RGB=0, 0, 0 to four-color CMYK black before sending the job to the Fiery PRO80. These elements are not affected by the Black Text and Graphics option. For more information, see Fiery Color Reference. Color Black Text and Graphics = Normal Black Text and Graphics = Pure Black On or Rich Black On RGB=0,0,0 (all other RGB values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting) RGB=0,0,0 is printed according to the definition for RGB=0,0,0 in the output profile. This may be a rich black using all toners if the output profile specifies a rich black, or may be K-only if the output profile specifies K-only for RGB=0,0,0. The output is affected by the calibration curve. RGB=0,0,0 is printed as K-only, using the black toner (Pure Black On) or 100% K plus 50% Cyan (Rich Black On) using black and cyan toners. All other RGB values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting. CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% (all other CMYK values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting) CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% may be printed as K-only or as a rich black using all toners, depending on the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. If CMYK/Grayscale Source is set to a specific profile, CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% prints as K-only and the amount of black toner is limited by the CMYK Source profile and the calibration curve. Setting CMYK/Grayscale Source to ColorWise Off disables the CMYK Source profile and the calibration curve. In this case, the black toner is not limited by the calibration curve. CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% is printed as K-only, using the black toner (Pure Black On) or 100% K plus 50% Cyan (Rich Black On) using black and cyan toners, regardless of the CMYK/ Grayscale Source and CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method settings. All other CMYK values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting. Setting CMYK/Grayscale Source to ColorWise Off disables the CMYK source profile and the calibration curve. In this case, the black toner is not limited by the calibration curve. Spot Colors (unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting) Standard spot color processing Standard spot color processing COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 16 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method The CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method allows you to define your preferred CMYK-to-CMYK conversion technique. • Quick applies one-dimensional transfer curves to adjust output densities in the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black channels. This technique leads to eye-pleasing color output from your printer because pure primary colors are not “contaminated” by other colorants. While it is the fastest simulation method and perfect for drafts, avoid using it for final documents that are used as press proofs. Other techniques offer the color simulation accuracy required by proofing applications. • Full (Source GCR) provides a complete and accurate simulation based on colorimetric transformations. Hues are preserved, even for primary colors. The Gray Component Replacement level specified in the original (source) document is preserved. Process black expressed in CMY is reproduced using CMY toner. Full (Source GCR) is recommended for the highest quality press proofing applications. • Full (Output GCR) is a complete and accurate simulation method based on colorimetric transformations. Hues are preserved, even for primary colors. With this method, the Gray Component Replacement (GCR) level that was specified in the original document is not preserved. Instead, all CMYK data is reseparated using the GCR level specified by the output profile. This simulation technique is similar to traditional ICC color matching methods and is more appropriate than Full (Source GCR) for full color printing designed for the press, but reproduced on your printer. NOTE: When you specify Pure Black On for Black Text and Graphics and Full (Output GCR) or Full (Source GCR) for CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method, the black text and graphics in your document are printed with 100% black-only toner. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 17 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link The CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link print option allows you to print press proofs or simulations. This setting specifies the offset press standard or other color printing device that you want to simulate. This option affects CMYK data only. When you specify a setting other than None or ColorWise Off for the CMYK/Grayscale Source, the Fiery PRO80 overrides source color space definitions or profiles that other color management systems may have specified. For example, if your document contains an embedded CMYK profile, the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting overrides it. In cases where you do not want this setting to override another specified source color space, choose None. In the printer driver, you can view an unlimited number of custom Full simulations created using Command WorkStation. The number of custom simulations is limited by the available disk space on the Fiery PRO80. The CMYK/Grayscale Source setting you specify depends on the press standard for which the CMYK data was separated. • For images that were separated using a custom separation (such as a separation produced with an ICC profile), choose the corresponding profile on the Fiery PRO80 with the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. • For images that were separated for SWOP, choose SWOP as the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. To properly simulate a printed image that was separated using an ICC profile, the same profile must be present on the Fiery PRO80. For more information about importing ICC profiles to the Fiery PRO80, see Command WorkStation Help. Two settings are available if you want no CMYK simulation: • The None setting sends your original CMYK data to the printer with calibration applied, but without conversions to simulate another printer. The None setting is recommended if you use another color management system instead of ColorWise (for example, ColorSync or Photoshop). In this case, the Fiery PRO80 is expecting to receive CMYK data already in the device color space of the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 will not convert the data, but it will apply calibration. • The ColorWise Off setting sends your original CMYK data to the printer without calibration applied and without conversions to simulate another printer. The CMYK data is still subject to maximum density constraints, however. The ColorWise Off setting is not available as a setting in Command WorkStation and cannot be the default CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. You choose this setting for a specific job. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 18 NOTE: When you print with the ColorWise Off setting, make sure the options you choose in your application do not cause the application to modify CMYK data. If you enable PostScript Color Management or include an embedded profile, the color data sent by the application is similar to Lab color. When you print with settings like Let Printer Determine Colors or Let Photoshop Determine Colors, the application either converts the CMYK data or tags it for color management. You must specify No Color Management in the application when you print with the ColorWise Off setting. Combine Separations The Combine Separations setting specifies how to print separated CMYK data. It supports: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black. With the Fiery Graphic Arts Package or Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition, you can combine an unlimited number of spot color separations along with the CMYK separations. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. • Off prints each separation individually. • On combines separations as a single, composite-color document, and automatically makes the settings for the following print options: Color Mode (CMYK) and Black Overprint (Off ). The results of combining the multiple plates are predictable and accurate, regardless of the original application used. This feature also fully supports DCS 2.0 file formats when included in a PostScript print job from a page layout application. The following applications have been tested with Mac OS and Windows for compatibility with the Combine Separations option: • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe PageMaker • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress For information about using the Combine Separations option with applications such as Photoshop, see Fiery Color Reference. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 19 Composite Overprint When overlapping objects are printed, the foreground object can either overprint or knock out the background object. With overprinting, the color of the background object shows through the foreground object where they overlap, and the resulting color is a combination of the colors of the two objects. With a knock-out, the foreground object hides the background object where they overlap. The Composite Overprint print option allows you to print overprinted objects as specified in the source file. By default, the Composite Overprint print option is off and overlapping objects print as knockouts. NOTE: The Composite Overprint option does not overprint the foreground object if it is an RGB object. The Composite Overprint print option is supported for PostScript and PDF jobs produced by the following applications: • Adobe Acrobat • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress • CorelDRAW The 2-Color Print Mapping option is ignored when Composite Overprint is enabled. A job with more than 32 spot colors may not print as expected. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 20 Gray (RGB) and Gray (CMYK) When Gray (RGB) is enabled, any RGB color where R=G=B is printed using only black toner instead of processed black. Similarly, when Gray (CMYK) is enabled, any CMYK color where C=M=Y=0 and K=any value is printed using only black toner instead of processed black. You can choose to apply the Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) option to either Text and Graphics or to Text, Graphics, and Images. The following limitations apply: • The Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) option has no effect on a job that is pre-separated. • If CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method is set to Quick, the Gray (CMYK) setting does not affect the output. • If Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source is enabled, the Gray (RGB) option is set to Off. Likewise, if the Gray (RGB) option is not set to Off, you cannot enable Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source. • If Black Text and Graphics is set to Pure Black On or Rich Black On, it takes precedence over Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) for 100% black text and graphics. • If a gray is specified as a spot color, the Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) option does not affect that gray. Output Profile Because the output profile is applied to all data in the print job, make sure the profile you select is the right one for your job. The default output profile consists of a profile for your printer that describes its color characteristics and a calibration target that describes the expected behavior of the printer. Use Command WorkStation to import your own output profile to the Fiery PRO80. Imported output profiles that do not already include a calibration target are at first associated with the calibration target that is tied to the default output profile. You can edit calibration target D-Max values separately. Select the Use Media Defined Profile setting to automatically apply the output profile associated with the media type used in a print job rather than setting a specific output profile. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 21 PDF/X Output Intent PDF/X is a subset of the PDF specification. PDF files can contain a variety of elements (text, graphics, even animations) and it is not always obvious how these elements should be displayed or printed. PDF/X was designed with a focus on high quality printing. It excludes the use of PDF features that are not appropriate for graphic arts and adds features that prevent ambiguities related to printing. A PDF/X compliant document contains embedded information about the intended printing conditions for the document. The PDF/X Output Intent option, when enabled for a PDF/X job, specifies that the Fiery PRO80 use the PDF/X output intent embedded in the PDF/X document. Typically, whether you use this option depends on whether you are using the Fiery PRO80 for proofing or for production (final) printing. Prints for proofing are expected to look exactly like the output of the final production device, regardless of the capabilities of the Fiery PRO80 or the printer. For instance, when proofing Newsprint, you want the color gamut of the printer to be very limited compared to its capabilities. In production, you usually want to maximize the use of the printer gamut by applying specific color features of the Fiery PRO80 or the printer. Even in production, however, you might choose to limit the color gamut in order to achieve consistency in the color produced by different devices. The PDF/X Output Intent option only affects PDF/X files (conforming to the PDF/X3 or PDF/X-1a standard). It has no effect on non-PDF files or PDF files that are not PDF/X compliant. Profiles specified by PDF/X files must be embedded in the files, not referenced from an external locations. NOTE: With the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition option, you can use a Hot Folders filter to determine if a PDF file is PDF/X compliant. For information about this Hot Folders filter, see Hot Folders Help. When PDF/X Output Intent is enabled and no other setting conflicts, the Fiery PRO80 processes a PDF/X compliant file in a way that produces results defined by the intents and source color spaces embedded in the file. The Fiery PRO80 ignores the CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method and CMYK/Grayscale Source options. The rendering intents in the PDF/ X file are used and the printed output is limited to the color gamut specified by the output profile embedded in the file. When PDF/X Output Intent is disabled, the Fiery PRO80 ignores the PDF/X output intent. You can specify the PDF/X Output Intent print option for a job in Job Properties in Command WorkStation but not when you print from the printer driver. PDF/X files can be imported directly to the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation or Hot Folders, but printer drivers always convert PDF before sending a job to the Fiery PRO80. The PDF/X Output Intent option does not appear in the printer driver. When you enable PDF/X Output Intent, you must set the RGB Source option to None so that the rendering intent embedded in the PDF/X file will be used. The PDF/X Output Intent and RGB Source options are both accessed from Expert Settings in the Color icon of Job Properties. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 22 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent The RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option specifies a rendering intent for color conversions. To control the appearance of images, such as prints from office applications or RGB photographs from Photoshop, select the appropriate rendering intent. The Fiery PRO80 allows you to choose from the four rendering intents currently found in industry standard ICC profiles. Fiery PRO80 rendering intent Best used for Equivalent ICC rendering intent Photographic: Typically results in less saturated output than presentation rendering when printing out-of-gamut colors. This style preserves tonal relationships in images. Photographs, including scans and images from stock photography CDs and digital camera images. Image, Contrast, and Perceptual Presentation: Creates saturated colors but does not match printed colors precisely to displayed colors. In-gamut colors, such as flesh tones, are rendered well. This style is similar to the Photographic rendering intent. Artwork and graphs in presentations. In many cases, this style can be used for mixed pages that contain presentation graphics and photographs. Saturation, Graphics Relative Colorimetric: Provides white-point transformation between the source and destination white points. For example, the bluish white color (gray) of a monitor is replaced by paper white. This style avoids visible borders between blank spaces and white objects. Advanced use when color matching is important, but you prefer white colors in the document to print as paper white. This style may also be used with PostScript color management to affect CMYK data for simulation purposes. Relative Colorimetric Absolute Colorimetric: Provides no white point transformation between the source and destination white points. For example, the bluish white color (gray) is not replaced by paper white. Situations when exact colors are needed and visible borders are not distracting. This style may also be used with PostScript color management to affect CMYK data for simulation purposes. Absolute Colorimetric COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 23 RGB Source or Device Link The RGB Source or Device Link setting allows you to define the characteristics of the RGB data in your document so that the appropriate color conversion occurs on the Fiery PRO80. Commonly used monitor color spaces are available from the printer driver and the Fiery PRO80. For others, use Command WorkStation to download custom monitor or scanner profiles. When you specify a setting other than None for the RGB Source, the Fiery PRO80 overrides source color space definitions or profiles that other color management systems may have specified. For example, if your document contains an embedded RGB profile, the RGB Source setting overrides it. In cases where you do not want this setting to override another specified source color space, choose None. When you specify a setting other than None, because the color space definitions are overridden, the output from the Fiery PRO80 is consistent across platforms. The Fiery PRO80 RGB Source options are as follows: • EFIRGB specifies an EFI-defined color space recommended for users who have no detailed information about their RGB data. • sRGB (PC) specifies the definition of a Windows computer monitor profile used as the default. • Apple Standard specifies the definition of a Mac OS computer monitor profile used as the default. • Adobe RGB (1998) is an Adobe-defined color space, used in pre-press as the default working space in Photoshop 5. • eciRGB is the European Color Initiative (ECI) recommended space for use as an RGB working color space and color data exchange format for ad agencies, publishers, reproduction and printing houses. • Fiery RGB is an EFI-defined color space recommended for users of office applications. This color space is similar to EFIRGB but is larger and can provide a more desirable blue output. • None instructs the Fiery PRO80 to allow the RGB sources you defined elsewhere, such as in the application, to be used. When you set RGB Source to None, the appearance of colors is not independent of the file type. For example, RGB EPS files looks different from RGB TIFF files. With RGB Source set to None, PostScript RGB data that contains a source color space definition is converted using the RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option (see “RGB/Lab Rendering Intent” on page 22). Non-PostScript RGB data and PostScript RGB data that does not contain a source color space definition are converted using the EFIRGB source profile and Presentation rendering intent. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 24 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source The Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option determines how RGB colors (as well as Lab and XYZ colors) are converted to CMYK. The name of this option is meant to be descriptive, because the option defines the color spaces that are used by the Fiery PRO80 to “separate” the RGB data into CMYK values. The two choices available for this option determine whether RGB data is converted into the full gamut of the printer (Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source disabled) or is first converted into the gamut of another digital printer or press standard (Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source enabled). This feature helps make one device behave like another for RGB data. For example, if a high-quality ICC profile is available for another print device, the printer can simulate the behavior of that device. Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source is also useful for prepress applications. For example, it allows you to experiment with the appearance of an RGB scan under different press printing conditions, without having to convert the RGB data to CMYK data for each condition. When the desired printing condition is found, convert the file to CMYK, using the same CMYK/Grayscale Source that you used during the experimentation. NOTE: Use the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source print option in conjunction with the Output Profile or CMYK/Grayscale Source print options. • Enabled converts all RGB colors into the CMYK color space for a specified simulation (select the desired simulation with the CMYK/Grayscale Source print option). • Disabled converts all RGB colors into the CMYK color space of your printer. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 25 Spot Color Matching The Spot Color Matching option provides automatic matching of spot colors with their best CMYK equivalents. • On: The Fiery PRO80 uses a built-in table to generate the closest CMYK matches of spot colors your printer can produce. (New tables are generated when you add new output profiles.) With Spot-On, the Fiery PRO80 uses the CMYK matches determined through Spot-On (see page 65). • Off: The Fiery PRO80 processes the spot color as CMYK data and uses CMYK equivalents defined by the spot color manufacturer, such as PANTONE. These are the same CMYK equivalents used by applications that include spot color libraries. NOTE: Spot colors that are not included in the built-in table are treated as CMYK. For jobs that include spot colors, set Spot Color Matching to On unless you are printing press simulations. In that case, set Spot Color Matching to Off and choose the appropriate CMYK/ Grayscale Source (see page 17). For a PDF job that includes spot colors that are not included in the built-in table, setting Spot Color Matching to On retains the original spot colors. The Fiery PRO80 references the built-in table to generate the closest CMYK matches of the original spot color. NOTE: Use Spot Color Matching only when printing composites, not when printing separations. Spot Color Matching and the PANTONE Coated Color Reference The PANTONE Coated Color Reference prints differently depending on the Spot Color Matching setting (see Fiery Color Reference). • On: The Fiery PRO80 uses a built-in table or, with Spot-On, the Spot-On color dictionaries to generate the best matches for the PANTONE colors that your printer can produce. The PANTONE number is displayed below each swatch. For more information about Spot-On, see page 65. • Off: The Fiery PRO80 prints swatches using the CMYK values recommended by Pantone, Inc. (and used by applications that provide PANTONE color libraries). The CMYK values used to generate the color, as well as the PANTONE number of the color, are printed below each swatch. These CMYK values are printed through the selected CMYK/ Grayscale Source and Output Profile settings. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 26 Substitute Colors Spot-On allows you to create a list of substitute colors. These are colors that, when called for in a document by their RGB or CMYK values, are substituted with a different color having the CMYK values from the Spot-On color dictionary. This permits exact color control and overrides individual RGB and CMYK colors. To enable substitute colors for a job, select the Substitute Colors option. For more information about creating and using substitute colors, see Command WorkStation Help. Specifying ColorWise print options To modify Fiery PRO80 printing behavior, do any of the following: • Specify default values for ColorWise options in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. You can also set default values from Fiery PRO80 Setup, as described in Configuration and Setup. The defaults apply to all subsequent print jobs unless you override them. A job uses the Fiery PRO80 default settings (unless otherwise specified) at the time it is processed for printing, and not at the time it is sent to the Fiery PRO80 Hold queue. • Specify ColorWise options for an individual print job using the menus that appear in the printer driver. • Specify ColorWise options for a job printed through Hot Folders using the Job Properties settings in Hot Folders. • Specify ColorWise options for a job already submitted and held at the Fiery PRO80 using the Job Properties settings in Command WorkStation. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 27 For the location of each print option, see the following table. ColorWise print option Color window of printer driver or Job Properties Basic Settings of printer driver, Job Properties, or Color Setup Expert Settings of printer driver, Job Properties, or Color Setup Auto Trapping ✔ Black Detection ✔ Black Overprint ✔ Black Text and Graphics ✔ CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method ✔ ✔ CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link ✔ ✔ Combine Separations ✔ Composite Overprint ✔ Gray (RGB and CMYK) ✔ ✔ Output Profile ✔ ✔ PDF/X Output Intent ✔ (Job Properties only) RGB/Lab Rendering Intent ✔ ✔ RGB Source or Device Link ✔ ✔ Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source ✔ Spot Color Matching ✔ ✔ Substitute Colors ✔ COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 28 Setting default values in Command WorkStation Command WorkStation allows you to set the default values for the ColorWise print options and print settings for the Fiery PRO80. These settings are applied to all print jobs sent to the Fiery PRO80, unless a user overrides them for an individual job by changing settings in the printer driver. These default settings can also be overridden using Command WorkStation Job Properties. In addition, the defaults set in Command WorkStation are automatically reflected in the printer driver and in Fiery PRO80 Setup (for those options that can be set in Setup). The ColorWise print option settings are in the Color Management tab under the Color Setup tab in the Device Center. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 29 Setting print options in the printer driver The printer driver writes a PostScript file containing the instructions generated by your application and the settings for the ColorWise print options you selected. The printer driver then sends the PostScript file to the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 performs PostScript processing and color conversions and sends raster color data to the printer. Setting print options for Windows This section explains how to set color management print options with the Adobe and Microsoft PostScript printer drivers for Windows, PostScript 3 printer drivers that take full advantage of the color features of the Fiery PRO80. Before you proceed, do the following: • Install the printer driver and the Fiery PRO80 PPD (see Printing). • Set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing (see Printing). NOTE: The following illustrations and instructions do not apply to all applications. Many applications, such as Adobe PageMaker, Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator, QuarkXPress, and CorelDRAW, have other color management options in addition to those presented in the printer driver. For information about specific applications, see Fiery Color Reference. Use the following procedure to set the color options for Windows computers. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 30 TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR WINDOWS COMPUTERS 1 Choose Print in your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. In the Properties dialog box, the Fiery Printing tab is displayed. 3 Click the Color icon. 4 Specify the settings for the print options in the Color window. For information about ColorWise print options, see page 13. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 31 5 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit dialog box appears. NOTE: If the Basic Settings and Expert Settings buttons are not active, make sure that Two- Way Communication is enabled. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 6 Click Server Defaults to display the default values currently set on the Fiery PRO80. 7 Specify settings for the ColorWise print options in each of the tabs. For most users, the default settings provide adequate color control. For information about individual print options, see page 13. 8 Click OK to save the settings and close the Advanced Edit window. 9 Click OK to close the Properties window, and then click OK to send your job. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 32 Setting print options in Mac OS This section explains how to set color management print options with the printer drivers for Mac OS. Before you proceed, do the following: • Install the Fiery PRO80 PPD (see Printing). • Set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing (see Printing). TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR MAC OS X COMPUTERS 1 Choose Print in your application. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Expand the dialog box, if necessary, by clicking the arrow next to the Printer name. 3 Mac OS X v10.3.9 and 10.4.x: Click Copies & Pages, choose ColorSync from the drop-down list, and choose In Printer from the Color Conversion list. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 33 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Click Preview, choose Color Matching from the drop-down list, and select In Printer. 4 Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. 5 Select Two-Way Communication. For information about enabling Two Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 6 Click Full Properties. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 34 7 Click the Color icon. The Color pane appears. 8 Specify settings for the print options in the Color pane. For information about ColorWise print options, see page 13. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 35 9 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit window appears. NOTE: Alternatively, you can click Basic Settings to display the Color Management window, which also displays ColorWise print options. However, not all of the print options appear in the Color Management window. 10 Click Server Defaults to display the default values currently set on the Fiery PRO80. 11 Specify settings for the ColorWise print options in each of the tabs. For most users, the default settings provide adequate color control. For information about individual print options, see page 26. 12 Click OK to save the settings and close the Advanced Edit window. The Color pane reappears. 13 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences window, and then click Print to send your job. COLOR PROFILES 36 COLOR PROFILES The Fiery PRO80 includes by default a number of RGB and CMYK profiles that you can use for printing through the RGB Source, CMYK/Grayscale Source, and Output Profile settings for a job. For more information about these options, see ColorWise Print Options. You can manage the profiles on the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation. You can import or delete other profiles as well. Color files The User Software DVD includes a number of files, including color profiles, that are useful for color management. To add color profiles to the Fiery PRO80: • Install them on your computer. • Use Command WorkStation to import them to the Fiery PRO80. For information about importing profiles to the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. COLOR PROFILES 37 Installing additional ICC profiles on your computer You can install (copy) additional ICC profiles from the User Software DVD or the Fiery PRO80 to your computer. Use the ICC profiles with applications that support ICC standards, such as Adobe Photoshop. Location on User Software DVD Profiles Adobe ICC Profiles folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ICC Profiles folder or Mac Color Files: ICC Profiles folder) These profiles were created by Adobe Systems, Inc. For more information, see the documents included in the folder. CMYK Profiles: • EuropeISOCoatedFOGRA27.icc • EuroscaleUncoated.icc • JapanColor2001Coated.icc • JapanColor2001Uncoated.icc • JapanColor2002Newspaper.icc • JapanWebCoated.icc • USSheetfedCoated.icc • USSheetfedUncoated.icc • USWebCoatedSWOP.icc • USWebUncoated.icc RGB Profiles: • AdobeRGB1998.icc • AppleRGB.icc • ColorMatchRGB.icc • sRGB Color Space Profile.icm COLOR PROFILES 38 ECI folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ICC Profiles folder or Mac Color Files: ICC Profiles folder) These profiles were created by the European Color Initiative (ECI). For more information, see the documents included in the CMYK Profiles folder and the RGB Profiles folder, as well as the ECI web site at www.eci.org. CMYK Profiles: • ISOcoated_v2_300_eci.icc • ISOcoated_v2_eci.icc • ISOuncoated.icc • ISOuncoatedyellowish.icc • ISOwebcoated.icc • SC_paper_eci.icc RGB Profiles: • ECI-RGB.V1.0.icc • eciRGB_v2.icc • eciRGB_v2_ICCv4.icc Location on User Software DVD Profiles COLOR PROFILES 39 EFI Support folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ICC Profiles folder or Mac Color Files: ICC Profiles folder) These profiles were created by EFI. For more information, see the General Requirements for Applications in Commercial Offset Lithography (GRACoL) web site at www.gracol.org, the Fogra web site at www.fogra.org, and the Specifications Web Offset Publications (SWOP) web site at www.swop.org. CMYK Profiles: • EFIEURO.icc • EFISWOP.icc • Enterprise CMYK.icc • GRACoL2006_Coated1_EFI.icc: • ISOCoated.icc • ISOCoated_FOGRA39L_EFI.icc • ISOUncoated_FOGRA29L_EFI.icc • SWOP2006_Coated3_EFI.icc • SWOP2006_Coated5_EFI.icc Japan Profiles: • EFIDIC.ICC • EFIJMPA2.icc • JC2001_type1_EFI.icc • JC2001_type2_EFI.icc • JC2001_type3_EFI.icc • JC2001_type4_EFI.icc • TOYO Offset Coated 2.0.icc RGB Profiles: • EFISRGB.ICC • Fiery RGB v2.icc • Fiery RGB v4.icc • Fiery RGB v5.icc • RGB D65 (Splash).icc Location on User Software DVD Profiles COLOR PROFILES 40 For most ICC-aware applications, you must install the files in a folder named Color (Windows) or a folder named Profiles in the Library: ColorSync folder (Mac OS). For use with the Fiery PRO80, you can copy the files to a folder of your choice. TO INSTALL ICC PROFILES ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive. 2 Open the folder containing the profile. 3 Right-click the profile that you want, and then click Install Profile. The profiles are installed automatically to the Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color folder on your computer. TO INSTALL ICC PROFILES ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive. 2 Open the folder containing the profile. 3 Copy the profiles into Library: ColorSync: Profiles. NOTE: You must log on with Administrator privileges. TO INSTALL ICC PROFILES ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER FROM THE FIERY PRO80 OVER THE NETWORK 1 Browse for the Fiery PRO80 over the network, using either the IP address or the DNS server name. 2 Type the user name and password, if required. Consult your administrator to see if this information is required. 3 Double-click the PC_User_SW directory. 4 Open the ICC folder. 5 Right-click the profile that you want, and then click Install Profile. The profiles are installed automatically to the Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color folder on your computer. COLOR PROFILES 41 TO INSTALL COLORSYNC PROFILES ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE FIERY PRO80 OVER THE NETWORK 1 Choose Connect to Server from the Go menu. 2 Type smb:// followed by the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. If you cannot locate your Fiery PRO80, contact your administrator. 3 Type the user name and password if required. Ask your administrator if this information is required. 4 Double-click the Mac_User_SW directory. 5 Open the ColorSync folder. 6 Copy the profiles into Library: ColorSync: Profiles. NOTE: You must log on with Administrator privileges. On Mac OS, see the ColorSync documentation for setting ColorSync profiles, such as EFIRGB. COLOR PROFILES 42 Other color files You can copy additional color files from the User Software DVD or the Fiery PRO80. These files are useful for color matching and for calibration. Windows Color Files folder or Mac Color Files folder CMYK Color Reference.ps: An 11-page, Letter-size PostScript file used for reference when defining CMYK colors in applications. PANTONE Book.ps: A 20-page, Letter-size PostScript file that indicates the closest equivalent of PANTONE coated colors that the Fiery PRO80 and your printer model can produce. The method used to print the PANTONE Book.ps file differs, depending on the Spot Color Matching setting. For more information, see “Spot Color Matching” on page 25. RGB page 01.doc: A Microsoft Word file that you can print to view available RGB colors. RGB page 02.ppt: A Microsoft PowerPoint file that you can print to view available RGB colors. Color Bars folder (inside the Windows Color Files folder or Mac Color Files folder) FieryColorBar.eps: Used for the Control Bar feature. For more information about Control Bar, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Ugra Fogra-MediaWedge V2.2x_EFIv1.eps: Used for the Ugra/ FOGRA Media Wedge feature. For more information about this feature, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. PS Files folder (inside the Windows Color Files\Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files folder) Custom21.ps, Custom34.ps, Standard21.ps, and Standard34.ps: PostScript files of color patches for obtaining measurements. The numbers in the file names refer to the number of patches on the page. The Custom files allow you to download measurement patches that incorporate the current calibration set of the printer. The Standard files allow you to download standard measurement patches that bypass the current calibration set of the printer. NOTE: These files are provided for expert users and should not be used for day-to-day calibration. COLOR PROFILES 43 Halftone Calibration Files folder (inside the Windows Color Files\Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files folder) Images of measurement pages for various calibration instruments and page sizes, used for calibrating the Fiery PRO80 for different halftone screens. Files are provided for Adobe Photoshop and for other applications. For more information about halftone calibration, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer. NOTE: Files for the ED-100 densitometer are provided. However, the ED-100 is not a supported measurement device. Photoshop folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ Calibration Files \Halftone Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files: Halftone Calibration Files folder) The following halftone calibration files are provided for Adobe Photoshop: DTP32_A3.psd DTP32_A4.psd DTP32_Letters.psd DTP32_Tabloid.psd DTP41_A3.psd DTP41_A4.psd DTP41_Letters.psd DTP41_Tabloid.psd ED100_A3.psd ED100_A4.psd ED100_Letters.psd ED100_Tabloid.psd ES1000_A3.psd ES1000_A4.psd ES1000_Letters.psd ES1000_Tabloid.psd NOTE: For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer. NOTE: Files for the ED-100 densitometer are provided. However, the ED-100 is not a supported measurement device. COLOR PROFILES 44 Other Applications folder (inside the Windows Color Files\Calibration Files\Halftone Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files: Halftone Calibration Files folder) The following halftone calibration files are provided for other applications (besides Adobe Photoshop): DTP32_A3.eps DTP32_A4.eps DTP32_Letters.eps DTP32_Tabloid.eps DTP41_A3.eps DTP41_A4.eps DTP41_Letters.eps DTP41_Tabloid.eps ED100_A3.eps ED100_A4.eps ED100_Letters.eps ED100_Tabloid.eps ES1000_A3.eps ES1000_A4.eps ES1000_Letters.eps ES1000_Tabloid.eps NOTE: For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer. NOTE: Files for the ED-100 densitometer are provided. However, the ED-100 is not a supported measurement device. COLOR PROFILES 45 Managing profiles on the Fiery PRO80 Command WorkStation allows you to import ICC profiles to the Fiery PRO80, export profiles, delete profiles (except for default profiles), and set the properties of profiles. You can also create custom CMYK source or output profiles by editing an existing profile and then saving it as a new profile. These features are in the Profiles tab under the Resources tab in the Device Center. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. CALIBRATION 46 CALIBRATION Calibrating the Fiery PRO80 ensures consistent and reliable color output. Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using the Calibrate feature in Command WorkStation with the printer’s built-in scanner, a densitometer or a spectrophotometer. If you defined a custom halftone screen, you must calibrate the Fiery PRO80 for that halftone screen before you print a job with it. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Changing calibration has the potential to affect all jobs for all users, so consider limiting the number of people authorized to perform calibration. Set an Administrator password to control access to calibration (see Configuration and Setup). Calibration methods You can calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using the following methods: All of these calibration methods except for ColorCal from the printer touch panel are performed through Command WorkStation. For more information about each of these methods, see Command WorkStation Help. Term Refers to ColorCal (in Command WorkStation) Calibration method that uses the printer’s built-in scanner to measure toner density values ColorCal from the printer touch panel Calibration method that uses the printer’s built-in scanner to measure toner density values DTP32 or DTP32 Series II X-Rite DTP32 or DTP32 Series II automatic densitometer DTP41 X-Rite DTP41 automatic spectrophotometer ES-1000 Spectrophotometer ES-1000 hand-held spectrophotometer CALIBRATION 47 Calibrating with Command WorkStation The Calibrate feature in Command WorkStation allows you to calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using the measurement method of your choice. The Calibrate feature is in the Tools tab under the General tab in the Device Center. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: Multiple users can be connected to one Fiery PRO80 with Command WorkStation, but only one user at a time can use the Calibrate feature. If you try to calibrate when another user is using Command WorkStation to calibrate, an error message appears. NOTE: You can disable calibration (and color management) for CMYK data in a job by using the ColorWise Off setting for the CMYK/Grayscale Source option. For more information, see “CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link” on page 17. You might want to disable calibration for testing purposes, for example. 1 Click to start calibration 1 CALIBRATION 48 Printer calibration with Fiery PRO80 calibration When you calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using Calibrator in Command WorkStation, by default Calibrator calibrates the printer before printing the measurement page. We recommend that you calibrate the printer before calibrating the Fiery PRO80, but if the printer has been calibrated recently, you might choose to skip printer calibration. TO DISABLE CALIBRATION OF THE PRINTER WHEN YOU PRINT THE MEASUREMENT PAGE 1 Click Print in the Calibrator main window. The Print Options window appears. 2 Click Show Advanced Options. The Engine Calibration option is displayed. This option is set to On by default. 3 Choose Off in the Engine Calibration list. 4 Specify settings for other options and click Print. The measurement page is printed immediately, without any delay for calibrating the printer. When you calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using ColorCal in Calibrator and you choose to calibrate the scanner first, the printer is not calibrated before it prints the scanner measurement page, but only before it prints the ColorCal measurement page. CALIBRATION 49 Calibrating from the printer touch panel You can calibrate the Fiery PRO80 from the printer touch panel using ColorCal, without using Command WorkStation. If an Administrator password has been set, you will need it to perform calibration from the printer touch panel. For instructions on using the printer touch panel, see Configuration and Setup. Calibration with Web LCD enabled (default) If the Web LCD feature of the Fiery PRO80 is enabled (the default condition), use the following procedure to calibrate from the printer touch panel. NOTE: For more information about the Web LCD feature, see Configuration and Setup. TO USE COLORCAL FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL WITH WEB LCD ENABLED 1 When the printer is Idle, press Controller on the Machine tab to enter the Fiery PRO80 display. 2 Press the Tools tab, and then press Calibrate. 3 If an Administrator password is set on the Fiery PRO80, enter it and press Login. 4 Choose the calibration set from the list and press OK. 5 Choose the paper source for the measurement page and press OK. The ColorCal measurement page is comprised of swatches of color that are measured by the printer’s scanner and then compared to the target color values. 6 To print the scanner measurement page and calibrate the scanner before calibrating the Fiery PRO80, select Scanner Calibration Page and press Continue. If you clear this option, only the ColorCal measurement page is printed, and the scanner calibration is skipped. We recommend that you always calibrate the scanner before calibrating the Fiery PRO80. 7 Retrieve the measurement pages. 8 Place the grayscale strip and Color Control patches according to the instructions on the scanner measurement page, and press Continue to initiate the scan. Wait for the scan to complete. 9 When the display indicates that the measurement was successful, press Continue. CALIBRATION 50 10 Place the grayscale strip according to the instructions on the ColorCal measurement page. Place the grayscale strip face-down on the printer glass (platen). Place the strip along the top edge of the printer so that it is centered between the paper width marks on the printer. Place the color measurement page face-down over the grayscale strip. Make sure the patches on the grayscale strip do not overlap the color patches. Close the platen glass cover, being careful not to move the grayscale strip and color measurement page. 11 Press Continue to initiate the scan. Wait for the scan to complete. 12 When the display indicates that the measurement was successful, press Continue. 13 To print a Comparison Page, press Print Comparison Page. You can examine the Comparison Page to decide if the calibration is successful. 14 If the calibration is successful, press Apply & Finish to save the measurements. 1 Place grayscale strip face down 2 Place color measurement page face down over grayscale strip 1 2 CALIBRATION 51 Calibration with Web LCD disabled If the Web LCD feature of the Fiery PRO80 is disabled, use the following procedure to calibrate from the printer touch panel. NOTE: For more information about the Web LCD feature, see Configuration and Setup. TO USE COLORCAL FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL WITH WEB LCD DISABLED 1 When the printer is Idle, press Controller on the Machine tab to enter the Fiery PRO80 display. 2 Press Calibration. 3 Choose the Calibration Set. 4 For Tray, choose the paper source for the measurement page. Make sure that the paper loaded in the tray matches the paper size and media type displayed. The color measurement page consists of swatches of color that are measured by the printer’s scanner and then compared to the target color values. 5 For Engine Calibration, press the setting to change it from Disable to Enable or from Enable to Disable. If Engine Calibration is enabled, the printer is calibrated before the measurement page is printed. We recommend that you calibrate the printer before calibrating the Fiery PRO80, but if the printer has been calibrated recently, you might choose to skip printer calibration. 6 To calibrate the scanner first, press Adjust Scanner, and then press Print. Otherwise, skip to step 10. A scanner measurement page is printed. 7 Retrieve the scanner measurement page and place it on the printer glass as directed. See the scanner measurement page for directions on how to place the page correctly on the printer glass. 8 On the printer touch panel, press Scan. 9 When the display indicates that the scanner adjustment is complete, press OK. 10 Press Print. The color measurement page is printed. 11 Retrieve the color measurement page. CALIBRATION 52 12 Place the grayscale strip face-down on the printer glass. Place the strip along the top edge of the printer so that it is centered between the paper width marks on the printer. 13 Place the color measurement page face-down over the grayscale strip. Make sure the patches on the grayscale strip do not overlap the color patches. Close the platen glass cover, being careful not to move the grayscale strip and color measurement page. 14 On the printer touch panel, press Scan. 15 Wait for the display to indicate that the calibration is complete. 16 To print a comparison of this calibration with the default calibration, press Compare and then press Print. You can use this comparison to check the calibration results. 17 Press Apply to save the measurements and overwrite any previous calibration data in the calibration set. 18 Press Close to return to the Machine display. Managing calibration sets Every output profile on the Fiery PRO80 must be associated with a calibration set. The calibration set provides the Fiery PRO80 with measurements of the density response of the printer toners for specific printing conditions (for example, media type). This data, along with the expected density response of the printer, allows the Fiery PRO80 to apply corrections to color values that are sent to the printer, to achieve the calibrated output. For more information, see “An overview of calibration” on page 62. An output profile can be associated with only one calibration set, but the same calibration set can be used by more than one output profile. A calibration set must be associated with at least one output profile, otherwise the calibration set will never be used for printing. 1 Place grayscale strip face down 2 Place color measurement page face down over grayscale strip 1 2 CALIBRATION 53 Using the output profiles and calibration sets The Fiery PRO80 is shipped with one or more output profiles. You may obtain good color quality with the factory-supplied output profiles and their associated calibration sets (see scenarios 1 and 2 in the table below). However, you may need to create custom calibration sets and output profiles depending on your situation (see scenarios 3 and 4 in the following table). NOTE: Recommended papers are chosen for quality, as well as other factors, such as feeding reliability and quality of transfer. Your paper Action See 1 Recommended paper for a factory-supplied output profile (the paper that the profile is based on) You will obtain acceptable color when you print with the output profile. You do not need to create a calibration set or custom profile. See “Recommended paper and print settings” on page 54 to find out the recommended paper for an output profile. 2 Paper similar to a factorysupplied profile’s recommended paper You might be able to use the output profile. The print settings required for your paper (for example, media type and media weight) must match the print settings required by the recommended paper. If the color quality is sufficient, you do not need to create a calibration set or custom profile. The output profile name usually indicates the general type of paper (for example, plain, coated, or heavy). To find out the print settings required for the recommended paper, see “Recommended paper and print settings” on page 54. 3 Paper that is similar to a factory-supplied profile’s recommended paper but uses different print settings You might still be able to use a factory-supplied output profile, if you create a custom calibration set and use it to calibrate the Fiery PRO80 with your paper. For more information, see “Adding custom calibration sets” on page 55. 4 Paper that does not yield acceptable color with any factory-supplied profile You must create a custom calibration set and a custom profile. For more information, see “Adding custom calibration sets and output profiles” on page 55. CALIBRATION 54 Recommended paper and print settings You can check the recommended paper and print settings for a particular output profile using Profile Manager and Calibrator. TO FIND THE RECOMMENDED PAPER AND PRINT SETTINGS FOR AN OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, go to Color Setup > Color Management. 2 Select the Output Profile and note the name of the calibration set displayed to the right. 3 In Device Center, go to General > Tools and click Calibrate. Calibrator starts in a separate window. 4 Under Calibration Set, select Manage. The Manage Calibration Settings window appears. 5 Select the calibration set from the list. The recommended paper and the required print settings are displayed. 6 Click Cancel to close the window. CALIBRATION 55 Adding custom calibration sets If you are printing on a paper that is similar to the recommended paper but uses different print settings, you might still be able to use the output profile, but you must create a custom calibration set. If the color quality is sufficient, you do not need to create a custom profile (see scenario 3 in the table under “Using the output profiles and calibration sets” on page 53). You can add a new calibration set that you can then select when performing calibration. You can delete a custom calibration set. You cannot delete a factory-supplied calibration set. For instructions on adding a custom calibration set, see Command WorkStation Help. Adding custom calibration sets and output profiles If you determine that none of the factory-supplied output profiles yields acceptable color with your paper, you must create a custom calibration set in Calibrator and a custom profile using profile-generating software such as Fiery Color Profiler Suite (see scenario 4 in the table under “Using the output profiles and calibration sets” on page 53). For example, if you print with a halftone screen setting other than the default (Dot 1), the resulting color using the default calibration set might not be acceptable. You can create a custom calibration set and specify a new screen setting, and then also specify the same screen when you create a custom profile. NOTE: Before creating a custom calibration set and custom output profile, make sure that the printer is calibrated (if calibration is supported on the printer). For information about performing printer calibration, see the documentation that accompanies the printer. Calibration on the Fiery PRO80 requires that each output profile contains a calibration target. If an output profile does not contain a calibration target, when you import the output profile to the Fiery PRO80, the calibration target from the default output profile is added to the imported profile. The procedures in this section describe how to make sure that an appropriate calibration target is added to your custom output profile when you import it to the Fiery PRO80 and associate it with a custom calibration set. Using Fiery Color Profiler Suite If you use Fiery Color Profiler Suite to create a custom output profile, you do not have to perform any procedures to add a calibration target to the output profile. Color Profiler Suite can create a profile that contains a calibration target. • First, create a custom calibration set using Calibrator in Command WorkStation. • Next, create a custom output profile using Color Profiler Suite and install it on the Fiery PRO80. CALIBRATION 56 TO CREATE A CUSTOM CALIBRATION SET ON THE FIERY PRO80 1 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, go to General > Tools and click Calibrate. Calibrator starts in a separate window. 2 For Calibration Set, select Manage. The Manage Calibration Settings window appears. 3 Choose a calibration set from the list. Choose the calibration set that is the most similar to your paper. For example, the calibration set might be for the same brand of paper but a different weight. 4 Type a new Recommended Paper description, choose the printer settings for the custom calibration set, and click Save. 5 Type a name for the custom calibration set and select an output profile to associate it with. Select any output profile for now. You will change this association to your custom output profile after you create the profile. 6 Click OK. The custom calibration set will be used when you print with its associated output profile. TO CREATE A CUSTOM OUTPUT PROFILE IN COLOR PROFILER SUITE V3.0 1 In Color Profiler Suite, start Printer Profiler and click Print Patches. 2 Proceed through the screens in sequence to create a profile. 3 On the Welcome screen, click Select Fiery Server and choose the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 must be connected to your network. 4 In the Print Patches screen, click Expert Settings, make sure that the Optimize Calibration option is selected, and click OK. 5 When you print the measurement page, choose the same Image Halftone Mode setting that you chose when you created the new calibration set. 6 When you save the profile, click Install on Fiery Server and make sure the Fiery PRO80 is selected. 7 In the Profile Settings window that appears when you save the profile, under Calibration, choose the custom calibration set that you created and click OK. The custom output profile is installed on the Fiery PRO80 and associated with your custom calibration set. When you print a job using this output profile, the calibration set is used as well. CALIBRATION 57 Using a profile-generating application other than Fiery Color Profiler Suite If you use a profile-generating application other than Fiery Color Profiler Suite to create a custom output profile, follow the instruction in this section. To create the calibration target, you print a page of color patches on the Fiery PRO80 using your paper and measure the page using Calibrator. Next, you copy the calibration target to a temporary output profile and set this profile as the default output profile. When you import your custom output profile, the calibration target is added from the temporary output profile. Follow these procedures to use custom calibration sets and output profiles. • Print a measurement page. • Measure the measurement page. • Create a custom calibration set and a temporary output profile. • Set up the calibration target in the temporary output profile. • Create a custom output profile and save it to your computer. • Import the custom output profile to the Fiery PRO80. • Delete the temporary output profile. TO PRINT THE MEASUREMENT PAGE 1 Load your paper in the printer. 2 Locate the file for the measurement page on the User Software DVD. Choose the file for your page size and measurement instrument. The files are located in the Photoshop and Other Applications folders inside the following folders on the User Software DVD: • Windows Color Files\Calibration Files\Halftone Calibration Files • Mac Color Files: Calibration Files: Halftone Calibration Files 3 Start Command WorkStation and connect to the Fiery PRO80. 4 Import the measurement page file to the Hold queue of the Fiery PRO80. For instructions, see Command WorkStation Help. 5 Double-click the job in the Job Center window. The Job Properties window appears. CALIBRATION 58 6 Select the following print settings and click OK. • Set the media settings appropriate for your paper. For example, choose the media type that corresponds to your paper and the input tray that contains your paper. Choose the halftone screen that you will use to print. Be sure you also choose this setting when you create the custom calibration set and output profile. • Set the CMYK/Grayscale Source option to ColorWise OFF. With this setting, the job is printed without calibration. • Set the desired halftone setting, if available. 7 Right-click the job and choose Print. The measurement page is printed. TO MEASURE THE MEASUREMENT PAGE 1 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, go to General > Tools and click Calibrate. 2 Make a note of the selected calibration set. For this procedure, you can use any existing calibration set. 3 Select Expert mode, click Save to File, and save the measurements for the currently selected calibration set to a file on your computer. If you do not need to preserve the existing measurements (for example, you have not calibrated the Fiery PRO80 using this calibration set), you can skip this step. 4 Measure the measurement page. For instructions, see the section in Command WorkStation Help for your measurement device. Do not print the measurement page in Calibrator. Use the measurement page you have already printed. 5 Click Apply to save the measurements. CALIBRATION 59 TO CREATE A CUSTOM CALIBRATION SET AND TEMPORARY DEFAULT OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Calibrator, create a custom calibration set. For instructions, see Command WorkStation Help. You must choose an existing calibration set that the custom calibration set is based on. Choose the same calibration set that you used to measure the measurement page. The measurements are copied to the custom calibration set you create. In the custom calibration set, be sure to choose the same Screen setting that you used to print the measurement page. When you create a custom calibration set, you associate it with a copy of an existing output profile. You can choose any output profile; this association is temporary. You will not use the copied output profile to print. 2 If you saved the current measurements to a file in the previous procedure, you can restore the measurements. • Select the correct calibration set. • Click From File under Get Measurements, select the file, and click Open. • Click Apply to save the measurements. Alternatively, you can restore the factory default measurements. • Select the correct calibration set. • Click Restore Device, and then click OK. TO SET UP THE CALIBRATION TARGET USING A TEMPORARY DEFAULT OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Calibrator, select Expert mode. 2 Make sure that your custom calibration set is selected. 3 Choose Measurements vs. Target under View Measurements (optional) and click View. 4 Make a note of the Measured D-Max values for C, M, Y, and K. Be sure to note the Measured values, not the Target values. 5 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, choose Resources > Profiles. 6 Select the output profile that you created when you created the custom calibration set and click Edit. You will use this profile as a temporary profile to set the D-Max values of your custom output profile. CALIBRATION 60 7 Change the D-Max values to the values you recorded in step 4. 8 Click Save, type the name if needed, and then click Save again to save the edited profile. 9 In Device Center, choose Color Setup > Color Management. 10 For the Output Profile option, select the profile that you just edited. The profile becomes the default output profile. TO CREATE A CUSTOM OUTPUT PROFILE 1 Print the color profiling patches. Before printing the color profiling patches: • Set the same print settings as in your custom calibration set. Be sure to use the same Screen setting. • Set the output profile to be the temporary default output profile (the one you saved in the previous procedure). • Set the CMYK/Grayscale Source option to None. This ensures that your patches print only with the proper correction from calibration, without any other CMYK conversions. 2 Measure the color profiling patches and create the new output profile using a profilegenerating application. For the procedures to create output profiles, see the documentation that accompanies the application. 3 Save the custom output profile to the default folder for profiles on your computer. Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008: Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color Mac OS X: Library: ColorSync: Profiles TO IMPORT THE CUSTOM OUTPUT PROFILE TO THE FIERY PRO80 1 In Device Center, choose Resources > Profiles. 2 Click Import and go to the location of your custom output profile. 3 Select your custom output profile, choose Output next to Import Profile As and click Import. The profile is imported to the Fiery PRO80, and the Output Profile Settings window appears. The calibration target from the default output profile is copied to the custom output profile. 4 In the Output Profile Settings window, confirm that your custom calibration set is selected. When the custom output profile is imported, the calibration set from the default output profile is associated with the custom output profile. 5 Click OK to save changes and close the Output Profile Settings window. CALIBRATION 61 Your custom output profile now has the correct calibration target and is associated with your custom calibration set. You no longer need the temporary default output profile and can delete it from the Fiery PRO80. TO DELETE THE TEMPORARY DEFAULT OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Device Center, choose Color Setup > Color Management. 2 For the Output Profile option, select a profile that is not the temporary default output profile you are going to delete. The profile becomes the default output profile. 3 In Device Center, choose Resources > Profiles. 4 Select the temporary output profile and click Delete. 5 Click Yes. CALIBRATION 62 Understanding calibration The following sections describe important concepts and suggestions for understanding calibration. An overview of calibration Calibration generates curves that adjust for the difference between the actual toner densities (measurements) and the response expected by the output profile. • Measurements represent the actual color behavior of the printer. • Calibration sets are sets of measurements that represent the output of specific combinations of media-related options. • Each output profile contains a calibration target that describes the expected behavior of the printer. After you calibrate the Fiery PRO80, a calibration set is stored. This calibration set is used when it is associated with an output profile. Every output profile has an associated calibration set. If you have not specified one, the calibration set associated with the default output profile is used. If you change the calibration after a saved job has been processed (RIPped), you do not have to reprocess (reRIP) the job. The new calibration affects the job without reprocessing. How calibration works Although the needs of most users are met by the default calibration set, the Fiery PRO80 allows you to choose a calibration set to customize calibration for specialized jobs. Calibration allows you to: • Maximize the color reproduction capabilities of the Fiery PRO80. • Ensure consistent color quality over time. • Produce consistent output across Fiery PRO80 servers. • Achieve better color matches when reproducing spot colors, such as PANTONE colors or other named color systems. • Optimize the Fiery PRO80 for using ColorWise rendering intents, CMYK simulations, and ICC profiles. Success in obtaining satisfactory print quality from the Fiery PRO80 depends on many factors. Among the most important are establishing and maintaining optimal toner densities. The density is the measure of the light absorbed by a surface. By carefully regulating toner densities, you obtain consistent printed color. CALIBRATION 63 Even with a calibrated system, toner density is affected by the settings of printer, humidity, and temperature. Density also tends to drift over time. Uneven toner density on paper affects calibration results. Regular measurement detects day-to-day variations in density, gradation, and color reproduction, and calibration corrects them. Calibration works by creating calibration curves on the Fiery PRO80 that compensate for the difference between actual (measured) and desired (target) density values. These calibration curves are the graphic equivalent of transfer functions, which are mathematical descriptions of changes that are made to the initial data. Transfer functions are often graphed as input or output curves. The Fiery PRO80 generates calibration curves after comparing measured values to the final target values for each of the four toner colors. The target values are based on the output profile specified. Measurements Measurement files contain numerical values that correspond to the toner density produced by the printer when it prints solid cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, and graduated tints of those colors. To create a measurement file, print a page of color patches. Measure the patches using a color measurement instrument connected to a computer on the network, or if it is available, the print device’s scanner. The new measurements are automatically downloaded to the Fiery PRO80. Output profiles and calibration sets Output profiles and calibration sets define desired calibration results. One or more output profiles and calibration sets are provided with the Fiery PRO80. When you calibrate the Fiery PRO80, select the calibration set that corresponds to the typical printing jobs at your site. This same calibration set can be associated with one or more output profiles. For more information about output profiles, see page 20. Scheduling calibration Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 at least once a day, depending on the volume of print jobs. If it is very important to maintain consistent color, or your printer is subject to wide fluctuations in temperature or humidity, calibrate every few hours. For optimal performance, calibrate whenever there is a noticeable change in print quality or printing results are not as expected. If you must split a print job into two or more batches to print at different times, it is important to calibrate before you print each batch. You should also calibrate the Fiery PRO80 after printer maintenance. However, because the printer may be less stable immediately after maintenance, wait until you have printed approximately 50 pages before you calibrate. CALIBRATION 64 NOTE: Because printed output from the printer is very sensitive to changes in temperature and humidity, do not install the printer near a window, in direct sunlight, or near a heater or air conditioner. Paper is also sensitive to climate changes. Store it in a cool, dry, stable environment, and keep reams sealed until they are used. To monitor print quality, print the following color pages: • Color Charts (from Command WorkStation or the printer touch panel) • Color reference pages included in the User Software DVD (see page 42) These pages include fully saturated color patches and pale tints of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Images with skin tones offer a good basis for comparison. Save and periodically compare the pages you print. If a noticeable change in appearance occurs, calibrate the Fiery PRO80. When you examine the Test Page, all color patches should be visible, even though they may be very faint in the five to two percent range. Each patch set should show uniform gradation from patch to patch as the color lightens from 100% to zero. If the solid density patches (100% cyan, magenta, yellow, or black) look less saturated over time, show the pages to your printer service technician to determine whether adjusting the printer can improve output. Checking calibration status To verify whether the Fiery PRO80 is calibrated, which calibration set and output profile were used, and when the printer was last calibrated, perform the following: • Print a Configuration page or Test Page from the printer touch panel or Command WorkStation. For instructions on printing the Configuration page, see Configuration and Setup. • In the Calibrate feature of Command WorkStation, select a calibration set. The last calibration and the user who performed it are displayed. SPOT-ON 65 SPOT-ON The Spot Color Matching print option automatically matches spot colors with their best CMYK equivalents so that spot colors can be simulated using the CMYK toner of the printer. However, you may want to adjust the default CMYK equivalents to achieve a better match for your specific printing conditions. You can modify spot colors using the Spot-On spot color editor in Command WorkStation. In addition to managing “named” colors, Spot-On allows you to create a list of “substitute” colors. These are colors that, when called for in a document by their RGB or CMYK values, are substituted with a different color having the CMYK values from the Spot-On color dictionary. This permits exact color control and overrides individual RGB and CMYK colors. If Two-Color Print Mapping is enabled, Spot-On also allows you to assign spot colors and process colors to the generic colors that are used in a job. The Two-Color Print Mapping feature is designed for print shop operators to do the proofing for a two-color press. You can print a two-color job to a two-color device by mapping the colors in a job to the colors that are already created on the device. For information about Two-Color Print Mapping, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Using Spot-On Spot-On allows you to adjust and manage lists of spot colors and their CMYK equivalents. The matching lists of spot colors and CMYK values are known as Spot Color Dictionaries. Spot-On allows you to maintain multiple Spot Color Dictionaries for each output profile on the Fiery PRO80. To use Spot-On, you must specify the output profile associated with the Spot Color Dictionary that you want to edit. If you select Output profile X and redefine PANTONE 123 from 30%M to 50%M using Spot-On, you will get 50%M when you print a job with Output profile X. If you print a job with Output profile Y, you will get the original value. SPOT-ON 66 If you select Output profile X and create a custom color named “My Purple” and define it as 80%C 40%M, ColorWise automatically calculates the Lab values using Output profile X and creates new CMYK values for use with Output profile Y. The Spot-On feature is in the Spot Colors tab under the Resources tab in the Device Center. For more information about using Spot-On, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: To use the Spot-On features with named colors, you must enable the Spot Color Matching print option. For more information about this option, see page 25. NOTE: Spot colors identified by names are printed with their defined CMYK values. Edits to an output profile made in Command WorkStation do not affect how spot colors print. Some Spot-On features require that a job be displayed with correct colors on your monitor. To display the colors correctly on your monitor, you must set up the monitor display according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, and specify the correct monitor profile for your monitor. SPOT-ON 67 Specify the following settings for the monitor display: • At the monitor: Brightness, Contrast, and Color Temperature • From the control panel of the operating system: Resolution, Refresh rate, and Number of colors For more information about setting up your monitor and the monitor profile, see the documentation that accompanies the monitor. NOTE: The edits to a job made with the color adjustment features in ImageViewer affect all colors in the job, including spot colors. For more information about ImageViewer, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: You cannot use the Substitute Colors and Postflight features at the same time. These print options are constrained from the printer driver. IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 68 IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS This chapter describes Simple ASCII File Format (SAIFF), which you can use to import density measurements from measurement devices into Command WorkStation for calibration. To use your own measurement data from an alternate measurement instrument, rather than make measurements directly in Command WorkStation, record your individual readings in a text file, structured as described in this chapter. You can then import the data by clicking From File under Get Measurements in the Calibrate feature of Command WorkStation. Simple ASCII Import File Format This format describes Status T measurement data for import into Command WorkStation. The three possible file formats are: • 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page • 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page • 1D Status T density for other pages (maximum of 256 patches per toner) The file format is ASCII and has no tabs. A single space or multiple spaces are used as delimiters. Blank lines are not allowed. Each line in the file represents four patches (C, M, Y, K) of a specific toner value. Comments may be on any line in the file. Comment lines must start with a pound sign (#) followed by a space. (A line with a pound sign followed by any character other than a space has been reserved.) Comments must be on a line by themselves. Each line of data contains five values. The first number is the sequential patch number (for EFI 21 and EFI 34 pages) or the toner value percentage (for other pages). The four values that follow are the density values of C, M, Y, and K of the corresponding patch. Lines are ordered either by increasing sequential patch numbers, or by increasing the toner percentage. For Windows computers, the file extension must be .cm0 or cm1. For Mac OS computers, the file type must be ‘TEXT’. Measurement data in EFI 21 and EFI 34 are paper-relative. For other pages, if the first line corresponds to zero toner value, Command WorkStation assumes that the measurement data is absolute and adjusts it to become paper-relative by subtracting the density values of the first line from the remaining patches. IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 69 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of the EFI 21 patch page. The value in the first column is the patch number. The first patch must be 1 and the last must be 21. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST21 # Cyan Magent Yellow Black 1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…more data…) 20 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 21 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of the EFI 34 patch page. The value in the first column is the patch number. The first patch must be 1 and the last must be 34. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST34 # Cyan Magent Yellow Black 1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…more data…) 33 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 34 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 70 Example of 1D Status T density for an arbitrary page This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of a user-defined patch page. The value in the first column is the toner percentage of the patch. The first percentage must be 0 and the last percentage must be 100. The percentages must increase in between. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST # percnt Cyan Magent Yellow Black 0.0000 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 0.3922 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 1.1765 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…more data…) 98.0000 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 100.0000 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 INDEX 71 A Absolute Colorimetric rendering intent 22 Adobe RGB setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 Apple Standard setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 Auto Trapping option 13 B Black Detection option 13 Black Overprint option 14 Black Text and Graphics option 15 C calibration See also ColorCal, measurements checking status of 64 curves 63 from print device panel, Web LCD disabled 51 from print device panel, Web LCD enabled 49 importing density measurements 68 measurement file, creating 63 measurement page 63 measurements 62 overview 62 scheduling 63 target 55, 62, 63 Calibration Files folder 42 calibration set 52 custom 53, 55 print settings 54 recommended paper 54 CMYK Color Reference.ps 42 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link option 17 Color Bars folder 42 Color Chart 64 color files 42 color management system (CMS) 9 color patches in Test Page 64 measuring 63 PostScript files of 42 color profiles See ICC profiles color reference files 42 color reference pages 64 color space 12 ColorCal calibration from print device panel 49 ColorWise color management system ICC profile support 9 key features 9 workflow diagram 12 ColorWise Off 17 ColorWise options, specifying 26 Combine Separations option 18 Command WorkStation Calibrate feature 47 Spot-On feature 66 Composite Overprint option 19 composites, printing 15, 18, 25 Configuration page 64 Contrast ICC rendering intent 22 custom calibration set 53, 55 custom output profile 53, 55 custom profiles, creating 45 custom simulations 17 Custom21.ps 42 Custom34.ps 42 D density 62, 64 density measurements, importing 68 DTP32 or DTP32 Series II densitometer terminology 46 DTP41 spectrophotometer terminology 46 INDEX INDEX 72 E eciRGB setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 EFIRGB, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 ES-1000 spectrophotometer terminology 46 F Fiery RGB setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 FieryColorBar.eps 42 Full (Output GCR) setting, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 Full (Source GCR) setting, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 G Graphics ICC rendering intent 22 Gray (RGB) and Gray (CMYK) options 20 H Halftone Calibration Files folder 43 I ICC profiles described 9 installing 37 rendering intents 22 Image ICC rendering intent 22 M Mac Color Files folder 42 Mac OS color management options 32 measurements page 63 N None setting, RGB Source or Device LInk option 23 O Other Applications folder 44 output profile calibration set 52 custom 53, 55 Spot-On 65 Output Profile option 20 output profiles 63 P PANTONE Book.ps 42 PANTONE Coated Color Reference 25 passwords, for calibration 46 patches page 63 PDF/X 21 PDF/X Output Intent option 21 Perceptual ICC rendering intent 22 Photographic rendering intent 22 Photoshop folder 43 PostScript color issues 12, 14, 15, 23 PowerPoint, RGB color reference file 42 PPD 29, 32 Presentation rendering intent 22 print options Mac OS 32 Windows 29 printer drivers Mac OS 32 Windows 29 profiles custom 45 described 9 installing 37 managing 45 rendering intents 22 Q Quick setting, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 R Relative Colorimetric rendering intent 22 rendering intents 12 RGB images defining source profiles for 23 PostScript and non-PostScript conversion 23 RGB page 01 42 RGB page 02 42 RGB Source or Device Link option 23 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option 22 S SAIFF format 68 Saturation ICC rendering intent 22 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option 24 INDEX 73 separations printing 15, 18, 25 target color space 24 separations, unlimited 18 simulations, custom 17 Spot Color Dictionaries 65 Spot Color Matching option 25 spot colors, CMYK equivalents 25, 65 Spot-On 65 named colors 66 RGB or CMYK values 65 Spot Color Matching 66 substitute colors 65 sRGB, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 Standard21.ps 42 Standard34.ps 42 Status T 68 Substitute Colors vs. Postflight 67 Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Configuration and Setup © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093721 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 Battery information for the European Union and EEA 9 CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 10 Fiery PRO80 on the network 10 Stages of installation on the network 11 Summary of Fiery PRO80 network installation 12 Network Server Setup requirements 13 Windows networks 13 AppleTalk networks 13 UNIX networks 14 PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 15 Levels of access and control 15 Users and Groups 15 Fiery PRO80 print connections 18 WebTools 19 Additional security features 20 Controlling E-mail access to the Fiery PRO80 20 Restricting IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses 20 Secure Printing 20 LDAP authentication 20 CONTENTS 4 Connecting network cable to the Fiery PRO80 21 Back view of the Fiery PRO80 21 Ethernet connection 22 About Setup 22 Setup from the printer touch panel 22 Setup from a network computer 22 SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 23 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel (new version) 24 Illustration of printer touch panel (new version) 24 Accessing Setup options 25 About the printer touch panel Setup interface 26 Types of Setup screens 26 Saving changes 26 Menu tabs 27 Setup options 29 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the Legacy LCD 31 Illustration of the Legacy LCD 31 Legacy LCD menus 32 Accessing Legacy LCD Setup options 33 About the Legacy LCD Setup interface 34 Types of Setup screens 34 Saving changes 34 Server Setup options 35 Network Setup 1 options 36 Network Setup 2 options 38 SETUP FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER 39 Accessing Configure from a network computer 39 Using Configure 40 CONTENTS 5 SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 41 PS and PCL Setup options 41 Productivity Setup options 44 CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS 45 Configuring the Fiery PRO80 and computers for WebTools 45 ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 46 Administrator functions 46 Setting passwords 47 Passwords from a network computer 47 Changing the Windows XP system password 48 Updating system and user software 49 Before updating the Fiery PRO80 49 System Updates 50 Check for Product Updates (Software Downloads Site) 56 Clearing the Fiery PRO80 57 Backing up the entire Fiery PRO80 57 Remote connection to the Fiery PRO80 58 Restoring Fiery PRO80 settings 58 Saving and restoring the Fiery PRO80 configuration 58 USB printing 59 Managing e-mail address books 60 VDP Search Path 63 Setting common global search paths 63 Allowing users to define a search path for a single job 64 Printing the Configuration page 65 Determining the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 65 CONTENTS 6 Maintaining optimal Fiery PRO80 performance 66 Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the Fiery PRO80 67 Ejecting a CD/DVD from the Fiery PRO80 68 TROUBLESHOOTING 69 Troubleshooting the Fiery PRO80 69 Runtime error messages 69 Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with utilities 70 Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with Command WorkStation 71 INDEX 73 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document describes how to set up network servers and user computers to use the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server so that users can print to it as a high-performance networked printer. For general information about using the printer, your computer, your software, or your network, see the documentation that accompanies those products. Setting up the network environment correctly requires the presence and active cooperation of the network administrator. Detailed instructions on configuring networks is beyond the scope of this document. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your network. For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Network connectors on the Fiery PRO80 • Information specific to the Fiery PRO80 about setting up network servers NOTE: For information about network servers, see the documentation that accompanies your network. • System security through access levels and passwords • Setup of the Fiery PRO80 from the printer touch panel • Setup of the Fiery PRO80 from a network computer • Setup of the Fiery PRO80 to allow users to use WebTools • Administration of the Fiery PRO80 • Troubleshooting Administrator functions described in other documentation are summarized on page 46. A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 Battery information for the European Union and EEA This symbol indicates that the batteries and accumulators used in this product must be disposed of separately from your household waste in accordance with EU Directive 2006/66/ EC (“Directive”) and local requirements. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown, in accordance with the Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Directive. Batteries and accumulators must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste. Users of batteries and accumulators must use the available collection framework for the return, recycling and treatment of batteries and accumulators. If your product contains non-removable batteries, the entire product is already covered by the EU WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Directive and should be handed over to an authorized collection site for WEEE. The collection site will take appropriate measures for the recycling and treatment of the product, including the batteries. Customer participation in the collection and recycling of batteries and accumulators is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to substances used in batteries and accumulators. In the EU, there are separate collection and recycling schemes for batteries and accumulators. To find out more about recycling schemes for batteries and accumulators available in your area, please contact your local city office, waste authority, or waste disposal facility. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 10 CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK This chapter summarizes the stages in setting up the Fiery PRO80. Fiery PRO80 on the network When the Fiery PRO80 is connected to a network, it behaves as a networked printer. The Fiery PRO80 supports the following network protocols (rules that enable computers on a network to communicate with each other): • AppleTalk, Bonjour • TCP/IP, which also includes the BOOTP, DHCP, FTP, HTTP, IMAP, IPP, IPv4, IPv6, LDAP, LPD, NBT, POP3, Port 9100, SMB, SMTP, SNMP, SNTP, and SSL/TLS protocols These protocols can run concurrently on the same cable. Computers that use other protocols can print through a server that uses one of the supported protocols. The Fiery PRO80 is auto-sensing, and handles all connections simultaneously. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 11 Stages of installation on the network Installation can be performed by a network or printing administrator. The stages of a successful installation are: 1 Configuring the network environment Configure network servers to provide users with access to the Fiery PRO80 as a networked printer. For information about configuring network servers in Windows and UNIX network environments as they relate specifically to the Fiery PRO80, see page 13. For information about using your network, see the documentation that accompanies your network. 2 Physically connecting the Fiery PRO80 to a functioning network Prepare a network node for the Fiery PRO80. Obtain cable, route it to the location where the Fiery PRO80 is to be installed, and attach the cable to the network connector of the Fiery PRO80. For details, see page 21. 3 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 Configure the Fiery PRO80 for your printing and network environment (see page 23). 4 Preparing user computers for printing Install the files needed for printing, install user software, and connect the user computers to the network. The software installation is described in Printing. 5 Administering the Fiery PRO80 Monitor and maintain system performance and troubleshoot problems that may arise (see “Administering the Fiery PRO80” on page 46). CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 12 Summary of Fiery PRO80 network installation Fiery PRO80 available on the network Network server configuration Network server Configure network servers to specify Fiery PRO80 print queues and Fiery PRO80 users. Connection Fiery PRO80 Prepare a network node. Connect the Fiery PRO80 to the network. If you use the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface, connect it to the network. Fiery PRO80 Setup Configure default settings for the options in the Setup menus. Client computer Setup On computers where users print to the Fiery PRO80: • Install the appropriate printer files and connect to one or more print connections. • Install utilities and an Internet browser on computers where users will use them. • Verify the Fiery PRO80 in the list of printers. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 13 Network Server Setup requirements This section provides basic information about configuring the Fiery PRO80 and using it on the network. It does not explain network functions for printing in general. Only information specific to the Fiery PRO80 is presented. Setting up the network environment correctly requires the presence and active cooperation of the network administrator. Detailed instructions on configuring networks is beyond the scope of this document. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your network. Configure the network and servers, and ensure that there is a live network connection before you configure network settings in Setup. This allows the Fiery PRO80 to query the network for zones, servers, and server-based queues. Whenever you change the configuration of the Fiery PRO80, printer, or network at your site, alter the settings to correspond to the changed environment. Changing network or port settings may require that you make changes to other Setup options, as well. Windows networks • The FieryPRO80 requires a valid IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address. Enter these addresses manually or use DHCP or BOOTP protocols to assign them dynamically. Make sure the Fiery PRO80 name and address are listed in a domain name server (DNS) or hosts name database used by your system. If more than one Fiery PRO80 print connection is published (for example, if both the Print queue and Hold queue are published), consider creating a printer for each print connection, so that users can print to each connection directly. • Configure the Fiery PRO80 with the correct Windows domain name. This is especially important for Windows printing, also known as SMB printing. To use Microsoft Active Directory, you must assign the Fiery PRO80 to a domain. If you assign the Fiery PRO80 to a workgroup, you cannot use Active Directory. AppleTalk networks AppleShare servers require no special configuration. To allow Mac OS X computers to access Bonjour printers, you must enable Bonjour in Setup. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 14 UNIX networks • When you configure a UNIX workstation with the lpr protocol and connect to the Fiery PRO80 over a TCP/IP network, you can print directly to the Fiery PRO80. • Setting up UNIX workstations requires an administrator with root privileges. After the initial configuration, UNIX users submit print jobs to a named printer. • The FieryPRO80 is a printer controller that understands lpr protocols. • The FieryPRO80 has a remote printer name you must use in order to communicate with it successfully. Regardless of the UNIX system you use, the name that you use for the remote printer (or rp in the /etc/printcap file) in configuring the network for the Fiery PRO80 must be one of the following: print hold name of virtual printer Computers on a TCP/IP network can print directly to the Fiery PRO80 as a remote printer, or can print to a Windows Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2 server or UNIX workstation acting as a print server. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 15 PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP To prepare for printing at your site, you must do some initial Fiery PRO80 configuration (or “Setup”) to specify the network environment and the types of printing you do. Before you perform Setup, decide the levels of access to implement, such as passwords and other security features that the Fiery PRO80 offers. Because many of these security features are interconnected, review the information in this chapter to plan for an effective security system, and then perform Setup accordingly. Levels of access and control When you configure the Fiery PRO80 during Setup, you implement a particular level of control by configuring these elements: • Users and Groups • Print connections • Access to WebTools Users and Groups With Configure, you create users, assign passwords to users, create groups with particular privileges, and assign users to the groups. Several groups are provided by default, and you can create new groups. All users in a group have the same privileges. In addition to assigning the users that you have created to a group, you can add users from your organization’s global address list if you have LDAP services enabled on the Fiery PRO80. The following discussion is an overview designed to help you prepare a security strategy. For more information, including specific procedures, see Configure Help. You can view detailed information about users and groups that you have created from Configure in Command WorkStation. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 16 User authentication The term “user authentication” means the Fiery PRO80 verifies that the user who is sending a job belongs to a group, and the group has printing privileges (“Print in B&W” or “Print in Color and B&W”). By default, the Fiery PRO80 does not enforce user authentication. That is, even if you assign passwords to users and assign users to groups, no authentication occurs unless you clear the “Allow users to print without authentication” option (in Configure > Users and Groups). If this option is selected, anyone can print to the Fiery PRO80. NOTE: You cannot enable Fiery PRO80 authentication and printer authentication at the same time. If you require users to specify their user name and password (that is, you have cleared the “Allow users to print without authentication” option), users must type this information in the printer driver when they print. Users must specify their user name and password if they create files from the printer driver for printing later (such as an e-mail attachment that will be sent to the Fiery PRO80). Because jobs that are sent through FTP do not require a printer driver, you can specify that FTP jobs are authenticated (see Configure > Network > Services > FTP > Require Password for Printing). Passwords When you create a new user in Configure > Users and Groups, you assign a password to the user. In other areas of the system, you can also set passwords for these areas: • Default admin user in Administrators group • Default operator user in Operators group • Windows system password NOTE: The Administrator and Operator passwords are separate from the Windows system password. By default, the Administrator password is set on the Fiery PRO80. Change the Administrator password periodically to protect the Fiery PRO80 from accidental or malicious changes to Setup. For more information, see “Setting passwords” on page 47. Users in the Administrators and Operators groups have privileges in addition to the explicit ones that you set when you create groups. Examples of these privileges are provided in the following sections. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 17 Administrator privileges Users in the Administrators group have the highest level of control. Administrator privileges include: • Configuring the Fiery PRO80 from Configure or the printer touch panel • Adding and deleting groups • Adding and deleting users • Setting and changing passwords for users • Deleting, printing, exporting, and viewing the Job Log • Deleting, viewing, and modifying users’ print jobs • Clearing the Fiery PRO80 of all job data • Printing in black-and-white or color • Publishing print connections • Deleting fonts • Controlling print jobs from the job management tools • Overriding job settings • Setting default settings for print options • Calibrating the Fiery PRO80 Operator privileges Users in the Operators group control print jobs from the job management tools, including the following: • Viewing the Job Log • Deleting, viewing, and modifying other users’ print jobs • Printing in black-and-white or color Guest privileges (no password) A user does not need a password to log on as a Guest from the job management tools. A Guest can view the status of active jobs but cannot make changes to jobs or to the Fiery PRO80 state. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 18 Fiery PRO80 print connections The Fiery PRO80 supports three print connections: Hold queue, Print queue, and Direct connection. You enable, or “publish,” these print connections to users on the network when you configure Printer Setup. All published connections are constantly checked for the presence of jobs. The Print queue and Direct connection give users more direct access to the Fiery PRO80 than the Hold queue. Therefore, do not publish the Print queue and the Direct connection in environments where maximum control is required. In addition, you can enable the Printed queue, which is a storage area for the most recent jobs from the Print queue. The Printed queue allows users to reprint those jobs by using the job management tools (for example, Command WorkStation). NOTE: To use the utilities and WebTools, you must enable at least one print connection. Hold queue Jobs sent to the Hold queue are spooled to the Fiery PRO80 hard disk drive for printing at a later time, or for reprinting. Because the Hold queue is a storage area, jobs sent to it cannot proceed through the printing process until the operator intervenes using the job management tools. Print queue The Print queue is the standard Fiery PRO80 queue. Jobs sent to the Print queue are processed and printed in the order in which they are received. Jobs prioritized by an operator with the job management tools and jobs sent via the Direct connection take priority over jobs sent to the Print queue. Direct connection The Direct connection transmits jobs directly to the Fiery PRO80, but only when the Fiery PRO80 is idle. If the Fiery PRO80 is busy, the job remains at the user’s computer until the Fiery PRO80 is ready. The job is then processed as soon as the previous job is finished and before the next queued job is processed. In most cases, jobs sent to the Direct connection are not stored on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, and cannot be selected for reprinting, moving, or deletion. Therefore, the Direct connection provides a measure of security for sensitive files. Jobs sent to the Direct connection do appear in the Job Log, for accounting purposes. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 19 Some types of jobs printed to the Direct connection cause temporary files to be stored on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, but do not appear in any of the job management tools. These job types are the following: • PDF jobs • TIFF jobs • Jobs with settings for any of the following print options: – Reverse order printing (for large jobs) – Booklet Maker – Mixed Media – Combine Separations NOTE: To download fonts to the Fiery PRO80, you must publish the Direct connection. WebTools The Fiery PRO80 supports Internet or intranet access with WebTools from Windows and Mac OS computers. To enable use of WebTools, see “Configuring WebTools” on page 45. Home Home provides you with current information about the jobs processing and printing on the Fiery PRO80. To use this WebTool, you do not need a password. For more information, see Utilities. Downloads Downloads allows users to download installers for printer drivers and other software directly from the Fiery PRO80. To use this WebTool, you do not need a password. For more information, see Printing and Utilities. Docs Docs allows users to access, manage, and modify jobs in their mailboxes on the Fiery PRO80, and submit jobs to the Fiery PRO80. For more information, see WebTools Docs Help. Configure Configure allows you to view and modify Fiery PRO80 options from a network computer. This function requires an Administrator password. For more information, see page 39. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 20 Additional security features In addition to the traditional security features such as passwords, you can use these features to keep the Fiery PRO80 secure: • E-mail access • IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses • Secure Printing • LDAP authentication Controlling E-mail access to the Fiery PRO80 Because you can allow users to print file attachments in e-mail messages sent to the Fiery PRO80, the Fiery PRO80 accepts only valid attachments (for example, PostScript or PDF files). Typically, viruses transmitted via e-mail require execution by the receiver. Attachments that are not valid files are discarded by the Fiery PRO80. Because file types such as .BAT, .VBS, and .EXE could launch harmful virus activity, the Fiery PRO80 does not process these file types. The Fiery PRO80 also ignores e-mails in RTF (Rich Text Format) or HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) format, and any included JavaScript code. You can define lists of authorized e-mail addresses on the Fiery PRO80. Any e-mail that the Fiery PRO80 receives from an e-mail address not in the authorized list is deleted. For more information, see page 60. Restricting IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses To restrict unauthorized connections to the Fiery PRO80, you can permit only users whose IP addresses or MAC addresses are within a defined range. You can also close unnecessary ports to reject inbound access from the network. Commands or jobs sent from unauthorized IP addresses or ports are ignored by the Fiery PRO80. Secure Printing This option allows the printing of highly sensitive or confidential files. A user printing a file with the printer driver assigns a password to the job. The user must then enter the password at the printer to print the job. For more information, see Printing. LDAP authentication When you enable LDAP communication to retrieve names and other information for people at your organization, you can specify the type of authentication. For more information, see Configure Help. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 21 Connecting network cable to the Fiery PRO80 This section includes an illustration of the Fiery PRO80 back panel, and provides information about connecting the Fiery PRO80 to the network. Back view of the Fiery PRO80 1 USB ports (x2) 2 Network port (RJ-45) 3 USB ports (x4) 4 Printer interface 1 2 3 4 PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 22 Ethernet connection For Ethernet connections, the Fiery PRO80 supports Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cabling for these network speeds: • 10BaseT: Category 3 or higher • 100BaseTX: Category 5 or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length) • 1000BaseT: Category 5e or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length) TO CONNECT TO THE NETWORK 1 Power off the printer and the Fiery PRO80. For information about the proper procedures, see page 67. 2 Connect the cable from the network to the appropriate network connector (RJ-45) on the back of the Fiery PRO80. 3 Power on the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. About Setup Setup configures the Fiery PRO80 to communicate with other devices and manage print jobs. Perform Setup the first time you turn on the Fiery PRO80, after new system software is loaded, or any time Server software is reinstalled. When the network or user printing environment changes, change the options accordingly. Setup from the printer touch panel Perform initial Setup from the printer touch panel. After the initial Setup, you can change Setup options from a network computer (page 39). If you do not set options in the Setup menus, the Fiery PRO80 uses default settings. You must choose settings appropriate for the printing environment at your site. Setup from a network computer To set up the Fiery PRO80 from a network computer, use Configure (page 39). Access Configure from WebTools or Command WorkStation. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 23 SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL Setup is required the first time the Fiery PRO80 is turned on after new system software is loaded. If you do not configure a particular Setup option, the Fiery PRO80 uses default settings. Make sure that the settings are appropriate for the printing environment at your site. The Fiery PRO80 is equipped with two different types of printer touch panel Setup interfaces: • The new version of Setup: The new version of Setup provides a condensed list of Setup options to allow for quick configuration of the Fiery PRO80. For more information, see “Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel (new version)” on page 24. • The Legacy LCD: This is a previous version of Setup that provides three groups of Setup options: Server Setup, Network Setup 1, Network Setup 2. For information on Legacy LCD Setup, see “Fiery PRO80 Setup from the Legacy LCD” on page 31. When the Enhanced Security Mode is set on the printer, use the Legacy LCD. Additional Setup is also available from Configure. For more information about Configure Setup, see Configure Help. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 24 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel (new version) Setup allows you to configure the Fiery PRO80 to communicate with other devices and manage print jobs sent to it. Illustration of printer touch panel (new version) The printer touch panel allows you to view status information about jobs printed to the Fiery PRO80, print system pages, and set up printing. The printer touch panel includes the following parts: 1 2 Item Description Controller button Controls functions on the Fiery PRO80 Selection buttons Select an option or menu and proceed to the next option or menu SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 25 Accessing Setup options When you access Setup options, make sure that no one is printing to the Fiery PRO80. TO ACCESS SETUP WHEN THE FIERY PRO80 IS IDLE 1 Make sure that the information screen on the printer touch panel reads Idle. If Printing or RIPping appears, the Fiery PRO80 is processing, and you must wait until the system finishes and reaches the Idle state. 2 Press Controller on the printer touch panel. 3 Press the Setup button. 4 Press the Administrator Password field, enter your password, and then press OK. 5 Press Login. 6 Perform Setup. This is the minimum required for initial Setup. Later, you can complete the remaining Setup menus, from a network computer. NOTE: This Setup screen does not display when Enable Web Services is disabled, the DHCP server is down, or the network does not have a DHCP server. When this occurs, the printer touch panel displays “The server appears to be offline” and you cannot access the above Setup screen. If this happens, press Enable Legacy LCD. This displays a previous version of Setup named Legacy LCD. From the Legacy LCD Setup screen, specify the IP address manually and make sure that Web Services is enabled. The new Setup screen is available after the Fiery PRO80 reboots. 7 Change the Administrator password to protect your Setup from unauthorized changes. For more information, see page 47. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 26 About the printer touch panel Setup interface When you perform Setup from the printer touch panel, you select one menu after another and enter information about your Fiery PRO80 and your network and printing environment. When you perform a function from the printer touch panel that prompts you for the Administrator password, you must enter it promptly. Otherwise, the printer touch panel returns to Idle, and you must start over. Types of Setup screens There are different types of Setup options: Saving changes After you enter the settings, you must save the changes. You are usually prompted to do so. If you choose Yes, your settings overwrite previous settings. If you choose No, your previous settings are retained. If necessary, the Fiery PRO80 restarts after you exit the Setup menu. Multiple choice questions Possible choices appear as buttons on the touch panel (for example, Yes or No, or a list of settings from which to choose). The currently selected value is highlighted. Press the button for the desired option on the touch panel. Information entry options You must specify the information for your site (the printer name or IP address, for example). Use the keyboard provided on the printer touch panel to enter information. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 27 Menu tabs In addition to performing Setup, you can use the printer touch panel to view status information about jobs printed to the Fiery PRO80, print system pages, and set up printing. The menu provides many of the same options available from Command WorkStation. For information about the job management features, see Utilities. Jobs tab The Jobs tab displays properties of currently printing and queued jobs, and allows you to print jobs. From Jobs you can also access the following commands: Suspend Printing Suspend communication between the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. Use this command if you want to interrupt the current job so that you can perform maintenance tasks. Jobs continue to process on the Fiery PRO80. After you complete the maintenance tasks, choose Resume Printing to continue printing jobs from the Fiery PRO80. Resume Printing Resume communication between the printer and the Fiery PRO80 after you have selected Suspend Printing. Secure Print Allows you to print a job with a secure password. USB Media Server Print a file from a USB device to one of the published print connections. For more information about printing, see Printing. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 28 Tools tab The Tools tab displays options that are installed on the Fiery PRO80. You can also print system pages and activity logs. Setup tab The Setup tab allows you to configure the Fiery PRO80 so that it can be operational on your network. Use Setup from the printer touch panel to perform minimum network Setup to put the Fiery PRO80 on the network. Use Configure to specify any remaining Setup options. Configure can be accessed from WebTools or from Command WorkStation. PS/PCL Test Page: Allows you to confirm that the Fiery PRO80 is properly connected to the printer, and provides color and grayscale samples to troubleshoot problems with the printer or the Fiery PRO80. Settings on the Test Page may include: Server Name, color settings, printer model, and date and time the Test Page was printed. Configuration: Prints the Configuration page, which gives the current server and device configuration. This page lists general information about the hardware and software configuration of the Fiery PRO80, the current options for all Setup settings, information about the current calibration, and the IP address of the Fiery PRO80. Color Charts: Prints samples of the RGB, CMY, and PANTONE colors available from the Fiery PRO80. PS/PCL Font List: Prints a list of all fonts currently on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk drive. Job Log: Prints a log of the last 55 jobs. E-mail Log: Prints a log listing recent e-mail activity. This E-mail log is useful to the network administrator. NOTE: To print the E-mail log, you must first enable the appropriate service. See Configure Help. FTP Log: Prints a log listing recent FTP activity. Calibrate: Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using ColorCal. For more information, see Color Printing. If an Administrator password has been set, you must enter it to access Calibration. Align Trays: Adjust the placement of text and images on a page so that they are correctly aligned on the sheet of paper and both sides of a duplex sheet have the exact same alignment. For more information about this function, see Command WorkStation Help. Restart Fiery: Resets the server software but does not reboot the entire system. Network access to the Fiery PRO80 is temporarily interrupted and all currently processing jobs are aborted and might be lost. Clear Server: Allows you to clear all queued print jobs from the Fiery PRO80 Print, Hold, and Printed queues. Clear Server also clears all jobs archived on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, the index of archived jobs, and all FreeForm masters. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 29 Setup options When you perform Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel, you configure the Fiery PRO80 to receive jobs over the network systems that are used at your site, including setting network addresses and names to be used by computers, servers, and the Fiery PRO80 when they communicate with each other. Before performing Setup, confirm that the Fiery PRO80 is connected to an active network because the Fiery PRO80 queries the network for zones, servers, and server-based queues. If you perform Network Setup without a connected and functioning network, default settings are used that may not meet your needs. Configure options only for the network systems that are currently used at your site. If your network requirements change, you can change Setup at any time. If the Fiery PRO80 is configured to enable more than one protocol, it automatically switches to the correct protocol when it receives a print job. The submenus and options appear in sequence. Default values, where applicable, are underlined. Words shown in italics indicate that a product- or site-specific value is displayed. Server Name Default server name Enter a name for the Fiery PRO80 (up to 15 characters long). This is the name by which the Fiery PRO80 appears on the network. NOTE: If you have more than one Fiery PRO80, do not give them the same name. Ethernet Speed Auto, 10 Mbps Half-Duplex, 100 Mbps Half-Duplex, 10 Mbps Full-Duplex, 100 Mbps Full- Duplex Choose the appropriate speed of the network. Choose Auto in any of these cases: • The network speed is unknown. • The network environment is mixed. • The network uses 1Gbps. IPv4 Address Type Automatic, Manual Choose whether to allow the Fiery PRO80 to obtain its Ethernet IP address automatically by searching the network. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 30 IP Address 127.0.0.1 If you choose Manual, enter the Fiery PRO80 IP address for Ethernet. This IP address, unlike an IP address set automatically, remains the same if you restart the Fiery PRO80. You must change the default to a valid address for your network. Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set the subnet mask for printing with TCP/IP on your network. Confirm the subnet mask setting with your network administrator before proceeding. Gateway Type Automatic, Manual Choose the method for obtaining the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP. Gateway Address 127.0.0.1 If you answered Manual to the previous option, set the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP on your network. Enable Web Services On, Off Select Yes to make the WebTools available to users. TCP/IP must be enabled on the Fiery PRO80 and on user workstations. A Java-enabled Web browser and a valid IP address or DNS host name are required for each user computer. If you select Off, you will only have access to Legacy LCD Setup once the Fiery PRO80 reboots. If you want to revert back to the newer version of Setup, Web Services and Web LCD must be enabled in the Legacy LCD (page 38). For more information about the Legacy LCD, see page 31. Enable Remote Desktop Enabled, Disabled Select Enabled to enable Remote Desktop, a Microsoft application that allows remote computers to manage and control the Windows desktop features of the Fiery PRO80. For information about enabling Remote Desktop on a computer, see page 58. Login timeout 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 seconds, never Specify the amount of time the Fiery PRO80 times out after you log in. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 31 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the Legacy LCD The Legacy LCD displays when Enable Web Services is disabled, the DHCP server is down, or the network does not have a DHCP server. To access the new version of Setup, as described on page page 31, from the Legacy LCD Setup screen, specify the Fiery PRO80 IP address and make sure that Web Services is enabled. The new Setup screen is available after the Fiery PRO80 reboots. Legacy LCD Setup provides the following groups of options: • Server Setup to specify system options • Network Setup 1 to specify information such as the IP address and Ethernet speed for network systems that transmit print jobs to the Fiery PRO80 • Network Setup 2 to specify information about WINS and Web Services Illustration of the Legacy LCD The Legacy LCD allows you to view status information about jobs printed to the Fiery PRO80, print system pages, and set up printing. The printer touch panel includes the following parts: Touch panel display 1 Controller button 2 Selection buttons 1 2 Item Description Controller button Controls functions on the Fiery PRO80 Selection buttons Select an option or menu and proceed to the next option or menu SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 32 Legacy LCD menus The Fiery PRO80 Legacy LCD menus provide many of the same options available from Command WorkStation. Choose the following commands: Job List Displays properties of currently printing and queued jobs, and allows you to print jobs, including Secure Print jobs. Print Pages Prints the following system pages from the Fiery PRO80: PS Test Page: Confirms that the Fiery PRO80 is properly connected to the printer, and provides color and grayscale samples to troubleshoot problems with the printer or the Fiery PRO80. Settings on the Test Page may include: Server Name, color settings, printer model, and date and time the Test Page was printed. Configuration: Provides general information about the hardware and software configuration of the Fiery PRO80, the current settings for Setup, the current calibration, and the IP address of the Fiery PRO80. Job Log: Prints a log of the last 55 jobs. Color Charts: Prints samples of the RGB, CMY, and PANTONE colors available from the Fiery PRO80. PS Font List: Prints a list of all fonts currently on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk. E-mail Log: Prints a log listing recent e-mail activity. FTP Log: Prints a log listing recent FTP activity. NOTE: To print the E-mail or FTP log, you must enable the appropriate service. For more information, see Configure Help. Calibration Calibrates the Fiery PRO80 using ColorCal. For more information, see Color Printing. If an Administrator password has been set, you must enter it to access Calibration. Setup Enters the Setup menu and changes Setup option settings. Restart Fiery Resets the server software but does not reboot the entire system. Network access to the Fiery PRO80 is temporarily interrupted and all currently processing jobs are aborted and might be lost. Shut Down Fiery Shuts down all Fiery PRO80 activity properly. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 33 Accessing Legacy LCD Setup options When you access Legacy LCD Setup options, make sure that no one is printing to the Fiery PRO80. TO ACCESS LEGACY LCD SETUP WHEN THE FIERY PRO80 IS IDLE 1 Make sure that the information screen on the printer touch panel reads Idle. If Printing or RIPping appears, the Fiery PRO80 is processing, and you must wait until the system finishes and reaches the Idle state. 2 Press Controller on the printer touch panel. 3 Press the Setup button. 4 Press the Administrator Password field, enter your password, and then press OK. 5 At the main Setup window, press the button for the Setup that you want to access. 6 Perform Server Setup, Network Setup 1, and Network Setup 2, in that order. This is the minimum required for initial Setup. Later, you can complete the remaining Setup menus, from a network computer. 7 Change the Administrator password to protect your Setup from unauthorized changes. For information, see page 47. Stop/Start Sample Print Allows the user to verify the quality of a long print job while it is printing. A sample sheet from the job is printed to a separate output tray while the main job is printing. Configure the type of Sample Print action in Setup. To receive a Sample Print, press Start Sample Print. To cancel the Sample Print, press Stop Sample Print. Suspend Print Suspends communication between the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. Use this command to interrupt the current Fiery PRO80 job and use the printer to make copies or print another job first. Jobs continue to process on the Fiery PRO80. After you make copies or complete maintenance tasks, choose Resume Printing to continue printing jobs from the Fiery PRO80. Resume Print Resumes communication between the printer and the Fiery PRO80 after you select Suspend Printing. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 34 About the Legacy LCD Setup interface When you perform Setup from the Legacy LCD, you select one menu after another and enter information about your Fiery PRO80 and your network and printing environment. When you perform a function from the printer touch panel that prompts you for the Administrator password, you must enter it promptly. Otherwise, the printer touch panel returns to Idle, and you must start over. Types of Setup screens There are different types of Setup options: Saving changes After you enter the settings, you must save the changes. You are usually prompted to do so. If you choose Yes, your settings overwrite previous settings. If you choose No, your previous settings are retained. If necessary, the Fiery PRO80 restarts after you exit the Setup menu. Multiple choice questions Possible choices appear as buttons on the touch panel (for example, Yes or No, or a list of settings from which to choose). The currently selected value is highlighted. Press the button for the desired option on the touch panel. Information entry options You must specify the information for your site (the printer name or IP address, for example). Use the keyboard provided on the printer touch panel to enter information. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 35 Server Setup options Server Setup lets you specify system information that pertains to the Fiery PRO80 and users. To access the menu, follow the instructions on page 25. The submenus and options appear in sequence. Default values, where applicable, are underlined. Words shown in italics indicate that a product- or site-specific value is displayed. Server Name Default server name Enter a name for the Fiery PRO80 (up to 15 characters long). This is the name by which the Fiery PRO80 appears on the network. NOTE: If you have more than one Fiery PRO80, do not assign them the same name. Date Date Confirm the correct system date in the standard format for your use. The date appears on the Job Log. NOTE: The Fiery PRO80 uses the current date and time as configured on the printer. Therefore, if the printer date and time are correct, you do not need to set them here. Time Time Confirm the correct system time. Enter the time based on the 24-hour clock in the format HH:MM (Hours:Minutes). The time appears on the Job Log. Remote Desktop Enabled, Disabled Select Enabled to enable Remote Desktop, a Microsoft application that allows remote computers to manage and control the Windows desktop features of the Fiery PRO80. For information about enabling Remote Desktop on a computer, see page 58. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 36 Network Setup 1 options When you perform Network Setup, you configure the Fiery PRO80 to receive jobs over the network systems that are used at your site, including setting network addresses and names to be used by computers, servers, and the Fiery PRO80 when they communicate with each other. Before performing Network Setup, confirm that the Fiery PRO80 is connected to an active network, because the Fiery PRO80 queries the network for zones, servers, and server-based queues. If you perform Network Setup without a connected and functioning network, default settings are used that may not meet your needs. Default settings for options, where applicable, are underlined. Ethernet Speed Auto, 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 10FD, 100FD Choose the appropriate speed of the network. Choose Auto Detect in any of these cases: • The network speed is unknown. • The network environment is mixed. • The network uses 1Gbps. TCP/IP Configuration Manual, DHCP, BOOTP Choose the method by which the Fiery PRO80 obtains its Ethernet IP address. Depending on your network and the protocol you select in the following option (DHCP or BOOTP), the IP address can change. Select Manual to assign the Fiery PRO80 a static IP address. IP Address 127.0.0.1 If you selected Manual for the TCP/IP Configuration option, enter the Fiery PRO80 IP address. This IP address, unlike an IP address set automatically, remains the same if you restart the Fiery PRO80. You must change the default to a valid address for your network. Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 This option lets you modify the subnet mask for printing with TCP/IP over Ethernet. NOTE: Confirm the subnet mask setting with your network administrator before proceeding. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 37 Default Gateway Automatic, Custom Choose whether to assign automatically the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP. If you choose Custom, enter the gateway address in the following option. Gateway Address 127.0.0.1 Set the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP on your network. TCP/IP Version 6 Enabled, Disabled Choose Enabled to allow the Fiery PRO80 to retrieve an IPv6 address from the network. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 38 Network Setup 2 options With Network Setup 2, you configure the Fiery PRO80 for WINS and Web Services. WINS Server Config WINS Disabled, Automatic, Custom Broadcasts from SMB devices cannot pass across a router without a WINS name server. Setting up the WINS name server is outside the scope of this document. To find out if a name server is available, contact your network administrator. Enabling Windows Printing enables Server Message Block (SMB), the file and printer sharing protocol built into Windows. Enabling SMB allows the Fiery PRO80 to be listed on the network so that Windows users can print to a particular print connection (Hold, Print, or Direct) on the Fiery PRO80 without any other networking software. For information about setting up a Windows computer for Windows printing, see Printing, and the documentation that accompanies Windows. Windows printing runs via TCP/IP, so you must configure TCP/ IP on the Fiery PRO80 and on all computers that use Windows printing. If you select Automatic, the Fiery PRO80 obtains the IP address for the WINS server automatically. If you choose Custom, you can enter the IP address manually in the following option. WINS IP Address 127.0.0.1 Change the default address to the correct IP address for the WINS Name Server. Obtain the correct address from your network administrator. Set Domain Name Name Enter the name of the workgroup or domain. Web Services Enabled, Disabled Select Enabled to make WebTools available to users. TCP/IP must be enabled on the Fiery PRO80 and user workstations. A Java-enabled Web browser and a valid IP address or DNS host name are required for each user computer. For information about browser and computer requirements, see Welcome. Web LCD Enabled, Disabled Select Enable to allow the new version of Setup to be available after the Fiery PRO80 reboots. Once the new version of Setup is enabled, the Legacy LCD will be disabled. To re-enable the Legacy LCD disable Enable Web Services from the new Setup version (page 30). For more information about the new version of Setup, see page 24. SETUP FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER 39 SETUP FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER After you perform initial Setup from the printer touch panel, you can change most Setup options from a network computer using Configure. To use Configure from a network computer, you must know the Fiery PRO80 Administrator password. Accessing Configure from a network computer To set up the Fiery PRO80 from a network computer, use Configure. You can access Configure in the following ways: • WebTools from a supported Internet browser • Command WorkStation TO ACCESS CONFIGURE FROM AN INTERNET BROWSER 1 Start your Internet browser and type the IP address of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Click Fiery WebTools. 3 Click the Configure tab. 4 Click Launch Configure. 5 Log on with Administrator privileges. TO ACCESS CONFIGURE FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 Start Command WorkStation. 2 Log on with Administrator privileges. 3 Choose Configure from the Server menu. Regardless of the method you use, the following dialog box appears. SETUP FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER 40 Using Configure For information about using Configure and setting options, see Configure Help. Configure Help can be accessed from WebTools Configure and from Command WorkStation. SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 41 SETUP OPTION REFERENCE This chapter describes the default settings that you can set for the following sets of options: • PS (PostScript) • PCL Although a PCL printer driver is not provided, the Fiery PRO80 can process PCL jobs. The PCL Setup options supply default settings for options that are not already defined in the job. • Productivity For more information about print options, see Printing. For setup options not listed this section, refer to Configure Help. PS and PCL Setup options To determine the current Setup defaults, print the Server Configuration page from Command WorkStation. To access PS Setup options Choose Configure > PDL > PS. To access PCL Setup options Choose Configure > PDL > PCL. Option Settings (default is underlined) Description Allow Courier Substitution Yes, No Specify whether to substitute Courier for fonts that are unavailable when you download files to the Fiery PRO80, or when you print a document for which you do not have the corresponding printer font. If this option is set to No, jobs with fonts that are unavailable on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk generate a PostScript error and do not print. This setting does not apply to PDF files; font substitution occurs automatically in PDF files. Append CR to LF Yes, No Specify whether to append a carriage return to each line feed. Color Mode CMYK, Grayscale Specify whether to print color (CMYK) or Grayscale images to the Fiery PRO80 by default. CMYK gives you full color prints. Select CMYK as the Color Mode before performing calibration on the Fiery PRO80. Grayscale converts all colors into shades of gray. SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 42 Convert Paper Sizes No, Letter/11x17->A4/A3, A4/A3->Letter/11x17 Convert paper sizes in documents automatically to the default paper sizes specified. For example, if you select Letter/ 11x17->A4/A3, a letter size document is automatically printed on A4 paper. This option works in conjunction with the Default Paper Sizes option. For example, if Convert Paper Sizes is set to Letter/ 11x17->A4/A3, and Default Paper Sizes is set to US, jobs are printed A4/A3 size. This also includes Fiery PRO80 system pages such as the Start Page, Test Page, and Job Log. Default Paper Sizes US, Metric (default is US in the United States, Metric elsewhere) Print on US paper sizes (for example, Letter, Legal, 11x17), or Metric paper sizes (for example, A4 or A3) by default. When no page size is defined within a PostScript file, jobs are printed on Letter paper if you selected US; or A4 paper if you selected Metric. Default Orientation Portrait, Landscape This PCL option determines whether the text or image will be oriented along the short edge of the paper (portrait) or along the long edge of the paper (landscape). Font Number 0-999 The font number designates the default font for the Fiery PRO80. To determine font numbers, print the internal PCL Font List. The standard fonts are listed in order. The font numbers, however, are not displayed. Font Pitch (char/in) 0.44-99.99 (default is 10.00) If the default PCL font selected in Font Number represents a fixed pitch scalable font, determine the width of scalable type. Pitch is measured by characters per inch, so 10-pitch type fits ten characters per inch. Font Size (pt) 4.0-999.75 (default is 12.00) If the default PCL font selected in Font Number represents a proportionally spaced scalable font, determine the point size (height) of the font. Font Source Internal, Soft Font Specify the PCL font source to be enabled. Form Length (lines) 5-128 (default is 60) This option sets the number of lines to be printed per page in PCL jobs. Offset Jobs On, Off Specify whether to have jobs offset after they are printed. You must have a finisher installed. If you set this option to Off, all offset functions are disabled, including those that occur between jobs. Paper Color White, Non-White Specify the default paper color. Paper Size for System Pages US, Metric (default is US in the United States, Metric elsewhere) Specify the paper size that PCL system pages print on. System pages are pages that you print from the printer touch panel, such as the PCL Font List. Option Settings (default is underlined) Description SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 43 Paper Type Plain, Coated-GL, Coated-ML, Coated-GO, Coated-MO, Fine, Color Specific Specify the paper type. Paper Weight Specify the weight of the paper. For a list of the supported paper weights, see the documentation that accompanies your printer. Print Cover Page Yes, No Print a cover page (job summary) containing the name of the user who sent the job, the document name, the server name, the time the job was printed, the number of pages printed, and the status of the job. If a PostScript error occurs and the Print to PS Error option is set to Yes, the cover page lists the PostScript error message instead of the job status. Print Master Yes, No Select Yes to print a FreeForm master when created and printed to the Fiery PRO80. The master is retained on the Fiery PRO80 after printing unless deleted later. Select No only to process and hold a FreeForm master on the Fiery PRO80. Print to PS Error Yes, No Specify whether the Fiery PRO80 should print the available portion of a print job when it encounters a PostScript error. Select Yes to print the portion of the job that was processed before the error occurred. Select No to cancel the print job entirely when a PostScript error is encountered. Leave this option at No unless you encounter printing problems. Punched Paper Punched, Not Punched Specify whether the printer punches the paper. Scale to Fit On, Off Specify whether to scale a document size to a selected paper size if the document size is different from the paper size. With the Off setting, if the document size is larger than the selected paper size, the document is cropped to the paper size when printed. Symbol Set ASCII, Roman_8, ECMA-94 L1, PC_8... Choose the PCL symbol set that best matches the needs of users printing to the Fiery PRO80. Use PDF XObjects On, Off Specify whether images in PDF files are cached to reduce the need to reprocess the same image in a file. Option Settings (default is underlined) Description SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 44 Productivity Setup options To determine the current Setup defaults, print the Configuration page from Command WorkStation. • To access Productivity Setup options Choose Configure > Server > Productivity. Option Settings (default is underlined) Description Job Batching On, Off Select this option if you want to treat multiple print jobs as a single job in the printer job list and in accounting information. CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS 45 CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS WebTools allow you to manage your Fiery PRO80 remotely from the Internet or your company’s intranet. The Fiery PRO80 has its own home page, from which you can select the WebTool that you want to use. For information about using WebTools, see Utilities. Also, for many of the WebTools, you can consult Help. Configuring the Fiery PRO80 and computers for WebTools WebTools provide access to many Fiery PRO80 functions via the Internet (or intranet), providing additional flexibility in remote management. After WebTools are enabled, you can access them from a network computer. TO ENABLE ACCESS TO WEBTOOLS, ENSURE THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE ENABLED • A valid, unique IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address for the Fiery PRO80. Print a Configuration page to acquire the Fiery PRO80 IP address. See page 65. • Web Services is enabled. – To enable from the new version of Setup, see page 30. – To enable from the Legacy LCD, see page 38. TO SET UP A COMPUTER TO ACCESS WEBTOOLS 1 Enable TCP/IP networking on the user computer. 2 Assign the computer a valid, unique IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address, if required. 3 Install an Internet browser that supports the Java language and frames. Make sure that Java is enabled. For more information about supported browsers and WebTools requirements, see Welcome. TO ACCESS WEBTOOLS 1 Start your Internet browser and type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Click Fiery WebTools. 3 Click the tab corresponding to the WebTool that you want to use. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 46 ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 This chapter provides tips on managing Fiery PRO80 printing, performance, and security. Administrator functions Administration features are included with the user software and are built into the Fiery PRO80. The following table describes where to find information about these features. For this information See Address books for E-mail Printing page 60 Administrator and Operator passwords page 47 Backing up the entire Fiery PRO80 page 57 Clearing the Fiery PRO80 page 57 Configuration page page 65 Connecting the Fiery PRO80 to the network page 21 IP Address of Fiery PRO80 page 65 Job Log Setup Configure Help Network servers, setting up to manage and share printing services Documentation for your network servers Network servers, setting up with information specific to the Fiery PRO80 page 10 Optimizing Fiery PRO80 performance page 66 Printer default settings page 41 Printing Publishing the Direct connection, Print queue, or Hold queue to users Configure Help Remote Desktop connection page 58 Saving and restoring Fiery PRO80 configuration settings page 58 Setting up printing, installing printer drivers, installing user software Printing Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the Fiery PRO80 page 67 ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 47 Setting passwords You can set or change the passwords for users of the Fiery PRO80. Anyone who is a member of the Administrators group can modify the Setup options and control the flow and order of print jobs with the job management tools. To create users, assign passwords, and add users to groups, use Configure. For more information, see Configure Help. To set the password for the user named “admin” in the Administrators group, use Configure. Keep track of the passwords that you set. Passwords from a network computer You can change the Administrator and Operator passwords from WebTools Configure or from Configure in Command WorkStation. For more information, see Configure Help. System software updates page 49 Troubleshooting Fiery PRO80 Setup page 69 USB printing page 59 Variable data printing, setting search path for common objects page 63 WebTools page 45 Windows XP system password page 47 For this information See ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 48 Changing the Windows XP system password The Fiery PRO80 is set with a Windows XP system password. To ensure network security in your environment, the administrator must change the password. TO CHANGE THE WINDOWS XP PASSWORD FOR THE FIERY PRO80 1 From the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete on the Windows keyboard. The Windows Security dialog box appears. NOTE: If you are using the Welcome screen on Windows XP, the Windows Task Manager dialog box appears. To access the Windows Security dialog box, you must disable the Welcome screen. From the Windows XP control panel, access User Accounts, select the Change the way users log on or log off option, and then clear the Use the Welcome screen option. 2 In the Windows Security dialog box, click Change Password, and then type the following. For example, to change to “Fiery.2”: User name: administrator Log on to: \\Aero Old Password: Fiery.1 New Password: Fiery.2 Confirm New Password: Fiery.2 3 Click OK. The new password, Fiery.2, is now set. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 49 Updating system and user software Using the tools System Updates and Check for Product Updates (Software Downloads Site), you can obtain updates to Fiery PRO80 System Software and User Software from a secure site on the Internet (referred to throughout this documentation as the Update Server). Before updating the Fiery PRO80 Keep in the mind the following before updating the Fiery PRO80 using System Updates or Check for Product Updates: • If you reinstall system software onto the Fiery PRO80 HDD from DVDs, all patches and updates previously downloaded and installed are deleted and must be reinstalled. You should obtain the most recent patches from the Update Server immediately after system software is reinstalled. • If the Fiery PRO80 is behind a firewall and unable to access the Internet, the site administrator can configure a proxy server at the customer’s organization to allow the Fiery PRO80 to receive updates (see page 53). • While updates are being installed, you cannot print to the Fiery PRO80. Schedule the automatic updates when no one plans to print. While updates are being installed, the Fiery PRO80 may need to reboot several times. • To view updates that have already been installed, print the Configuration page or access Check Now and click the History tab (see “Using Check Now” on page 53). Check Now is available when you access System Updates directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface. • The list that is displayed when you access Check for Product Updates (Software Downloads Site) may include: – Updates that are unavailable through System Updates and/or are not approved for all users. – Updates that may already be installed on some Fiery PRO80 print servers. To help you choose the updates to download, compare the list displayed with the Fiery PRO80 print server’s Configuration Page > Updates log. NOTE: Check Now is not available when you access System Updates from Command WorkStation or WebTools. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 50 System Updates System Updates allows you to schedule regular inquiries to an Update Server on the Internet for available Fiery PRO80 updates. The Fiery PRO80 checks automatically for updates by contacting the Update Server periodically. System Updates also allows users to obtain updated versions of Fiery PRO80 user software (utilities) and install them onto client computers that connect to the Fiery PRO80. The updated applications are first downloaded from the Update Server to a partition on the Fiery PRO80 HDD. Users access the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet and download the updated applications onto client computers and then manually install them. You can also view and download updates at any time using the Check Now feature from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface. Use Check Now to view and manually download updates that are available for installation (Patches tab) and/or view a list of updates that have already been installed (History tab). You can also launch Check Now by clicking an update notification in the task bar on the Fiery PRO80 monitor. Access System Updates in the following ways: • Directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface • From a client computer through WebTools > Configure tab > Launch Configure • From a client computer through Command WorkStation > Server menu > Configure > Server > System Update For detailed instructions, see “To schedule System Updates” on page 51. Make sure to review “Before updating the Fiery PRO80” on page 49 before scheduling System Updates. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 51 TO SCHEDULE SYSTEM UPDATES 1 Access System Update. You can access System Updates directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface or from a client computer using WebTools or Command WorkStation. If you access System Updates directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface, an additional feature, Check Now, is available (see page 53). Check Now lists the updates that are currently available (Patches tab) and the updates that have already been installed (History tab). NOTE: Check Now is not available when you access System Updates from Command WorkStation or WebTools. NOTE: While updates are being installed, you cannot print to the Fiery PRO80. Schedule the automatic updates when no one plans to print. The Fiery PRO80 may also need to reboot several times during the update process. From the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface From a client using Command WorkStation From a client using WebTools • Click Start > All programs > Fiery > System Updates. • Start Command WorkStation. • Log on with Administrator privileges. • Choose Configure from the Server menu. • Choose Server > System Update. • Launch a Web browser, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, and then press Enter. • Click the Configure tab, and click Launch Configure. • Log on with Administrator privileges. • Choose Configure > Server > System Update. • Choose System Update from the Server menu. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 52 2 Select “Check for important system updates” (or “Enable System Updates” in Command WorkStation or WebTools). 3 Specify how often the Fiery PRO80 is to contact the Update Server. This feature sets a schedule for installing, downloading and/or notifying of updates. 4 Choose a method for updating the Fiery PRO80 operating software, system software, and utility software: • Automatically download and install updates (preferred method): Automatically downloads updates to the Fiery PRO80 and installs them. Your intervention is not required. • Download updates and send notification: Automatically downloads updates to the Fiery PRO80 but does not install them; sends a notification that updates have been downloaded. After the updates are downloaded, you install the updates manually. • Send notification when updates are available: A notification displays in the Fiery PRO80 task bar when new updates are available for download from the Update Server. To manually download the updates to the Fiery PRO80, access Check Now by clicking the notification in the task bar. Not available when accessed from WebTools or Command WorkStation ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 53 5 If you use a proxy server to connect through a firewall to the Update Server, click Proxy Settings, select Enable Proxy, and type the appropriate information in the following fields: • Address: proxy server IP address • Port: port used by the proxy server • User Name: user name for accessing the proxy server • Password: password for accessing the proxy server 6 In the Proxy Settings window, click Save. 7 Click Apply. Using Check Now Check Now is available when you access System Updates directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface. Use Check Now to view updates that are available for installation (Patches tab) and updates that have already been installed (History tab). NOTE: Check Now is not available when you access System Updates from Command WorkStation or WebTools. TO VIEW AND INSTALL UPDATES USING CHECK NOW 1 At the Fiery PRO80, click Start > All Programs > Fiery > System Updates. The System Update Preferences dialog box appears. 2 Click Check Now at the bottom of the screen, and then do any of the following: • To view a description of an update, select it in the list. • To install the update, click Install. • To view updates that have already been installed, click the History tab. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 54 • To close the window without installing an update, click the X in the upper-right corner. Enabling Remote Desktop Remote Desktop is a Microsoft application that allows client computers to manage and control the Windows desktop features of the Fiery PRO80. You can enable Remote Desktop to access the Check Now feature (page 53) of System Updates on Fiery PRO80s that are not equipped with FACI. Remote Desktop must be enabled in both Fiery PRO80 Setup and on the client computer, as described in the following procedure. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 55 TO ENABLE REMOTE DESKTOP 1 Enable Remote Desktop on the Fiery PRO80 from the printer touch panel. See “Enable Remote Desktop” on page 30. Or, enable Remote Desktop on the Fiery PRO80 from a networked computer: • Launch a Web browser, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, and then press Enter. • Click Fiery WebTools. • Click the Configure tab, and click Launch Configure. • Log on with Administrator privileges. • Choose Configure > Server > General. • Select Enable Remote Desktop. • Click Apply. • Click Reboot. 2 Enable Remote Desktop on the client computer: • Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications > Remote Desktop Connection. • Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is Idle, and then type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. • Type the Administrator password, if prompted. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 56 Check for Product Updates (Software Downloads Site) Check for Product Updates (also known as the Software Downloads Site) allows you to access the Update Server to view and manually download all available updates for Fiery PRO80 System and User Software. You can access Check for Product Updates from the Configure tab in WebTools. Check for Product Updates is especially useful if your Fiery PRO80 cannot access the Internet, is behind a firewall, or is otherwise unable or not configured to seek and accept automatic updates from the Update Server (for instance, if you do not want—or the Fiery PRO80 is unable—to take advantage of the auto-download/auto-installation/auto-notification features available through System Updates). For detailed instructions, see “To install updates using Check for Product Updates” on page 56. Make sure to review “Before updating the Fiery PRO80” on page 49 before using Check for Product Updates. TO INSTALL UPDATES USING CHECK FOR PRODUCT UPDATES 1 Launch a Web browser, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, and then press Enter. 2 Click Fiery WebTools. 3 Click the Configure tab, and then click Check for Product Updates. A window appears listing available updates. NOTE: The list that is displayed when you access Check for Product Updates may include: • Updates that are unavailable through System Updates and/or are not approved for all users. • Updates that may already be installed on some Fiery PRO80 print servers. To help you choose which updates to download, compare the list displayed with the Fiery PRO80 print server’s Configuration page > Updates log. 4 For each update you want to download, click the file name under Download and then select Save to download the update file to a location on the client computer. 5 When the updates files have been downloaded, browse to the location of the update file on the client computer and handle it according to the file type, circumstances, and site conditions. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 57 Clearing the Fiery PRO80 The Clear Server command allows you to clear all queued print jobs from the Fiery PRO80 Print, Hold, and Printed queues. Jobs can also be deleted, individually or as a group, using Command WorkStation. Clear Server also clears all jobs archived on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, the index of archived jobs, and all FreeForm masters. TO CLEAR THE FIERY PRO80 FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION • In Command WorkStation, choose Clear Server from the Server menu. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Back up your original data on your own media at the same time you store and save data on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk. Never damage or reset the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, and do not turn off the system while accessing the hard disk. For instructions on how to turn on and turn off the Fiery PRO80, see page 67. If the Fiery PRO80 hard disk or system software experiences technical difficulties, data stored and saved on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk may be irretrievably lost. If problems with the hard disk occur, extended storage of the following data cannot be assured: • Third-party fonts • Print jobs • Color profiles, including profiles downloaded or edited with Spot-On • Job notes and instructions • Scanned image data • Jobs edited with Impose • Variable data documents • E-mail Service Address Book • FieryPRO80 configuration information (list of all the settings in effect for the current Setup) Backing up the entire Fiery PRO80 With the Fiery Clone Tool, you can the copy of the contents of the Fiery PRO80 hard disk to an image file, and then save the image file to a folder on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk or a USB storage device connected to the Fiery PRO80. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies the Fiery Clone Tool. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 58 Remote connection to the Fiery PRO80 You can access the Fiery PRO80 from a remote Windows computer. This type of connection allows you to use the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface as if you were using it locally. TO CONNECT TO THE FIERY PRO80 FROM A REMOTE COMPUTER 1 Enable the Remote Desktop option in Setup. For information, see page 30. 2 In WebTools Configure, make sure that port 3389 is enabled. 3 From the remote computer, choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Remote Desktop Connection. 4 Type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. 5 Type the Administrator password, if prompted. Restoring Fiery PRO80 settings You can restore the Fiery PRO80 to a group of settings that you have already saved. Saving and restoring the Fiery PRO80 configuration You can save the current configuration of the Fiery PRO80 and restore it later, if necessary. To save and restore settings, use Configure. For information, see Configure Help. The following settings are saved (if your Fiery PRO80 supports them): • Settings made in Setup (except Server Name) • Impose templates saved in the default directory for these files on the Fiery PRO80 • Address books • Virtual printer settings • Users and Groups information (logon names and passwords) • Custom spot colors ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 59 USB printing Users can save PS, EPS, TIFF, and PDF files to a USB device and print those files on the Fiery PRO80. To print files automatically when you connect the USB drive to the Fiery PRO80, save the files to specific folders or to the root level on the USB drive. For more information about USB printing, see Printing. TO SET UP A USB DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC PRINTING 1 Configure, at a minimum, the following USB printing options in Configure > Network > Port > USB: • Select Enable USB Port. • For Default Queue, choose the connection to which the Fiery PRO80 downloads files that do not specify a connection. • Set USB Media Autoprint to Print All. 2 At a computer, create folders at the top (root) level of the USB device named Print, Hold, and Direct. 3 Save the files from the computer to the USB drive. Files copied to the Print, Hold, and Direct folders are downloaded to the corresponding print connection on the Fiery PRO80 when you connect the USB device to the Fiery PRO80. Files copied to the root level of the device (and any folder under the root level that is not named for a print connection) are downloaded to the queue that you configured for USB printing. Prepare the USB device with the correct folder structure and appropriate files before the device is connected to the Fiery PRO80. Because file processing begins as soon as you connect the device to the Fiery PRO80, there is no time to do any file management tasks such as moving files to a different folder or deleting files. 4 Remove the USB device from the computer and connect it to the USB port on the Fiery PRO80. For the location of the USB port, see page 21. Make sure that the USB device is properly stopped before you disconnect it from the computer. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 60 Managing e-mail address books You can manage e-mail/Internet Fax addresses by sending e-mail messages in a particular format to the Fiery PRO80. Management features are overwriting the address book, adding new addresses, removing addresses, and retrieving current addresses on the Fiery PRO80. Users use the address books when they send attachment files to the Fiery PRO80. NOTE: E-mail messages can be sent only from an administrator account. The Fiery PRO80 supports the following address books: Admin allows members to modify the address book, get the current address book from the Fiery PRO80, cancel a job, or receive the status of a job. However, membership in this address book does not provide the same privileges as the Administrator password (page 47) does. Print includes users who have print access. Only users whose e-mail addresses are in the Print address book are authorized to submit jobs via e-mail to the Fiery PRO80. Unauthorized users receive an e-mail reply that their job was not accepted by the Fiery PRO80 for printing. User includes users who have scanning access. Fax is used for Scan to Internet FAX. This address book is used for sending scan files via Internet FAX to the Fiery PRO80. You cannot use addresses in the address book to send an e-mail to the Fiery PRO80. Corporate is an LDAP address book used for Scan to E-mail. It allows users to send files with Remote Scan to a list of addresses registered on an LDAP server. NOTE: Perform LDAP Setup before setting this address book. For more information, see Configure Help. When a print job is submitted via e-mail, the Fiery PRO80 first checks the Print address book. If the user’s e-mail address does not match any entry in the Print address book, the job does not print. Instead, the user receives an e-mail stating that the print job was not accepted. The default wildcard character “@” is stored in the Print address book. This allows any user to print to the Fiery PRO80 until the administrator adds the first entry in the Print address book. To manage address books, send an e-mail to the Fiery PRO80 with commands in the Subject and Message fields. The Fiery PRO80 responds by e-mail with information about each request, as described in the following table. To add or remove more than one address at a time, list the addresses on separate lines in the message field of the e-mail. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 61 Task Administrator subject field Administrator message field E-mail response subject field E-mail response message field To retrieve a specific address book #GetAddressBook name of address book For example: #GetAddressBook Admin Address Book name of address book For example: Address Book Admin List of addresses in the specified address book To add an address to an address book #AddAddressTo name of address book For example: #AddAddressTo Print name@domain or “display name” Added to Address Book name of address book For example: Added to Address Book Print List of addresses added to the address book The Fiery PRO80 also lists any addresses that cannot be added and includes the reason. To clear an address book #ClearAddressBook name of address book For example: #ClearAddressBook User Address Book name of address book cleared or Address Book name of address book not cleared For example: Address Book User cleared If the address book is not cleared, the reason is given. To delete an address from an address book #DeleteAddressFrom name of address book For example: #DeleteAddressFrom User name@domain or “display name” Removed from Address Book name of address book For example: Removed from Address Book User Deleted Address 1 Deleted Address 2 The Fiery PRO80 also lists any addresses that cannot be deleted and includes the reason. To receive help for e-mail services #Help RE: Help Provides troubleshooting e-mail syntax ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 62 TO RETRIEVE AN ADDRESS BOOK FROM THE FIERY PRO80 1 Start your e-mail application. 2 Open a new message window. 3 Type the e-mail address of the Fiery PRO80 in the To line. 4 Type the command and the address book name in the Subject line. For example, to retrieve the User address book, type “#GetAddressBook User.” 5 Send the message. The return message includes the addresses of the specified address book. 6 Copy the addresses to a text file or save the message for your records. TO RESTORE AN ADDRESS BOOK TO THE FIERY PRO80 1 Start your e-mail application. 2 Open a new message window. 3 Type the e-mail address of the Fiery PRO80 in the To line. 4 Type the command and the address book name in the Subject line. For example, to restore the User address book, type “#GetAddressTo User.” 5 Copy the addresses to the body of the e-mail with each address on a separate line. You can include nicknames. However, when a nickname or address is longer than one line, edit it to fit on one line. 6 Send the message. 7 In the return e-mail message, confirm that the addresses were restored correctly. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 63 VDP Search Path In Configure > PDL > VDP, use the following information to set the file search path for VDP objects. Setting common global search paths A file search path specifies where common VDP resources (for example, PostScript images and fonts) are stored, on a network computer or on the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 searches predefined paths until it finds the necessary resources. If the resource is not found, the job fails. Inform users of the paths that you specify so that their jobs can access the resources. The Fiery PRO80 searches paths for VDP resources in the following order: • Path that the user specifies in the job See “Allowing users to define a search path for a single job” on page 64. • Paths that you define in Configure for common global objects • Path that the application specifies for VPS or PPML resources when it generates the data stream For any of these paths, the Fiery PRO80 searches the folder, and then the subfolders within that folder. After the Fiery PRO80 locates the first resource, it attempts to locate the second resource in the same folder. If the second resource is not found in the same folder, the Fiery PRO80 searches according to the original order. TO SPECIFY A GLOBAL PATH FOR COMMON VDP OBJECTS 1 In Configure, choose PDL > VDP. For information about accessing Configure, see page 39. 2 Click Add. 3 In the window that appears, type the path name or click Browse to locate the path. If you type the path name, use the format of a mapped drive (for example, Z:\folder) or a UNC (for example, \\computer name\folder). 4 If the path is located on a computer that requires authentication, select Remote Server Authentication, and then enter the appropriate user name and password. 5 Click OK. 6 To add more paths, click Add and repeat these steps. 7 Click Apply. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 64 Allowing users to define a search path for a single job A user can enter a single search path when the user sends the job from a Windows printer driver, or when someone later overrides the job to include a search path. The path must be fewer than 256 characters, and in the format of a mapped drive (for example, Z:\folder) or a UNC (for example, \\computer name\folder). To use a mapped drive, it must be recognized by the Fiery PRO80. For example, if the user specifies a path on the user’s computer (for example, C:\My Documents\VDP), the Fiery PRO80 assumes this is the C:\ drive on the Fiery PRO80. In another example, if “Z:” is a network drive that users access on their network, the Fiery PRO80 does not know the location to which “Z:” refers. Therefore, you must map a drive so that the Fiery PRO80 also recognizes the location where resources are stored. The following procedure assumes that you use the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface. If you do not have the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface, but your Fiery PRO80 supports Remote Desktop, connect to the Fiery PRO80 with Remote Desktop and use the following procedure. TO MAP A DRIVE TO A LETTER RECOGNIZED BY THE FIERY PRO80 1 From a Windows Explorer window, choose Tools > Map Network Drive. One method of accessing an Explorer window is to choose Start >Documents > My Documents. 2 From the Drive menu, choose a letter that is not currently mapped. 3 In the path field, type the UNC of the network computer that contains the shared resources, or click Browse and locate the computer on the network. 4 Click Finish. 5 If you are prompted to enter a network password, type Administrator in the Connect As field, type the password in the Password field, and then click OK. 6 Inform the user to use the drive letter in the VDP search path when the user sends the job to the Fiery PRO80. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 65 Printing the Configuration page The Configuration page lists the settings in effect for the current Setup. After you perform Setup, print a Configuration page to confirm your settings. Post the current Configuration page near the Fiery PRO80 for quick reference. Users need the information on this page, such as the current printer default settings. TO PRINT THE CONFIGURATION PAGE FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION • In Command WorkStation, choose File > Print > Server Configuration. TO PRINT THE CONFIGURATION PAGE FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 1 At the printer touch panel, press the Controller button. 2 Press the Tools tab. 3 Press Configuration. Determining the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 If you must know the IP address of the Fiery PRO80, you can determine it from the Control Panel without printing a Configuration page. TO DETERMINE THE IP ADDRESS 1 When the Fiery PRO80 reaches Idle, press any button on the Control Panel. 2 In the menu that appears, press the button next to IP Address. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 66 Maintaining optimal Fiery PRO80 performance The Fiery PRO80 does not require maintenance. Beyond the obvious requirements of servicing and maintaining the printer and replenishing consumables, you can improve the overall performance of your system by doing the following: • Make the best use of your network connections. Publish only connections that will be used. The Fiery PRO80 constantly checks all published connections, even if they are inactive. Review the published connections by printing a Configuration page. Eliminate the connections that are not being used. It is easy to re-establish them when needed. • Leave less urgent jobs to times when there is less network traffic or printing. You can print recurring print jobs or jobs that are not urgent to the Hold queue. At low-traffic times, the administrator or a user of the job management tools with Operator privileges can move (or copy) all the Hold queue jobs to the Print queue for printing. • Reduce unnecessary network communication. Large numbers of users running Fiery utilities, especially with frequent updates, may have a significant effect on Fiery PRO80 performance. • Make sure that you have adequate disk space on the Fiery PRO80. Periodically review the list of jobs in the Hold queue, and the number of jobs being retained in the Printed queue. An administrator can print or delete jobs that are in the Printed queue and Hold queue. Consider printing or offloading inactive jobs. If disk space on the Fiery PRO80 is frequently low, you can disable the Printed queue and choose not to publish the Hold queue (in Printer Setup). To move or remove queued jobs, use the job management tools. When you free up disk space by removing inactive jobs, new jobs are spooled and printed more quickly. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 67 Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the Fiery PRO80 Generally, you can leave the Fiery PRO80 and the printer running all the time. This section describes how to shut down and restart the Fiery PRO80 when necessary. When you need to shut down the Fiery PRO80, fonts downloaded to the Fiery PRO80 are not deleted. Jobs in the Printing, Processing, and Held jobs lists are not deleted and are available for printing when you reboot or restart the Fiery PRO80. Restarting the Fiery PRO80 resets the system software, but does not reboot the entire system. Network access to the Fiery PRO80 is temporarily interrupted and all currently processing jobs are terminated. If you use a USB thumb drive, remove it before rebooting. Otherwise, the Fiery PRO80 does not reboot. TO SHUT DOWN THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE CONTROL PANEL 1 Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is not receiving, processing, or printing any files. If the system has just finished processing, wait at least five seconds after the system reaches Idle before beginning the shutdown procedure. 2 Press the Menu button to display the Functions menu. 3 Select Shutdown System. TO RESTART OR REBOOT THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE CONTROL PANEL 1 When the Fiery PRO80 reaches Idle, press any button on the Control Panel. 2 Press the Menu button to display the Functions menu. 3 In the menu that appears, press the button next to Restart Server. 4 In the next menu, press the button next to Restart Server or Reboot System. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 68 Ejecting a CD/DVD from the Fiery PRO80 Use of the CD/DVD drive is primarily for service technicians when they install system software. If you shut down the Fiery PRO80, the CD/DVD is ejected automatically. TO EJECT A CD/DVD 1 When the Fiery PRO80 reaches Idle, press any button on the Control Panel. 2 In the menu that appears, press the button next to Eject CD/DVD. TROUBLESHOOTING 69 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter provides troubleshooting tips. Troubleshooting the Fiery PRO80 Startup diagnostics are described in the documentation for service technicians. Contact your authorized service/support center if you see startup error messages on Command WorkStation or if the Fiery PRO80 does not reach the Idle state. Runtime error messages For error messages related to canceling jobs and printing, including the Disk Full message and alerts to load media, see Command WorkStation Help. You can turn on PostScript error reporting as a print option from Mac OS applications. Printer not found Most failures to find a printer on the network are due to conflicting or missing name or address settings for the Fiery PRO80. You must enter names in specific places. The required names are: • TCP/IP host name (also known as the DNS name), which is defined by your organization. Enter the host name as the Server Name in Fiery PRO80 Setup. • Remote printer (internal machine) name. Use one of the following: print hold direct NOTE: If you change the DNS name (TCP/IP host name) of the Fiery PRO80, you must reconfigure one of the utilities on each computer. TROUBLESHOOTING 70 For the appropriate name, see the following table. Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with utilities If users cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80, check the following: Fiery PRO80 Setup: The appropriate network protocol must be enabled, with the correct parameters (for example, for TCP/IP, the IP address), and you must publish the Print queue or Hold queue. You can check these settings quickly by printing a Configuration page. On the client computer: The appropriate network protocols must be loaded. In this location For this item TCP/IP networks See Setup Server Name option Administrator defines name page 29 Windows hosts file host name DNS name (TCP/IP host name) page 10 Windows setup for TCP/IP lpd host name DNS name (TCP/IP host name) page 13 Name of printer on lpd host machine print, hold, or direct UNIX /etc/printcap file (BSD) rp line print, hold, or direct page 14 Solaris lpadmin queuename print, hold, or direct Add New Server dialog box, when configuring a utility Server Name DNS name (TCP/IP host name) Utilities TROUBLESHOOTING 71 Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with Command WorkStation If a problem occurs while you are connecting to the Fiery PRO80, an error message is displayed. The problem can occur when: • The FieryPRO80 is initially turned on. • The FieryPRO80 restarts. • You have changed settings affecting the server address and have not reconfigured the connection to the server. If you experience this problem, try the following solutions, in this order: • A remote computer running utilities or WebTools may be interfering by obtaining status information. If possible, close the remote application, and try to connect again. • Restart the Command WorkStation software and try to connect again. • Restart the Fiery PRO80. INDEX 73 Numerics 1000BaseT 22 100BaseTX 22 10BaseT 22 A access levels, setting 15 Active Directory 13 administrator functions 46 installing the server 11 password 47 privileges 17 Allow Courier Substitution option 41 Append CR to LF option 41 C Calibration command 32 changing Administrator password 47 host name or DNS name 69 characters per inch 42 check for product updates 56 Check Now feature, system updates 50, 53 Clear Server command 57 client setup overview 11 WebTools 45 CMYK printing by default 41 Color Charts 28, 32 Color Mode option 41 Command WorkStation Configuration page 65 problems connecting to server 71 Setup from 39 Configuration page printing 28, 32, 65 troubleshooting connection problems 70 Configure (WebTool) 19 configuring a proxy server, system updates 53 connecting network cable 21 Convert Paper Sizes option 42 Courier font, substitution with 41 cover page, printing at end of job 43 D date, setting 35 Default Gateway option 37 Default Paper Sizes option 42 Direct connection described 18 required for downloading fonts 19 disk space 66 DNS (Domain Name Server) implications of changing 69 listing server name 13 Docs WebTool 19 downloading fonts, Direct connection requirement 19 Downloads (WebTool) 19 E E-mail Log 28, 32 Enable Auto IP Configuration option 29 enabling WebTools 38 error messages 43 runtime 69 Ethernet connector 22 Port Setup 29, 36 speed 29, 36 F Font Number (PCL) option 42 fonts pitch 42 printer fonts on server 28, 32 printing Font List 28 printing font list 32 size 42 source 42 substitution 41 Form Length option 42 FreeForm master 43 FTP Log 28, 32 Functions menu 27 INDEX INDEX 74 G Gateway Address option 37 Gateway Type option 30 gateway, assigning address automatically 30 H Hold queue, described 18 Home (WebTool) 19 host name, registering on network 13, 69 I improving server performance 66 installing server on network 11 Internet, accessing server with WebTools 19 IP address assigning automatically 29 assigning manually 30 for Ethernet Setup 30 static 30 IP Address option 36 J Java to support Internet browser 45 Job Batching 44 Job Log clearing jobs from 57 described 32 printing manually 28 job management tools, deleting jobs with 57 L line feed, PCL jobs 41 LPR (TCP/IP), UNIX 14 M maintaining server performance 66 N naming the server 29, 35, 69 network installation summary 11, 12 protocols supported 10 TCP/IP 12 Network Setup 36 O Offset Jobs option 42 Operator password privileges 17 Orientation option 42 P PANTONE 28, 32 Paper Color option 42 Paper Size for System Pages option 42 paper size used by default 42 Paper Type option 43 Paper Weight option 43 passwords Administrator privileges 17 Administrator, changing 47 Operator privileges 17 setting 16 PDF files, font substitution in 41 Pitch option 42 Points option 42 Port Setup, Ethernet Setup 29, 36 PostScript error 43 Print Cover Page option 43 Print Master option 43 Print Pages command 32 Print queue, described 18 Print to PostScript Error option 43 Printed queue 18 printer connection failure 69 not found 69 not in Chooser 69 printing CMYK by default 41 Configuration page 28, 32 connections 18 cover page for each job 43 Font List 28 font list 32 reprinting previously printed jobs 18 server information pages 32 Productivity Setup options 44 protocols, network 10 proxy server 53 publishing connections, overview 18 Punched Paper option 43 Q queues, clearing all 57 R Remote Desktop connecting from user computer 58 Setup option 35 INDEX 75 remote desktop, enabling for system updates 54 reprinting jobs 18 Restart command 32 Resume Printing command 27, 33 RJ-45 connector 22 S Sample Print command 33 Scale to Fit option 43 Secure Print 32 server back view showing connectors 21 maintaining and improving performance 66 naming 29, 35 Setup 22 touch panel display 24, 31 Server Name option 35 Server Setup 29 Server Setup 35 Set Domain Name option, Windows printing 38 Setup accessing 24, 31 administrative functions 46 from a network computer 39 Network Setup 36 screen types 26, 34 Server Setup 35 summary 24 Setup command 32 Shut Down command 32 SMB, see Windows printing Subnet Mask option 30, 36 Suspend Printing command 27, 33 Symbol Set option 43 System Date option 35 system software updating 49, 50, 52, 53, 54, 56 system software, updating 49 System Time option 35 system updates 50 cautions 49 check for product updates 50 Check Now feature 50, 53 enabling a proxy server 53 enabling Remote Desktop 54 scheduling 52 T TCP/IP Ethernet Setup 29 host name 69 with UNIX workstations 14 TCP/IP Version 6 option 37 terminology, general 7 Test Page, printing 32 time, setting 35 touch panel display accessing Setup 24, 31 illustrated 24, 31 troubleshooting Command WorkStation connection problems 71 connection to printer fails 69 Printer not found in the selection list of utilities 70 Printer not found on TCP/IP or IPX networks 69 twisted pair cable 22 U UNIX on TCP/IP network 14 printcap file 70 remote printer name 70 updating the system 49, 50, 52, 53, 56 USB printing 59 Use PDF XObjects option 43 Use WINS Name Server option 38 using check for product updates 56 using system updates 50 W Web Services option 38 WebTools Configure 19 Docs 19 Downloads 19 enabling 38 Home 19 Windows printing domain issues 13 setting domain or workgroup 38 Fiery® Color Server Fiery Color Reference © 2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45087207 1 September 2009 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 About this document 7 For additional information 7 OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 8 Understanding color management systems 8 How color management works 9 Using ColorWise and application color management 10 Using ColorWise color management tools 11 USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 12 Understanding workflows 12 Standard recommended workflow 14 Choosing colors 15 Understanding color models 16 Optimizing for output type 17 Maintaining color accuracy 18 MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 19 Using office applications 19 Color matching with office applications 20 Working with office applications 20 Defining colors 20 Working with imported files 21 Selecting options when printing 21 Output profiles 22 Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file 22 CONTENTS 4 MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 23 Working with PostScript applications 23 Color matching with PostScript applications 24 Using color reference pages to match color 24 Using the CMYK Color Reference 24 Using the PANTONE reference 25 Working with imported objects 25 Mixing object types (Advanced color management) 26 Using CMYK source profiles 26 Using application-defined halftones 27 Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file 27 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 28 Specifying color settings 28 Configuring Photoshop color settings 28 Saving files from Photoshop 31 Choosing a file format 31 Selecting options when printing 34 Advanced tips for using PostScript color management 36 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 38 Adobe InDesign 39 InDesign color settings 39 Importing objects 41 Selecting options when printing 42 QuarkXPress 45 Importing objects 45 Selecting options when printing 45 Optional color management from QuarkXPress 46 CONTENTS 5 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 47 Adobe Illustrator 47 Note about color models in Illustrator 47 Illustrator color settings 48 Saving files for importing into other documents 50 Specifying print options 50 Using Illustrator color management 53 CorelDRAW 53 Defining colors 53 Importing objects 54 Saving files for importing into other documents 54 Specifying print options 54 Optional color management in CorelDRAW 55 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 56 Specifying color settings 57 Selecting options when printing 58 DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 60 The properties of color 60 The physics of color 61 CIE color model 62 Hue, saturation, and brightness 62 Additive and subtractive color systems 64 Understanding color gamut 67 Printing techniques 67 Halftone and continuous tone devices 68 Using color effectively 68 General guidelines 69 Color wheel 69 Color and text 71 CONTENTS 6 Raster images and vector graphics 72 Optimizing files for processing and printing 73 Resolution of raster images 73 Scaling 74 BIBLIOGRAPHY 75 GLOSSARY 77 INDEX 89 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document provides a reference for information about optimizing color printing with the Color Server and improving color quality and performance for all Color Server models. Specific features and options may vary, depending on the Color Server model at your site. NOTE: The term “printer” is used throughout this document to denote a supported printer or copier. The term “toner” refers to toner or ink. About this document This document provides an overview of general color concepts, with a specific focus on color management for print output. It describes multiple scenarios (called workflows) during which color information can be specified. It also provides application notes that explain how to print to the Color Server from popular Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac OS applications. Color terms and concepts, such as “color space,” “spot color,” “gamut,” and “source profile” appear in bold throughout this document. If you are new to desktop color, or if any terms are unfamiliar, see the “Glossary” on page 77. For additional information This document is one in a set of documentation that includes documents for both users and system administrators. For a description of all of the available documentation, see Welcome. All other documents should be available at your site. For more information, see the following documents as directed. For additional information about the topics discussed in this document, see: • Color Printing: For detailed information about the color printing options and settings available with your Color Server, as well as the ColorWise color management system built into your Color Server. • Printing: For information about how to set the ColorWise print options. For information about performing color management tasks and using Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. For general information about printing in color, see “Desktop Color Primer” on page 60 and the sources in the “Bibliography” on page 75. OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 8 OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS To create successful color documents and presentations, you can take advantage of the features of color management software as they are implemented by the Color Server and on your desktop computer. This chapter is devoted to various elements of color management that contribute to predictable color results. Understanding color management systems A color management system (CMS) is a “translator” between the color space of the source device (for example, a monitor or scanner) and the color space of the destination device (for example, the printer). It compares the color space in which the source object is created to the color space in which the job is output, and adjusts the colors in the document to maintain consistency across different devices. A CMS typically uses a device-independent color space, such as CIELAB, as its intermediate color space. To perform its translation, a CMS needs information about the color space of the source object and the gamut of the printer. This information is provided through profiles, often created by the manufacturers of the computer monitor or printer. The end product of a CMS conversion is a printed document or object file in the gamut of a particular printer. Progress is being made toward standardization in the field of digital color management systems. Windows and Mac OS operating systems support an industry standard format developed by the International Color Consortium (ICC). This ICC format is implemented on Windows and Mac OS computers. Other software developers are also incorporating CMSs into high-end applications. The Color Server CMS, ColorWise, supports this standard profile format. You can use the EFI Color Profiler Suite (an optional software package) to create color profiles that are fully compliant with ICC standards, evaluate the profiles, edit them, and test them. EFI Color Profiler Suite includes a spectrophotometer that you can use to create profiles. OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 9 How color management works Before you can print a color document, the color data in it must be converted to the gamut of the printer. Whether performed by the Color Server or a host-based CMS, the process of converting color data for a printer is the same: the CMS interprets RGB object data according to a specified source profile and adjusts both RGB and CMYK data according to a specified output profile, also called a destination profile by some color management systems. The source profile defines the RGB color space of the object’s source: characteristics such as the white point, gamma, and type of phosphor used. The output profile defines the gamut of an output device, such as a printer. The Color Server (or host-based CMS) uses a deviceindependent color space to translate between the source color space and the color space of the output device. The Color Server allows you to specify default and override settings for the source color space information and the output profile information (see Color Printing). When you use these settings, you do not need to use the features of other color management systems. Your Color Server software includes ICC profile for use with other color management systems, although conflicts may arise when the Color Server CMS is used in conjunction with a host CMS. You can also use color management systems to adjust color data to the gamut of an output device other than the one to which you are printing. This process of simulating another output device is commonly used for proofing jobs that are printed on an offset press. For more information about the Color Server simulation feature, see Color Printing. The type of print job and the final output device, Color Server or offset press, determines the workflow that provides the best results. For information about choosing workflows, see “Using Color Management Workflows” on page 12. Input data Printed data or file Color manageme nt system Device-independent color space Source profile Output profile OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 10 Using ColorWise and application color management The Color Server CMS, ColorWise, is designed to provide casual and expert users the best color output for a variety of purposes. Several applications also provide their own CMS. This document describes how to optimize print output using ColorWise color management and application color management. The Color Server intelligently manages the printed appearance of RGB, CMYK, and spot colors. You can allow the Color Server to manage color for most color printing jobs without adjusting any settings. A desktop (host-based) CMS uses ICC profiles to convert colors from one device gamut to another (see “Desktop Color Primer” on page 60). The color data is converted when it passes from one application to another or when the job is sent to the printer; thus, the processing occurs on your computer, as opposed to the Color Server. Conventional color management systems typically address only color conversions, and they occupy your computer processor. When you use ColorWise, jobs leave your computer and are processed faster on the Color Server. The advantages to ColorWise color management versus desktop (application) color management include the following: • Relieving your computer from performing additional processing. Delaying color conversions until the color data reaches the Color Server frees your computer so that you can continue working. Color conversions on the Color Server are, in most cases, much faster than similar conversions on a host computer. • Eliminating the potential for undesirable color management-related conflicts, such as iterative color conversions and inconsistent color between applications. The Color Server applies global corrections to specific groups of RGB, CMYK, and spot colors to avoid such conflicts. • Accepting RGB files in addition to larger CMYK files from applications, which minimizes network traffic and enables jobs to print faster. ColorWise uses ICC profiles to convert colors to the device gamut or simulate other devices, such as an offset printing press. ColorWise manages color conversions for all users printing to the Color Server from Windows and Mac OS computers. It allows users to follow a simple workflow with minimal intervention using robust default settings, while giving advanced users the control and precision that they need. OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 11 Using ColorWise color management tools Your Color Server user software includes several types of color reference pages that allow you to see the range of colors that can be printed on your printer. For predictable color, use the color reference pages when defining the colors in your document. The available resources are as follows: RGB Color Reference: A Microsoft Word file and a Microsoft PowerPoint file that allow you to view the colors available in the standard palettes of office applications and see how those colors print on the Color Server (see “Color matching with office applications” on page 20). CMYK Color Reference: An 11-page, downloadable PostScript file of CMYK color patches (see “Using the CMYK Color Reference” on page 24). Process Simulation of PANTONE Solid Coated Colors: A 19-page, downloadable PostScript file of color patches showing the CMYK equivalents of PANTONE Coated colors. This file prints differently, depending on the setting of the Spot Color Matching option (see “Using the PANTONE reference” on page 25). In addition, you can print RGB, CMYK, and PANTONE color charts from the Color Server. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 12 USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS A workflow is the path a print job follows from creation to destination. The workflow of any job includes points at which decisions are made about how to define, use, and translate color. The choices made, and the point at which they are made, impact the color output produced. This chapter introduces issues with color management in specific desktop applications and discusses the interaction between those applications and ColorWise color management. Understanding workflows The term “workflow” is used to describe the path a job follows from its creation in a desktop application to final printed output. The Color Server supports a variety of workflows with different levels of complexity. There are several points at which color management can be performed on a job (see the illustration on page 13). The information provided at each step (for example, the type of color used) impacts the workflow of the job. Always consider the complexity of the workflow. Every time colors are converted, performance and color accuracy are affected. A workflow with a minimum number of steps minimizes the risk of error. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 13 Application and operating system color management: Turn off Disable any CMS provided by the application or operating system to ensure that the Color Server receives color data properly and prints it accurately. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your application. NOTE: Color management between the display device and the application cannot be disabled. Select colors based on the desired output (see “Choosing colors” on page 15). Select file format based on the desired output. EPS data is not manipulated. Other formats can be used if the file is saved with the appropriate settings. Use the ColorWise CMS as described in this document and Color Printing. Operating system color options: Disabled Disable any CMS provided by the operating system. Calibrate as described in Color Printing. Perform regular maintenance as recommended by the printer manufacturer. Use the paper stock, toner, and other materials recommended by the printer manufacturer. CMYK DOCUMENT Spot RGB SAVE AS (File Format) PRINT Set ColorWise print options Color Server Calibration Device maintenance Optimal output USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 14 Standard recommended workflow The Color Server is highly optimized for the specific printer it supports. ColorWise addresses issues unique to your printer, including halftones, individual toner response, interactions among toners, natural smoothness of blends, and the capability to render spot and custom colors. The Color Server distinguishes text and graphics from image elements, so that black channel information can be preserved while parameters used for CMYK color separations are maintained. The recommended standard color workflow uses ColorWise calibration and color management. The Color Server comes into play near the end of the color workflow. For this workflow: • Bypass any color management of printed output in the application and operating system. This ensures that the colors you select reach the Color Server and ColorWise in a usable form. Consider, however, that ColorWise fully supports color management from applications and printer drivers (see “Using ColorWise and application color management” on page 10). • Set the CMYK/Grayscale Source option in ColorWise to match the CMYK color space used in the application to select the colors. Any CMYK/Grayscale Source setting (except ColorWise Off, if available) applies calibration, so the response of the printer appears stable. Some examples of CMYK/Grayscale Source settings are SWOP or ISO Coated in the U.S., Euroscale in Europe, and DIC or Japan Color in Japan. If colors have been selected specifically for your calibrated Color Server, set CMYK/Grayscale Source to None. • Set other ColorWise print options as appropriate. For a list and descriptions of ColorWise print options that affect CMYK, RGB, spot, and other colors, see Color Printing. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 15 Choosing colors When working with color materials, whether they are presentations, illustrations, or complicated page designs, you make aesthetic decisions about the colors you use. After you set a goal, you must make the best use of the capabilities of your Color Server to realize your design in print. Your color printing system becomes an ally in this creative process to the extent that results are predictable: • If you designed a poster to print on the Color Server, you want the printed colors to match the design specification. • If you are printing presentations on the Color Server, you want to preserve the vivid colors that you see on the monitor. • If you are working with color that is to be printed on an offset press, you want the Color Server output to match other prepress proofs or PANTONE color swatch books. The colors that you define when creating a file in an application, and the color management tools within the application that you use, impact how the file is processed (workflow) and the final output that you can expect. Use color management to control color output by performing the following tasks: • Select a color model: Different types of applications use different color models. The color model you select, and whether or when data is converted from one color model to another, influences the final color output. • Optimize for output type: The type of final output influences your color and application choices. • Use color matching tools: The Color Server provides several tools to preview colors available on a device and define them within an application. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 16 Understanding color models You can define colors in several different color models, most commonly RGB, CMYK, and a spot color matching system (such as PANTONE). Depending on the application you use, you may or may not have a choice of the color model. RGB colors are used when you take output from an RGB device such as a digital camera or scanner. Another use of the RGB color model is for displaying colors on a monitor. CMYK colors are what most printers use. spot colors, such as PANTONE, are special inks manufactured to run on an offset printing press. Spot colors can be simulated using CMYK toners (also known as process colors). With the Spot Color Matching print option, you can determine how spot colors are printed at the Color Server: • Spot Color Matching On uses color tables built into the Color Server to simulate the spot color with the closest equivalent available using the CMYK toners of the copier/printer connected to the Color Server. If your Color Server supports the Spot-On application in Command WorkStation, you can customize the spot color definitions used by ColorWise. • Spot Color Matching Off instructs the Color Server to simulate the spot color using CMYK equivalents defined by the spot color manufacturer. These are the same CMYK values used by applications that include spot color libraries. This CMYK combination is then printed with the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting that you choose, such as SWOP or DIC. The color model used by your application determines the methods available for choosing colors, as well as the way color data is transmitted to the Color Server: • Office applications, such as word processing, spreadsheet, and presentation graphics applications, use the RGB color model. They typically transmit only RGB data to the Color Server. • Illustration applications use both the RGB and CMYK color models, but typically transmit only CMYK data to the Color Server. • Pixel-editing applications use both the RGB and CMYK color models. They transmit RGB or CMYK data to the Color Server. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 17 Optimizing for output type You can use the Color Server for on-demand color printing and color proofing. On-demand color printing refers to those jobs for which the Color Server is the final print device. Printing jobs to the Color Server in preparation for printing on an offset press is referred to as color proofing. Both types of Color Server print jobs can use RGB, CMYK, and spot colors. NOTE: The term “on-demand” applies to producing printed output when it is needed. You may be familiar with the term “short-run,” which usually applies to the volume of a printing task. Although these terms do not mean exactly the same thing, “on-demand” in this document applies also to short-run printing scenarios. Because you can print as many pages as you need and reprint jobs quickly, the Color Server performs equally well in either environment. The type of printing you plan for a document, on-demand color printing on the Color Server versus color proofing for eventual printing on an offset press, determines the way you define colors, as well as the print option settings you choose. • For on-demand color printing on the Color Server, use any application and define colors in RGB or CMYK. If your application supports it, you can also choose colors from the PANTONE color library. Choose the appropriate settings for print options affecting color output (for descriptions of the print options, see Color Printing). • For color proofing, use a PostScript-defined color in CMYK or choose colors from color libraries, such as the PANTONE color library. Placed objects can also be defined in RGB or CMYK. Choose the appropriate settings for print options affecting color output (see Color Printing). NOTE: The Color Server allows you to use RGB or CMYK data when printing proofs for an offset press run. However, sending data to an imagesetter usually requires CMYK data. Characteristics of on-demand jobs Characteristics of offset proofs Bright, saturated colors are often desirable. Require the printed colors to match those from another set of CMYK printing conditions. Colors are achieved using the full range of colors available, referred to as the full gamut of the printer or, more simply, device CMYK. Colors that are specified for an offset press require CMYK simulation that is optimized for proofing on the printer. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 18 Maintaining color accuracy For the colors you see on your monitor to match those on your printed output, they must go through color management, including precise calibration of your monitor and Color Server. If viewing colors on the monitor is critical, consider using a professional profiling software package and instrument, such as the EFI Color Profiler Suite, to create a monitor profile. A monitor profile enables the application to compensate for the color behavior of the monitor when displaying colors. As a result, colors previewed on the monitor more closely match the colors in your printed output. If you are not equipped or inclined to maintain accurate monitor color management, you can opt for an easier approach. Determine which is more important to you: printed colors or on-screen colors. • If printed colors are your priority, choose colors from printed samples. By using sample colors, you ensure that your printed output remains consistent, regardless of how the colors appear on different monitors. Print the palette of available colors from business applications and select colors from the printed samples. Color reference files are included on the User Software CD or DVD. (For more information, see “Color matching with office applications” on page 20 and “Color matching with PostScript applications” on page 24.) You can also print color charts from the Color Server and select colors by name or number from the printed samples. Advanced applications allow you to define colors in the easier-to-control spot and CMYK color spaces. For more information about color selection, see “Choosing colors” on page 15. • If on-screen (displayed) colors are more important, trust your eyes and your monitor. Visually select colors on your monitor, but be aware that colors are optimized only for your monitor. When the document is opened on other monitors, the colors may look different. Even though printed colors may not match those on your monitor, they still print to the Color Server with good results. MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 19 MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS The ColorWise color management system provides complete color management for jobs printed from office applications and other applications that do not generate PostScript. This chapter provides instructions for printing color documents from applications such as word processing, spreadsheet, and presentation graphics applications. Use these instructions with the Microsoft Office applications. Using office applications The Color Server must receive PostScript instructions to print a document. Many applications do not create these PostScript instructions, relying on the printer driver to create them. Included in this category are most word processing, spreadsheet, and presentation graphics applications. These applications use operating system features to render images for display or printing. The term “office applications” is used in this document to refer to these types of applications. All office applications handle color similarly, using the same RGB color model used for the color monitor. Most office applications allow you to choose colors from a palette of preselected colors. Some allow you to add new colors to the palette using a color picker. Although some applications allow you to specify color using the CMYK, HSL, and HSV color models, these applications always send RGB color data to the Color Server. (An exception to this is a CMYK EPS format file placed in a document, which is sent as CMYK data.) When working with color in office applications, consider the following: • The range of colors that can be displayed in RGB on your monitor is much larger than the range of colors that can be printed on your printer. When you print the document, out-of-gamut RGB colors are mapped to the colors your printer can produce. • Office applications send only RGB data to the Color Server. You control the rendering style of the color conversion with your selection of a rendering intent. Each rendering intent uses a different color rendering style and has a different way of mapping unprintable colors to the color gamut of your printer. For more information about color rendering intents, see Color Printing. MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 20 Color matching with office applications Your Color Server user software includes two RGB color reference pages, a Microsoft Word file and a Microsoft PowerPoint file. You can print these files using different RGB print options to see how the colors appear when printed to the Color Server. For best results, print the color reference page using the same print options you plan to use for your final document. Select the colors that you want to use from the printed version of the RGB color reference page and use those colors in your document. Working with office applications Before printing from these applications, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and the Color Server PPD (PostScript Printer Description) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. Defining colors Office applications use the RGB color model. The only way to use CMYK or PANTONE colors is to define them in Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) format files with an illustration or page layout application, and then place these files in Microsoft Office documents. Colors in EPS files are preserved until they reach the Color Server (assuming no PostScript color management information was included). Office applications display EPS files at low resolution, but the EPS objects are printed at full resolution. In general, use EPS files only when RGB colors are impractical in your specific workflow. EPS files are useful when large or complex objects must be printed at full resolution or exceed the memory allocation of some office applications. RGB Color Reference (Microsoft PowerPoint) MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 21 Working with imported files Your application may allow you to import a variety of file formats. If you encounter printing problems when using other imported file formats, such as TIFF and PICT, EPS files are recommended. NOTE: If you cannot import EPS elements, it may be necessary to perform a “custom install” of your office applications. Even when there are no user-defined color management options within office applications, color conversions occur when you import objects or page elements that were not defined in RGB. To avoid such conversions with imported files, use the EPS file format for non-RGB artwork that is to be imported into office applications. All RGB objects placed in a document are affected by the settings you choose for the RGB print options. Mixing imported object types (Advanced color management) If you place multiple RGB objects, mixed non-photographic and photographic, into an office application file, a single rendering intent may not optimize output for all the objects. In this case, you can have the photographic objects bypass the rendering intent altogether. To accomplish this, open the photographic object in CMYK mode with a pixel-editing application, such as Adobe Photoshop, save the object in an EPS format file, and then import it into the document. Selecting options when printing With regard to Color Server printing, all office applications behave in the same manner. To specify print options and color management settings, follow the instructions in Color Printing. To specify these options, you must use a PostScript Level 2 (or later) printer driver, such as an Adobe PostScript printer driver. Because office applications send RGB data to the Color Server, your choice of RGB print option settings is important. Specify the appropriate RGB print options for the desired color effect (see Color Printing). MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 22 Output profiles All color data in a job is affected by the output profile on the Color Server. This profile may be the one designed for your device and shipped with the Color Server, or it may be a custom profile created at your site (see Color Printing). If necessary, print the Test Page to see which profile is the active default on the Color Server. Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file To ensure color accuracy, take the following steps: • When saving CMYK EPS files, do not include PostScript color management information. This minimizes the risk of conflicting data and multiple color conversions. PostScript color management causes your CMYK colors to be interpreted by the Color Server as though they were supplied in the Lab color space and, as a result, processed by RGB print options, rather than your CMYK Source and CMYK Processing Method settings. • Include ICC color information in files. ColorWise does not conflict with this information, and such data is useful for identifying the specific color space used by your files. • Do not include halftone and transfer functions. • Turn off color management in the printer driver. On Windows computers, on the Color Management tab of the printer’s Properties, make sure that no color profiles are associated with the printer. On Mac OS computers, in the ColorSync settings of the printer driver, set the Color Conversion option to In Printer and the Quartz Filter option to None. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 23 MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS This chapter provides guidelines for using applications that can write their own PostScript, such as some illustration, pixel editing, and page layout applications. For information about using specific applications, see “Managing Color in Adobe Photoshop” on page 28, “Managing Color in Page Layout Applications” on page 38, or “Managing Color in Illustration Applications” on page 47. Working with PostScript applications Most applications used for illustration, pixel editing, and page layout can create the PostScript information they send to a PostScript printer or save in PostScript files. Adobe Illustrator, Photoshop, Adobe InDesign, and QuarkXPress are all PostScript applications. PostScript applications work with color in many different ways. Most allow you to choose process colors (by entering percentages for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black), as well as named colors from a spot color system, such as PANTONE. When you print composites, these applications send process-color equivalents for named spot colors to the Color Server. In some applications, you can also choose colors using the RGB, HSB, HSL, or other color models. Generally, PostScript applications send color information to the Color Server as CMYK data. An exception to this is an RGB object placed in a document, which is sent directly to the Color Server (unless you specify special color management settings in the application). In addition, some PostScript applications that allow you to define colors in RGB or other color models also send data to the Color Server in those color spaces. NOTE: If your Color Server supports the Postflight application, you can use PostFlight to analyze the color spaces used in a particular job. Color controls in PostScript applications are typically designed for printing on an offset press. Some adjustments may be required for printing to the Color Server. Displayed versions of colors you choose in these applications may not match Color Server output exactly, and named colors may not print accurately on the Color Server, since these colors typically require custom inks. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 24 Color matching with PostScript applications All PostScript applications support CMYK. Some also support RGB and other color models based on monitor display values. PostScript applications also allow you to choose named colors using one or more color libraries, such as PANTONE (see page 25). We highly recommend that you use printed color reference pages to ensure predictable color printing results with the Color Server or match your Color Server output to colors produced by other printers. Using color reference pages to match color Your Color Server user software includes several color reference pages. By choosing colors for your documents from these printed reference pages and specifying the corresponding CMYK values, you ensure that you print the same color from your device. NOTE: For best results, calibrate the Color Server before printing the reference pages. NOTE: Using the reference pages does not match monitor colors to printed colors. For this, you must use a color management system and calibrate your monitor. Using the CMYK Color Reference Use the CMYK Color Reference included with your Color Server user software to see how various cyan, magenta, yellow, and black combinations look when printed on your printer. To print the CMYK Color Reference, download the file to a recently calibrated Color Server. The printed pages display groups of color patches in graduated combinations of yellow, magenta, and cyan, and smaller patches that include 25%, 50%, and 75% black. Use these pages to pick colors and specify process color values in your application. The file is included on the User Software CD or DVD. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 25 Using the PANTONE reference Use the PANTONE reference (Process Simulation of PANTONE Solid Coated Colors) included with your Color Server user software to help ensure predictable results with colors chosen from the PANTONE color library. The information printed by this reference varies depending on the Spot Color Matching setting. • Spot Color Matching On prints patches that simulate the spot color with the closest equivalent available using the CMYK toners of the copier/printer connected to the Color Server. The CMYK values used to produce the color, as well as the PANTONE color name/number, are printed below each patch. • Spot Color Matching Off prints patches of the CMYK equivalents of PANTONE colors as defined by PANTONE. (These are the same CMYK values defined in applications that include PANTONE libraries.) The CMYK values used to produce the color, as well as the PANTONE color name/number, are printed below each patch. To print the reference, download the file to the Color Server. The file is included on the User Software CD or DVD. If the default Spot Color Matching setting on the Color Server is not the setting that you want to use for printing the PANTONE colors, download the file to the Hold queue, and then override the Spot Color Matching setting using Command WorkStation. For more information about using Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. Working with imported objects You can import objects into documents created in illustration applications (such as Illustrator) and page layout applications (such as QuarkXPress). The recommended formats for objects imported into page layout documents are EPS (also known as EPSF) and TIFF (Tag Image File Format). If you encounter a problem using a TIFF format object, use the EPS file format. Support for importing other file formats may be provided by individual applications. All RGB objects placed in a document are affected by the RGB print options. The ColorWise CMS applies the specified RGB/Lab Source setting to all RGB data, and then uses the specified rendering intent to perform a color conversion. An exception to this occurs if you assign ICC profiles to RGB objects using the application’s color management tools (see the following section). In this case, the application performs the color conversion of the object and sends CMYK data to the Color Server. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 26 Mixing object types (Advanced color management) If you place multiple RGB objects, mixed non-photographic and photographic, in a file, a single rendering intent may not optimize output for all the objects. In this case, you can have the photographic objects bypass the rendering intent altogether. To accomplish this, separate the object into CMYK data with a pixel-editing application, such as Photoshop, and perform color correction. Save the file as an EPS or TIFF format file, and then import it into the document. You can save the RGB object in TIFF format and assign it an ICC profile and rendering intent when you import it into the document, if your application supports this feature. Using CMYK source profiles You can specify a CMYK source profile and a CMYK processing method for a job (see Color Printing). The CMYK print options affect all CMYK color data sent by the page layout or illustration application, and can also affect RGB data in a page layout application if the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option is enabled. • If the document contains CMYK objects that were separated for an offset press standard, apply the corresponding CMYK source profile. For example, for objects separated for SWOP, choose SWOP as the CMYK source profile. NOTE: If you print separations to the Color Server and choose to use the Combine Separations feature in conjunction with the Full (Source GCR) or Full (Output GCR) CMYK processing methods, the result may not match that of the same page printed as composite. • If the document contains CMYK objects that were separated according to the color characteristics of a custom ICC profile (not a press standard profile), specify the corresponding profile as the CMYK source profile on the Color Server. For more information about copying CMYK source profiles to the Color Server with Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 27 Using application-defined halftones If your site has installed the Graphic Arts Package (not available for all Color Server models), you can define halftones from several PostScript applications and use them when printing. The results may vary, depending on the application. To define a halftone, use the application to adjust the Frequency and Angle values of the halftone. When you print the job, choose Application Defined for the halftone screen print option. The Frequency and Angle settings in the Application Defined halftone are used regardless of whether the setting for Combine Separations is set to On or Off. For special instructions on printing separations with Photoshop, see “Selecting options when printing” on page 34. NOTE: In general, using halftones is not recommended, because the printed output will have visible dots of toner, rather than smooth blends. Use halftones only when necessary to achieve a specific style of printed output. Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file To ensure color accuracy, take the following steps: • When saving CMYK EPS files, do not include PostScript color management information. This minimizes the risk of conflicting data and multiple color conversions. PostScript color management causes your CMYK colors to be interpreted by the Color Server as though they were supplied in the Lab color space and, as a result, processed by RGB print options, rather than your CMYK Source and CMYK Processing Method settings. • Include ICC color information in files. ColorWise does not conflict with this information, and such data is useful for identifying the specific color space used by your files. • Do not include halftone and transfer functions. • Turn off color management in the printer driver. On Windows computers, on the Color Management tab of the printer’s Properties, make sure that no color profiles are associated with the printer. On Mac OS computers, in the ColorSync settings of the printer driver, set the Color Conversion option to In Printer and the Quartz Filter option to None. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 28 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP This chapter covers features of Adobe Photoshop CS3 for Windows and Mac OS. The illustrations show the Windows user interface, but the information and instructions apply equally to the Mac OS version of Photoshop, unless otherwise specified. Before using Photoshop, install the RGB source profile and CMYK source profile or output profile that you will use when printing to the Color Server. For more information about transferring profiles to or from the Color Server, see Command WorkStation Help. Before printing from Photoshop, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and Color Server PPD (PostScript Printer Description) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. Specifying color settings The following sections outline the recommended color settings for Photoshop in a Color Server workflow. These color settings include: Working Spaces: Default color spaces used when working with RGB, CMYK, grayscale, and spot colors. ICC color profiles describe the gamut and color characteristics of these working spaces. Color Management Policies: Instructions that tell Photoshop what to do when it encounters color data from a color space other than the specified working space. Configuring Photoshop color settings Photoshop uses a sophisticated CMS that handles document colors for a variety of colormanaged workflows. By customizing color settings, you specify the amount of color management that you want to use while working in Photoshop. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 29 TO SPECIFY COLOR SETTINGS FOR PHOTOSHOP 1 Choose Color Settings from the Edit menu. The Color Settings dialog box appears. NOTE: If More Options appears (rather than Fewer Options), click More Options. 2 Choose the desired working space profile for each color mode in the Working Spaces area. A working space specifies the color profile for documents that have no color profile associations or documents that are newly created. It also defines the color space of a document converted to RGB, CMYK, or Grayscale color modes, and the spot colors in a document. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 30 Choose an appropriate ICC profile to embed when saving a file for each color space. Use the following guidelines for specifying working spaces: • For RGB, choose the profile for the default RGB color space used by the Color Server, for example, Fiery RGB or EFIRGB. New RGB documents you create in Photoshop will use this working space. • For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP, DIC, or Japan Color) if you are a prepress user. If you are a user who prints final output, choose an output profile that describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a devicespecific output profile, you must copy the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Command WorkStation Help). New CMYK documents you create in Photoshop will use the specified working space. • For guidelines on specifying the Gray working space, see the documentation that accompanies Photoshop. 3 In the Color Management Policies area, choose Preserve Embedded Profiles from the RGB, CMYK, and Gray menus. 4 Select the following options: Profile Mismatches: Ask When Opening, Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles: Ask When Opening These options allow you to override the color management policies when opening documents or importing color data. We recommend that you use these settings so that you are notified before any application color management is applied. 5 In the Conversion Options area, choose settings for converting between color spaces. Choose Adobe (ACE) from the Engine menu to use the built-in color management engine for Photoshop. Choose a rendering intent from the Intent menu that optimizes the color quality of the conversion. For information about choosing the rendering intent, see the documentation that accompanies Photoshop. Select the Use Black Point Compensation and Use Dither (8-bit/channel images) options to optimize the quality of color conversions. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 31 6 Clear the Desaturate Monitor Colors By and Blend RGB Colors Using Gamma options in the Advanced Controls area. Clearing these options helps to ensure a match between your monitor display and the printed output. 7 Click Save to save the current group of color settings. The Save dialog box appears. 8 Name the settings file, accept the default saved location, and then click Save. Switch to your saved settings at any time by choosing the group name from the Settings menu at the top of the Color Settings dialog box. NOTE: You can apply the saved color settings in other Adobe Creative Suite applications. You can also apply the saved color settings to all Adobe Creative Suite applications at once using Adobe Bridge. 9 Click OK to apply the settings and close the Color Settings dialog box. Saving files from Photoshop Before saving a file from Photoshop, perform any necessary rotating, cropping, and resizing. This speeds processing when printing from the application in which the object is placed. When saving a document, you have the option to embed a color profile in the document. If you will send the document to the Color Server, we recommend that you disable this option. Choosing a file format We recommend that you use EPS or TIFF file formats to save RGB objects that will be imported into other documents and printed to the Color Server. You can import EPS and TIFF files into virtually all page layout applications. NOTE: Although TIFF files generally display better when imported into other applications, their color and resolution characteristics may be altered by the application into which they are imported. EPS files are not modified by the applications into which they are imported. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 32 TO SAVE A DOCUMENT FROM PHOTOSHOP 1 Choose Save As from the File menu. The Save As dialog box appears. 2 Specify settings in the Save As dialog box. • Browse to a location for the document. • Specify a file name and format. • Clear the ICC Profile option (Windows) or Embed Color Profile option (Mac OS). MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 33 3 Click Save. If you chose Photoshop EPS as the format, the EPS Options dialog box appears. 4 Specify EPS options, and then click OK. • Choose a TIFF preview option. A TIFF preview is compatible with Windows and Mac OS computers. • Do not select the PostScript Color Management option. For more information about PostScript color management, see the following section. • Do not select Include Transfer Function or Include Halftone Screen. NOTE: If you choose JPEG encoding, save a backup of the original object with Binary encoding until you see the printed results of the JPEG file. Occasionally, the compression used for JPEG encoding produces unwanted artifacts. If you see unexpected results in the printed output of a JPEG file, revert to Binary encoding. If you experience problems printing the document in which you placed the object, substitute an ASCII version of the same object and reprint the document. Binary encoding is much more compact than ASCII encoding, but occasionally causes printing problems with some system configurations. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 34 Selecting options when printing You can print RGB or CMYK objects from Photoshop. • When you print an RGB object, you choose whether the conversion to CMYK is performed by the Color Server (using ColorWise RGB print options), PostScript (using the PostScript Color Management option), or Photoshop built-in color management. • When you print a CMYK object, you can print composites or color separations. NOTE: Make sure that the Color Server Combine Separations print option is set to Off. To print separations, use the Separation option in the Photoshop pane of the print dialog box. For instructions, see the documentation that accompanies Photoshop. TO PRINT OBJECTS FROM PHOTOSHOP 1 Choose Print (or Print with Preview in Photoshop CS2) from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Choose Output. 1 Choose Output 2 Choose Encoding method 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 35 3 Choose an Encoding method. NOTE: If you choose JPEG encoding, save a backup of the original object with Binary encoding until you see the printed results of the JPEG file. Occasionally, the compression used for JPEG encoding produces unwanted artifacts. If you see unexpected results in the printed output of a JPEG file, revert to Binary encoding. 4 Choose Color Management. 5 Choose No Color Management from the Color Handling menu to specify the color space for printing the object. Photoshop does not convert object data to another color space before sending it to the Color Server. 6 Click Print. The operating system Print dialog box appears. 7 Windows: Click Preferences, and then click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears. 8 Select the desired print options. For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. 9 Windows: Click OK. 10 Click Print. 1 Choose Color Management 2 Choose Color Handling 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 36 Advanced tips for using PostScript color management Use the following information to implement alternative, more complex, color workflows with Photoshop. Saving EPS documents with PostScript color management If you select the PostScript Color Management option (in the EPS Options dialog box) when you save a CMYK or RGB EPS file, Photoshop embeds PostScript color information, which is independent of ICC profiles, in the resulting document. This information is intended for PostScript devices like the Color Server. Printing RGB EPS files saved with PostScript color management When you print an RGB EPS file that contains an embedded profile to the Color Server, you can use the working space information from the embedded RGB profile as an RGB source definition for Color Server rendering intents. To use this source color space information from the embedded profile with Color Server rendering intents, choose None as the ColorWise RGB/Lab Source when you print. This applies when you print directly from Photoshop or when the same RGB EPS file is output from another application. To override the embedded profile in an EPS file using an RGB source profile on the Color Server, choose anything except None as the Color Server RGB source profile. Printing RGB objects with Photoshop PostScript color management If you select an RGB color space and decide to use PostScript color management, Photoshop sends RGB data to the Color Server along with the PostScript color information defining this RGB color space. When you select the PostScript Color Management option, a rendering intent is used to perform color conversions to CMYK. NOTE: The included RGB source color space information is overridden by the ColorWise RGB/Lab Source setting, unless it is set to None. The ColorWise Rendering Intent option specified takes effect if the ColorWise RGB/Lab Source option is set to None. For fastest print times, choose JPEG encoding, but inspect printed output carefully for unwanted artifacts that may appear as a result of JPEG compression. If you see unexpected results in the printed output, reprint the job using Binary or ASCII encoding. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 37 Printing CMYK EPS files saved with PostScript color management If you select the Photoshop PostScript Color Management option when you save a CMYK EPS object, Photoshop embeds PostScript color information that defines the CMYK source color space of the object. When you print a CMYK EPS file that contains PostScript color information to the Color Server, RGB print options are used instead of ColorWise CMYK source profile and processing method options. Choose the appropriate setting for the Rendering Intent option. Printing CMYK objects with Photoshop PostScript color management If you select a CMYK color space and decide to use PostScript color management, Photoshop sends CMYK data to the Color Server along with the PostScript color information defining this CMYK color space. When you select the PostScript Color Management option, a rendering intent is used to perform color conversions to the CMYK color space of the Color Server. The destination color space for the rendering intents is determined by the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source print option. If the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option is enabled, the CMYK object is printed according to all specified CMYK/Grayscale Source and CMYK Processing Method settings. If the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option is not enabled, the CMYK object is converted to the CMYK color space of the selected output profile. Setting the Color Server print option Spot Color Matching to On has an effect only if you use the Photoshop Multi-Channel feature to define spot channels, and then save the object in EPS format and open it in another application. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies Photoshop. Photoshop converts spot colors to CMYK values when you work in CMYK mode. • If the object was separated for an offset press standard, apply the corresponding CMYK/ Grayscale Source setting. For example, if the object is separated for SWOP, choose SWOP as the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. • If Photoshop is configured for a custom separation using an ICC profile, choose the corresponding profile for the ColorWise CMYK/Grayscale Source option. The previous custom CMYK setting requires that the same profile used for separation in Photoshop also reside on the Color Server. For more information about downloading CMYK Source profiles to the Color Server with Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 38 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS This chapter provides instructions for printing color documents from Adobe InDesign CS3 and QuarkXPress 7 for Windows and Mac OS. The illustrations show the Windows user interface, but the information and instructions apply equally to the Mac OS version of each application, unless otherwise specified. Before using these applications, install the RGB source profile and the CMYK source profile or output profile that you will use when printing to the Color Server. For more information about transferring profiles to or from the Color Server, see Command WorkStation Help. Before printing from these applications, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and Color Server PPD (PostScript Printer Description) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 39 Adobe InDesign The following sections outline the recommended settings for using Adobe InDesign CS3 with the Color Server. InDesign color settings When using ColorWise color management, turn off the InDesign color management features. TO DISABLE INDESIGN COLOR MANAGEMENT 1 Choose Color Settings from the Edit menu. The Color Settings dialog box appears. 2 Select Advanced Mode. In Advanced Mode, a more extensive list of options is displayed. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 40 3 Choose the desired working space profile for each mode in the Working Spaces area. Use the following guidelines for specifying working spaces: • For RGB, choose the profile for the default RGB color space used by the Color Server, for example, Fiery RGB or EFIRGB. • For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP, DIC, or Japan Color) if you are a prepress user. If you are a user who prints final output, choose an output profile that describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a devicespecific output profile, you must copy the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Command WorkStation Help). 4 In the Color Management Policies area, choose Preserve Embedded Profiles from the RGB and CMYK menus. 5 Select the following options: Profile Mismatches: Ask When Opening, Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles: Ask When Opening These options allow you to override the color management policies when opening documents or importing color data. We recommend that you use these settings so that you are notified before any application color management is applied. 6 In the Conversion Options area, choose settings for converting between color spaces. Choose Adobe (ACE) from the Engine menu to use the built-in color management engine for InDesign. Choose a rendering intent from the Intent menu that will optimize the color quality of the conversion. For information about choosing the rendering intent, see the documentation that accompanies InDesign. Select the Use Black Point Compensation option to optimize the quality of color conversions. 7 Click Save to save the current group of color settings. The Save dialog box appears. 8 Name the settings file, accept the default saved location, and click Save. Switch to your saved settings at any time by choosing the group name from the Settings menu at the top of the Color Settings dialog box. NOTE: You can apply the saved color settings in other Adobe Creative Suite applications. You can also apply the saved color settings to all Adobe Creative Suite applications at once using Adobe Bridge. 9 Click OK to apply the settings and close the Color settings dialog box. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 41 Importing objects All RGB objects placed in a document, except for RGB TIFF objects, are affected by your RGB print settings. For best results with placed objects, follow the instructions in “Working with imported objects” on page 25. Disable InDesign color management when placing objects in a document. TO DISABLE INDESIGN COLOR MANAGEMENT WHEN IMPORTING OBJECTS 1 Choose Place from the File menu. The Place dialog box appears. 2 Select the Show Import Options option. 3 Select the file that you want to import and click Open. 4 Click the Color tab. 5 Choose Use Document Default from the Profile menu. 6 Choose Use Document Image Intent from the Rendering Intent menu. 7 Click OK. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 42 Selecting options when printing Use the standard Color Server printer driver interface to select print options from InDesign. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FROM INDESIGN 1 Choose Print from the File menu. 2 Choose the Color Server device name from the Printer menu. 3 Select Output. Output options appear. 4 Choose Composite Leave Unchanged from the Color menu. 1 Choose the device name 2 Select Output 3 Choose Color setting 1 2 3 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 43 5 Select Graphics. Graphics options appear. 6 Choose Level 3 from the PostScript menu. If you encounter problems, you can also use Level 2. 7 Select Color Management. Color management options appear. 1 Select Graphics 2 Choose PostScript setting 1 2 1 Select Color Management 2 Choose Color Handling setting 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 44 8 Confirm that Color Handling is set to No Color Management. 9 Click Setup (Windows) or Printer (Mac OS) at the bottom of the dialog box. The operating system Print dialog box appears. 10 Windows: Click Preferences, and then click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears. 11 Select the desired print options. For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. 12 Windows: Click OK. 13 Click Print, and then click Print again. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 45 QuarkXPress Importing objects Only RGB objects saved in EPS format are affected by RGB print options. For best results with placed objects, follow the instructions in “Working with imported objects” on page 25. Selecting options when printing The following procedure provides instructions on printing files to the Color Server. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS IN QUARKXPRESS 1 Choose Print from the File menu. 2 Choose the Color Server device from the Printer menu. 3 Choose the Color Server PPD from the PPD menu. 1 Choose the Color Server 2 Choose PPD for the Color Server 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 46 4 Select Color. Color management options appear. 5 Choose Composite from the Mode menu. 6 Choose As Is from the Setup menu. Use this setting if you want the color managed by the Color Server. This means that each color in the document should be described in the space from which the color was created. 7 Click Properties. 8 Click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears. The standard printer driver interface for the Color Server appears. 9 If the document contains spot colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color Matching setting. 10 Select the desired print options, and then click OK. For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. 11 Click Print. Optional color management from QuarkXPress If you have color management requirements that are not offered by ColorWise, such as managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the QuarkXPress color management features. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies QuarkXPress. 1 Select Color 2 Choose Mode setting 3 Choose Setup setting 1 2 3 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 47 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS This chapter provides instructions for using Illustrator for Windows and Mac OS and CorelDRAW for Windows. The illustrations show the Windows user interface, but the information and instructions apply equally to the Mac OS version of Illustrator, unless otherwise specified. You can print directly from an illustration application or use it to create and save files that will be imported into a page layout document. To print from an illustration application, use the printer driver and print settings recommended in Color Printing. As a general rule, use the EPS file format when saving files with an illustration application. When an EPS file is imported into another application, the color information in the imported object is not changed by the application. Before using these applications, install the RGB source profile and CMYK source profile or output profile that you will use when printing to the Color Server. For more information about transferring profiles to or from the Color Server, see Command WorkStation Help. Before printing from these applications, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and Color Server PPD (PostScript Printer Description) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. NOTE: This document provides instructions for printing composites only. For information about printing color separations, see the documentation that accompanies the application. Adobe Illustrator The following sections provide guidelines for working with Adobe Illustrator CS3. Note about color models in Illustrator In Illustrator, you can set the Document Color Mode to RGB color or CMYK color. All elements in a file are created in the selected color model. When you print the file, the data is sent to the Color Server in the color model that you specified. MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 48 Illustrator color settings Illustrator uses a sophisticated color management system that can handle both RGB and CMYK colors for a variety of color-managed workflows. By customizing color settings, you specify the amount of color management that you want to use while working in Illustrator. Illustrator color settings include the following: Working spaces: Default color spaces to use when working with RGB and CMYK documents. ICC color profiles describe the gamut and color characteristics of these working spaces. Color management policies: Instructions that tell Illustrator what to do when it encounters color data from a color space other than the specified working space. The following procedure outlines the recommended color settings for Illustrator in a Color Server workflow. TO SPECIFY COLOR SETTINGS 1 Choose Color Settings from the Edit menu. The Color Settings dialog box appears. 2 Select Advanced Mode. In Advanced Mode, a more extensive list of options is displayed. MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 49 3 Choose the appropriate working space profile for each mode in the Working Spaces area. • For RGB, choose the profile for the default RGB color space used by the Color Server, for example, Fiery RGB or EFIRGB. New RGB documents you create in Illustrator will use this working space. • For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP, DIC, or Japan Color) if you are a prepress user. If you are a user who prints final output, choose an output profile that describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a devicespecific output profile, you must copy the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Command WorkStation Help). New CMYK documents you create in Illustrator will use the specified working space. 4 In the Color Management Policies area, choose Preserve Embedded Profiles from the RGB and CMYK menus. 5 Select the following options: Profile Mismatches: Ask When Opening, Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles: Ask When Opening These options allow you to override the color management policies when opening documents or importing color data. We recommend that you use these settings so that you are notified before any application color management is applied. 6 In the Conversion Options area, choose settings for converting between color spaces. Choose Adobe (ACE) from the Engine menu to use the built-in color management engine for Illustrator. Choose a rendering intent from the Intent menu that optimizes the color quality of the conversion. For information about choosing the rendering intent, see the documentation that accompanies Illustrator. Select the Use Black Point Compensation option to optimize the quality of color conversions. 7 Click Save to save the current group of color settings. The Save dialog box appears. 8 Name the settings file, accept the default saved location, and then click Save. Switch to your saved settings at any time by choosing the group name from the Settings menu at the top of the Color Settings dialog box. NOTE: You can apply the saved color settings in other Adobe Creative Suite applications. You can also apply the saved color settings to all Adobe Creative Suite applications at once using Adobe Bridge. 9 Click OK to apply the settings and close the Color settings dialog box. MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 50 Saving files for importing into other documents When saving files in Illustrator for importing into other types of documents, use the EPS file format. Illustrator can save color information in both RGB and CMYK. The ColorWise RGB print options affect color output of RGB artwork saved in Illustrator EPS and imported into other kinds of documents (even when both RGB and CMYK artwork exist in the same file). In the case of Illustrator files imported into Photoshop, however, vector data from the Illustrator file is rasterized into bitmap (or raster) format in Photoshop, and the final color space of the bitmap data is determined by the color mode that you set in Photoshop. Specifying print options The following procedure explains how to set print options when printing a document from Illustrator to the Color Server. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS IN ILLUSTRATOR 1 Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Choose the Color Server device from the Printer menu. 3 Select Color Management. Color management options appear. 4 Choose Let Illustrator determine colors from the Color Handling menu. 1 Choose the device name 2 Select Color Management 3 Choose Color Handling setting 4 Choose Printer Profile 1 2 3 4 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 51 5 Make sure that the Printer Profile setting matches the displayed Document Profile setting. 6 Select Output. Output options appear. 7 Choose Composite from the Mode menu. 1 Select Output 2 Choose Mode setting 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 52 8 Select Graphics. Graphics options appear. 9 Choose Language Level 3 from the PostScript menu. If you encounter problems, you can also use Level 2. 10 Click Setup (Windows) or Printer (Mac OS) at the bottom of the dialog box. The operating system Print dialog box appears. 11 Windows: Click Preferences, and then click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears. 12 If necessary, click ColorWise and select RGB print settings. Specify these settings only if your CMYK document contains placed RGB objects. In all other cases, colors remain unaffected by the settings. 13 If the document contains spot colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color Matching setting. 14 Select the desired print options. For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. 15 Windows: Click OK. 16 Click Print, and then click Print again. 1 Select Graphics 2 Choose PostScript setting 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 53 Using Illustrator color management If you have color management requirements that are not offered by ColorWise, such as managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the Illustrator color management features. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies Illustrator. CorelDRAW The following sections describe the recommended color settings for CorelDRAW X3 for Windows. Defining colors Any colors defined in CorelDRAW X3 are sent to the device in CMYK, even those colors defined using other color models. For best results, use the color definition methods described in “Color matching with PostScript applications” on page 24. You can control the conversion of RGB colors defined in CorelDRAW by specifying settings in the Color Management dialog box. To display the Color Management dialog box, chooseColor Management from the Tools menu in the CorelDRAW main window. TO DISABLE COLOR MANAGEMENT IN CORELDRAW 1 Choose Color Management from the Tools menu. 2 Choose Color Management Off from the Settings list and click OK. 1 Color Management Off 1 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 54 Importing objects All RGB objects placed in a document are affected by the RGB print settings. For best results with placed objects, follow the instructions in “Working with imported objects” on page 25. Saving files for importing into other documents When saving files in CorelDRAW for importing into other types of documents, use the EPS file format. CorelDRAW saves all color information in CMYK, so RGB print options have no effect on color output of artwork saved with CorelDRAW and imported into other kinds of documents. In the case of CorelDRAW files imported into Photoshop, however, vector data from the CorelDRAW file is rasterized into bitmaps in Photoshop, and the final color space of the bitmap data is determined by the color mode that you set in Photoshop. Specifying print options This section explains how to set print options when printing from CorelDRAW to the Color Server. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS IN CORELDRAW 1 Choose Print from the File menu. 2 On the General tab, select the correct print device from the Name list. 1 Print device name appears here 2 Printer driver/PPD name appears here 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 55 3 On the Misc tab, clear the Apply ICC profile option. If this option is selected, CorelDRAW color management settings are used to convert RGB colors and objects to CMYK. 4 On the General tab, click Properties. The Properties window appears. 5 Click the ColorWise icon, and then click Expert Settings to specify ColorWise print options. 6 If a document contains placed RGB objects, choose RGB print settings for your device. With the exception of placed RGB objects, these settings have no effect on colors printed with CorelDRAW. 7 If the document contains spot colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color Matching setting. 8 Click OK, and then click Print to print the document. Optional color management in CorelDRAW If you have color management requirements that are not offered by ColorWise, such as managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the CorelDRAW color management features. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies CorelDRAW. 1 Clear this option to use ColorWise color management 1 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 56 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT This chapter covers features of Adobe Acrobat 7.0 Professional for Windows and Mac OS. The illustrations show the Windows user interface, but the information and instructions apply equally to the Mac OS version of Acrobat, unless otherwise specified. Before using Acrobat, install the RGB source profile and CMYK source profile or output profile that you will use when printing to the Color Server. For more information about transferring profiles to or from the Color Server, see Command WorkStation Help. Before printing from Acrobat, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and the Color Server PostScript printer description file (PPD) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 57 Specifying color settings When using ColorWise color management, turn off the Acrobat color management features. TO SPECIFY COLOR SETTINGS FOR ACROBAT 1 Choose Preferences from the Edit menu (Windows) or Acrobat menu (Mac OS). NOTE: If Enfocus Pitstop is installed, choose Preferences > General from the Edit menu. 2 Select Color Management. Color management preferences appear. 3 Choose the desired working space profile for each color mode in the Working Spaces area. • For RGB, choose the profile for the default RGB color space used by the Color Server, for example, Fiery RGB or EFIRGB. • For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP, DIC, or Japan Color) if you are a prepress user. If you are a user who prints final output, choose an output profile that describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a devicespecific output profile, you must copy the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Command WorkStation Help). • For guidelines on specifying the Grayscale working space, see the documentation that accompanies Acrobat. 4 Clear the Output Intent overrides working spaces option. 5 Click OK. 1 Select Color Management 2 Choose profiles 3 Clear Output Intent overrides working spaces 1 2 3 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 58 Selecting options when printing You can use the standard Color Server printer driver interface to select print options from Acrobat. TO PRINT A PDF DOCUMENT FROM ACROBAT 1 Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Choose the Color Server device from the Name menu (Windows) or Printer menu (Mac OS). 3 Windows: Clear the Print color as black option. 4 Click Advanced. 1 Select Color Server 2 Clear Print color as black 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 59 5 Select Output. 6 Choose Same as Source (No Color Management) from the Color Profile list. Acrobat does not convert object data to another color space before sending it to the Color Server. 7 Click OK, and then click OK again (Windows) or click Print (Mac OS). 1 Select Output 2 Choose Color Profile 1 2 DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 60 DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER This chapter covers concepts that are basic to printing in color, including: • Properties of color • Printing techniques • Effective use of color • Raster images and vector graphics • File optimization for processing and printing If you are already familiar with color theory and digital color printing, proceed to “Optimizing files for processing and printing” on page 73 for information about optimizing files for printing. The properties of color This section introduces concepts that are basic to color theory. You will encounter some of these concepts (such as hue, saturation, and brightness) when you work with color in applications; others provide useful background information. Color is a complex topic, so consider this a starting point for experimentation and further research. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 61 The physics of color The human eye can see electromagnetic radiation at wavelengths between 400 nanometers (purplish blue) and 700 nanometers (red). This range is called the visible spectrum of light. We see pure spectral light as intensely saturated or pure colors. Sunlight at midday, which we perceive as white or neutral light, is composed of light from across the visible spectrum in more or less equal proportions. Shining sunlight through a prism separates it into its spectral components, resulting in the familiar rainbow of colors illustrated in the following figure. Like the sun, most light sources we encounter in our daily environment emit a mixture of light wavelengths, although the particular distribution of wavelengths can vary considerably. Light from a tungsten light bulb, for example, contains much less blue light than sunlight. Tungsten light appears white to the human eye, which, up to a point, can adjust to the different light sources. However, color objects appear different under tungsten light than they do in sunlight because of the different spectral makeup of the two light sources. The mixture of light wavelengths emitted by a light source is reflected selectively by different objects. Different mixtures of reflected light appear as different colors. Some of these mixtures appear as relatively saturated colors, but most appear as grays or impure hues of a color. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 62 CIE color model In the 1930s, the Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage (CIE) defined a standard color space, a way of defining colors in mathematical terms, to help in the communication of color information. This color space is based on research on the nature of color perception. The following CIE chromaticity diagram is a two-dimensional model of color vision. The arc around the top of the horseshoe encompasses the pure, or spectral, colors from blue-violet to red. Although the CIE chromaticity diagram is not perceptually uniform, some areas of the diagram seem to compress color differences relative to others, it is a good tool for illustrating some interesting aspects of color vision. By mixing any two spectral colors in different proportions, we can create all the colors found on the straight line drawn between them in the diagram. It is possible to create the same gray by mixing blue-green and red light or by mixing yellow-green and blue-violet light. This is possible because of a phenomenon peculiar to color vision called metamerism. The eye does not distinguish individual wavelengths of light. Therefore, different combinations of spectral light can produce the same perceived color. Purple colors, which do not exist in the spectrum of pure light, are found at the bottom of the diagram. Purples are mixtures of red and blue light—the opposite ends of the spectrum. Hue, saturation, and brightness A color can be described in terms of three varying characteristics, called the HSB color model: • Hue: Tint (the qualitative aspect of a color—red, green, or orange) • Saturation: The purity of the color • Brightness: Relative position between white and black DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 63 While the CIE chromaticity diagram illustrated earlier conveys hue and saturation, a three-dimensional color model is required to add the brightness component, as illustrated in the following figure. Many computer applications include dialog boxes in which you choose colors by manipulating hue, saturation, and brightness. For example, some applications use a color picker that can be reconfigured according to your preference (as illustrated in the following figure). Brightness Saturation Hue DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 64 Additive and subtractive color systems Color devices used in desktop publishing and printing simulate the range of visible colors using a set of primary colors that are combined to create other colors. There are two methods for creating a range of colors from a set of primary colors. Computer monitors and scanners are based on the additive color model. Printing technologies, including the Color Server and offset presses, are based on the subtractive color model. Additive (RGB) color Color devices that use the additive color model create a range of colors by combining varying amounts of red, green, and blue light. These colors are called the additive primaries (illustrated in the following figure). White is created by adding the maximum amount of red, green, and blue light available. Black occurs wherever all three colors are absent. Grays are created by adding equal amounts of all three color together. Combining varying amounts of any two of the additive primaries creates a third, saturated hue. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 65 A familiar device that is based on this color model is the computer monitor, illustrated in the following figure. Monitors have red, green, and blue phosphors that emit varying amounts of light to display a given color. Scanners create digital representations of colors by measuring their red, green, and blue components through colored filters. Subtractive (CMY and CMYK) color The subtractive color model is the basis for color printing, color photographic prints, and transparencies. While the additive color model simulates the visible spectrum of color by adding light of three primary hues, the subtractive color model starts with a “white” or neutral light source containing light of many wavelengths. Inks, toners, or other colorants are used to selectively absorb (subtract) certain wavelengths of light that otherwise would be reflected or transmitted by the media in use. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 66 The subtractive primaries are cyan, magenta, and yellow; they absorb red, green, and blue light, respectively (as illustrated in the following figure). Combining any two subtractive primaries creates a new color that is relatively pure or saturated. For example, you can make red by combining magenta and yellow, which absorb green and blue light, respectively. White occurs when no colorant is applied. In theory, combining all three subtractive primaries yields black, but due to deficiencies of cyan, magenta, and yellow colorants, combining these three primaries actually yields a muddy brown. Black colorant is added to compensate for the deficiencies of cyan, magenta, and yellow colorants. Consequently, color printing uses four process colors: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and blacK (CMYK). The use of black toner produces neutral solid blacks and allows for improved rendering of black text. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 67 Understanding color gamut Different color reproduction techniques have different color capabilities, or gamuts. Color transparency films have comparatively large gamuts, as do color monitors. The color gamut that can be produced using process inks or CMYK toners on paper is smaller. This is why some colors that can be displayed on a color monitor, especially bright saturated colors, cannot be reproduced exactly by your Color Server, nor can they be reproduced on a press using process colors. Moreover, different printers have different gamuts. Some colors your printer can produce cannot be reproduced on an offset press, and vice versa. The following figure illustrates this concept of differing gamuts. You must account for the gamut of your printer when designing on a color monitor. When printed, colors that fall outside the printer gamut are “mapped” to printable colors. This process, referred to as gamut mapping, takes place when color data is converted or adjusted to meet the gamut requirements of a printer. The Color Server is specially designed to perform gamut mapping at high speed with high-quality results. It provides these color management features automatically, using either built-in default settings or settings you select for a particular print job. For added flexibility, you can also use the Color Server color management system in combination with the color management systems on Windows and Mac OS computers. Printing techniques Until recently, most color printing was done on printing presses using one of several printing techniques, such as offset lithography, flexography, or gravure. All traditional printing techniques require lengthy preparation before a press run can take place. Short-run color printing, including Color Server printing, eliminates most of this preparation. By streamlining the process of color printing, the Color Server makes short print runs economically feasible. In contemporary offset lithographic printing, digital files from desktop computers are output to an imagesetter, which creates film separations. The film is used to make a prepress proof, which is an accurate predictor of the final print job and allows you to make corrections before going to press. Once the proof is approved, the printer makes plates from the film and runs the print job on the press. 1 Color transparency film 2 RGB monitor 3 Offset press (white) 4 Other print device 1 2 3 4 DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 68 With the Color Server, you simply print the file. The Color Server processes the PostScript information in the file and sends four bitmaps (one each for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) to the printer. The ease of Color Server printing makes possible experimentation that would be too costly on a press, allowing unlimited fine-tuning of color and design elements. Halftone and continuous tone devices Halftoning is used in offset printing to print each process color at a different intensity, allowing millions of different colors to be reproduced using only the four process colors. Depending on the required intensity of a given color, toner is placed on paper in dots of different size. The grid of dots used for each toner color is called a screen. Halftone screens are aligned to unique angles designed to eliminate interference patterns called moiré that can arise with halftoning. Some color printers are commonly referred to as continuous tone (contone) devices. They do not use traditional halftone patterns and angles. Contone devices are capable of varying the intensity of individual dots. Even if your color printing is done exclusively on the Color Server, you will encounter concepts from offset printing if you use high-end graphics applications. For example, color controls in illustration applications, such as Adobe Illustrator, are geared toward specifying color for offset printing using process and spot colors. Many applications allow you to specify the halftone used for each printing plate. Using color effectively The ability to print in color can greatly increase the effectiveness of your message, whether you are printing a presentation or newsletter (short-run printing), or proofing an ad concept that will later be printed on a press (color proofing). Some potential benefits of using color include: • Conveying information rapidly by using color cues • Making use of the emotive aspects of different colors • Increasing impact and message retention Color can also be a source of distraction and discord if it is used poorly. This section outlines some guidelines and concepts to consider as you approach designing color materials. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 69 General guidelines To create successful color materials, consider the following: • Use color to aid comprehension, rather than applying colors indiscriminately. In presentations, graphs, and charts, use color to highlight patterns and emphasize differences. • Use color sparingly. In general, fewer colors work better than many colors. • Use red as an accent color. Red is particularly effective when used in otherwise monochromatic materials. • Consider the tastes of your target audience when choosing colors. • Keep a file of printed color pieces that appeal to you or strike you as effective. Refer to it for ideas when designing your own documents. Color wheel A color wheel like the one in the following figure is a helpful tool for understanding the interrelation of colors. The colors on one side of the color wheel, from magenta to yellow, appear to most people to be warm colors, while those on the other side, from green to blue, appear to be cool. The distance between two colors on the color wheel can help predict how they will appear when seen side by side. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 70 Colors opposite one another on the color wheel are called complements (see example a in the following figure), and create a striking contrast side by side. This can be the basis for a bold graphical design, but it is an effect you should use with discretion, since it can be visually fatiguing. Other bold combinations to consider are split complements—a color and the two colors adjacent to its complement (example b)—and triads (three colors evenly spaced on the color wheel (example c). Colors adjacent to one another on the color wheel result in subtle harmonies. The color wheel simplifies color relationships for the purpose of clarity, showing only saturated or pure colors. Adding the myriad variations of each hue to the palette (more or less saturated, darker, or lighter) creates a wealth of possibilities. Taking a pair of complements from the color wheel and varying the saturation and brightness of one or both colors produces a very different result from the pure complements. Combining a light tint of a warm color with a darker shade of its cooler complement often gives pleasing results. Combining a darker shade of a warm color with a light tint of its cooler complement produces an unusual effect that may appeal to you. Once you have mastered the concept of the color wheel, you have a good framework for experimenting with color combinations. Many books targeted at graphic designers show groups of preselected color combinations. Some are organized by themes or moods, and some are based on a custom color system, such as PANTONE. The more you develop a critical facility for judging color combinations, the more you will trust your own eye for color. For a selection of books about design, see the “Bibliography” on page 75. a b c DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 71 Color and text It is not a coincidence that the overwhelming majority of text you see is printed in black on white paper. Text in black on white is highly legible and is not fatiguing to read for extended periods. For many color materials, using black text on a white background and confining color to graphic elements and headings is a good choice. When used skillfully, color text can add flair to documents printed on paper. This technique is widely used in presentations. When using color text, avoid dazzling text and background combinations created from primary complements, especially red and cyan or red and blue. They are visually fatiguing and hard to read. Color text is more legible when distinguished from its background by a difference in lightness, for example, dark blue text on a light beige background. In addition, using many different colors in a string of text makes for a confused appearance and is hard to read. However, using a single highlight color is an effective way to draw the reader’s eye to selected words. For color text samples, see the following figure. When using color text, keep in mind that small font sizes typically do not print in color with the same sharpness as in black. In most applications, black text prints exclusively in black toner, while color text usually prints with two or more toners. Any misregistration between the different toners on paper causes color text to lose definition. You can make test prints to find the smallest point size at which color text prints clearly. When using high-end graphics applications that allow you to specify color as percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, black, you can create pure cyan or pure magenta text that prints with the same sharpness as black text. (Pure yellow text is extremely hard to read on anything but a dark or complementary background.) STOP! STOP! Exceptio probat regulam de rebus non exceptis. De gustibus non est disputandum. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 72 Raster images and vector graphics Two broad categories of artwork can be printed from a personal computer to a color printer: raster images and vector graphics. A raster image, also referred to as a bitmap, is composed of a grid of pixels, each assigned a particular color value (as illustrated in example a in the following figure). The grid, when sufficiently enlarged, resembles a mosaic made from square tiles. Examples of raster images include scans and images created in painting or pixel-editing applications, such as Photoshop and Corel Painter. The amount of data found in a raster image depends on its resolution and bit depth. The resolution of a raster describes the compactness of the pixels and is specified in pixels per inch (ppi). The bit depth is the number of bits of information assigned to each pixel. Black and white raster images require only one bit of information per pixel. Grayscale images require 8 bits per pixel. For photographic quality color, 24 bits of RGB color information are required per pixel, yielding 256 levels of red, green, and blue. For CMYK images, 32 bits per pixel are required. When printing raster artwork, the quality of the output depends on the resolution of the source raster. If the raster resolution is too low, individual pixels become visible in the printed output as small squares. This effect is sometimes called “pixelation.” In vector graphics, picture objects are defined mathematically as lines or curves between points—hence the term “vector” (see example b). Picture elements can have solid, gradient, or patterned color fills. Vector artwork is created in illustration and drawing applications, such as Illustrator and CorelDRAW. Page layout applications, such as QuarkXPress, also allow you to create simple vector artwork with their drawing tools. PostScript fonts are vector-based, as well. Vector artwork is resolution-independent. You can scale it to any size and resolution without danger of pixels becoming visible in printed output. a b DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 73 Optimizing files for processing and printing The following sections provide information about how to create image files that produce the highest possible print quality while minimizing the processing time and disk space they require. Resolution of raster images While a 72-ppi raster image appears sharp on a monitor, the same image would likely appear pixelated when printed to the Color Server. Color printers are capable of much greater detail than computer monitors, and require correspondingly higher resolution image files. However, high-resolution files can be large and, therefore, cumbersome to transmit over a network, process for printing, store on disk, and edit. Beyond a certain threshold, a higher image resolution greatly increases file size while having a minimal effect on output quality. The optimal image resolution depends on the resolution of the final print device. Aim for the resolution that optimizes both file size and output quality. The resolution of a raster image, along with its bit depth and physical dimensions, determine its file size. The following table shows the file sizes of color raster images at different dimensions and resolutions. In this table, the shaded areas indicate that 200 ppi is typically the best trade-off between image quality and file size. However, higher resolutions (for example, 250 to 300 ppi) may be necessary for offset printing, when quality is of the utmost importance, or for images containing sharp diagonal lines. To find the best image resolution for your purposes, make test prints of some raster artwork at different resolutions. Start with a high-resolution image (400 ppi) and save versions at progressively lower resolutions, down to 100 ppi, using a pixel-editing application, such as Photoshop. Always save a copy of the original high-resolution version, in case you must revert to it. The high-resolution data cannot be recreated from a lower resolution version. File size at 100 ppi 150 ppi 200 ppi 400 ppi 600 ppi Image size RGB/CMYK RGB/CMYK RGB/CMYK RGB/CMYK RGB/CMYK 3"x 4" 0.4/0.5 MB 0.8/1.0 MB 1.4/1.8 MB 5.5/7.3 MB 12.4/16.5 MB 5"x7" 1.0/1.3 MB 2.3/3.0 MB 4.0/5.3 MB 16.0/21.4 MB 36.1/48.1 MB 8.5"x11" 2.7/3.6 MB 6.0/8.0 MB 10.7/14.3 MB 42.8/57.1 MB 96.4/128.5 MB 11"x17" 5.4/7.1 MB 12.0/16.1 MB 21.4/28.5 MB 85.6/114.1 MB 192.7/256.9 MB DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 74 Print the files and examine the output. You will likely begin to see a marked deterioration in output quality at resolutions below 200 ppi, while above 200 ppi the improvement may be very subtle. Raster images prepared for offset printing may need to be at higher resolutions than necessary for proofing on your Color Server. Scaling Ideally, each raster image should be saved at the actual size, and it will be placed in the document at the optimal resolution for the printer. If the image resolution is correct for the printer, there is no quality advantage to be gained by scaling an image to a percentage of its actual size. If you scale a large image to a percentage of its actual size, you incur unnecessary file transfer time, because the image data for the entire large image is sent to the printer. If an image is placed multiple times at markedly different sizes in a document, save a separate version of the image at the correct size for each placement. If you must place an image at greater than 100% in a document, remember that the output image resolution is affected. For example, if you scale a 200 ppi image to 200%, the image is printed at 100 ppi. 100 ppi 200 ppi 300 ppi 400 ppi 500 ppi 600 ppi Image resolution Image quality BIBLIOGRAPHY 75 BIBLIOGRAPHY Books Bruno, Michael H., ed. Pocket Pal: A Graphic Arts Production Handbook. Nineteenth Edition. International Paper, 2004. Fraser, Bruce and Blatner, David. Real World Adobe Photoshop CS2. Berkeley: Peachpit Press, 2006. Hunt, R.W.G. The Reproduction of Colour. Sixth Edition. Wiley, 2004. Kieran, Michael. The Color Scanning Success Handbook. Toronto: DPA Communications Corp., 1997. (Out of print) Kieran, Michael. Understanding Desktop Color. Second Edition. Berkeley: Peachpit Press, 1994. Lawler, Brian P. Adobe Print Publishing Guide. Second Edition. Adobe Press, 2006. Margulis, Dan. Professional Photoshop: The Classic Guide to Color Correction. Fifth Edition. Berkeley: Peachpit Press, 2006. Miller, Marc D. and Zaucha, Randy. The Color Mac. Second Edition. Hayden Books, 1995. (Out of print) The Color Guide and Glossary: Communication, measurement, and control for Digital Imaging and Graphic Arts. X-Rite Incorporated, 2004. (Available from X-Rite dealers or via the X-Rite web site, www.xrite.com.) World Wide Web sites International Color Consortium: www.color.org Graphic Arts Information Network: www.gain.net Seybold Seminars Online: www.seyboldseminars.com Adobe Systems Incorporated: www.adobe.com GLOSSARY 77 GLOSSARY This Glossary contains some terms that are industry concepts and may not be explicitly referenced in the documentation set. A additive color model A system in which colors are produced by combining red, green, and blue light (the additive primaries). An RGB video monitor is based on an additive color model. additive primaries Red, green, and blue light used in additive color systems. When blended together in proper amounts, these colors of light produce white. artifact A visible defect in an image, usually caused by limitations in the input or output process (hardware or software); a blemish or error. B banding Visible steps between shades in a color gradient. bit depth Amount of information used for each pixel in a raster image. Black-and-white images require only one bit per pixel. Grayscale images with 256 shades of gray require 8 bits (or 1 byte) per pixel. Photographic quality color images can require 24 bits per pixel (RGB images) or 32 bits per pixel (CMYK images). Bitmap (BMP) A graphics file format established by Microsoft; native to the Windows operating system. bitmap (or raster) An image made up of small squares arranged in a grid. Each square in the grid is a pixel. The number of pixels per inch defines the resolution of a bitmap. GLOSSARY 78 blasting An undesirable effect that occurs when excess amounts of toner, possibly combined with certain types of paper stock, cause objects in an image to spread beyond the boundaries defined in the file. brightness Both the saturation and lightness of product color. C calibration The process of adjusting the basic setting of a monitor, printer, or other device to standard values in order to ensure uniform and consistent results over time. Calibration helps assure predictable and consistent printing results. calibration target (or calibration set) A set of measurements that describe the expected density response of a printing device. Calibration targets are associated with the output profile of the device. CIE The International Commission on Illumination, abbreviated as CIE from its French title Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage, is an organization devoted to international cooperation and exchange of information among its member countries on all matters relating to the science and art of lighting. The CIE developed mathematical models to quantify light sources, objects and observers as a function of wavelength, which led to the development of a basic color space for plotting colors. CIEbased colors (A, ABC, DEF, DEFG) Device-independent color spaces that are produced by color management outside of the Color Server, such as application software, operating systems, or printer drivers, and are applied at the user’s computer. CMS See color management system. CMYK A subtractive color model that uses cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (process colors), and is used in color printing; a color model used in the printing of colors in four-color process printing. coated media Media that is coated to enhance print quality. The coating allows the media to be printed without allowing significant toner or ink absorption, thereby preventing blurriness or lack of contrast. GLOSSARY 79 color channel A single-color image that can be edited separately from the other color channels in a color space; for example, the red channel of an RGB image. color gamut See gamut. color management system (CMS) System used to match color across different input, display, and output devices. color rendering dictionary See CRD (Color Rendering Dictionary). color separation The process of separating a color image into the color components for printing: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Also refers to the four sheets of film that result from the process of separating a color image. color space A model for representing color in terms of measurable values, such as the amount of red, green, and blue in an image. RGB and CMYK color spaces correspond to color devices (monitors and printers, respectively). Other color spaces, such as CIE Lab, are based on mathematical models and are device-independent (that is, not based on the color response of a particular device). See gamut. colorant An ink, dye, toner, paint, or other pigment that modifies the color of media to which it is applied. ColorWise See ColorWise color management. ColorWise color management An ICC-open color management solution, which is an easy-to-use system that addresses the needs of both casual and experienced color management users. component In variable data printing, an element such as text, a graphic, or a photograph that is printed on a page. composite printer Any output device that can print directly in color without first creating color separations. A composite print can be used as an early proof of an offset print job. GLOSSARY 80 consumable Material such as ink, toner, paper, or lubricants that must be replenished regularly in order for the print device to function properly. continuous tone (contone) A photographic image that contains gradient tones from black to white (such as a 35mm transparency or a photograph). Continuous tones cannot be reproduced in that form for printing, but must be screened to translate the image into dots. CRD (Color Rendering Dictionary) A feature that maintains the best possible translation of color from one color device to another. A CRD is used by the color management system or the PostScript interpreter of the Color Server when converting data between color spaces. The Color Server includes several CRDs, each of which provides a different color rendering intent. custom color system A system of named color swatches that can be matched on press using spot colors or approximated using process colors. PANTONE and TruMatch are examples of custom color systems. D DCS (Desktop Color Separation) A data file standard that assists in making color separations with desktop publishing systems. Five files are created: four color files (one each for C, M, Y, and K) and a composite color preview file of the color image. DCS allows an image-editing application to perform color separation and pass it through to final output with its integrity intact. densitometer An instrument commonly used in the graphic arts industry to measure density according to a specified standard. density A measurement of the light-absorbing quality of a photographic or printed image. desktop color separation See DCS. device-dependent colors Colors directly related to their representation on an output device. Color values map directly or via simple conversions to the application of device colorants, such as quantities of ink or intensities of display phosphors. Device-dependent colors are controlled precisely for a particular device, but the results may not be consistent between different devices. Examples of device-dependent color spaces are DeviceRGB, DeviceCMYK, and DeviceGray. GLOSSARY 81 device-independent colors Colors described using a model based on human visual perception instead of being device-specific. DIC A Japanese standard of specifications for separations, proofs, and color printing. E Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) A PostScript file format designed to be embedded in another PostScript stream. Euroscale A European standard of specifications for separations, proofs, and color printing. F flexography A printing technology that uses flexible raised-image plates. Flexography can be used to print on non-flat materials such as cans. four-color printer A printing device that uses cyan, magenta, yellow, and black ink or toner. G gamma A numeric value representing the relationship (gamma curve) between the input and output values of a color device. If gamma equals 1, input values are mapped exactly to output values. gamut A range of colors. A device gamut is the range of colors that a print device can produce. An image gamut is the range of colors in a particular image. gamut mapping The conversion of color coordinates from one device’s gamut to another, usually accomplished with algorithms or look-up tables. GCR See gray component replacement. GLOSSARY 82 GDI (Graphics Device Interface) Graphics and display technology used by Windows computers. GDI applications rely on GDI (rather than the PostScript language) to send text and pictures to a print device. GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) A standard for bitmap graphics of up to 256 colors used for posting photographic images on Internet or intranet pages; rarely used for professional printing. gradient A smooth transition between two different colors or two shades of a color. Graphics Device Interface See GDI. Graphics Interchange Format See GIF. gravure A printing technology that uses an etched cylinder that has been immersed in ink. The ink that remains in the etched areas is applied to the paper. The non-etched surfaces of the cylinder are non-printing areas. gray component replacement (GCR) A method for improving wet ink trapping and reducing ink costs in process color printing. In shadow, midtone, and quarter-tone areas where all three process colors (C, M, Y) overprint, the gray components of those colors are reduced and replaced by black. H halftoning A method for representing an original continuous tone image using a pattern of dots, lines, or other patterns. HSB A color model where each color is represented by its hue, saturation, and brightness components; supported by most color applications. HSL A color model in which each color is represented by its hue, saturation, and lightness components. GLOSSARY 83 I ICC profile An industry standard color profile format developed by the International Color Consortium (ICC) that describes the color capabilities, including the gamut, of a color device based on the differences between an ideal and the current device. The ideal is often provided by the manufacturer as a color reference file. ICC profiles are implemented on Mac OS computers in ColorSync and on Windows computers in Image Color Matching (ICM). The Color Server color management system, ColorWise, supports ICC profiles. imagesetter Raster-based film output device; a high-resolution laser output device that writes bitmapped data onto photosensitive paper or film. J JPEG A graphics file format defined by the Joint Photographic Experts Group committee of International Standards Organization (ISO); a standard for digital compression of still image graphic data. L Lab A uniform device-independent color space in which colors are located within a threedimensional rectangular coordinate system. The three dimensions are lightness (L), redness/ greenness (a) and yellowness/blueness (b). (Also referred to as L*a*b* and CIELab.) M metamerism Phenomenon in which two colors composed of different combinations of light wavelengths appear identical under a specific light source, but may look different under other light sources. The colors are called “metamers.” moiré An undesirable pattern in images made using halftone screens. Moiré can be caused by the improper line frequency of the screens, improper screen angles, improper alignment of halftone screens, or by the combination of a halftone screen with patterns in the image. GLOSSARY 84 N named color A color that is defined according to a custom color system. For example, PANTONE 107 C is a named color; also referred to as a spot color. O office applications Software applications commonly used for business purposes, including presentation, spreadsheet, and word processing applications. offset lithography Printing in which ink is transferred from printing plates to a rubber blanket, and then from the blanket to paper. output See output profile. output profile A file that describes the color characteristics of a printing device. The output profile is associated with a calibration target that defines the expected density response of the print device. P PANTONE System One of the best known color specification systems used by designers and printers to communicate color. Available in Coated, Uncoated, and Matte, each swatch book contains a series of colors that can be referenced based on the assigned PANTONE notation. PDF (Portable Document Format) An open file format specification that describes text and graphics in documents. phosphor Material used in making computer monitors; phosphors glow and emit red, green, and blue light when struck by an electron beam, thus creating an image. photographic rendering A color rendering intent that preserves tonal relationships in images. Unprintable colors are mapped to printable colors in a way that retains differences in lightness, sacrificing color accuracy as necessary. GLOSSARY 85 pixel The smallest distinct element of a raster image. The term is a combination of the words “picture” and “element.” PostScript A device-independent page description language that is used to print and display pictures and text. PostScript 3 includes many enhancements to older versions of PostScript, including improved image quality and color. PPD (PostScript Printer Description) A file containing information about particular PostScript capabilities of the print device. The information in the PPD is presented via the printer driver. prepress proof A print made from a set of film separations or other file to simulate the results of printing. A prepress proof is the last opportunity to catch problems before the print job goes to press. presentation graphics rendering A color rendering intent that creates saturated colors but does not match printed colors precisely to displayed colors. It is appropriate for bright saturated colors used in illustrations and graphs. process colors The colors used in printing to simulate full-spectrum color images: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, blacK (CMYK). profile Systematically describes how a color maps to a particular space. By identifying a source profile and an output profile, you initiate the appropriate workflow to maintain consistent color values. R raster image Electronic representation of a page or image using a grid of points called pixels. rendering intent The style of color rendering, or gamut mapping, designed for a particular type of color job. An example of a rendering intent is Photographic rendering (also referred to as Image rendering or Contrast rendering), which is designed for photographic images. GLOSSARY 86 resolution The number of pixels per inch (ppi) in a bitmap image or the number of dots per inch (dpi) that a device can render. RGB An additive color model that makes a range of colors by combining red, green, and blue light, called the additive primaries. Commonly used to refer to the color space, mixing system, or monitor in color computer graphics. S solid color rendering A color rendering intent intended for use when color accuracy is crucial. Unprintable colors are mapped to the closest printable colors. Solid color rendering does the best job of preserving the saturation of displayed colors. source color space The color environment of the originating source of a colored element, including scanners and color monitors. source profile A file used by a color management system to determine the characteristics of the color values specified in a source digital image. spectral light The wavelengths of electromagnetic radiation emitted by a given light source that can be seen by the human eye. spectrophotometer An instrument commonly used in the graphic arts industry to measure spectral light according to a specified standard. spot color A color that is printed on its own separation plate when separations are specified. A spot color is printed using a custom ink for that color, in contrast to process colors, which are printed using combinations of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. (Also referred to as a named color.) Status T A spectral response for graphic arts reflection densitometers defined by ANSI (American National Standards Institute). substrate The material upon which a job is printed. GLOSSARY 87 subtractive color model A system in which color is produced by combining colorants such as paint, inks, or dyes on media such as paper, acetate, or transparent film. All printing devices use the subtractive color model. subtractive primaries Cyan, magenta, and yellow colorants used in subtractive color systems for color printing. Combining the subtractive primaries produces darker colors. Black is added to the subtractive primaries to compensate for deficiencies of the toners or inks, and for more efficient black printing. SWOP The abbreviation for Specifications for Web Offset Publications. A standard of specifications for separations, proofs, and color printing on a web offset press (not a sheet-fed press). T TIFF (Tag Image File Format) A common format for exchanging raster graphics (bitmap) images between applications. trapping Printing technique in which some objects are printed slightly larger or smaller than you have specified in an application in order to prevent white edges around these objects. U undercolor removal (UCR) A method for improving wet ink trapping and reducing ink costs in process color printing. In shadow areas where all three process colors (C, M, Y) overprint, the amounts of those colors are reduced and replaced by black. V vector graphic Graphic illustration created on computers where picture objects are defined mathematically as lines or curves between points. These mathematical definitions are interpreted by an image language such as PostScript. Vector images include artwork created with illustration applications (such as Adobe Illustrator or Macromedia FreeHand) and page layout applications (such as Adobe PageMaker). W white point The color temperature of any white light source, typically expressed in degrees Kelvin (for example, 6500 K, typical for the white of a monitor). INDEX 89 A accent color 69 Acrobat 56 to 59 additive color model 64 additive primaries 64 Adobe (ACE) conversion option Illustrator 49 InDesign 40 Photoshop 30 Adobe Acrobat, see Acrobat Adobe Illustrator, see Illustrator Adobe InDesign, see InDesign Adobe Photoshop, see Photoshop B bit depth, of raster images 72, 73 Blend RGB Colors Using Gamma, Photoshop setting 31 brightness 60, 62 C charts, using color in 69 choosing color 15 CIE chromaticity diagram 62, 63 color model 62 CIELAB color space 8 CMY color model 19 CMYK Color Reference 11, 24 CMYK EPS, Photoshop 37 CMYK processing method 26 CMYK source profile 26 color accent color 69 additive model 64 CMY model 19 complements 70 controlling printing results 15 custom color systems 23 HSB model 23, 62 HSL model 19, 23 HSV model 19 physics of 61 process colors 68 properties of 60 reference pages 11 RGB model 19, 23 split complements 70 subtractive model 64, 65 subtractive primaries 66 text 71 theory 60 triads 70 using effectively 68 to 71 wheel 69 color management Acrobat 57 basics 8 to 9 ColorWise 10 CorelDRAW 53 Illustrator 48 InDesign 39 monitor 18 Photoshop 28 QuarkXPress 46 color management system (CMS) 8 color matching systems, see custom color systems color monitors, see monitors Color Profiler Suite 8, 18 color proofing 17 color theory 60 color wheel 69 ColorSync 8 ColorWise 8, 10 Combine Separations, Photoshop 34 Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage, see CIE complements, color 70 compression, JPEG 33, 35, 36 computer monitors, see monitors continuous tone devices 68 Conversion Options, Photoshop setting 30 CorelDRAW 53 to 55 custom color systems 23, 70 INDEX INDEX 90 D Desaturate Monitor Colors by, Photoshop setting 31 device profiles 8 Document Color Mode, Illustrator 47 documentation 7 E EFIRGB Photoshop 30, 40, 49, 57 Encoding, Photoshop setting 35 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) about 25 defining colors 21 imported objects 25 PostScript color management 36 with CorelDRAW 54 with illustration applications 47 with Illustrator 50 with Photoshop 31 EPS CMYK, Photoshop 37 EPS RGB 36 Excel, see Microsoft Office F file size, of raster images 10, 73 font size, for color text 71 G gamma 9 gamut of monitors 67 of photographic transparencies 67 Graphic Arts Package 27 graphs, using color in 69 gravure 67 H halftone screen 27 halftoning 68 HSB color model 23, 62 HSL color model 19, 23 HSV color model 19 hue, saturation, and brightness 60, 62 I ICC profiles about 30 included with user software 9 ICC standard for color management systems 8 illustration applications 47 Illustrator 23, 47 InDesign 39 to 44 International Color Consortium 8 J JPEG 33, 35, 36 L light 61 to 62 line art, see vector graphics M metamerism 62 Microsoft Excel, see Microsoft Office Microsoft Office 19 to 22 Microsoft PowerPoint, see Microsoft Office Microsoft Word, see Microsoft Office misregistration of colors 71 moiré 68 monitor color management 18 monitors color model 65 gamut of 67 phosphors 65 Multi-channel, Photoshop 37 N named colors 23 O office applications 16, 19 to 22 offset lithographic printing 67 offset press print jobs, workflow issues 17 offset press printing 67 on-demand printing 17 output profile color conversion 9 with office applications 22 P page layout applications 38 painting applications 72 PANTONE color system 23, 24 reference 11 phosphors 9, 65 photographic prints 65 photographic transparencies 65, 67 Photoshop color management with 23 importing CorelDRAW data 54 using 28 to 37 INDEX 91 Photoshop Multi-channel 37 physics of color 61 pixel-editing applications 72, 73 Postflight 23 PostScript applications color handling 23 using color in 23 to 27 PostScript Color Management, Photoshop option 33, 36 PostScript printer drivers 21 PowerPoint, see Microsoft Office prepress proof 67 presentation print jobs, using color in 69 printing raster images 72 techniques 67 prism 61 process colors 24, 66, 68 profiles, device 8 proofing color 17 prepress 67 Q QuarkXPress 23, 45 QuarkXPress color management 46 R raster images about 72 to 74 bit depth 72, 73 file size 73 for offset press printing 74 printing 72 resolution 73 to 74 scaling of 74 registration of colors 71 rendering intent 19 bypassing 21, 26 RGB color model 19, 23 RGB Color Reference 11, 20 RGB EPS 36 RGB source color space, see source color space S saturation 60, 62 scaling of raster images 74 scanners 64, 65 screens, used in halftoning 68 Separations, printing with Photoshop 34 short-run printing 17 source color space 9 spectral colors 62 spectral components of light 61, 62 split complements 70 Spot Color Matching option with Photoshop 37 with PostScript applications 25 spot colors 23, 24 Spot-On 16 subtractive color model 64, 65 subtractive primaries 66 sunlight 61 T text font size 71 using color with 71 TIFF objects assigning ICC profiles to 26 preview 33 recommended for imported objects 25, 31 tint 62 transparencies (photographic) 65, 67 triads 70 V vector graphics 72 visible spectrum of light 61 W white point 9 Word, see Microsoft Office workflow, recommended 14 working Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Fiery Graphic Arts Package © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093739 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 Fiery Graphic Arts Package 9 Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition 10 Available options 11 Enabling the feature at the Fiery PRO80 11 Updating the status of Fiery Graphic Arts Package 11 Updating the status on Windows 11 Updating the status on Mac OS X 12 Setting up your monitor and the monitor profile 13 PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 14 Paper simulation workflow 14 Printing with default Paper Simulation 14 Paper Simulation print option 15 Paper Simulation White Point editing 15 Printing with custom paper simulation values 16 SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 18 Setting up Two-Color Print Mapping 19 Printing a job with Two-Color Print Mapping 20 CONTENTS 4 COLOR SETUP FEATURES 22 Control Bar 22 Control Bar workflow 23 Printing with the default Control Bar 23 Setting up a custom Control Bar 25 Printing with a custom Control Bar 25 Configurable Auto Trapping 26 Configurable Auto Trapping workflow 26 Printing with default Auto Trapping 26 Setting up configurable Auto Trapping 28 Printing with configurable Auto Trapping 28 Progressives 29 Progressives workflow 29 Printing with the default Progressives 30 Setting up Progressives 31 Printing with custom Progressives 31 Halftone Simulation 32 Halftone Simulation workflow 32 Halftone Simulation print option 32 Printing with pre-defined halftone screens 33 Setting up custom Halftone Simulation 34 Printing with custom halftone screens 34 Supported applications 35 Calibrating for custom halftone screens 35 SOFT PROOFING 38 IMAGEVIEWER 39 Accessing ImageViewer 39 CONTENTS 5 PREFLIGHT 42 HOT FOLDERS FILTERS 43 POSTFLIGHT 44 About Postflight 45 Postflight Test Page 45 Postflight color-coded pages 45 Postflight reports 46 Postflight print option 48 Postflight workflow 48 Scenario 1: Diagnose an unexpected color 50 Scenario 2: Check the calibration status 52 Scenario 3: Check the quality of the output profile 53 Scenario 4: Diagnose a color problem of a specific object 54 MULTIPLE PLATE SEPARATIONS 55 Multiple plate separations workflow 55 Combine Separations print option 56 Supported applications 56 PAPER SIMULATION 57 Paper Simulation workflow 57 Paper Simulation print option 58 CONTENTS 6 UGRA/FOGRA MEDIA WEDGE 59 Printing the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge 59 Reading the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge 60 Using the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge for quality control 60 INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 61 Altona Visual Test file 61 Interpreting test results 62 Using a PDF/X workflow not compatible with Altona 64 INDEX 65 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document explains the Fiery Graphic Arts Package features and how they work. Because of the flexibility of the controls Fiery Graphic Arts Package provides, users in any environment can benefit from the Fiery Graphic Arts Package features. Novice users can use the default settings to obtain optimal results. Expert users with specific needs and requirements in graphic arts and other markets can also obtain optimal results by customizing the settings. Terminology and conventions The documentation for the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Fiery Graphic Arts Package Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document describes the features that are available through print options and utilities such as Command WorkStation. The features are organized as follows: • Features accessible from Command WorkStation – Paper Simulation White Point Editing describes the white point editing feature. – Spot-On with Two-Color Print Mapping describes the feature used to map document colors with print colors. – Color Setup describes the following features: Control Bar, Auto Trapping, Progressives, and Halftone Simulation. – ImageViewer describes how to start the ImageViewer application. – Soft Proofing describes the Soft Proof feature. – Preflight describes how to perform the Preflight check of your job. • Features accessible from utilities other than Command WorkStation – Hot Folders Filters describes the filters features. • Other features – Postflight describes the Postflight feature and its workflow examples. – Multiple Plate Separations describes the combine separation feature for more than four plates. – Paper Simulation describes the fixed Paper Simulation feature. – Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge describes the color test file called the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge. – Integrated Altona Visual Test describes the test integrated in the Fiery PRO80 to check for PDF/X compatibility as tested by the Altona Test Suite. A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 Fiery Graphic Arts Package The following features are included in Fiery Graphic Arts Package: Feature Where to set values or access Print option name See Halftone screening Command WorkStation: Color Setup Halftone Simulation Color Setup Features Soft proofing Command WorkStation: Preview Soft Proofing Multiple plate separations Combine Separation Multiple Plate Separations Fixed paper simulation Paper Simulation Paper Simulation INTRODUCTION 10 Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition The following features are included in Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition: Feature Where to set values or access Print option name See Paper simulation white point editing Command WorkStation: Paper Simulation Paper Simulation Paper Simulation White Point Editing Spot-On: two-color print mapping Command WorkStation: Spot-On Two-Color Print Mapping Spot-On with Two-Color Print Mapping Control bar Command WorkStation: Color Setup Control Bar Color Setup Features Configurable auto trapping Command WorkStation: Color Setup Auto Trapping Color Setup Features Progressives Command WorkStation: Color Setup Progressives Color Setup Features Halftone screening Command WorkStation: Color Setup Halftone Simulation Color Setup Features Soft proofing Command WorkStation: Preview Soft Proofing ImageViewer Command WorkStation: ImageViewer ImageViewer Preflight Command WorkStation: Preflight Preflight Hot Folders file filters Hot Folders Hot Folders filters Postflight Command WorkStation: ImageViewer Postflight Postflight Multiple plate separations Combine Separation Multiple Plate Separations Fixed paper simulation Paper Simulation Paper Simulation Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge Integrated Altona Visual Test Integrated Altona Visual Test INTRODUCTION 11 Available options The following feature package is available for the Fiery PRO80. Enabling the feature at the Fiery PRO80 The Fiery Graphic Arts Package option or the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition option must be enabled at the Fiery PRO80 before you can access its features from your computer. A service technician enables the option at your site using the Feature Update or Restore/Update Server Software CD and the hardware key (dongle). To check whether the option is enabled at the Fiery PRO80, do one of the following: • Print the Configuration page (see Configuration and Setup). • Check the information on the General Info tab of the Device Center. Updating the status of Fiery Graphic Arts Package If the Fiery Graphic Arts Package option or the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition option is enabled at the Fiery PRO80, you must update the status of the option on your computer before you can access its features from your computer. Updating the status on Windows Use the following procedure to update the status of Fiery Graphic Arts Package on a Windows computer. NOTE: Before updating the status on a Windows computer, you must install the printer driver. For information about installing the printer driver, see Printing. Fiery Graphic Arts Package Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition To use Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition features Fiery PRO80 Optional Optional Upgrade to Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition or Upgrade Fiery Graphic Arts Package to Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition INTRODUCTION 12 TO UPDATE THE STATUS ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER 1 Open the Printers (or Printers and Faxes) window. 2 Right-click the Fiery PRO80 and choose Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3 Click the Installable Options tab. 4 Select the Two-Way Communication option. 5 Type the IP address or DNS name and click Update. NOTE: If you use the Point and Print method to install the printer driver and printer description file, you must enable Two-Way Communication on the monitor at the Fiery PRO80 for each connection (print, hold, or direct) before you install them on your computer. For more information about Point and Print, see Printing. 6 Verify that Fiery Graphic Arts Package or Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition appears under Installed Options. 7 Click OK to close the dialog box. Updating the status on Mac OS X Use one of the following procedures to update the status of Fiery Graphic Arts Package on a computer running Mac OS X. NOTE: Before updating the status on a computer running Mac OS X, install the printer driver. For information about installing the printer driver, see Printing. TO UPDATE THE STATUS ON A COMPUTER RUNNING MAC OS X V10.5 AND 10.6 1 Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu and then choose Print & Fax. The Print & Fax dialog box appears. 2 In the Printer List, select the Fiery PRO80 and click Options & Supplies. 3 Click the Driver tab. 4 Select Fiery Graphic Arts Package or Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition from the GA Package list. 5 Click OK to apply changes. 6 Quit System Preferences. INTRODUCTION 13 TO UPDATE THE STATUS ON A COMPUTER RUNNING MAC OS X V10.4.X 1 Start Printer Setup Utility. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List. 3 Choose Show Info from the Printer menu. The Printer Info dialog box appears. 4 Choose Installable Options. 5 Select Fiery Graphic Arts Package or Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition from the GA Package list. 6 Click Apply Changes. 7 Close the dialog box. Setting up your monitor and the monitor profile Some Fiery Graphic Arts Package features require that a job be displayed with correct colors on your monitor. The following features require the correct monitor display: • Paper Simulation White Point editing (see page 14) • Soft Proofing from Command WorkStation (see page 38) • ImageViewer previewing from Command WorkStation (see page 39) To display the colors correctly on your monitor, you must set up the monitor display according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and specify the correct monitor profile for your monitor. Specify the following settings for the monitor display: • At the monitor: Brightness, Contrast, and Temperature • From the control panel of the operating system: Resolution, Refresh rate, and Number of colors For more information about setting up your monitor and the monitor profile, see the documentation that accompanies the monitor. PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 14 PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING Although an ICC profile contains a definition of “white,” the white may not always visually match the human eye, requiring a perceptual adjustment. The Paper Simulation White Point editing feature allows you to perceptually adjust the hue, brightness, and saturation of the simulated paper white defined in the ICC profile. Paper simulation workflow You can print a job with the Paper Simulation feature set to On from the printer driver without customizing paper simulation. Many jobs may print satisfactorily with the fixed default Paper Simulation setting. However, you can customize the paper simulation by editing the white point values with Command WorkStation. After you customize the values, print the job with the custom paper simulation values from the printer driver by setting the Paper Simulation print option to On. To print a job with the fixed Paper Simulation setting, use the procedure on page 14. For more information about editing Paper Simulation White Point values and printing with custom paper simulation values, see page 15. Printing with default Paper Simulation Use the following procedure to print a job with the fixed Paper Simulation value. NOTE: The procedures for printing a job from a Mac OS or a Windows computer are similar. TO PRINT A JOB WITH DEFAULT PAPER SIMULATION 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Color icon. 4 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit dialog box appears. 5 Under the Color Input tab, select Paper Simulation. 6 Click OK to close the Advanced Edit dialog box. 7 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. 8 Click Print. The job prints with the default Paper Simulation White Point setting. PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 15 Paper Simulation print option The following values are available for the Paper Simulation print option: • Off (Default) • On NOTE: If you have not edited the Paper Simulation White Point values with Command WorkStation and selected On for this option, your job is printed with the default Paper Simulation values. If you edited the values, your job is printed with the custom Paper Simulation values. Paper Simulation White Point editing Your job may print satisfactorily with the fixed Paper Simulation setting. However, you can customize the Paper Simulation setting by editing the Paper Simulation White Point values with Command WorkStation. NOTE: To display the colors correctly with your monitor, you must set the monitor and monitor settings correctly. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. To edit a custom profile, do the following: • Select a CMYK Source Profile. • Link the CMYK source profile to an output profile. To access the Paper Simulation White Point dialog box, see the instructions in Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: If Paper Simulation is set to On, and you have defined a substitute color as C=0, M=0, Y=0, K=0, the values defined in Substitute Colors override those for Paper Simulation. For information about Substitute Colors, see Command WorkStation Help. PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 16 Printing with custom paper simulation values After you edit the paper simulation values in Command WorkStation, you can print a document with the custom paper simulation values from the printer driver. You can also override the setting in Job Properties. NOTE: The procedures for printing a job from a Windows or Mac OS computer are fundamentally the same. The following procedure uses illustrations from a Mac OS computer. Use the following procedure to print a job with the custom paper simulation values. TO PRINT A JOB WITH EDITED PAPER SIMULATION VALUES 1 Choose Print in your application. The print dialog box appears. 2 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Expand the dialog box, if necessary, by clicking the arrow next to the Printer name. 3 Mac OS X v10.4.x: Click Copies & Pages, choose ColorSync from the drop-down list, and then choose In Printer from the Color Conversion list. Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Click Preview, choose Color Matching from the drop-down list, and then select In Printer. 4 Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. 5 Select Two-Way Communication. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 6 Click Full Properties, and then click the Color icon. The Color pane appears. PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 17 7 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit dialog box appears. 8 Under the Color Input tab, select the following settings. • Choose the custom profile from the CMYK/Grayscale Source list. Choose the profile you saved after editing the Paper Simulation White Point values. • Select Full (Output GCR) for the CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option. • Select Paper Simulation. 9 Under the Output tab, choose the output profile that you linked to the custom CMYK Source profile from the Output Profile list. 10 Click OK. The Color pane reappears. 11 Click OK, and then click Print. The job is printed using your custom CMYK Source profile with the edited White Point values. SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 18 SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING In addition to managing “named” colors, the Spot-On spot color editor in Command WorkStation allows you to assign spot colors and process colors to the generic colors that are used in a job. The Two-Color Print Mapping feature is designed for print shop operators to do the proofing for a two-color press. You can print a two-color job to a two-color device by mapping the colors in a job to the colors that are already created on the device. For information about managing named colors with Spot-On, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: The RGB colors in a document are first converted to CMYK colors and then the Two-Color Print Mapping is applied. The following limitations apply when you use the Two-Color Print Mapping feature: • The settings for Two-Color Print Mapping are ignored when the Composite Overprint and Combine Separation features are enabled. • Postflight does not report on Two-Color Print Mapping, because Postflight reports the source state of a document. The color space that the printer receives before any conversions is reported in Postflight. • You cannot select the Two-Color Print Mapping and Substitute Color options at the same time. Also, you cannot select a substitute color to be used in the Two-Color Print Mapping feature. SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 19 Setting up Two-Color Print Mapping In the Two-Color Print Mapping feature, the colors that are used in a job are mapped with the colors to print. From Spot-On, open the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window and then reassign the document colors to the named or custom colors to print with. When the Two-Color Print Mapping print option is enabled for a job, Fiery PRO80 replaces the document colors with the colors you defined in the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window. To define the color mappings in the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window, see the instructions in Command WorkStation Help. 1 Click to open the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window 1 SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 20 Printing a job with Two-Color Print Mapping After you map the colors in the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window in Spot-On, you can print a two-color job from the printer driver. You can also override the print option setting using Command WorkStation Job Properties. NOTE: When you print a job, select the same output profile from the printer driver as you selected when you set up Two-Color Print Mapping in Spot-On. Otherwise, print mappings that are defined in Spot-On have no effect. NOTE: The procedures for printing a job from a Mac OS and a Windows computer are similar. TO PRINT A TWO-COLOR JOB 1 Open a document in your application. 2 Choose Print. 3 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Expand the dialog box, if necessary, by clicking the arrow next to the Printer name. 4 Mac OS X v10.4.x: Click Copies & Pages and choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Click Preview and choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 21 5 Click Full Properties, and then click the Color icon. The Color pane appears. 6 Select 2-Color Print Mapping. 7 Click OK and then click Print. The job is printed with the mapping you defined in Spot-On. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 22 COLOR SETUP FEATURES With Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition, Color Setup in Command WorkStation offers the following customizable features: • Control Bar (see page 22) • Auto Trapping (see page 26) • Progressives (see page 29) • Halftone Simulation (see page 32) For information about Color Setup, see Command WorkStation Help. Control Bar Control Bar allows you to add a static color bar and dynamic job information to each printed page at a user-defined location. The feature can be set as a server default or overridden on a per-job basis. The default Control Bar is designed to fit the Fiery PRO80 default paper size, Letter/A4, or larger. You can create Control Bars for other paper sizes. NOTE: If a Control Bar does not fit on the page, it will be clipped. NOTE: If a background color is defined as “white” for a user-defined Control Bar, it must be defined in the CMYK color space for the Paper Simulation feature to take effect. For more information about Paper Simulation, see page 14. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 23 Control Bar workflow The default Control Bar provides a color bar and dynamic job information. Print a job with the default Control Bar by setting the Control Bar print option to On from the printer driver. Many jobs print satisfactorily with the default Control Bar, but if you require your own color bars, create them by defining custom values in the Control Bar Definition dialog box. After you define a custom Control Bar in the Control Bar pane in Color Setup, you can print a job with the custom Control Bar from the printer driver. To print a job with the default Control Bar, see the following section. To print a job with a custom Control Bar, see page 25. Printing with the default Control Bar Print a job with the default Control Bar by setting the Control Bar print option to On from the printer driver. TO PRINT A JOB WITH THE DEFAULT CONTROL BAR 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears, with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Job Info icon. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 24 4 Under Reporting, select On for the Control Bar print option. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Print. The job is printed with the default Control Bar. 1 Static color bar 2 Job information 1 2 COLOR SETUP FEATURES 25 Setting up a custom Control Bar The custom Control Bar feature is in the Control Bar tab under the Color Setup tab in the Device Center. For more information about using Control Bar, see Command WorkStation Help. Printing with a custom Control Bar The procedure to print a job with a custom Control Bar is basically the same as to print with the default Control Bar (see page 23). Use the following procedure to print with a custom Control Bar. TO PRINT A JOB WITH A CUSTOM CONTROL BAR 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Job Info icon. 4 Select On for the Control Bar print option. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Print. The job is printed with the Control Bar specified in the Control Bar Definition dialog box. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 26 Configurable Auto Trapping Trapping is a technique where some objects are printed slightly larger or smaller than you have specified in an application, in order to prevent white edges around the objects. These white edges, or “halos,” can be caused by factors such as misregistration, the physical properties of the toners, and the stiffness of the media. The configurable Auto Trapping feature provides you with advanced trapping settings and gives you full control over their values. The Fiery PRO80 is shipped with values that are optimized for the print device using regular paper, but if these values do not provide the results necessary for the media that you use, modify the values to meet your requirements. Configurable Auto Trapping workflow The fixed values are set as default for Auto Trapping. The Fiery PRO80 applies these fixed values when you set Auto Trapping to On, with generally good results. However, to customize the values for Auto Trapping, define the values in the Auto Trapping pane in Color Setup. After you define the values, print a job with Auto Trapping set to On from the printer driver. Printing with default Auto Trapping You can print a job with default Auto Trapping by setting the Auto Trapping print option to On from the printer driver. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 27 TO PRINT A JOB WITH DEFAULT AUTO TRAPPING 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Color icon. 4 Select On for the Auto Trapping print option. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Print. The job is printed with the default Auto Trapping values. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 28 Setting up configurable Auto Trapping In Command WorkStation, the configurable Auto Trapping feature is in the Trapping tab under the Color Setup tab in Device Center. For more information about using Trapping, see Command WorkStation Help. Printing with configurable Auto Trapping After you define the Auto Trapping values, print a job with the Auto Trapping feature by setting the Auto Trapping print option to On from the printer driver. You can also change the setting for this print option in a job using Command WorkStation Job Properties. NOTE: If the Auto Trapping values are changed, reRIPping is required to print a job with the new values. Use the procedure on page 23 to print a job with custom Auto Trapping values from the printer driver. The job is printed with the Auto Trapping values defined in the Auto Trapping pane. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 29 Progressives The term “Progressives” refers to printing variations in a multi-color document. The variations may use from one to all of the available color channels in a print device. The majority of printing processes that involve more than one or two colorants apply the colorants sequentially. Traditionally, progressives are the intermediate states after some and before all colorants have been applied. The Progressives feature is more flexible, because it allows you to select which color is printed, using up to four sheets per original document page. NOTE: The Progressives feature is designed to show you the toner separations used by the job on the print device. The feature is not intended to be used to proof for another non-Fiery driven print device. NOTE: Progressives show the separations that the Fiery PRO80 sends to the print device, not the separations contained in the job source file. NOTE: Progressives is a “reporting” feature. It is not designed to be used with production features such as VDP and Imposition. Progressives is offered for diagnostic situations. With high volume applications or production environments, use Progressives only on the individual pages that need testing. Progressives workflow You can inspect the result of each channel with the default values for color channels in Progressives. However, if you must customize the selection of color channels or number of sheets to print, you can do so by specifying the color channels in the Progressives pane in Color Setup. After specifying the color channels, print a job with the customized Progressives by setting the print option to On from the printer driver. NOTE: You cannot use the Progressives and Postflight features at the same time. A constraint is set for these print options from the printer driver. NOTE: Clearing plates in ImageViewer does not have an effect on a Progressives job printed from ImageViewer. It prints with the values specified in the Progressives pane. For more information, see “ImageViewer” on page 39. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 30 Printing with the default Progressives Print a job with the default Progressives by setting the Progressives print option to On from the printer driver. TO PRINT A JOB WITH THE DEFAULT PROGRESSIVES 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Job Info icon. 4 Select Progressives. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Print. The job is printed with the default Progressives. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 31 Setting up Progressives The Progressives feature is in the Progressives tab under the Color Setup tab in the Device Center. For more information about setting up custom Progressives, see Command WorkStation Help. Printing with custom Progressives After specifying the color channels, print a job with custom Progressives by setting the Progressives print option to On from the printer driver. NOTE: Alternatively, you can send a job with the default Progressives setting and change the print option setting using Command WorkStation Job Properties. Use the same procedure on page 30 to print a job with the Progressives option from the printer driver. The printed job reflects the Progressives settings you defined in the Progressives pane. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 32 Halftone Simulation When proofing, we recommend that you print in contone mode, which uses the best color in the Fiery system. For advanced proofing purposes, Fiery Graphic Arts Package offers usercontrolled halftone generation. Halftoned proofs simulate, with reasonable accuracy, the final dots imaged on films or plates for offset printing. The halftone screening feature allows you to define the custom screening functions applied to your print job. Halftone Simulation workflow You can select pre-set halftone screens to print jobs with good results. When you must customize the values for a halftone screen, define a custom halftone in your application or in Command WorkStation, and then select the screen in the Halftone Simulation print option from the printer driver. For information about the print option and the procedure to print with the pre-defined halftone screens, see the following section. For information about the Halftone Simulation pane and the procedure to specify custom halftone screen values, see Command WorkStation Help. Halftone Simulation print option Access the halftone screening feature through the Halftone Simulation print option. Select from the following option items: • Application Defined: Uses a pre-defined halftone screen specified in an application. For information about the supported applications, see page 35. • Newsprint: Uses a pre-defined halftone screen that looks and feels like a newspaper. • User Defined Screen1/2/3: Applies a user-defined halftone screen based on the settings in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. NOTE: Use Newsprint and User Defined Screen1/2/3 with all applications, including Microsoft Office. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 33 Printing with pre-defined halftone screens Use the following procedure to print a job with a pre-defined default halftone screen from the printer driver. TO PRINT A JOB WITH A DEFAULT HALFTONE SCREEN 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Image icon. 4 Select a pre-defined halftone screen from the Halftone Simulation list. For more information, see page 32. 5 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. 6 Click Print. The job is printed to the Fiery PRO80 with the pre-defined halftone screen. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 34 Setting up custom Halftone Simulation In Command WorkStation, the Halftone Simulation feature is in the Halftone Simulation tab under the Color Setup tab in Device Center. For more information about setting up custom Halftone Simulation screens, see Command WorkStation Help. Printing with custom halftone screens After specifying the halftone screen values for User Screen 1, User Screen 2, or User Screen 3, select a corresponding custom screen name from the printer driver. Use the same procedure on page 33 to print a job with a custom halftone screen. NOTE: Alternatively, you can send a job with a default halftone screen and change the print option setting using Command WorkStation Job Properties. The printed job reflects the settings you defined on the Halftone Simulation pane. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 35 Supported applications The following applications have been tested with Mac OS and Windows for compatibility with the Application Defined setting in the Halftone Simulation print option. Other applications should work as well, as long as they are using standard PostScript conversions on halftone screen definitions and the parameters used in the definitions are kept within the physical limitations of the printer. • Adobe Acrobat • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe PageMaker • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress Calibrating for custom halftone screens When color quality is important, make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is calibrated for the particular halftone screen that you use. Changing a halftone screen usually modifies the color response of the printer. The best color is achieved when an Output profile that is associated with the appropriate calibration response is selected at print time. However, when custom halftones are specified, the Fiery PRO80 does not have adequate information about the resulting color response. For this reason, achieving good color with custom halftone screens is often possible only when you perform custom halftone calibration and use a profile based on this custom halftone. Use the following procedure to calibrate the Fiery PRO80 for custom halftone screens. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 36 TO CALIBRATE THE FIERY PRO80 FOR CUSTOM HALFTONE SCREENS 1 Prepare the measurement instrument you use for calibration. 2 On the User Software DVD, open the folder that contains the custom halftone calibration files. The folder locations for Mac OS and Windows are as follows: Mac OS: Mac Color Files:Calibration Files:Halftone Calibration Files:Photoshop or Other Applications Windows: Windows Color Files\Calibration Files\Halftone Calibration Files\Photoshop or Other Applications The folder contains images of the measurement pages for various instruments and page sizes. If you print halftone screens only from Adobe Photoshop, open the Photoshop folder. Otherwise, open the Other Applications folder. NOTE: When opening or printing these files, do not “color-manage” using PostScript Color Management or ICC profiles that provide color conversions. 3 From Photoshop, open the image file that corresponds to your instrument and page size. From other applications, open a blank document and place the EPS file that matches your instrument and page size. The images were prepared for the final sheet page size. If you are placing an image, do so using no margins. Ignore warnings that the image may be clipped. NOTE: If you use these measurement pages with the Fiery PRO80 standard halftone screens, make sure to set the print option that controls the screen. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 37 4 Print the measurement page using your custom halftone and other print option settings. This page is now the custom calibration measurement page. You must print this measurement page with the CMYK/Grayscale Source print option set to ColorWise OFF, which prints the page without calibration. NOTE: To calibrate your printer, you must print CMYK patches in the raw state of the printer. Except for the Output Profile print option, the ColorWise print options are irrelevant and will be ignored. Use the Output Profile setting that corresponds to the type of paper you are using. To increase the speed and reliability of the calibration, print your measurement page, with the appropriate print option settings, to a PostScript file. The next time you calibrate, download this PostScript file. Retaining this file in the Hold queue of the Fiery PRO80 makes the calibration process faster. 5 Use the Calibrate feature in Command WorkStation to perform the calibration. NOTE: Do not use the Print button to generate the measurement page. Use the measurement page that you printed in step 4. For information about calibration, see Color Printing. SOFT PROOFING 38 SOFT PROOFING The Soft Proofing feature allows you to view accurate color previews of print jobs on a monitor. Use soft proofs to preview colors as they will appear when the job is printed. You access Soft Proofing through the Preview window in Command WorkStation. The Soft Proofing feature applies a specified color profile to the preview of a job to compensate for the unique display characteristics of your monitor. As a result, the preview provides a more accurate representation of how the job will appear when printed. For information about using Soft Proofing, see Command WorkStation Help. IMAGEVIEWER 39 IMAGEVIEWER ImageViewer allows you to soft proof and adjust colors in a job before it is printed. You can use the preview in ImageViewer to verify job placement, orientation, and content, as well as general color accuracy. If the job contains halftone screened settings, the preview shows a composite view of all separations at the dot level. You can select to display the plate data for each process color independently or in combination with the other colors, allowing inspection of individual plate data or a combination of any range of plates. Accessing ImageViewer Start ImageViewer from the Actions menu or Preview window of Command WorkStation. TO START IMAGEVIEWER FROM THE ACTIONS MENU 1 In Job Center in Command WorkStation, select the job that you want to preview. NOTE: ImageViewer recognizes only jobs that show processed/held (dark yellow) status. Processed/held jobs are also indicated by the raster job icon (page icon ringed with a halo). 2 If needed, choose Process and Hold from the Actions menu to move the job to processed/ held status. IMAGEVIEWER 40 3 To start ImageViewer, do one of the following: • Choose ImageViewer from the Actions menu. • Right-click the selected job and choose ImageViewer from the menu that appears. The ImageViewer main window appears. IMAGEVIEWER 41 TO START IMAGEVIEWER FROM THE PREVIEW WINDOW 1 In Job Center in Command WorkStation, select the job that you want to preview. NOTE: ImageViewer recognizes only jobs that show processed/held (dark yellow) status. 2 If needed, choose Process and Hold from the Actions menu to move the job to processed/held status. 3 Choose Preview from the Actions menu. Page thumbnails appear in the Preview window. 4 To start ImageViewer, select the thumbnail of the page that you want to soft proof, and click the ImageViewer button. The ImageViewer main window appears. For information about using ImageViewer, see Command WorkStation Help. 1 ImageViewer button 1 PREFLIGHT 42 PREFLIGHT The Preflight feature performs a simple check of the most common areas of error to ensure that the job will print successfully and to the expected quality on the selected printing device. The categories of errors that Preflight checks are: • Fonts • Spot Colors • Image Resolution • VDP Resources • Hairlines • Overprint • PostScript This feature is accessible from Command WorkStation. For more information about Preflight, see Command WorkStation Help. HOT FOLDERS FILTERS 43 HOT FOLDERS FILTERS This chapter describes the Hot Folders filters that convert various files to PostScript or PDF (Portable Document Format), or preflight certain files. Some of these filters are included in Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition and are available if Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is enabled. Hot Folders filters allow you to convert certain file formats to PostScript or PDF or to preflight files for conformity. File conversion and preflighting take place on your computer in the Hot Folders application, which saves Fiery PRO80 resources. You can print files directly from Hot Folders filters without starting the application from which they were created. The filters included with Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition are: • General – EPS – JPEG – PDF – TIFF • Color Separated – DCS – TIFF/IT-P1 • Special – CT/LW – ExportPS – PDF2Go For information about using the filters in the Hot Folders application, see Hot Folders Help. For information about operating systems that support Hot Folders, see Welcome. For information about installing the Hot Folders application, see Utilities. POSTFLIGHT 44 POSTFLIGHT The Postflight feature helps you determine why some printed jobs may not deliver expected color. Acting as a diagnostic and training tool for all users, it provides helpful global and object-specific information about how a job is actually received and processed by the Fiery PRO80. Use Postflight to troubleshoot color problems with a previously printed job or as a preventive measure. You can print the original document (or RIPped and previewed) with all objects (images, graphics, and text) color-coded. A report explains what color spaces are used in the job and what print options affect those spaces. The report also provides information about the printing environment, such as calibration date, time, and method. Print a Test Page to verify the condition of the printing environment. Postflight is a powerful analysis tool that enumerates in its reports not only those color spaces that are used by visible objects, but any color space called by a job. This can be very useful in diagnosing puzzling situations that may require correction. For example: using one specific combination of a printer driver, an OS, and a desktop publishing application emitting separations for plates, you might find that: 1) the Postflight color-coded pages show the Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow separations in the “DeviceGray” color space, while the Black separation is shown in the “DeviceCMYK” color space and 2) the Postflight report enumerates: DeviceGray, DeviceCMYK and DeviceRGB. What once required a PostScript expert to decipher can now be interpreted in minutes using Postflight reports. The Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow pages are defined in “DeviceGray”, the Black page is using the “K” channel of DeviceCMYK, and the job is calling for the RGB color space, without applying it on any user-visible object. POSTFLIGHT 45 About Postflight When the Postflight print option is set to values other than Off, it provides the following information to help you identify possible problems: Postflight Test Page, Postflight colorcoded pages, and Postflight reports. Postflight Test Page You can print the Postflight Test Page alone or in combination with the color-coded pages. The Test Page is printed using the exact same media and global settings (such as calibration) as your job. However, color objects on this page are printed independently of the userspecified source color definitions (such as CMYK simulation and RGB). If the color on this page is not accurate, the problem lies with the printing environment (such as the calibration, output profile, or print device). If the color on this page prints correctly but objects in your job do not print in expected colors, it is likely that the problem lies with the color setting specific to these objects. Problems with objects can be: wrong color values for text and graphics, bad quality images, or out-of-gamut colors. Postflight color-coded pages With this option, Postflight prepares a color-coded version of the original document that displays each object with a color corresponding to the color space that the Fiery PRO80 received for the object. The colors used to represent the color spaces for objects are as follows: • Gray objects: Gray • CMYK objects: Cyan • RGB objects: Red • Device-Independent objects: Indigo • Spot color objects: Yellow By reviewing the colors for all objects, you can identify the print option settings that affect the color conversion of the objects and make appropriate modifications. POSTFLIGHT 46 Postflight reports You can print reports on color-coded pages, either alone or combined with the color-coded document. These reports are printed on the Fiery PRO80 default paper size (Letter for US, A4 for metric) and use the default calibrated color mode. The reports provide a document header with information (such as job name, date and time printed, and user name), a ColorWise global settings page, and object-specific settings pages. All pages include the job name, postflight date/time, and pagination in the bottom margin. • ColorWise global settings page provides information that affects every object in a job, such as Calibration Set, the date the Fiery PRO80 was calibrated, the method used for calibration, and the output profile that was used. • Object-specific settings pages provide a list of the settings that were used to process every object in each color space, thus suggesting the locations to correct problems. For example, if you see a problem with an object that is displayed in Cyan in a color-coded page, review the settings listed in the CMYK Objects page and try changing those settings. • Spot colors page lists all spot colors. For spot colors, the Postflight report lists the colors that are used in a job. It also indicates whether these colors are defined in the Fiery PRO80. When a spot color is defined in the Fiery PRO80, a patch is printed next to the color name. When a color is not defined in the Fiery PRO80, a white patch with an X is printed. POSTFLIGHT 47 Important notes on Postflight reports The main purpose of Postflight is to help you detect, diagnose, and prevent color-related problems. In contrast to generic preflight software, which attempts to predict how a job would be processed, a postflighted job is fully processed by the Fiery PRO80, allowing accurate reporting on the settings with which the job processed. This Postflight feature is especially useful in cases where a workflow that was used to submit a job inadvertently converts colors. This conversion occurs with some printer drivers, printing options, and conversions to PDF. This report focuses on color processing and does not list every printing option that affects your job. For more information about the ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. NOTE: Postflight reports list only those color spaces that were submitted to the Fiery PRO80 with your job. You may occasionally find that a job produces a Postflight report that includes information about color spaces that you cannot locate in the job’s color-coded pages. This occurs when an object in the color space is used in the job but is masked by another object, when an object is very light (for example, 0% of a spot color), or when the specific application or printer driver asks the Fiery PRO80 to process a particular color space but does not use it for user-visible objects. NOTE: A Postflight report contains only one page on global settings, and it can include only one Test Page. Therefore, Postflight cannot describe an entire job accurately unless all pages are printed with the same options and on the same media. This is the case, for instance, with Mixed Media jobs, because they can use multiple output profiles, up to one profile per media in the job. If the page range is set to the pages that use one media only, Postflight produces reliable results for the specified range. NOTE: Postflight is a “reporting” feature that is designed for diagnostic purposes. It is not designed for use with production features such as VDP and Imposition. For high-volume applications in production environments, use Postflight only on the individual pages that need testing. POSTFLIGHT 48 Postflight print option Access the Postflight feature through the Postflight print option. The following values are available for the Postflight print option: • Off (Default) • Concise Report • Test Page • Color-Coded Pages • All Components (Color-Coded document pages, Test Page, and Concise Report) NOTE: Select a portion of a job to print the Postflight pages by selecting the appropriate page range of a job from the printer driver. Postflight workflow The default settings in the ColorWise print options are such that in most cases you should not have to change them. However, there may be times when you receive unexpected colors for your job. Postflight is a procedure performed after you print a document and receive unexpected or inadequate color. If you have access to Command WorkStation, Postflight also helps you catch color problems before you actually print. Postflight processes your job and collects information about the color objects throughout. The information is then displayed in Color-Coded document pages, a Test Page, and a Concise Report. NOTE: The background defined in the Paper Simulation is not indicated as a CMYK object in the Postflight reports. For more information about Paper Simulation, see page 14. NOTE: You cannot use Postflight at the same time that you use the following features: Progressives, Substitute Colors, or Combine Separations. Constraints are set for these print options from the printer driver. POSTFLIGHT 49 The following scenarios show how Postflight can be helpful to users who demand high color quality. To diagnose an unexpected color (see page 50) Use Postflight to diagnose unexpected color in a job, or determine which print or calibration settings apply to a job. To check the calibration status prior to printing a job (see page 52) Consider the following before printing a job: • The FieryPRO80 may include many calibration sets. Which calibration set applies to my job? • When was the Fiery PRO80 last calibrated? • Which instrument was used for the last calibration? To check the quality of the output profile (see page 53) If you are considering using a new paper for which you do not have a custom profile, or if you suspect that the output profile for your print device may not precisely describe its color behavior, check your output profile by printing the Postflight Test Page. To diagnose a color problem of a specific object (see page 54) When experts have verified that the calibration is correct and that the global settings, including the output profile, are correct, but the color of a specific object is still not as intended, you can print a color-coded document and diagnose the problem. The detailed procedures of these scenarios are described in the following sections. NOTE: For each of the following procedures, instead of printing the report to the Fiery PRO80, you can also send it to the Hold queue of the Fiery PRO80 and preview the information (of a job with raster data) in ImageViewer. For more information about ImageViewer, see ImageViewer. To view the color of a job correctly, you must set your monitor and monitor profile correctly. For more information about the monitor and monitor profiles, see page 13. NOTE: The procedures for printing a job from a Windows and a Mac OS computer are similar. POSTFLIGHT 50 Scenario 1: Diagnose an unexpected color Use the following procedure to print a job with Postflight set to Off. TO PRINT A JOB 1 Open a job from your application. 2 Choose Print. 3 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 4 Click each option icon, and specify the values for each print option. 5 Click the Job Info icon. 6 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 7 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. 8 Click Print. The job is printed to the Fiery PRO80. After you print a job, use the following procedure to diagnose an unexpected color and print the job with edited color settings. POSTFLIGHT 51 TO DIAGNOSE AN UNEXPECTED COLOR AND PRINT WITH EDITED COLOR SETTINGS 1 Click the Job Info icon. 2 Choose All Components from the Postflight menu. For information about the components of Postflight, see page 45. 3 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. 4 Click Print. Postflight Test Page, color-coded document pages, and Postflight Reports are printed. 5 Review all Postflight pages. For information about the Postflight pages, see page 45. 6 Make appropriate changes based on all Postflight pages. For more information about the changes, see the following section. 7 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 8 Click OK. 9 Click Print. The job with the edited color settings is printed to the Fiery PRO80. 10 Return to Step 1, if needed. Repeat the steps until you get satisfactory color results. Making changes After reviewing the Postflight information, determine what changes are necessary and apply the changes. Depending on your printing environment, the condition of the print device, and the color settings, possible changes are as follows: • Correct problems with the print device (see the documentation that accompanies the print device). • Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 (see Color Printing). • Edit the colors of the output profile with Command WorkStation (see Command WorkStation Help). • Change the default settings in Command WorkStation (see Command WorkStation Help). • Change the job specific print option settings using Command WorkStation Job Properties. POSTFLIGHT 52 Scenario 2: Check the calibration status Use the following procedure to check the calibration status prior to printing a job. TO CHECK THE CALIBRATION STATUS AND PRINT WITH THE OPTIMUM CALIBRATION CONDITION 1 Click the Job Info icon. 2 Choose Concise Report from the Postflight menu. For information about Postflight reports, see page 46. 3 Click OK. 4 Click Print. The Concise Report page is printed. 5 Review the information in the ColorWise global settings page. 6 Perform calibration, if needed. If service has been performed on the print device since the last calibration, or calibration has not been performed, perform calibration using the Calibration Set specified in the Postflight report. For more information about calibration, see Color Printing. 7 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 8 Click OK. 9 Click Print. 10 The job is printed to the newly calibrated Fiery PRO80. POSTFLIGHT 53 Scenario 3: Check the quality of the output profile Use the following procedure to check the quality of the output profile of the print device. TO CHECK THE QUALITY OF OUTPUT PROFILE AND PRINT WITH THE OPTIMUM OUTPUT PROFILE 1 Click the Job Info icon. 2 Choose Test Page from the Postflight menu. For information about the Postflight Test Page, see page 45. 3 Click OK. 4 Click Print. The Postflight Test Page is printed to the Fiery PRO80. 5 Review the quality of the color on the Postflight Test Page. NOTE: Make sure that this page was printed with the same media and print option settings as the job. 6 Review the instructions on the Postflight Test Page. 7 Edit the color of the output profile, or create a profile, if needed. It may be necessary to customize the output profile or create one to get optimal results on the media the job is using. 8 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 9 Click OK. 10 Click Print. The job is printed to the Fiery PRO80 with the edited or newly created output profile. POSTFLIGHT 54 Scenario 4: Diagnose a color problem of a specific object Use the following procedure to diagnose a color problem. TO DIAGNOSE A COLOR PROBLEM OF A SPECIFIC OBJECT AND PRINT WITH THE EDITED COLOR SETTINGS 1 Click the Job Info icon. 2 Choose Color-Coded Pages from the Postflight menu. For information about Postflight color-coded pages, see page 45. 3 Click OK. 4 Click Print. Postflight color-coded pages are printed to the Fiery PRO80. NOTE: Alternatively, you can send the Postflight color-coded pages to the Hold queue of the Fiery PRO80 and preview them using ImageViewer. To preview the pages using ImageViewer, make sure that your monitor is set up according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and that the correct monitor profile is specified for your monitor. For information about monitor profiles, see page 13. 5 Review the Postflight color-coded pages. 6 Make changes to the color settings, if needed. For information about the ColorWise print options for various color spaces, see Color Printing. NOTE: Use the Color-Coded Pages Only setting to send a job to another print device that has a specific color-space requirement. For example, a document targeted to a CMYK-only press must have only Cyan-colored objects. 7 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 8 Click OK. 9 Click Print. The job is printed to the Fiery PRO80 with the edited color settings. MULTIPLE PLATE SEPARATIONS 55 MULTIPLE PLATE SEPARATIONS The Multiple Plate Separations feature allows you to combine the multiple pre-separated color plates of a PostScript job into a composite color print. It supports: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and one or more spot colors. The results of combining the multiple plates are predictable and accurate, regardless of the original application used. This feature also fully supports DCS 2.0 file formats when included in a PostScript print job from a page layout application. Multiple plate separations workflow Use the following procedure to print a composite color print from the printer driver. NOTE: The procedures for printing a composite color print from a Windows and a Mac OS computer are similar. TO PRINT A COMPOSITE COLOR PRINT 1 Open a color-separated document in a supported application. 2 Choose Print. 3 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 4 Click the Color icon. 5 Select Combine Separations. 6 Click OK, and then click Print. A composite color print is printed to the Fiery PRO80. MULTIPLE PLATE SEPARATIONS 56 Combine Separations print option Access the Multiple Plates Separations feature through the Combine Separations print option from the printer driver. The following values are available for the Combine Separations print option: • Off (Default) • On Supported applications The following applications have been tested with Mac OS and Windows for compatibility with the Multiple Plates Separations feature: • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe PageMaker • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress PAPER SIMULATION 57 PAPER SIMULATION The Paper Simulation feature gives you the benefit of the absolute colorimetric rendering that renders the white point of the source color space as a visible color in the output profile color space. Paper Simulation workflow Use the following procedure to print a job with the fixed Paper Simulation feature On. NOTE: The procedures for setting the Paper Simulation print option from a Windows and a Mac OS computer are similar. TO PRINT WITH THE FIXED PAPER SIMULATION FEATURE ON 1 Choose Print from an application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Color icon, and then click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit dialog box appears. PAPER SIMULATION 58 4 Select Paper Simulation and click OK. 5 Click OK, and then click Print. The job is printed with the fixed Paper Simulation feature. Paper Simulation print option Turn the Paper Simulation feature on or off through the print option from the printer driver. • On: Performs Absolute Colorimetric rendering. • Off (Default): Performs Relative Colorimetric rendering. UGRA/FOGRA MEDIA WEDGE 59 UGRA/FOGRA MEDIA WEDGE Ugra (the Graphic Technology Research Association of Switzerland) and FOGRA (the Graphic Technology Research Association of Germany) are organizations that support standardization and quality control. Together, they developed the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge CMYK v2.0, a control device used to evaluate hard copy proofs. One version of the the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge, which is supported by the Fiery PRO80 with Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition enabled, is customized for the ES-1000 spectrophotometer. The Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge, as printed on the Fiery PRO80, includes the standard color patches as well as the printer resolution, Fiery PRO80 model name, and other static information required by Ugra/FOGRA. Adding the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge to any job allows you to check the color accuracy and consistency of the printer by measuring the colors in the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge with the ES-1000 and supporting software, and comparing the measurements to reference values. Printing the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge There are two ways to include the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge in a job: • By incorporating the Ugra FOGRA-MediaWedge V2.2x.EPS file in the source document. This file is available on the User Software DVD, in the Color Bars folder inside the Windows Color Files folder or Mac Color Files folder. • By enabling the Control Bar print option. The Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge is the default Control Bar image. For more information about the Control Bar print option, see “Control Bar” on page 22. NOTE: This version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge is different from the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge used in the Integrated Altona Visual Test. For more information about the Integrated Altona Visual Test, see Integrated Altona Visual Test. UGRA/FOGRA MEDIA WEDGE 60 The Ugra FOGRA-MediaWedge V2.2x.EPS file is not an ordinary EPS file. Printing this file is supported only on a Fiery PRO80 with the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition enabled. The file will not print if modified and saved as another version. You cannot currently use Compose, Impose, or QDM to embed the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge image in a PDF file. Reading the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge This version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge is optimized for the ES-1000. Other stripreading or spot-reading spectrophotometers may be used, if supported by their applications. EFI Color Verifier (part of Fiery Color Profiler Suite) is the quality control application officially supported to measure the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge as printed by the Fiery PRO80. Reference measurements are not supplied with the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge. With the appropriate software, such as Fiery Color Profiler Suite, you can create your own reference measurements, extract them from reference ICC profiles, or load them from standards. Using the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge for quality control You can use the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge to compare digital proofs with print standards, print runs with print standards, and digital proofs with print runs. It was originally designed to check the accuracy and consistency of CMYK values when compared to the international ISO 12642 standard, but this is not its exclusive usage: when the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge is printed in a job, you can measure the color accuracy and consistency of the output device for any printing condition, whether CMYK simulation or device CMYK color. INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 61 INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST The Altona Test Suite is a project of the European Color Initiative (ECI). The test suite is suited for evaluating RIPs as well as other components in composite PDF workflows for print proofing or print production. Even if you are not yet using PDF/X3, you can use the Altona Test Suite to identify the weaknesses and limitations of a PDF workflow. The Integrated Altona Visual Test feature of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition allows you to verify the level of PDF/X support provided by the software and hardware used in a composite PDF workflow. You perform this test by printing the free version of the Altona Visual Test document on the Fiery PRO80 using the PDF workflow you want to verify. The Fiery PRO80 adds information to the printed output that can be used to determine: • If the workflow used to send PDF documents to the Fiery PRO80 is PDF/X compatible. • If a PDF/X workflow is compatible with the limited interpretation of PDF/X by Altona. • If the color quality of a PDF/X workflow meets a standard. The Integrated Altona Visual Test simplifies the setup and verification of PDF workflows. You can verify Altona PDF/X compliance without having to purchase the Altona Test Suite Application Kit. Altona Visual Test file You can obtain the free version of the Altona Visual Test file that you need for the Integrated Altona Visual Test at the ECI website (www.eci.org). Go to the Downloads area and download altona_visual_1v2a_x3.pdf. This PDF file must be imported to the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation or Hot Folders, not printed through the printer driver. The printer driver converts a PDF file to PostScript, and therefore some PDF/X embedded information is lost. A PDF/X workflow cannot include printing through a printer driver. INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 62 For PDF/X compliance as tested by Altona, set the following settings for the Altona Visual Test job in Command WorkStation Job Properties: Scaling the Altona Visual Test file and any file designed with resolution-dependent objects often leads to artifacts such as moirés. For more information about these print options, except for Scale, see Color Printing. For more information about Scale, see Printing. If you use all of these settings, the Altona Visual Test File output will indicate PDF/X compliance as tested by Altona. Interpreting test results The Altona Visual Test file produces the printed page shown below. The Fiery PRO80 inserts the test results in the lower left area. Print option Setting Location in Job Properties PDF/X Output Intent Enabled Expert Color Settings (in Color) Composite Overprint Enabled Color RGB Source None Expert Color Settings (in Color) Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source Enabled Expert Color Settings (in Color) Scale 100% (no scaling) Layout 1 Test result area 1 INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 63 The following table indicates how to read the test results: If the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge, shown in the figure below, is printed in the test result area, the workflow is PDF/X compatible for Altona testing. It is therefore correct to visually and colorimetrically inspect the page. If you have a spectrophotometer, such as the ES-1000, and quality control software, such as EFI Color Verifier, you can proceed with measurements to evaluate the degree of color matching. The version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge inserted by the Fiery PRO80 is scaled and positioned for easy reading by a strip-reading instrument. NOTE: Be sure to use the free version of the Altona Visual Test file, not the purchased one. The purchased version always includes a version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge in the bottom left area, whether the workflow is valid or not. In addition, the version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge printed by the purchased version cannot be read conveniently by a strip-reading instrument. The Integrated Altona Visual Test confirms if your workflow maintains PDF integrity and if it produces valid output that can be used for further analysis and interpretation. To formally determine the level of PDF/X compliance, refer to Adobe published documentation. For information on how to interpret printed Altona pages, refer to the documentation available from the European Color Initiative (ECI). For information on the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge and how to use it for quality control in user designed workflows, see Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge. Test result Indicates Blank File printed to a Fiery PRO80 without the Integrated Altona Visual Test feature or workflow is not PDF/X compatible. A message indicating that the test file was not processed with optimal settings for Altona Workflow is not compatible with PDF/X as tested by Altona. Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge (a standard set of color bars) Workflow is compatible with PDF/X as tested by Altona. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 10 20 40 60 80 100 User: Version EFI 2007 Device: EFI Fiery Demo Copyright Fogra 2007 Liz.: 2FO180107 Resolution: 600 dpi Ugra/Fogra-Medienkeil CMYK-EPS V2.2x ID: 85377533 INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 64 Using a PDF/X workflow not compatible with Altona If text appears in the test result area instead of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge, you cannot use the page for further Altona testing because the workflow is not PDF/X compatible as tested by Altona. However, the Fiery PRO80 is not limited to the Altona interpretation of PDF/X. In particular, if you are using the Fiery PRO80 for production printing rather than proofing, you might choose job settings that are not PDF/X compatible as tested by Altona. For example, you might choose to: • Disable the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option in production PDF/X workflows, to exploit the maximum gamut of the printer. • Scale down the document to increase margins or scale it up to reduce margins. • Use FieryPRO80-specific options, such as Image Smoothing, that would alter the images in the Altona Visual Test file but would enhance your production output. To get the best possible output from the Altona Test Suite, refer to the information about the Altona Visual Test File at http://www.efi.com/support/production/fiery/production/how-to/sys8/ Altona helps verify PDF/X compliance, with some bias towards ISO color standards. We recommend that you do not limit yourself to ISO color. PDF/X lets you define your own color spaces and take advantage of the wider color gamut often possible with digital printers. For more information about PDF/X and how to create compliant documents, refer to documents and information available from Adobe. INDEX 65 A Altona 59 Auto Trapping about 26 configurable 26 configuring 28 default 27 printing 28 workflow 26 C color accuracy 59 color consistency 59 colors, proofing 38, 39 Combine Separations print option 56 Command WorkStation Auto Trapping configuration 28 Control Bar feature 25 halftone calibration 37 Halftone Simulation feature 34 Paper Simulation white point editing 15 Progressives feature 31 Two-Color Print Mapping definition 19 Control Bar about 22 custom 25 default control bar 23 print option 23 printing 25 workflow 23 custom Control Bar 25 E EFI Color Verifier 60, 63 F Fiery Color Profiler Suite 60 FOGRA 59 G graphic arts features 9, 10 H halftone calibration files 36 Halftone Simulation Application Defined 32 calibrating 35 customizing 34 Newsprint 32 print option 32 printing 33, 34 User Defined Screen 32 workflow 32 Hot Folders filters 43 I ImageViewer, accessing 39 Integrated Altona Visual Test 59, 61 J jobs, viewing soft proof of 38, 39 M monitor profile, specifying 13 monitor, setting up 13 Multiple plate separations workflow 55 O output profile Paper Simulation 15, 17, 57 Postflight 49, 51, 53 Spot-On 20 P Paper Simulation fixed values 14, 57 Full (Output GCR) 17 print option 15, 58 printing 16, 57 white point editing 15 workflow 14, 57 PDF/X compatibility 61 PDF/X Output Intent 62 INDEX INDEX 66 Postflight about 45 accurate reporting 47 calibration status 49, 52 color problems 49, 54 color-coded pages 45, 54 ColorWise global settings page 46 ColorWise print options 47 Concise Report 52 global settings page 52 Hold queue 54 ImageViewer 54 information 51 making changes 51 monitor profile 54 Object-specific settings pages 46 Paper Simulation 48 print option 48 quality of output profile 49, 53 Spot colors 46 Test Page 45, 53 unexpected colors 49, 50 vs. Combine Separations 48 vs. Progressives 48 vs. Substitute Colors LEGAL NOTICES This product documentation is protected by copyright, and all rights are reserved. No part of it may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means for any purpose without express prior written consent from Electronics for Imaging, Inc. (“EFI”), except as expressly permitted herein. Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of EFI. This product documentation is provided in conjunction with the EFI software (“Software”) and any other EFI product described in this documentation. The Software is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of the EFI Software End User License Agreement set forth below. Patents This product may be covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5,109,241, 5,150,454, 5,170,182, 5,212,546, 5,260,878, 5,276,490, 5,278,599, 5,335,040, 5,343,311, 5,398,107, 5,424,754, 5,442,429, 5,459,560, 5,467,446, 5,506,946, 5,517,334, 5,537,516, 5,543,940, 5,553,200, 5,563,689, 5,565,960, 5,583,623, 5,596,416, 5,615,314, 5,619,624, 5,625,712, 5,640,228, 5,666,436, 5,682,421, 5,729,665, 5,745,657, 5,760,913, 5,799,232, 5,818,645, 5,835,788, 5,859,711, 5,867,179, 5,937,153, 5,940,186, 5,959,867, 5,970,174, 5,982,937, 5,995,724, 6,002,795, 6,025,922, 6,035,103, 6,041,200, 6,065,041, 6,081,281, 6,112,665, 6,116,707, 6,122,407, 6,134,018, 6,141,120, 6,166,821, 6,173,286, 6,185,335, 6,201,614, 6,209,010, 6,215,562, 6,219,155, 6,219,659, 6,222,641, 6,224,048, 6,225,974, 6,226,419, 6,238,105, 6,239,895, 6,256,108, 6,269,190, 6,271,937, 6,278,901, 6,279,009, 6,289,122, 6,292,270, 6,299,063, 6,310,697, 6,321,133, 6,327,047, 6,327,050, 6,327,052, 6,330,071, 6,330,363, 6,331,899, 6,337,746, 6,340,975, 6,341,017, 6,341,018, 6,341,307, 6,347,256, 6,348,978, 6,356,359, 6,366,918, 6,369,895, 6,381,036, 6,400,443, 6,429,949, 6,449,393, 6,457,823, 6,476,927, 6,487,568, 6,490,696, 6,501,565, 6,519,053, 6,539,323, 6,543,871, 6,546,364, 6,549,294, 6,549,300, 6,550,991, 6,552,815, 6,559,958, 6,572,293, 6,590,676, 6,599,325, 6,606,165, 6,616,355, 6,618,157, 6,633,396, 6,636,326, 6,637,958, 6,643,317, 6,647,149, 6,657,741, 6,660,103, 6,662,199, 6,678,068, 6,679,640, 6,687,016, 6,707,563, 6,741,262, 6,748,471, 6,753,845, 6,757,436, 6,757,440, 6,778,700, 6,781,596, 6,786,578, 6,816,276, 6,825,943, 6,832,865, 6,836,342, 6,850,335, 6,856,428, 6,857,803, 6,859,832, 6,866,434, 6,874,860, 6,879,409, 6,885,477, 6,888,644, 6,905,189, 6,930,795, 6,950,110, 6,956,966, 6,962,449, 6,967,728, 6,974,269, 6,977,752, 6,978,299, 6,992,792, 7,002,700, 7,023,570, 7,027,187, 7,027,655, 7,031,015, 7,046,391, 7,054,015, 7,058,231, 7,064,153, 7,073,901, 7,081,969, 7,090,327, 7,093,046, 7,095,518, 7,095,528, 7,097,369, 7,099,027, 7,105,585, 7,116,444, 7,177,045, 7,177,049, 7,177,472, 7,204,484, 7,206,082, 7,212,312, 7,229,225, 7,233,397, 7,233,409, 7,239,403, 7,245,400, 7,248,752, 7,259,768, 7,259,893, 7,280,090, 7,296,157, 7,301,665, 7,301,667, 7,301,671, 7,302,095, 7,302,103, 7,304,753, 7,307,761, 7,342,686, 7,343,438, 7,349,124, 7,365,105, 7,367,060, 7,367,559, 7,389,452, 7,396,119, 7,396,864, 7,397,583, 7,397,961, 7,426,033, 7,431,436, 7,433,078, 7,453,596, 7,460,265, 7,460,721, 7,461,377, 7,463,374, 7,466,441, 7,471,403, 7,480,070, 7,489,422, 7,495,812, 7,506,253, 7,522,311, 7,522,770, 7,528,974, 7,532,347, 7,552,207, 7,552,923, 7,554,687, 7,562,957, 7,564,583, 7,574,545, 7,574,546, 7,579,388, 7,587,336, 7,587,468, 7,598,964, 7,600,867, 7,630,106, 7,636,180, 7,648,293, RE36,947, RE38,732, D341,131, D406,117, D416,550, D417,864, D419,185, D426,206, D439,851, D444,793. Trademarks Auto-Count, BioVu, BioWare, ColorWise, Command WorkStation, Digital StoreFront, DocBuilder, DocBuilder Pro, DocStream, EDOX, the EFI logo, Electronics for Imaging, Fabrivu, Fiery, the Fiery logo, Fiery Driven, the Fiery Driven logo, Inkware, Jetrion, MicroPress, OneFlow, PressVu, Printellect, PrinterSite, PrintFlow, PrintMe, PrintSmith Site, Prograph, RIP-While-Print, Ultravu, and VUTEk are registered trademarks of Electronics for Imaging, Inc. in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and/or certain other foreign jurisdictions. BestColor is a registered trademark of Electronics for Imaging GmbH in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. AutoCal, Balance, ColorPASS, Dynamic Wedge, EFI, Estimate, Fast-4, Fiery Link, Fiery Prints, Fiery Spark, the Fiery Prints logo, FreeForm, Hagen, Logic, Pace, Printcafe, PrintSmith, Print to Win, PSI, PSI Flexo, Rastek, RIPChips, Screenproof, SendMe, Splash, Spot-On, UltraTex, UV Series 50, VisualCal, and WebTools are trademarks of Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Best, the Best logo, Colorproof, PhotoXposure, Remoteproof, and Screenproof are trademarks of Electronics for Imaging GmbH. All other terms and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners, and are hereby acknowledged. LEGAL NOTICES 2 Third-Party Notifications APPLE, INC. (“APPLE”) MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE APPLE SOFTWARE. APPLE DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE, OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE APPLE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE APPLE SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Apple’s liability to you for actual damages from any cause whatsoever, and regardless of the form of the action (whether in contract, tort [including negligence], product liability, or otherwise), will be limited to $50. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the Software or in the documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2001. Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of PANTONE color data and/or software. Certified PDF is a registered trademark of Enfocus, patent pending. PitStop Professional, PitStop Extreme, PitStop Server, Instant PDF, StatusCheck, CertifiedPDF.net, Instant Barcode, and PDF Workflow Suite are product names of Enfocus. Enfocus products and the use of Enfocus products are under license from Markzware under U.S. Patent No. 5,963,641. Enfocus is an EskoArtwork Company. The Software may contain various components which are subject to different licenses, including the EFI modified version of the Linux kernel binary image, certain LGPL libraries, certain other open source libraries and tools, and software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (www.apache.org). By using the Software or any of the incorporated components, you agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of their respective licenses. The respective copyright notices, acknowledgments and licenses can be found on the Fiery WebTools home page. As a reminder, the term "Software" as used in the EFI Software End User License Agreement does not include any open source software that is contained in the product, and the terms of the EFI Software End User License Agreement do not apply to open source software. Regulatory Notices and Markings THE FOLLOWING REGULATORY NOTICES AND MARKINGS APPLY IF THE EFI PRODUCT YOU RECEIVED INCLUDES EQUIPMENT. WARNING: FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Refer to the Class Compliance sticker affixed to the back of your Fiery (or, in the case of embedded systems, to the sticker affixed to the print engine) to identify the appropriate classification (A or B, below) for this product. FCC Class A Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Industry Canada Class A Notice This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis de Conformation Classe A de l’Industrie Canada Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. LEGAL NOTICES 3 FCC Class B Declaration of Conformity This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. In order to maintain compliance with FCC regulations, shielded cables must be used with this equipment. Operation with non-approved equipment or unshielded cables is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. The user is cautioned that changes and modifications made to the equipment without the approval of the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Industry Canada Class B Notice This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis de Conformation Classe B de l’Industrie Canada Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. RFI Compliance Notice This equipment has been tested concerning compliance with the relevant RFI protection requirements both individually and on a system level (to simulate normal operation conditions). However, it is possible that these RFI Requirements are not met under certain unfavorable conditions in other installations. It is the user who is responsible for compliance of his particular installation. Dieses Gerät wurde sowohl einzeln als auch in einer Anlage, die einen normalen Anwendungsfall nachbildet, auf die Einhaltung der Funkentstörbestimmungen geprüft. Es ist jedoch möglich, dass die Funkentstörbestimmungen unter ungünstigen Umständen bei anderen Gerätekombinationen nicht eingehalten werden. Für die Einhaltung der Funkentstörbestimmungen einer gesamten Anlage, in der dieses Gerät betrieben wird, ist der Betreiber verantwortlich. Compliance with applicable regulations depends on the use of shielded cables. It is the user who is responsible for procuring the appropriate cables. Die Einhaltung zutreffender Bestimmungen hängt davon ab, dass geschirmte Ausführungen benützt werden. Für die Beschaffung richtiger Ausführungen ist der Betreiber verantwortlich. CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) This product complies with the following EU directives: 93/68/EEC, 2002/96/EC, and 2006/66/EC. This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union. LEGAL NOTICES 4 EFI SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY. THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND ELECTRONICS FOR IMAGING, INC. (“EFI”) REGARDING THE EFI SOFTWARE (“SOFTWARE”). YOU AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS LIKE ANY WRITTEN NEGOTIATED AGREEMENT SIGNED BY YOU. BY CLICKING TO ACKNOWLEDGE YOUR AGREEMENT DURING REVIEW OF AN ELECTRONIC VERSION OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT OR BY INSTALLING, COPYING OR BY OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU AND ANY LEGAL ENTITY (E.G., SYSTEM INTEGRATOR, CONSULTANT OR CONTRACTOR) THAT INSTALLS OR USES THE SOFTWARE ON YOUR BEHALF. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE, AND RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS REFUND POLICIES. NOTICE TO PARTIES THAT ACT AS AN AGENT OF AN END USER OR OTHERWISE DO NOT INTEND TO BE END USERS OF THE SOFTWARE: IF YOU CLICK TO ACCEPT AN ELECTRONIC VERSION OF THIS AGREEMENT, OR INSTALL, COPY OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE AS AN AGENT ACTING ON BEHALF OF THE INTENDED LICENSEE, THEN YOU WILL BE DEEMED TO BE THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE AND BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT UNLESS YOU (I) DELIVER THE TANGIBLE MEDIA CONTAINING THE SOFTWARE AND THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT TO THE LICENSEE PRIOR TO PROVIDING THE LICENSEE ACCESS TO THE SOFTWARE, AND (II) REMOVE AND DESTROY ANY COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE IN YOUR POSSESSION. IF YOU HAVE EXECUTED A SEPARATE SIGNED WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH EFI FOR THE SOFTWARE, IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICTING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BETWEEN SUCH WRITTEN AGREEMENT AND THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE WRITTEN AGREEMENT SHALL CONTROL. License EFI grants you a limited, non-exclusive license to use the Software solely in accordance with the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, solely as specified in the EFI product documentation, and solely with the product(s) specified in the EFI product documentation (“Product(s)”). Some third-party materials distributed with the Software may be subject to other terms and conditions, which are typically found in a separate license agreement or “Read Me” file located near such third party materials. The term “Software” as used in this License Agreement shall mean the EFI software (including software provided by third party suppliers) and all documentation, downloads, on-line materials, bug fixes, patches, releases, release notes, updates, upgrades, technical support materials, and information regarding the EFI software. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement shall apply to and govern your use of all such items; however EFI may provide other written terms with an update, release or upgrade. The Software is licensed, not sold. You may use the Software solely for the purposes described in the EFI product documentation. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend, or otherwise distribute the Software or use the Software in any time sharing, service bureau, or similar arrangement. Certain Software may only be installed at a single, physical location and any relocation of such Software will require EFI’s written consent. You may not make or have made, or permit to be made, any copies of the Software or portions thereof, except one (1) backup or archive copy for the purposes permitted in this License Agreement; provided, however, that under no circumstances may you make or have made, or permit to be made, any copies of any portion of the Software that is included on any portion of the controller board or hardware of a product. Any copies of the Software that you are permitted to make pursuant to this Agreement must contain the same copyright and other proprietary notices that appear on or in the Software. EFI may occasionally verify the number of copies and configurations, and/or the physical location of Software in use by you. Any such verification shall be conducted during normal business hours and in such a manner as not to unreasonably interfere with your normal business activities. In the event such verification discloses an underpayment of fees, you shall promptly pay such underpaid fees to EFI in accordance with EFI’s then-current price list. You agree not to localize, translate, disassemble, decompile, decrypt, reverse engineer, unbundle, repackage, discover the source code of, modify, create derivative works of, or in any way change any part of the Software. As between you and EFI, you assume all risk and are solely responsible for any and all liability resulting from your use of the Software in a way that violates (or that produces content that violates) any law or the rights of others including, without limitation, laws concerning copyright infringement or privacy. LEGAL NOTICES 5 Intellectual Property Rights You acknowledge and agree that all rights, title, and interest, including all intellectual property rights, in and relating to the Software, all EFI Products, and all copies, modifications, and derivative works thereof, are solely owned by and shall remain with EFI and its suppliers. Except for the express limited license granted in this License Agreement, no right or license of any kind is granted. You receive no rights or license under any patents, copyrights, trade secrets, trademarks (whether registered or unregistered), or other intellectual property. You agree not to adopt, register, or attempt to register any EFI trademark or trade name or any confusingly similar mark, URL, internet domain name, or symbol as your own name or the name of your affiliates or products, and agree not to take any other action which impairs or reduces the trademark rights of EFI or its suppliers. Excluded License Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, you are not licensed to (and you agree that you will not) integrate or use the Software in any manner that would cause the Software in whole or in part to become subject to any of the terms of an Excluded License. “Excluded License” means any license that requires as a condition of use, modification and/ or distribution of software subject to the Excluded License, that such software or other software combined and/or distributed with such software be (i) disclosed or distributed in source code form; (ii) licensed for the purpose of making derivative works; or (iii) redistributable at no charge. Updates If the Software is an upgrade or update to a previous version of the Software, you must possess a valid license to such previous version in order to use such upgrade or update. All upgrades and updates are provided to you on a license exchange basis. You agree that by using an upgrade or update you voluntarily terminate your right to use any previous version of the Software. As an exception, you may continue to use previous versions of the Software after you use the upgrade or update only to assist you in the transition to the upgrade or update, provided that the upgrade or update and the previous versions are installed on the same device. Upgrades and updates may be licensed to you by EFI with additional or different terms. Confidentiality The Software, including its structure, organization, and code, constitutes valuable trade secrets and confidential, proprietary information of EFI and its suppliers and you may not distribute or disclose the Software. You may, however, permanently transfer all of your rights under this License Agreement to another person or legal entity provided that: (1) such a transfer is authorized under all applicable export laws and regulations, including the laws and regulations of the United States, including the United States Export Administration Regulations; (2) you transfer to the person or entity all of the Software (including all copies, updates, upgrades, media, printed documentation, and this License Agreement); (3) you retain no copies of the Software, including no backup, archival, or other copies, however stored; and (4) the recipient agrees to all of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement. Termination Unauthorized use, copying, or disclosure of the Software, or any breach of this License Agreement will result in automatic termination of this license and will make available to EFI other legal remedies. In the event of termination, you must destroy all copies of the Software and all component parts thereof. All provisions of this License Agreement relating to confidentiality of the Software, disclaimers of warranties, limitation of liability, remedies, damages, governing law, jurisdiction, venue, EFI’s intellectual property rights, and Adobe Software shall survive any termination of this license. If the Software contains a License Key, upon termination, EFI may immediately and without notice, execute the License Key, defined as a programming code, intentionally inserted into the Software, which if executed, renders the Software or portions thereof inoperable. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY CONTAIN A LICENSE KEY AND THAT EXECUTION OF SUCH LICENSE KEY SHALL RENDER THE SOFTWARE OR A PORTION THEREOF INOPERABLE. YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE LICENSE KEY IS NOT A VIRUS AND THAT IN THE EVENT THAT THE LICENSE KEY IS EXECUTED DUE TO YOUR BREACH, YOU MAY BE OBLIGATED TO PAY EFI’S THEN CURRENT FEE TO REACTIVATE THE SOFTWARE, PLUS ANY OTHER APPLICABLE FEES, INCLUDING LICENSE FEES. LEGAL NOTICES 6 Limited Warranty and Disclaimer EFI warrants that the Software, if used as specified in the EFI product documentation, will perform substantially in accordance with the EFI product documentation for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt when used on the recommended operating system, platform, and hardware configuration. All warranty claims must be made, along with proof of purchase, within such ninety (90) day period. EFI makes no warranty or representation that the Software will meet your specific requirements, that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted, secure, fault-tolerant, or error free, or that all defects in the Software will be corrected. EFI makes no warranty, implied or otherwise, regarding the performance or reliability of any other Products or services or any third party products (software or hardware) or services. THE INSTALLATION OF ANY THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED BY EFI WILL VOID THIS WARRANTY. USE, MODIFICATION, AND/OR REPAIR OF THE SOFTWARE OR AN EFI PRODUCT OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED BY EFI WILL VOID THIS WARRANTY. FURTHER, THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VOID IF A PROBLEM WITH THE SOFTWARE ARISES FROM ACCIDENT, ABUSE, MISAPPLICATION, ABNORMAL USE, VIRUS, WORM, OR SIMILAR CIRCUMSTANCE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE (“LIMITED WARRANTY”), EFI MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE, ANY PRODUCT AND/OR ANY SERVICES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR IN ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION. EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, REPRESENTATIONS, AND CONDITIONS, INCLUDING THOSE OF SECURITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. THERE IS NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE AND/OR ANY PRODUCT WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, FAULT-TOLERANT, SECURE, OR ERROR-FREE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY, AND THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS, RELATING TO ANY AND ALL SOFTWARE, PRODUCTS, SERVICES, AND/OR APPLICABLE WARRANTIES SHALL BE, AT EFI’S OPTION, (1) TO REPAIR OR REPLACE THE SOFTWARE THAT DOES NOT MEET THE LIMITED WARRANTY; OR (2) PROVIDE A REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID (IF ANY) FOR THE SOFTWARE THAT DOES NOT MEET THE LIMITED WARRANTY. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SECTION, EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL PROVIDE NO REFUNDS, RETURNS, EXCHANGES, OR REPLACEMENTS. Limitation of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, YOU AGREE THAT THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS FOR ALL CLAIMS RELATED TO ANY SOFTWARE, PRODUCT, SERVICES, AND/OR THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, UNDER STATUTE, OR OTHERWISE), SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU, IF ANY, FOR THE EFI SOFTWARE. YOU AGREE THAT SUCH AMOUNT IS SUFFICIENT TO SATISFY THE ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT SUCH A LIABILITY IS A FAIR AND REASONABLE ESTIMATE OF ANY LOSS AND DAMAGE LIKELY TO BE SUFFERED IN THE EVENT OF ANY WRONGFUL ACT OR OMISSION BY EFI AND/OR ITS SUPPLIERS. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE SOFTWARE, PRODUCTS OR SERVICES, LOST PROFITS OR DATA, THIRD PARTY CLAIMS, OR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, RELIANCE, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, RELATED TO ANY SOFTWARE, PRODUCT, SERVICES AND/ OR THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. YOU AGREE THAT THE PRICE OF THE EFI SOFTWARE REFLECTS THIS ALLOCATION OF RISK. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY AND DISCLAIMERS FORM AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, WITHOUT WHICH EFI WOULD NOT HAVE LICENSED THE EFI SOFTWARE TO YOU. BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW SOME OR ALL OF THE EXCLUSIONS AND/OR LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY HEREIN, SOME OR ALL OF THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LEGAL NOTICES 7 Export Restrictions The Software and EFI Products are subject to the export laws and regulations of the United States, including the United States Export Administration Regulations. The license granted to you herein is conditioned upon your compliance with all applicable export laws and regulations, including the export laws and regulations of the United States. You represent and agree that you will not use, disclose, distribute, transfer, export, or re-export any portion of the Software or any EFI Product in any form in violation of any applicable export laws and regulations, including the export laws and regulations of the United States. In addition, if the Software is identified as an export controlled item under the applicable export laws and regulations, you represent and warrant that you are not a citizen of, or located within, an embargoed or otherwise restricted nation and that you are not otherwise prohibited under such laws and regulations from receiving the Software. Consent to Use of Data You agree that EFI may collect and use anonymously aggregated technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the Software. Subject to EFI’s then-current privacy policy and applicable laws and regulations, EFI may: (i) use this information to improve its products or to provide customized services or technologies to you; (ii) transfer this information to its affiliates, agents, and partners; and (iii) transfer this information to the United States and/or any other country where EFI and its affiliates, agents, and partners maintain facilities. Adobe Software The Software may contain the following Adobe Systems Incorporated (“Adobe”) materials: (a) software included as part of the printing system, including PostScript® software, Font Programs (digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in special format and in encrypted form used to produce various typefaces) and other Adobe software (collectively, “Printing Software”), and (b) other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”). The following terms are applicable to the materials provided by Adobe: 1. Printing Software. You may use the Printing Software (in object code form only) (i) on a single output device that contains an embedded controller; OR (ii) for Printing Software residing on a host computer, on up to the authorized number of central processing units (“CPUs”) for which you are licensed, for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. You may not change the name of any driver software file or driver software icon without consent of EFI. You may use Roman character Font Programs and Adobe Type Manager® to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on up to five (5) computers for use with the Printing Software. 2. Host Software. You may install the Host Software in a single location on a hard disk or other storage device on one (or the authorized number of) computer(s) for which you are licensed (“Permitted No. of Computers”), and, provided that the Host Software is configured for network use, install and use the Host Software on a single file server for use on a single local area network for either (but not both) of the following purposes: (i) permanent installation onto a hard disk or other storage device on the Permitted No. of Computers; or (ii) use of the Host Software over such network, provided the use of the Host Software does not exceed the Permitted No. of Computers. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software (which shall not be installed or used). You are hereby notified that Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-2704 (“Adobe”) is a third-party beneficiary to this License Agreement to the extent that this License Agreement contains provisions which relate to your use of any software, font programs, typefaces, and/or trademarks licensed or supplied by Adobe. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Adobe and are enforceable by Adobe in addition to EFI. ADOBE WILL HAVE NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER TO YOU FOR ANY ADOBE SOFTWARE OR TECHNOLOGY LICENSED HEREUNDER. U.S. Government Restricted Rights Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 or DFARS 227.7202-3 - 227.7202-4 and, to the extent required under U.S. federal law, the minimum restricted rights as set out in FAR 52.227-14, Restricted Rights Notice (June 1987) Alternate III(g)(3) (June 1987) or FAR 52.227-19 (June 1987). To the extent any technical data is provided pursuant to the Agreement, such data is protected per FAR 12.211 and DFARS 227.7102-2 and to the extent explicitly required by the U.S. Government, is subject to limited rights as set out in DFARS 252.227.7015 (November 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7037 (September 1999). In the event that any of the above referenced agency regulations are modified or superseded, the subsequent equivalent regulation shall apply. The name of the Contractor is Electronics for Imaging, Inc. LEGAL NOTICES 8 Governing Law and Jurisdiction The rights and obligations of the parties related to this License Agreement will be governed in all respects by the laws of the State of California exclusively, as such laws apply to contracts between California residents performed entirely within California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and any other similar convention does not apply to this License Agreement. For all disputes related to the Software, Products, services, and/or this License Agreement, you consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction and venue of the state courts in San Mateo County, California and the federal court for the Northern District of California. General This Agreement is the entire agreement held between us and supersedes any other communications or advertising with respect to the Software, Products, Services, and any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement. If any provision of the License Agreement is held invalid, such provision shall be deemed modified to the extent necessary to be enforceable and the other provisions in this License Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. EFI is a registered trademark of Electronics for Imaging, Inc. in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and/or certain other foreign jurisdictions. If you have any questions, see the EFI web site at www.efi.com. Electronics for Imaging, Inc. 303 Velocity Way Foster City, CA 94404 USA Copyright © 2004-2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. All rights reserved. Part Number: 45091181 7 January 2010 Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Printing © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093727 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 User software 9 System requirements 9 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 10 Installing the Mac OS X printer driver files 10 Installing from the User Software DVD 11 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools 12 Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 13 Uninstalling printer driver files 14 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing 15 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6.x 15 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.4.x 19 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.3.9 23 Adding a non-English printer on Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6 26 Configuring Installable Options 26 Using Desktop Printer (optional) 26 Printing from Mac OS X computers 27 Selecting the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List 28 Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X applications 30 Defining and printing custom page sizes 37 Viewing the printer status 38 CONTENTS 4 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 39 Installing Windows printer drivers 39 Installing printer drivers by Point and Print 40 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools 42 Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 43 Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD 44 Installing and connecting to a virtual printer 47 Uninstalling printer drivers 49 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing 50 Setting up printing connections 50 Completing the SMB printing connection 50 Completing Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) printing connections 51 Completing IPP connections 54 Configuring installable options 57 Printing from Windows computers 58 Setting print options and printing from Windows applications 59 Specifying default print options for print jobs 65 Customizing the Quick Access icon 66 Defining and printing custom page sizes 67 Viewing the printer status 67 Saving files to print at a remote location 67 PRINTING METHODS 68 Configuring and using Job Monitor 69 Configuring the connection 69 Using Job Monitor 69 E-mail Service 69 Printing using an e-mail client 70 Managing print jobs with e-mail commands 72 CONTENTS 5 Printing from a USB device 73 FTP printing 74 Printing and retrieving a secure print job 75 Sample printing 76 Using Sample Print 76 Job Batching 77 Cancelling batch jobs 77 Using Command WorkStation Print Next and Rush Print commands with batch jobs 77 Accounting batch jobs 77 PRINT OPTIONS 78 About printer drivers and printer description files 78 Setting print options 79 Print option override hierarchy 79 Print options and default settings 80 Job Info options 81 Media options 83 Layout options 85 Color options 94 Image options 98 Finishing options 100 Variable Data Printing (VDP) options 102 Stamping/Watermark options 103 Overriding print option settings 104 CONTENTS 6 Additional information 105 Auto Trapping 105 Booklet Maker 105 Booklet Maker in the printer driver 107 Booklet Maker in Job Properties 108 Booklet Maker: 1-up Perfect binding 113 Document size and Paper size 115 Duplex printing 116 Fold options 117 Gang-up printing 118 Image Shift 119 Mixed Media 119 Output Delivery 121 Paper Catalog 122 Punch and Punch Holes 123 Scale 124 Scale to Fit 124 Sorter Mode 124 Staple option 125 Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement 126 Halftoned Text Enhancement 126 Text Smoothing Enhancement 126 User Authentication 127 INDEX 129 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document describes how to install the printer drivers and printer description files for the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server, set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing, and print from Apple Mac OS and Microsoft Windows computers. It also provides information about the Fiery PRO80 print options and describes several printing methods that can be used to print to the Fiery PRO80. For information about setting up network servers and clients to use the Fiery PRO80, see Configuration and Setup. For general information about using the color printer, your computer, application software, or network, see the documentation that accompanies those products. For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Installing printer files on Mac OS computers • Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing from Mac OS computers • Printing from Mac OS computers • Installing printer files on Windows computers • Setting up the printing connections on Windows computers • Printing from Windows computers • FieryPRO80 print options • Using other printing methods to print to the Fiery PRO80 A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 User software The following table lists the user software that is described in this document. This is the user software you need for setting up basic printing on the Fiery PRO80. Other documents may describe other user software depending on what you are trying to accomplish. When you install user software on a Windows computer, you use the Fiery User Software Installer. System requirements For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. User software Description PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and associated files (for Windows) Files that provide information about the Fiery PRO80 and your particular printer model to your application and printer driver. PostScript Printer Description (PPD/Plugin) files (for Mac OS X) Files that are used with the PostScript printer driver that allow the Fiery PRO80 to appear in the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes of popular applications. The Fiery PRO80 PPDs provide information about the printer to your application and printer driver. PageMaker PPD files Files that allow you to print to the Fiery PRO80 from Adobe PageMaker. You must install the appropriate PPD in PageMaker. See the PageMaker documentation for instructions. PostScript screen fonts (for Mac OS X) PostScript/TrueType screen fonts that correspond to the printer fonts installed on the Fiery PRO80. For a complete list of PostScript/ TrueType fonts installed on the Fiery PRO80, print a Font List. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Job Monitor (for Windows) Monitor the status of connected Fiery PRO80s and print jobs sent to them. Job Monitor is automatically installed when the printer driver is installed on a Windows computer. For more information, see “Configuring and using Job Monitor” on page 69. Printer Delete Utility (for Windows) Uninstall the Windows printer driver. For more information, see “Uninstalling printer drivers” on page 49. Fiery Software Uninstaller Utility (for Mac OS X) Uninstall the Mac OS X printer and associated printer driver files. For more information, see “Uninstalling printer driver files” on page 14. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 10 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X To set up the Fiery PRO80 as a PostScript printer on a Mac OS X computer, install the printer driver files that correspond to your printer and set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing. Printer drivers provide a way to communicate information about print jobs between your applications, the Fiery PRO80, and the printer. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Installing the Mac OS X printer driver files The Mac OS X printer driver files are provided on the User Software DVD or can be downloaded from the Fiery PRO80 over the network or using WebTools. The following sections describe how to install the printer files for the Fiery PRO80. You can install printer drivers as follows: • From the User Software DVD • From WebTools, using the Downloads tab to download the printer driver files before installing the printer driver NOTE: WebTools is available if the administrator has enabled Internet access to the Fiery PRO80. • From the Fiery PRO80 by downloading the printer driver files over the network before installing the printer driver For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Procedure See Installing the Mac OS X printer files page 10 Printing from Mac OS X computers page 27 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing page 15 Procedure See Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 page 13 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools page 12 Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD page 11 Uninstalling printer driver files page 14 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 11 Installing from the User Software DVD The User Software DVD provides the following software for Mac OS X (see the OSX:Printer Driver folder): • OSX Installer: Installs the printer driver files required to print from Mac OS X. • Language folders: Printer description files that are installed by OSX Installer. You do not need to open these folders or install them manually on your computer. The appropriate files are installed by OSX Installer. TO INSTALL THE PRINTER DRIVER FILES FOR MAC OS X 1 Quit all open applications. 2 Mac OS X v10.3.9 and v10.4.x: Make sure that the Printer Setup Utility is not running on your computer. Printer Setup Utility updates the list of available printers when it starts. If a printer description file is added while Printer Setup Utility is running, you cannot select the associated printer model until you restart. Mac OS X v10.5.x and v10.6.x: Proceed to step 3. 3 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive. 4 Open the OSX : Printer Driver folder on the User Software DVD. If you are installing from a folder you downloaded from WebTools or the Fiery PRO80, browse to the Printer Driver folder on your desktop. 5 Double-click the OSX Installer icon to start installing the printer driver. 6 Follow the on-screen instructions. The OSX Installer installs the printer driver files that correspond to the Fiery PRO80. 7 When copying is complete, click Quit. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 12 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools WebTools allows you to download installers for printer drivers to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80. Before you download the printer driver files, the administrator must enable Internet access to the Fiery PRO80. For more information about setting up and starting WebTools, see Utilities. TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVERS WITH WEBTOOLS 1 Start your Internet or intranet browser and type the DNS name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Click the Downloads tab. 3 Click the link for the printer drivers that you want to install (Printer Files for Mac OS X). A file named OSX.dmg is downloaded to your desktop. The file contains a folder named Printer Driver in a compressed format. If your Internet browser is equipped with an expander utility, such as StuffIt Expander, the folder decodes and decompresses automatically. If the Printer Driver folder does not automatically decode and decompress, double-click the file to start the utility that performs that function. 4 Open the OSX : Printer Driver folder. 5 Double-click the OSX Installer icon to start installing the printer driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. For instructions on installing the printer driver for Mac OS X, see page 11. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 13 Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 You can download printer driver files to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80 over the network. TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVER FILES FROM THE FIERY PRO80 1 In the Finder, choose Connect to Server from the Go menu. 2 Type SMB:// followed by the name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. If you cannot locate your Fiery PRO80, contact your administrator. 3 Type the user name and password in the SMB/CIFS File System Authentication dialog box. The “Guest” account can be used as the default. The Guest account does not require a password. If the Guest account cannot be used, ask your network administrator for an account. 4 Select the Mac_User_SW folder from the shared volume list and click OK. 5 Open the OSX : Printer Driver folder. 6 Double-click the OSX Installer icon to start installing the printer driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. For instructions on installing the printer driver for Mac OS X, see page 11. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 14 Uninstalling printer driver files The Fiery Software Uninstaller utility is installed and used locally. You do not need to connect to the Fiery PRO80 before you use the software. The Fiery Software Uninstaller is available from the OSX folder of the User Software DVD. You can also download it to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80 over the network. TO INSTALL AND USE THE FIERY SOFTWARE UNINSTALLER UTILITY 1 Copy the Fiery Software Uninstaller.dmg to the Desktop from the User Software DVD or the Mac_User_SW folder from the shared volume list on the Fiery PRO80. 2 On the Desktop, double-click the Fiery Software Uninstaller.dmg. The Fiery Software Uninstaller opens in the Finder showing the Fiery Software Uninstaller icon and an arrow pointing to a link to the Applications folder. 3 Select the Fiery Software Uninstaller icon on the left and drag it onto the Applications folder to install. 4 Browse to the Applications folder and double-click the Fiery Software Uninstaller icon. 5 Click the Printers tab if it is not selected. 6 Select a printer from the Installed Printers list and do one of the following: • Click Remove Printer and Driver to remove the printer along with its printer driver files. If you want to remove the printer and the associated printer driver, you can select only one printer at a time. • Click Remove Printer to remove only the printer from the Installed Printers list, but leave the printer driver installed. The utility can remove only printers that are not currently in use or open on the Dock. NOTE: If more than one printer uses a printer driver, removing the printer driver also removes all printers using that driver. 7 To confirm that you wish to delete the printer, type your password in the dialog box and click OK. 8 Click the Drivers tab to view the installed printer drivers. 9 Close the Fiery Software Uninstaller dialog box. TO DELETE THE FIERY SOFTWARE UNINSTALLER UTILITY • Delete the Fiery Software Uninstaller icon from the Mac OS X Applications folder. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 15 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing The following section describes how to set up the Fiery PRO80 on a Mac OS X computer. NOTE: The steps for setting up the Fiery PRO80 on a computer with Mac OS X v10.6.x, Mac OS X v10.5.x, Mac OS X v10.4.x, and Mac OS X v10.3.9 are different. Any differences are noted in the following sections. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6.x Use the following procedures to set up the Fiery PRO80 on a computer with Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6.x. TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE PRINT DIALOG BOX 1 Open a file in your application. 2 Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 3 Select Add Printer from the Printer list. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the printer connections in the following table to add a printer. Procedure See Adding a non-English printer on Mac OS X v10.5 and v10.6 page 26 Configuring Installable Options page 26 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.3.9 page 23 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.4.x page 19 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6.x page 15 Using Desktop Printer (optional) page 26 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 16 TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 USING PRINT & FAX 1 Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu, and then choose Print & Fax. The Print & Fax dialog box appears. 2 Click the “+” button to add a printer. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the following connections to add a printer. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE DEFAULT (BONJOUR OR APPLETALK) CONNECTION 1 Click the Default icon in the dialog box. The Default pane appears. The names of printers with default connections are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Printer Name list. Printing connection See AppleTalk page 18 Default (Bonjour or AppleTalk) page 16 IP Printer page 17 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 17 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 from the list. The information about the selected printer appears at the bottom of the Default pane. The appropriate PPD file for the Fiery PRO80 is automatically selected. If your administrator configured the Secure Access printing at the Fiery PRO80, the PPD file for Secure Access printing is selected. 3 Click Add. AppleTalk: The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List of the Print & Fax dialog box. Bonjour: The Installable Options pane in the Print & Fax dialog box appears. Click Continue to return to the Print & Fax dialog box. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List. 4 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List. 5 Click Options & Supplies, and then click the Driver tab. 6 Specify the installable option settings, and then click OK. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE IP PRINTER CONNECTION 1 Click the IP icon in the dialog box. The IP pane appears. 2 LPD printing: Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD from the Protocol list, type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name in the Address field, and then type the print connection (print, hold or direct) in the Queue field. Proceed to step 4. IP printing: Select Internet Printing Protocol - IPP from the Protocol list and type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name in the Address field. Proceed to step 3. The IP address or DNS name appears in the Name field. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 18 3 Type “ipp/” followed by the print connection (print, hold, or direct, or name of virtual printer) in lowercase letters in the Queue field. NOTE: The Fiery PRO80 requires a queue name. Do not leave the Queue field empty. 4 For Mac OS X v10.5.x: Choose “Select a driver to use” from the Print Using menu. For Mac OS X v10.6.x: Choose “Select Printer Software” from the Print Using menu. 5 Type Fiery PRO80 in the search filter to narrow the search, and then select the PPD file from the list. 6 Click Add. The Installable Options pane in the Print & Fax dialog box appears. 7 Click Continue. The Fiery PRO80 with its IP address appears in the Printer List. 8 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List. 9 Click Options & Supplies, and then click the Driver tab. 10 Specify the installable option settings, and then click OK. For information about configuring installable options, see printer driver Help. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE APPLETALK CONNECTION NOTE: Use this procedure if the Fiery PRO80 is in a different AppleTalk zone than your computer. If the Fiery PRO80 is in the same zone, it is displayed as a default following the procedure on page 16. 1 Click the AppleTalk icon in the dialog box. The AppleTalk pane appears. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 19 2 Select the AppleTalk zone for the Fiery PRO80 from the list. The AppleTalk printers in the specified zone are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Name list. 3 Select the Fiery PRO80 name in the Printer List and click Add. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List of the Print & Fax dialog box. 4 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List. 5 Click Options & Supplies, and then click the Driver tab. 6 Specify the installable option settings, and then click OK. Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.4.x Use the following procedures to set up the Fiery PRO80 on a computer with Mac OS X v10.4.x. TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE PRINT DIALOG BOX 1 Open a file in your application. 2 Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 3 Select the Add Printer from the Printer list. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the printer connections in the following table to add a printer. TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 USING PRINTER SETUP UTILITY 1 In the Finder, choose Utilities from the Go menu. 2 Start Printer Setup Utility. The Printer List dialog box appears. 3 Click Add. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the printer connections in the following table to add a printer. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 20 TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 USING PRINT & FAX 1 Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu, and then choose Print & Fax. The Print & Fax dialog box appears. 2 Click the “+” button to add a printer. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the following connections to add a printer. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE DEFAULT BROWSER (BONJOUR OR APPLETALK) CONNECTION NOTE: Bonjour printers are available to Mac OS X v10.4.x computers only if Bonjour is enabled on the Fiery PRO80. 1 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box. The Default Browser pane appears. The names of printers with default connections are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. If the printer is not listed in the Printer Name list, click More Printers. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Name list. Printing connection See AppleTalk page 22 Default Browser (Bonjour or AppleTalk) page 20 IP Printer page 21 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 21 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 from the list. The information about the selected printer appears at the bottom of the Default Browser pane. The appropriate PPD file for the Fiery PRO80 is automatically selected. 3 Click Add. AppleTalk: The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List of the Print & Fax dialog box. Bonjour: The Installable Options pane in the Printer Browser dialog box appears. Click Continue to return to the Print & Fax dialog box. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List. 4 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List and click Show Info. 5 In the Printer Info dialog box, choose Installable Options, specify the installable option settings, and then click Apply Changes. 6 Close the Printer Info dialog box. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE IP PRINTER CONNECTION 1 Click IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box. The IP Printer pane appears. 2 LPD printing: Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD from the Protocol list, type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name in the Address field, and then type the print connection (print, hold or direct) in the Queue field. Proceed to step 6. IP printing: Select Internet Printing Protocol - IPP from the Protocol list and type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name in the Address field. Proceed to step 3. The IP address or DNS name appears in the Name field. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 22 3 Type “ipp/” followed by the print connection (print, hold, or direct, or name of virtual printer) in lowercase letters in the Queue field. NOTE: The Fiery PRO80 requires a queue name. Do not leave the Queue field empty. 4 Print Using: Choose the appropriate manufacturer name or model, and then select the file for the Fiery PRO80 PPD. 5 Click Add. The Installable Options pane in the Printer Browser dialog box appears. 6 Click Continue. The Fiery PRO80 with its IP address appears in the Printer List. 7 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List and click Show Info. 8 In the Printer Info dialog box, choose Installable Options, specify the installable option settings, and then click Apply Changes. For information about configuring installable options, see printer driver Help. 9 Close the Printer Info dialog box. TO ADD A PRINTER USING THE APPLETALK CONNECTION NOTE: Use this procedure if the Fiery PRO80 is in a different AppleTalk zone than your computer. If the Fiery PRO80 is in the same zone, it is displayed as a default following the procedure on page 20. 1 Click Default Browser or IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 23 2 Click More Printers. The dialog box with a list of other connections appears. 3 Select AppleTalk from the connection list. The AppleTalk pane appears. 4 Select the AppleTalk zone for the Fiery PRO80 from the list. The AppleTalk printers in the specified zone are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Name list. 5 Select the Fiery PRO80 name in the Name list and click Add. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List dialog box. 6 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List and click Show Info. 7 In the Printer Info dialog box, choose Installable Options, specify the installable option settings, and then click Apply Changes. 8 Close the Printer Info dialog box. Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.3.9 Use the following steps for setting up the Fiery PRO80 on a computer with Mac OS X v10.3.9. TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 FOR PRINTING 1 In the Finder, choose Utilities from the Go menu. 2 Start Printer Setup Utility or Print Center. The Printer List dialog box appears. 3 Click Add. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the following connections to add a printer. Printing connection See AppleTalk page 24 LPD/LPR page 25 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 24 TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE APPLETALK CONNECTION 1 Select AppleTalk from the list. The AppleTalk pane appears. 2 Select the AppleTalk zone for the Fiery PRO80 from the zone pop-up list. The AppleTalk printers in the specified zone are listed. The Virtual Printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Name list. 3 Select the Fiery PRO80 name in the Name list. 4 Click Add. The appropriate PPD file for the Fiery PRO80 is automatically selected. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 25 TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE LPD/LPR CONNECTION 1 Select IP Printing from the list. The IP Printing pane appears. 2 Select LPD/LPR from the Printer Type list. 3 Type the Fiery PRO80 IP address in the Printer Address field. 4 Type the virtual printer name in the Queue Name field or leave it blank for the default queue. 5 Select the appropriate model from the Printer Model list. The Model Name pane appears in the dialog box. 6 Select the PPD file from the Model Name list. 7 Click Add. The Fiery PRO80 with its IP address appears in the Printer List. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 26 Adding a non-English printer on Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6 When adding a non-English Fiery PRO80 printer on Mac OS X v10.5 or 10.6, you must navigate to Other to select the correct printer driver for your language. TO ADD A NON-ENGLISH PRINTER 1 Open the Add Printer dialog box. The list of available Bonjour printers is displayed. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 from the list. 3 From the Print Using menu, select Other. 4 Navigate to Library > Printers > PPDs > Contents > Resources, and open the language folder that corresponds to the language that you are using on your system. 5 Select the Fiery PRO80 from the list. 6 Click Open, and then click Add. Configuring Installable Options To use the print options for the printer and Fiery PRO80 appropriately, you must configure the Fiery PRO80 from your computer for the options that are installed on the printer. Configure the options manually. For information about configuring installable options, see printer driver Help. Using Desktop Printer (optional) After adding Fiery PRO80 to the Printer List in Print & Fax or the Printer Setup Utility, you can create and use the Desktop Printer feature. For information about the Desktop Printer feature, see printer driver Help. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 27 Printing from Mac OS X computers You can print to the Fiery PRO80 just as you would print to any other printer from a Mac OS X application. Select the Fiery PRO80 as the current printer in the Printer List and print the file from the application. In addition to this method, you can download files to the Fiery PRO80 using Hot Folders or the Docs WebTool, and print documents using Command WorkStation (see Utilities). After you install the Fiery PRO80 printer driver files using the OSX Installer and set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing, you can print directly from most Mac OS X applications. Using the appropriate PPD file, you can control the Fiery PRO80 printing features by specifying print options from the Print dialog boxes. For more information about the Fiery PRO80 print options, see page 80. To achieve optimal printing results from specific applications, see Color Printing, Fiery Color Reference, and Command WorkStation Help. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Procedure See Defining and printing custom page sizes page 37 Selecting the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List page 28 Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X applications page 30 Viewing the printer status page 38 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 28 Selecting the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List Before you print a job, you must select the Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List. Use the following procedure to select the Fiery PRO80 as your default printer. TO SELECT THE FIERY PRO80 AS THE DEFAULT PRINTER WITH MAC OS X V10.5 OR MAC OS X V10.6 1 Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is connected to the network and turned on. 2 Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu, and then choose Print & Fax. The Print & Fax dialog box appears. The printers that are set up for printing are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 and set up for printing are also listed. 3 To make the Fiery PRO80 the default printer, select it from the Default Printer menu. 4 Close the window. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 29 TO SELECT THE FIERY PRO80 AS THE DEFAULT PRINTER WITH MAC OS X V10.4.X 1 Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is connected to the network and turned on. 2 In the Finder, choose Utilities from the Go menu. 3 Start Printer Setup Utility. The Printer List dialog box appears. The printers that are set up for printing are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 and set up for printing are also listed. 4 Select the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List to specify it as your current printer. 5 Click the Make Default icon. The Fiery PRO80 is now your default printer. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 30 Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X applications In Mac OS X applications, print options are set from the Page Setup dialog box and the Print dialog box. For information about specific print options, see Print Options. NOTE: Some default print options are set by your administrator during Setup. For information about the current server default settings, contact your administrator or the operator. NOTE: The following procedure uses Mac OS X v10.5 illustrations. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS AND PRINT FROM MAC OS X 1 Open a file and choose Page Setup from the application’s File menu. 2 For Settings, choose Page Attributes. For Format for, choose the Fiery PRO80. The Paper Size option in the Page Setup dialog box is the same as the Document Size print option on the Fiery Features Media tab. Document Size is the page size defined in your original application’s Print setup (or Page Setup) dialog box. The Paper Size print option on the Fiery Features Media tab is the size of the actual sheet of paper on which your job will print. The default value of the actual paper size is the paper size set in the Page Setup dialog box. 3 Select the Page settings for your print job. 4 Click OK. 5 Choose Print from the application’s File menu. 6 Choose the Fiery PRO80 as your printer. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 31 7 Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. NOTE: For information about Two-Way Communication, see page 38. For information about using presets, see printer driver Help. 8 Click Customize to specify the options shown in the Quick Access window. You can select a shortcut from the Available Shortcuts list and add it to the Current Shortcuts list, as well as remove a shortcut from the Current Shortcuts list. Click OK to save your changes. For information about customizing the Quick Access view, see printer driver Help. 1 Fiery Features 2 Customize button 3 Full Properties button 4 Presets 5 Two-Way Communication 1 2 3 4 5 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 32 9 Click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane. The Job Info tab is displayed in the Printing Preferences dialog box. 10 Type your user name or domain\user name in the User Name field if User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80 under User Authentication. 11 Type your local password or domain password in the Password field if User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80 under User Authentication. 12 Type information in the Notes field under Job Notes. 13 Type instructions to the operator about the job in the Instructions field. These instructions can be displayed in Command WorkStation, but do not appear in the Job Log. These instructions can be edited by the operator. 14 Type public in the Account Name and Account Password fields to send public jobs on the volume track. The volume track must be enabled on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer. 15 If you are sending a secure print job, type a password in the Secure Print field. 16 Type values for the other fields, as required. For information about these fields, see page 80. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 33 17 Click the Color icon and specify the color profile options for the job. In the Color Mode area, select a color mode for the job. NOTE: To view the basic and expert color settings from the Fiery PRO80 in this dialog box, make sure that Two-Way Communication is enabled. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 34 18 To use basic color management features, such as the printer color settings, click Basic Settings. To revert to the Fiery PRO80 default color settings, click Server Defaults. To edit advanced color management features, such as RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, click Expert Settings and proceed to step 19. Otherwise, proceed to step 21. Two-Way Communication On PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 35 19 To edit the advanced color management features, such as RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, click Expert Settings. The Expert Color Settings Advanced Edit dialog box appears. The advanced edit controls are divided into three tabbed categories: Color Input, Gray & Black Processing, and Output. 20 After you edit the expert settings, click OK. To revert to the Fiery PRO80 default color settings, click Server Defaults. 21 Specify the color settings for the print job and click OK. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 36 22 Choose other printer-specific options. These print options are specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. These options override settings in Fiery PRO80 Printer Setup but can be changed from Command WorkStation. If you choose Printer’s default, the job prints according to the settings specified in Setup. For more information about these options and overrides, see Print Options. Some print options that are selectable from an application or are provided by Mac OS are similar to the print options that are specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. In these cases, use the print options specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer that appear in the Fiery Features menu. The application may not set up the file properly for printing on the Fiery PRO80, resulting in unexpected finishing, printing errors, or longer processing time. When you print to your selected printer, make sure to clear the Collated check box in the Copies & Pages pane of the Mac OS X v10.4 or earlier printer driver or in the main pane of the Mac OS X v10.5 printer driver. If you select an invalid setting or combination of settings when printing a document, no error message appears. For example, you may be able to select duplex printing on transparency media. Invalid settings and combinations are ignored by the Fiery PRO80. 23 Click the VDP icon to specify variable data printing options. For more information about VDP print options, see page 102. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 37 24 Click the Stamping icon to specify a watermark for the print job. For more information about watermarks, see printer driver Help. 25 Click the Printer icon to view printer status. For more information about monitoring printer status, see printer driver Help. 26 Click the remaining print option icons to specify the appropriate settings for the print job and click OK. 27 From your application, click Print to send your print job. Defining and printing custom page sizes With custom page sizes, you define the dimensions of a printed page. After you define a custom page size, you can use it from within an application without redefining it each time you print. When you create custom page sizes, specify Width dimensions to correspond with the shorter side of your job and specify Height dimensions to correspond with the longer side of your job. Set custom page sizes in this way, regardless of the orientation settings in the application. The printer driver custom size range is 100 x 140mm to 330 x 1200mm for the 80C-KM printer. The printer driver custom page size range is 100mm x 148mm to 330mm x 1200mm for the 70-60C-KM printer. However, the actual maximum paper size the Fiery PRO80 can print is 330mm x 487mm. The Fiery PRO80 supports a minimum custom page size of 1.0 inch x 1.0 inch (25.4mm x 25.4mm). Consult your service representative about printing banners and posters. For information about defining and printing custom pages sizes, see printer driver Help. Height Width Width Height Portrait Landscape PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 38 Viewing the printer status If you enabled a TCP/IP network, you can retrieve printer status and color settings from the Fiery PRO80 and display them in the printer driver using the Two-Way Communication option. The printer status includes the current paper and toner levels. You can set the color settings on the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation. For more information about color print options, see Color Printing or Command WorkStation Help. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 39 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS To set up the Fiery PRO80 as a printer on a Windows computer, install the printer driver files that correspond to your printer and set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing. Printer drivers provide a way to communicate information about print jobs between your applications, the Fiery PRO80, and the printer. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Installing Windows printer drivers Installing printer drivers and printer description files is the first step in setting up the Fiery PRO80 as a PostScript printer. You can install printer drivers as follows: • From the Fiery PRO80 through Point and Print using SMB printing • From WebTools, using the Downloads tab to download the printer driver files before installing the printer driver NOTE: WebTools is available if the administrator has enabled Internet access to the Fiery PRO80. • From the Fiery PRO80 by downloading the printer driver files over the network before installing the printer driver • From the User Software DVD NOTE: Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 have a User Account Control (UAC) feature. You must be the administrator or a user with administrator privileges to install printer drivers. NOTE: If the Fiery PRO80 printer driver is already installed, you must uninstall it before you install a new driver (see “Uninstalling printer drivers” on page 49). Procedure See Installing Windows printer drivers page 39 Printing from Windows computers page 58 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing page 50 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 40 For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Installing printer drivers by Point and Print SMB printing (also known as Windows or WINS printing) allows you to install PostScript printer drivers on your computer from the Fiery PRO80 using Point and Print, and print to a particular connection (Print queue, Hold queue, Direct connection or Virtual Printer). Each connection (print, hold, direct or virtual printer) requires a separate installation. Repeat the procedure for each connection. When you install the printer driver using Point and Print, you cannot configure installable options manually. The installed options are displayed as the Fiery PRO80 configuration in the printer driver. For more information, see “Configuring installable options” on page 57. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ask your administrator to do the following in Setup on the Fiery PRO80: • Assign the Fiery PRO80 a valid IP address. Ask your administrator for the IP address or DNS name required in the following procedure. • Configure the Fiery PRO80 for SMB printing. NOTE: SMB printing is referred to as Windows Printing in Setup and on the Configuration page. For more information, see Configuration and Setup or Configure Help. Procedure See Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 page 43 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools page 42 Installing and connecting to a virtual printer page 47 Installing printer drivers by Point and Print page 40 Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD page 44 Uninstalling printer drivers page 49 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 41 TO SET UP SMB PRINTING ON WINDOWS COMPUTERS 1 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Right-click Network Neighborhood or My Network Places, and select Find Computer or Search for Computers. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, double-click Network and Sharing Center, and then click the View computers and devices link. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then under the Network and Sharing Center heading, click the View network computers and devices link. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Type the name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Search Now or Search. Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Type the name of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. Windows Server 2008: Type the name or \\IP address of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. If you cannot locate the Fiery PRO80, contact your Fiery PRO80 administrator. 3 Double-click the name of the Fiery PRO80 to display enabled print connections. NOTE: For a description of each print connection, see Configuration and Setup. 4 Double-click the connection that you want to set up (print, hold, direct, or virtual printer). The files are installed on your computer. NOTE: You may receive a message that you are about to connect to a printer on the Fiery PRO80, which will automatically install a printer driver on your machine. Click Yes to continue. 5 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and under Classic View, double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. The printer is displayed in the Printers or Printers and Faxes window. 6 Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Properties. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 42 7 Click Print Test Page on the General tab. If the Test Page prints successfully, you are ready to print from the computer. 8 Repeat the previous steps for the other connections that you want to set up. Downloading printer drivers using WebTools WebTools allows you to download installers for printer drivers to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80. Download the printer driver files from the Fiery PRO80 using WebTools and then follow the procedures on page 44 to install the printer driver. Before you download the printer driver files, the administrator must set specific Fiery PRO80 options in Setup. You must also prepare each client computer to communicate with the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet or intranet. For more information about Setup, see Configuration and Setup. For more information about setting up and starting WebTools, see Utilities. TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVER FILES WITH WEBTOOLS 1 Start your Internet or intranet browser and type the DNS name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Click the Downloads tab. 3 Click the link for the item that you want to install. For Windows printer drivers, click the Printer Files link under the Windows heading. 4 If a dialog box prompts you to open the file or save it to disk, choose to save it to disk. 5 Browse to the location where you want to save the PRNTDRVE.EXE file and click Save. The file is downloaded from the Fiery PRO80. This compressed file is an archive that contains multiple files. 6 Double-click the PRNTDRVE.EXE file to extract the files. Depending on your operating system, you might be prompted to select a location to extract the files to. Follow the instructions for your operating system to install the printer driver. The procedures are the same as for installing from the DVD, except that after you click Have Disk, you browse to the location where you extracted the files, rather than to the DVD. For instructions on installing the Windows printer driver, see “To install and complete the print connection for Windows” on page 44. For more information, see WebTools Downloads Help. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 43 Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 You can download printer drivers files to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80 over the network, and then install them following the procedures in “Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD” on page 44. TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVER FILES FROM THE FIERY PRO80 1 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Right-click Network Neighborhood or My Network Places, and select Find Computer or Search for Computers. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, double-click Network and Sharing Center, and then click the View computers and devices link. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start, choose Control Panel, choose Network and Internet, and then under the Network and Sharing Center heading, click the View network computers and devices link. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Type the name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Search Now or Search. Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Type the name of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. Windows Server 2008: Type the name or \\IP address of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. If you cannot locate your Fiery PRO80, contact your administrator. 3 Double-click the name of the Fiery PRO80. A folder called PC_User_SW is displayed along with the enabled print connections. 4 Double-click the PC_User_SW folder and browse to the English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr folder. Follow the instructions for your operating system to install the printer driver. The procedures are the same as for installing from the DVD, except that after you click Have Disk, you browse to the Win_2K_XP_VISTA folder on your desktop, rather than to the DVD. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 44 Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD The following procedures describe installing the printer driver from the User Software DVD. To install the printer driver on a Windows Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7 computer, select the same PPD (oemsetup.inf ) file as for Windows 2000/XP/ Vista, described in the following procedure. NOTE: The following procedures use Windows XP illustrations. This procedure describes the installation of a local printer (Port 9100). You can modify the printing protocol later, according to your network type. TO INSTALL AND COMPLETE THE PRINT CONNECTION FOR WINDOWS 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and under Classic View, double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Windows 2000/XP: Double-click the Add Printer icon and click Next. Windows Server 2003: Double-click the Add a printer icon and click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Add a printer. 3 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Specify printing using a Local printer, clear the “Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer” option, and then click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Select Add a local printer. 4 Select Create a New Port, choose Standard TCP/IP Port from the Type of port menu, and then click Next. 5 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Click Next in the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box. The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears. Proceed to step 6. Windows Vista/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Select the Device Type, type the Hostname or IP address of the Fiery PRO80, and then click Next. Proceed to step 9. 6 Type the printer name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Next. Windows 2000/Server 2003: Proceed to step 7. Windows XP: Select the Device Type and click Next. 7 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Make sure that Generic Network Card is selected as Standard for Device Type and click Next. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 45 8 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Click Finish to close the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box. NOTE: If the device is not found on the network, the device is displayed instead of the Finish button. If a device is not found on the network, that could be for one of the following reasons: • FieryPRO80 is not powered on • Network is not connected • FieryPRO80 is not configured properly • IP address is not correct If you encounter one of the situations mentioned, you can continue to set up the port by configuring the port manually. See “To set up Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) for Windows” on page 51 and follow steps 11 to 14 before proceeding to step 9. 9 Click Have Disk in the dialog box displaying lists of manufacturers and printers. The Install From Disk dialog box prompts you for the disk. 10 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive, type the name of the DVD drive (for example, D:\), and then click Browse. Browse to the English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP_VISTA folder. If you are installing from the files you downloaded from the Fiery PRO80 using the Downloads tab in WebTools, browse to prntdrvr\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP_VISTA and click Open. 11 Make sure that “oemsetup.inf” or “oemsetup” is selected and click Open. The path is copied to the Install From Disk dialog box. 12 Verify that the path is correct and click OK. 13 In the Printers box, select your printer and click Next. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 46 NOTE: Select the printer driver without “eu” for US (the default Document Size is Letter) or with “eu” for International (the default Document Size is A4). 14 Type a name for the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer name field, indicate whether you want to make it the default printer, and then click Next. This name is used in the Printers window and the queues window. 15 Follow the on-screen instructions. Do not share the printer and do not print a Test Page at this time. Continue with the printer driver installation and at the last screen, click Finish. The necessary files are installed on your hard disk. When installation is complete, the Printers window appears with an icon for the newly installed printer. Now you are ready to configure the installable options (see “Configuring installable options” on page 57). To set up a connection other than port 9100, proceed to “Setting up printing connections” on page 50. To use the printer driver, you must select the following options on the Advanced tab of the printer driver after installation is complete: • Spool print documents • Start printing immediately • Print spooled documents first PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 47 Installing and connecting to a virtual printer A virtual printer allows you to print to the Fiery PRO80 using a predefined set of job settings. You do not have to set print options manually. Before you can print to a virtual printer, the administrator must create and configure the virtual printer using Command WorkStation. After the virtual printer is set up, you can install the printer driver and printer description files on your computer from the Fiery PRO80 using Point and Print. For more information about setting up virtual printers, see Command WorkStation Help. When you install the printer driver using Point and Print, you cannot configure installable options manually. Installable options are configured automatically. The installed options are displayed in the printer driver when you select the Two-Way Communication option. TO SET UP A VIRTUAL PRINTER ON WINDOWS COMPUTERS USING THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Right-click Network Neighborhood or My Network Places and select Find Computer or Search for Computers. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Right-click Network and choose Open from the menu. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start, choose Control Panel, choose Network and Internet, and then under the Network and Sharing Center heading, click the View network computers and devices link. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Type the name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Search Now or Search. Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Type the name of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. Windows Server 2008: Type the name or \\IP address of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. If you cannot locate the Fiery PRO80, contact your network administrator. 3 Double-click the Fiery PRO80 name to display enabled print connections. Virtual printers are listed along with the Print queue, Hold queue, and Direct connection (if those connections are enabled). Virtual printers usually have names that indicate the type of job they are set up for. 4 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and under Classic View, double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 5 Windows 2000/XP: Double-click the Add printer icon and click Next. Windows Server 2003: Double-click the Add a printer icon and click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Add a printer. 6 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Click Local Printer and click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Select Add a local printer. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 48 7 Click Create a New Port, choose Local Port from the menu, and then click Next. 8 In the Port Name dialog box, type the name of the Fiery PRO80 server, followed by the printing connection, and then click OK. Type the port name as follows: \\Aero\print where Aero is the name of the Fiery PRO80 and print is the printing connection. 9 In the dialog box displaying lists of manufacturers and printers, click Have Disk. You will now install the printer driver from the User Software DVD. 10 Type the name of the DVD drive and browse to the Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP_VISTA folder. 11 Make sure that “oemsetup.inf” or “oemsetup” is selected, and then click Open. 12 Verify that the path is correct in the Install From Disk dialog box and click OK. 13 Follow the on-screen instructions. The virtual printer is displayed in the Printers or Printers and Faxes window. You can print to a virtual printer as you would print to the Fiery PRO80. Depending on how the virtual printer is configured, you may not be able to set some print options. Enabling Two-Way Communication You must enable Two-Way Communication to automatically update your printer driver to reflect the options currently installed on the printer. NOTE: You must log on with Administrator privileges to add or change the installable options after the Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 printer driver is installed. For more information, see “Configuring installable options for Windows Vista/Windows 7/ Server 2008 R2 printer driver” on page 57. TO ENABLE TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and under Classic View, double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Properties. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Printer properties. 3 Click the Installable Options tab. 4 Select Two-Way Communication. 5 Type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 49 6 Select Update Fiery Driver When Opened to display the printer’s current default settings when the printer driver is opened. 7 Click Update. NOTE: To confirm that Two-Way Communication is enabled, click the About tab and check that the Fiery PRO80 name and other server information are displayed. 8 Click OK. Uninstalling printer drivers All of the installation of user software on a Windows computer is performed through the Fiery User Software Installer. The procedures in Utilities describe installing from the User Software DVD. The Printer Delete Utility is installed and used locally. You do not need to connect to the Fiery PRO80 before you use the software. TO USE PRINTER DELETE UTILITY 1 Click Start, choose Programs, and then choose Fiery. 2 Click PrinterDeleteUtility. The Printer Delete Utility dialog box appears. Any Fiery PRO80 printer drivers found on your computer are listed. 3 To delete a printer, select the check box next to the printer name and click Delete the Selected Printers. To delete all the installed printer drivers, select the Delete All Printer Drivers check box. 4 Click OK to delete the selected printer driver(s). 5 When you finish deleting printer drivers, click Exit and restart your computer. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 50 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing To print from Windows computers, you or the administrator must perform the following tasks to set up a connection other than port 9100: • Set up network servers, if any. • Set up the Fiery PRO80 to accept print jobs from your computer. • Configure a port on each Windows computer for the network type. Setting up printing connections The Fiery PRO80 supports the following printing connections: • SMB • Standard TCP/IP (RAW or LPR) • IPP or IPP over SSL • Bonjour for Windows NOTE: For more information about Bonjour, see the Apple Inc. website. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Completing the SMB printing connection If your network does not have a Windows server, Windows computers can still print to the Fiery PRO80. This method of printing is SMB printing (also known as Windows or WINS printing). When users send print jobs, computers running Windows operate in a peer-to-peer environment and communicate directly with the Fiery PRO80. Enabling SMB printing allows the Fiery PRO80 to be listed on the network, so that Windows clients can print to a particular print connection (Print queue, Hold queue, Direct connection or Virtual Printer) on the Fiery PRO80 without using other networking software. Windows printing runs via TCP/IP. You must configure TCP/IP on the Fiery PRO80 and on all computers that use SMB printing. After you enable SMB printing on the Fiery PRO80, you can set up the Windows or SMB connection and install the printer driver in one procedure. For more information, see “Installing printer drivers by Point and Print” on page 40. Procedure See Completing IPP connections page 54 Completing Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) printing connections page 51 Completing the SMB printing connection page 50 Configuring installable options page 57 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 51 Completing Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) printing connections After you install the PostScript and printer driver files, you can add or configure the Setup for the Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) connection as follows: • Prepare the Fiery PRO80 to accept print jobs using Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) protocols. • Enable LPD or Port 9100 on the Fiery PRO80. • Configure the computer for the TCP/IP connection. For more information about Setup, see Configure Help. Before you complete the following procedure, contact your system administrator for the IP address assigned to the Fiery PRO80. The TCP/IP protocol should be installed as a default on the Windows computer. For Port 9100, you can set up the connection and install the printer driver in one procedure. NOTE: You can also set up the LPR Port connection by installing Print Services for UNIX, which is supplied as an add-on Windows component. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies Windows. TO SET UP STANDARD TCP/IP PORT (RAW OR LPR) FOR WINDOWS NOTE: The following procedures use Windows XP illustrations. 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Properties. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Printer properties. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 52 3 Click the Ports tab. 4 To add a new port, click Add Port. To change the port settings, proceed to step 11. 5 Windows 2000/XP/Server2003: Select Standard TCP/IP Port from the list of Available port types and click New Port Type. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Double-click Standard TCP/IP Port from list. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Select Standard TCP/IP Port from the list of Available port types and click New Port. The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears. 6 Click Next. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 53 7 Type the Fiery PRO80 IP address. 8 Click Next. 9 Make sure that Generic Network Card is selected as Standard for Device Type and click Next. 10 Click Finish to close the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box, and then click Close in the Printer Ports dialog box. To change the default setting, proceed to step 11. If you do not want to change the default setting, the setting is now completed. NOTE: Port 9100 was set as the default setting in the preceding procedure. 11 Click Configure Port on the Ports tab of the Properties dialog box. The Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box appears. 12 To use LPR printing, select LPR in the Protocol area and LPR Byte Counting Enabled in the LPR Settings area. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 54 NOTE: You can also proceed without selecting LPR Byte Counting Enabled. To use Port 9100 printing, select Raw in the Protocol area. The port number 9100 automatically appears in the Raw Settings area. This is the default port number. You can print to the printer connection selected for Port 9100 printing on the Fiery PRO80. To specify a specific port number, see the following step. 13 Type the name of the print connection. For LPR, enter print or hold for Queue Name or published virtual printer name. The Direct connection is not supported for LPR printing. For Port 9100, type the following port numbers for each print connection in the Raw Settings area: Fiery PRO80 default: 9100 direct: 9101 print: 9102 hold: 9103 NOTE: Type the number exactly as shown. 14 Click OK to close the Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box. NOTE: The Fiery PRO80 supports printing in the IPv6 environment on Windows Server 2008/ Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows Vista. NOTE: LPR printing in the IPv6 environment is supported on the Windows XP/Server 2003 computer from a command line, but other methods may work. 15 Click Apply in the Fiery PRO80 Properties dialog box, and then click OK. Completing IPP connections With Internet Printing Protocol (IPP), print jobs are sent to the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet. Before you begin, perform the following tasks: • Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is configured for TCP/IP printing and IPP printing. For more information, see Configure Help. • Specify the printing destination on your computer. NOTE: IPP over SSL connections is supported. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 55 TO SET UP IPP PRINTING WITH WINDOWS 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers under Classic View. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Windows 2000/XP: Double-click the Add Printer icon and click Next. Windows Server 2003: Double-click the Add a printer icon and click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Add a printer. 3 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Select Network printer and click Next. Windows Vista: Select Add a network printer. Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Select Add a network, wireless, or Bluetooth printer. 4 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: Select Connect to a printer on the Internet or your intranet. Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: If the printer search takes a long time, click Stop, and then click “The printer that I want isn’t listed.” 5 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: In the URL field, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, followed by “ipp/” and then the name of the connection (hold, direct, print, or name of virtual printer). For example, http://10.10.10.150/ipp/print or http://DNS name of the Fiery PRO80/ipp/print sends the job to the Print queue on the Fiery PRO80. For IPP over SSL, type https, instead of http. NOTE: The ipp/print in the example is case sensitive. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 56 Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Select a printer by name, and in the URL field, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, followed by “ipp/” and the name of the connection (hold, direct, print, or name of virtual printer). NOTE: For example, http://10.10.10.150/ipp/print or http://DNS name of Fiery PRO80/ipp/ print sends the job to the Print queue on the Fiery PRO80. NOTE: The URL for the printer is not case-sensitive. 6 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: Click Next. The Connect to Printer dialog box appears. Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Next. 7 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: Click OK. The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears. Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Install driver. 8 If you are installing the PostScript printer for the first time, follow the procedure “To install and complete the print connection for Windows” on page 44, step 9. 9 Indicate whether you want to make the Fiery PRO80 the default printer and click Next. 10 Click Finish. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 57 Configuring installable options After you complete the printer driver installation, you must configure the Fiery PRO80 for the options installed on the printer to allow the Fiery PRO80 to take advantage of the printer options. Configure the options manually, or for TCP/IP network connections, use the Two-Way Communication option to configure the options automatically. For information about specifying installable options, see printer driver Help. Configuring installable options for Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 printer driver Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 have a User Account Control (UAC) feature. You must log on with Administrator privileges to add or change the installable options after the printer driver is installed. TO CHANGE INSTALLABLE OPTIONS 1 Windows Vista: Open the Printers Control Panel. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Open the Devices and Printers Control Panel. 2 Windows Vista: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 printer icon, choose Run as administrator, and then choose Properties. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 printer icon, choose Run as administrator, and then choose Printer properties. The User Account Control dialog box opens. 3 Choose the User that has administrator privileges, type the password, and then click OK. 4 Windows Vista: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 printer icon again and choose Properties. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 printer icon again and choose Printer properties. 5 Click the Installable Options tab and make your selections. 6 Click Apply, and then click OK. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 58 Printing from Windows computers You can print to the Fiery PRO80 just as you would print to any other printer from a Windows application. You can print from a networked Windows computer or a computer using Windows (WINS) printing. The following table includes other methods to print to the Fiery PRO80 and the location in which to find more information. After you install the Fiery PRO80 printer driver and configure the proper port, you can print directly from most Windows applications. Set the print options for the job and choose Print from your application. To achieve optimal printing results from specific applications, see Color Printing, Fiery Color Reference, and Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: The following procedures use Windows XP illustrations, unless specified. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. For more information See Downloading certain types of files to the Fiery PRO80 using the Docs WebTools Utilities Printing documents using E-mail Services “E-mail Service” on page 69 Printing documents using Hot Folders Utilities Setting up the Windows environment for printing with Windows servers connected to the Fiery PRO80 Configuration and Setup Procedure See Customizing the Quick Access icon page 66 Defining and printing custom page sizes page 67 Saving files to print to a remote location page 67 Setting print options and printing from Windows applications page 59 Specifying default print options page 65 Viewing the printer status page 67 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 59 Setting print options and printing from Windows applications To print from Windows platforms, install the PostScript printer driver. For instructions, see “Installing Windows printer drivers” on page 39. Be sure to configure the options on the Advanced tab of the printer driver after installation is complete, as described on page 44. If you print to a virtual printer, you may not be able to set some print options, depending on how the virtual printer is configured. The following procedures explain how to use the printer driver to specify print options for a particular job and print it to the Fiery PRO80. You can also set default print settings using the driver. For information about specific print options, see Print Options. NOTE: The following procedures use Windows XP illustrations. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR A SPECIFIC WINDOWS PRINT JOB USING THE PRINTER DRIVER 1 Choose Print in your application. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. 3 Click the Fiery Printing tab. The Fiery Printing tab serves as the control center for all frequently used printing functions. For information about using presets, see printer driver Help. NOTE: For a list of print options, see page 80. 1 Presets (Job Templates), see Help 2 Print Option icons 3 Customize (Shortcuts), see Help 4 Job View 5 Printer Status 6 Help 1 2 3 5 4 6 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 60 4 Click the Job Info icon. 5 Type a user name and password in the User Authentication area. The user name that you type in the User Authentication area can be your network domain\user name or a local user name. Check with your system administrator about the requirements for your system. If you do not have a user name and password or you want to send jobs as a public user, select the I’m a Guest option. The Fiery PRO80 must be configured to allow guest printing. With external authentication enabled, jobs are printed directly to the Fiery PRO80. With internal authentication, jobs are printed to the Fiery PRO80 if public user is enabled on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer. The printed jobs use the public account for job accounting. Otherwise, clear the I'm a Guest option. If you are not using a network user name and password, you can type your domain\user name and password in the fields provided. Click Validate to validate the user name and password. When the Use Windows Login option is selected, the LDAP domain user name and password are used as an authenticated user name. This is available only if the user is logged on to the Windows computer as a domain user. 6 Type information in the Notes field. Type user and job identification information for managing purposes, or other information that is required at your site. The information that you type in this field can be viewed and edited by the operator in Command WorkStation and also appears in the Job Log. For more information about Command WorkStation, see Utilities and Command WorkStation Help. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 61 7 Type instructions to the operator about the job in the Instructions field. These instructions are displayed in Command WorkStation, but do not appear in the Job Log. These instructions can be edited by the operator. 8 Type public in the Account Name and Account Password fields to send public jobs on the volume track. The volume track must be enabled on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer. 9 Type a password in the Secure Print field if you are sending a secure print job. 10 Type values for the other fields, as required. For information about these fields, see page 80. 11 Click the Color icon and specify the color profile options for the job. In the Color Mode area, select a color mode for the job. NOTE: To display the basic and expert color settings from the Fiery PRO80 in this dialog box, make sure that Two-Way Communication is enabled. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 62 12 To use basic color management features, such as printer color settings, click Basic Settings. To revert to the Fiery PRO80 default color settings, click Server Defaults. To edit advanced color management features, such as RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, click Expert Settings and proceed to step 13. Otherwise, proceed to step 15. Two-Way Communication On PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 63 13 To edit advanced color management features, such as RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, click Expert Settings. The Expert Color Settings Advanced Edit dialog box appears. The advanced edit controls are divided into three tabbed categories: Color Input, Gray & Black Processing, and Output. 14 After you edit the expert settings, click OK. To revert to the Fiery PRO80 default color settings, click Server Defaults. 15 Specify the color settings for the print job and click OK. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 64 16 Choose other printer-specific options. 17 Click the VDP icon to specify variable data printing options. For more information about VDP print options, see “Variable Data Printing (VDP) options” on page 102. 18 Click the Stamping icon to specify a watermark for the print job. For more information about watermarks, see printer driver Help. 19 Click the Printer icon to view printer status. For more information about monitoring printer status, see printer driver Help. 20 Click the remaining print option icons to specify the appropriate settings for the print job and click OK. The settings that you make for these print options override settings that the administrator specified in Fiery PRO80 Printer Setup, but can be overridden from Command WorkStation. For information about these options and overrides, see page 79. For more information about Command WorkStation, see Utilities and Command WorkStation Help. Some print options are available only if a particular installable option has been configured. For information about configuring installable options, see “Configuring installable options” on page 57. If you choose Printer’s default, the job prints according to the settings that the administrator specified in Setup. For more information, see page 79. NOTE: If you specify incompatible print settings, the Conflict dialog box provides instructions to resolve the conflict. 21 From your application, click OK to send your print job. Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is selected as your current printer. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 65 NOTE: Some print options that are selectable from an application are similar to print options that are specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. In these cases, use the print options specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. These options appear in the Fiery Printing tab. The application may not set up the file properly for printing on the Fiery PRO80, resulting in unexpected finishing, printing errors, or longer processing time. NOTE: With the E-mail Notification feature enabled in the printer driver, you receive an e-mail notification after your job is printed or when a printing error occurs. For more information about the E-mail Notification feature, see printer driver Help. Specifying default print options for print jobs To set default print options, use the following procedure. TO SET DEFAULT PRINT OPTIONS FOR WINDOWS PRINT JOBS USING THE POSTSCRIPT PRINTER DRIVER 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Printing Preferences. 3 If the Fiery Printing tab is not displayed, click it. 4 Specify the default settings for your print job, as described on page 59. 5 Click OK to close the dialog box. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 66 Customizing the Quick Access icon The Quick Access icon is on the Fiery Printing tab. You can customize it with the print options you use frequently. This saves time because you do not have to open all of the other print option icons if you only want to set the options in Quick Access. Quick Access initially contains a default group of print options. You can remove these options and add others. NOTE: When you place a print option in Quick Access, it still appears under its appropriate print option icon. You can set the option from either location. For more information about customizing the Quick Access icon, see printer driver Help. 1 Quick Access icon 2 Customize (Shortcuts) 1 2 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 67 Defining and printing custom page sizes With custom page sizes, you define the dimensions of a printed page. After you define a custom page size, you can use it from within an application without redefining it each time you print. When you create custom page sizes, specify Width dimensions to correspond with the shorter side of your job and specify Height dimensions to correspond with the longer side of your job. Set custom page sizes in this way, regardless of the orientation settings in the application. The printer driver custom size range is 100 x 140mm to 330 x 1200mm for the 80C-KM printer. The printer driver custom page size range is 100mm x 148mm to 330mm x 1200mm for the 70-60C-KM printer. However, the actual maximum paper size the Fiery PRO80 can print is 330mm x 487mm. The Fiery PRO80 supports a minimum custom page size of 1.0 inch x 1.0 inch (25.4mm x 25.4mm). Consult your service representative about printing banners and posters. For more information about defining and printing custom page sizes, see printer driver Help. Viewing the printer status If you enabled a TCP/IP network, you can retrieve printer status and color settings from the Fiery PRO80 and display them in the printer driver using the Two-Way Communication option. If you have enabled Two-Way Communication for your printer, you can monitor the status of the printer, including the levels of consumable materials, such as paper and toner. For more information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. Saving files to print at a remote location If you do not have an Fiery PRO80 onsite and are preparing files to take to a service bureau or other location, print the final files to the File port (as opposed to one of the local ports). You can also print to the File port to create a file to download using the Docs WebTool. For instructions on printing to the File port, see the documentation that accompanies Windows. Height Width Width Height Portrait Landscape PRINTING METHODS 68 PRINTING METHODS In addition to printing jobs from the Fiery PRO80 printer driver, you can print jobs using these methods: • Job Monitor displays information about the jobs sent to the Fiery PRO80 and reprints them. • E-mail Service submits jobs to the Fiery PRO80 as e-mail attachments. • USB device prints files saved on a USB drive. • FTP printing prints to the Fiery PRO80 using the FTP protocol. • Secure printing requires that a password be entered at the Fiery PRO80 before a job is printed. • Sample printing prints sample pages from a long job to ensure print quality. • Job Batching prints a collection of print jobs as a single job in the printer job list and accounting information. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Procedure See Configuring and using Job Monitor page 69 E-mail Service page 69 FTP printing page 74 Job Batching page 77 Printing and retrieving a secure print job page 75 Printing from a USB device page 73 Sample printing page 76 PRINTING METHODS 69 Configuring and using Job Monitor Use Job Monitor to monitor the status of Fiery PRO80 and view information about the print jobs sent to them. NOTE: Job Monitor is not supported on Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2, Windows XP/ Vista, Windows 7 64-bit version, or Mac OS X. Configuring the connection When you send your first print job to the Fiery PRO80, Job Monitor opens and establishes a connection to the Fiery PRO80. If you installed and configured printer drivers for more than one printer, Job Monitor automatically establishes connections to all the Fiery PRO80 printers. The Job Monitor icon ( ) appears on the desktop and in the Windows taskbar of your computer. Job Monitor is automatically installed when you choose the printer driver to install on your computer. To use Job Monitor, you must enable it in the printer driver. TO ENABLE JOB MONITOR • Select the Monitor my Print Job check box on the Printer tab of the printer driver. TO DISABLE JOB MONITOR • Clear the Monitor my Print Job check box on the Printer tab of the printer driver. Using Job Monitor For information about using Job Monitor, see Job Monitor Help and printer driver Help. E-mail Service E-mail Service allows you to control the Fiery PRO80 using your current e-mail infrastructure, print to remote locations, and bypass firewalls. E-mail Service is not application-specific. You can use any e-mail infrastructure. The Fiery PRO80 supports internal address books. Administrators can retrieve, add, delete, and clear addresses from the address books by sending requests through e-mail. For more information about address books, see Configuration and Setup. To set up E-mail Service, see Configure Help. PRINTING METHODS 70 Use E-mail Service in the following ways: • Print a job from an e-mail application. To print with an e-mail client, you send a file as an e-mail attachment. E-mail Service extracts the file and sends it to the Fiery PRO80. The attachment can be in any format the Fiery PRO80 recognizes (PostScript, PDF, or TIFF). NOTE: E-mail Service does not process files with .vbs, .exe, or .bat extensions. • Manage jobs using an e-mail application. You can manage your print jobs by submitting e-mail commands to the Fiery PRO80 using e-mail. • Scan to E-mail. You can scan a document and send it to an e-mail address as an attachment or URL. For more information about Scan to E-mail, see Utilities. Printing using an e-mail client You can submit print jobs to the Fiery PRO80 in the form of an e-mail attachment using your e-mail application. When you send an e-mail with an attachment, E-mail Service extracts the file and sends it to the Fiery PRO80 Print queue. The file format must be one supported by the Fiery PRO80. By default, anyone can print with an e-mail client, unless the Print address book has been set up by the administrator. If the Print address book has been set up and your e-mail address is not in it, you cannot send files to the Fiery PRO80 via e-mail. For more information about address books, see Configuration and Setup. When User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80, the e-mail attachment must have the appropriate user name and password when it is printed through e-mail printing. As part of creating the e-mail attachment with the Fiery PRO80 printer driver, type the appropriate user name and password in the Job Info tab of the printer driver. The user name and password must match those defined by the administrator in the Users and Groups section of Configure. For information about Users and Groups, see Configure Help. NOTE: The Direct connection is not supported by the e-mail client feature. NOTE: The following illustrations depict the Microsoft Outlook e-mail application. PRINTING METHODS 71 TO PRINT USING AN E-MAIL CLIENT 1 Open your e-mail application. 2 Type the Fiery PRO80 e-mail address in the To: line. 3 Type text in the Subject line or leave the Subject line blank. 4 Attach the file that you want to print. The attachment can be in any format the Fiery PRO80 recognizes (PostScript, PDF, or TIFF). NOTE: If your attachment exceeds the file size limitation set by your e-mail system administrator, the e-mail is not sent. 5 Optionally, you can type text in the body of the message. The text is printed with the file. NOTE: HTML-formatted e-mail messages are not supported, and might not print as they appear on the remote workstation. Send e-mail messages in plain text format. 6 Send the e-mail. The file is sent to the Fiery PRO80 and the job is printed. After the Fiery PRO80 receives the job, you are sent an e-mail notification that the print job was accepted. The e-mail provides a job identification (ID). Use the job IDs to manage jobs with e-mail commands (see “Managing print jobs with e-mail commands” on page 72). The e-mail notification indicates any current error at the printer. After the job is printed, you are sent a second e-mail notification that indicates the job printed successfully. PRINTING METHODS 72 Managing print jobs with e-mail commands You can manage your print jobs by submitting commands to the Fiery PRO80 using e-mail. You can cancel a job, check job status, and get help on a job. When you send a command, the Fiery PRO80 returns an e-mail response. TO MANAGE PRINT JOBS WITH E-MAIL COMMANDS 1 In your e-mail application, type the Fiery PRO80 e-mail address in the To: line. 2 Type one of the following commands in the Subject line: To check the status of a job, type #JobStatus in the Subject line. You receive a reply to your job status query. You can only get the status of the job if you sent the job or are an administrator. To cancel a job, type #CancelJob in the Subject line. You receive a notification indicating that the job has been cancelled and did not print to the Fiery PRO80. You can only cancel a job if you sent the job or are an administrator. To get help, type #Help in the Subject line. You receive an e-mail response that contains links that allow you to cancel jobs, check job status, and search and manage address books. Click any of the links to perform a command. 3 Send the e-mail to the Fiery PRO80. PRINTING METHODS 73 Printing from a USB device You can print files on a USB device to the Fiery PRO80. To do so, save files to the USB device and download them directly to the Fiery PRO80. You can print files that originated on Mac OS X or Windows computers. You can print files automatically from a USB device to one of the standard print queues on the Fiery PRO80 (Print, Hold, or Direct) or to published virtual printers (if supported). Verify with your administrator that these connections are published in Setup. For more information about virtual printers, see Command WorkStation Help. Before you print files from a USB device, ask your administrator to configure the appropriate options. For more information about configuring the appropriate options, see Configuration and Setup or Configure Help. Automatic printing To print automatically to Print, Hold, or Direct queues, or to published virtual printers with the Print All setting, set up folders on your USB device with the names print, hold, direct, and the names of any published virtual printers. When you plug the USB device into a USB port on the Fiery PRO80, the files in those folders are sent automatically to the corresponding queues. TO PRINT FILES FROM THE USB DEVICE 1 Configure the USB printing options in Setup. 2 Create folders at the top (root) level of the USB device named print, hold, direct, and virtual printer. 3 Save the files (PS, EPS, TIFF, and PDF) from the user’s computer to the USB device. Files copied to the print, hold, direct, or virtual printer folders are downloaded to the corresponding print connection on the Fiery PRO80 automatically when you connect the USB device to the Fiery PRO80. Files copied to the root level of the USB device are downloaded to the Print queue. 4 Remove the USB device from the computer and connect it to the USB connector on the Fiery PRO80. Make sure that the USB device is properly stopped before you disconnect it from the computer. For the location of the USB port, see Configuration and Setup. PRINTING METHODS 74 FTP printing If FTP Services are enabled on the Fiery PRO80, the Fiery PRO80 is set up as an FTP server. You can send jobs to the Fiery PRO80 using FTP printing. For more information about configuring FTP Services, see Configure Help. You can use any FTP client software. Before you use FTP printing, the FTP client software requires the following information (see your administrator): • IP address or DNS name for the Fiery PRO80 • Directory or path to send the job to, such as the Print Queue, Hold Queue, or published virtual printers (if supported) NOTE: You cannot print to the Direct connection using FTP printing. • User name and password (if required) You can send PostScript (PS), Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), and Portable Document Format (PDF) files to the Fiery PRO80. Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files are not supported for FTP printing. TO PRINT FILES TO THE FIERY PRO80 USING THE FTP PROTOCOL 1 Connect to the Fiery PRO80 with your FTP client software. Folders corresponding to the Print queue and Hold queue are displayed. Folders for any published virtual printer are also displayed. 2 Navigate to the folder representing the print connection or published virtual printer. 3 Upload your job to the folder that you want. After the job is printed, it is deleted from the Fiery PRO80. PRINTING METHODS 75 Printing and retrieving a secure print job The Secure Print feature offers a level of security for confidential or sensitive print jobs, which print only when you are present at the printer. To use this feature, you first enter an arbitrary password into the Secure Print field in the printer driver when you send your job to the Fiery PRO80. To print your job, you re-enter the password at the Fiery PRO80 printer touch panel as described in the following procedures. TO SEND A SECURE PRINT JOB 1 In your application, select File > Print. 2 Windows: Click the Job Info icon. Mac OS X: Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties, and then click the Job Info icon of the Printing Preferences dialog box. 3 Enter an arbitrary password in the Secure Print field. NOTE: The password is limited to alphanumeric characters (do not use symbols). For more information about entering the password, see page 32 or page 61. 4 Make any other changes to job properties and send your job to the Fiery PRO80. 5 Click OK to close the Fiery PRO80 Properties dialog box. 6 Click OK or Print to close the Print dialog box. TO RETRIEVE A SECURE PRINT JOB 1 On the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer, press the User Box button. 2 Press System User Box. 3 Press Secure Print User Box. 4 Press the Use/File button. 5 Enter the ID, and then press OK. 6 Enter the password, and then press OK. Secure jobs are shown on the printer touch panel. NOTE: The Secure Print ID and Job Password are set in the printer driver. 7 Select the job and press the Start button on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer. PRINTING METHODS 76 Sample printing The Sample Print feature allows you to print extra pages to an easily accessible output tray during a long print job, to verify that the printer is performing as expected. For example, when a job is currently printing to a closed elevator (such as, 1000 pages to an output tray that cannot be opened until the entire job is completed), you can use the sample print function to print a separate page or finished output set to an open output tray to verify the output. If the output is unsatisfactory, you can take corrective action. Sample Print should only be used with printers that have multiple output trays, and is useful when one of the output trays is closed and not easily accessed during printing. The Sample Print default settings for the specified Fiery PRO80 can be set up in Configure. For more information, see Configure Help. When the job is printing, you can initiate a sample print from Command WorkStation. For more information about Sample Print, see Command WorkStation Help. Using Sample Print You can print an extra sheet or output set as follows: • Once during the printing of a job • Every N-sheets during the currently printing job • Every N-sheets until cancelled (can span jobs) When the job is printing, you can initiate a sample print. The default setup values are applied and any existing sample print command in progress is overridden. If Start Sample Print appears dimmed or unavailable, the Fiery PRO80 is already performing a sample print or it is not available for the specified Fiery PRO80. TO INITIATE A SAMPLE PRINT • While a job is printing, initiate a sample print from Server > Start Sample Print. After sample print has been initiated, the Fiery PRO80 performs the sample print based on the options specified in Configure. TO CANCEL A SAMPLE PRINT • While a job is printing, cancel a sample print from Server > Stop Sample Print. The Fiery PRO80 cancels the previously requested sample print command. PRINTING METHODS 77 Job Batching Job Batching provides a way for the Fiery PRO80 to send print jobs to the printer to make sure the job can print (if the print job is overly complex) or print faster by minimizing cycle down times. A batch job is a collection of jobs sent to the copier as a single job. The batch job is shown as a single job in the printer job list and accounting information. The Fiery PRO80 can continue adding pages to an existing batch job, as long as the pages are processed and ready for printing. Job Batching functionality can be enabled or disabled by the administrator. For more information about configuring Job Batching, see Configuration and Setup. Cancelling batch jobs When the Fiery PRO80 cancels a job in a batch either through an error or user intervention, it cancels that job and resends the remainder of the jobs from that batch as a new batch job in addition to any other queued batch jobs. This functionality maintains the ability to print jobs in the desired order, including user-defined changes such as cancel, print next, and rush print. Using Command WorkStation Print Next and Rush Print commands with batch jobs Print Next and Rush Print commands in Command WorkStation cannot be applied to batch jobs. If you apply a Print Next command to a job that is not part of the batch job, the Fiery PRO80 stops adding jobs to the batch job and then prints the Print Next job after the current batch job finishes printing. If you apply a Rush Print command to a job that is not part of the batch job, the Fiery PRO80 stops adding pages to the batch job at an appropriate place in the job and then prints the Rush Print job after the current batch job finishes printing. The Fiery PRO80 sends the remaining pages of the interrupted job (as necessary) and continues printing normally. Accounting batch jobs When the Fiery PRO80 batches jobs together, it lists each original job while the printer lists only the resulting batched job. This can create a discontinuity between the Fiery PRO80 job list or job log, and the printer job list or job log. The total media counts, however, remain consistent between the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. PRINT OPTIONS 78 PRINT OPTIONS This chapter describes printer drivers and PPD (PostScript Printer Description) files, Fiery PRO80 print options, and where to set print options. About printer drivers and printer description files The Fiery PRO80 receives files from computers on the network, processes (RIPs) the files, and then sends them to the printer. Windows and Mac OS computers communicate with the Fiery PRO80 by means of a printer driver and PPD files. The driver allows you to use special features of the Fiery PRO80 from the Print dialog box. A printer driver manages printing communication between your application and the printer. It interprets the instructions generated by the application, merges those instructions with printer-specific options you set, and then translates all information into Adobe PostScript, a language the printer understands. In other words, the printer driver writes a PostScript file based on your original file and the options you set from the Print dialog box. A printer driver also allows you to select print options for your printer. To do this, the printer driver must be matched with a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for your Fiery PRO80. A PPD file contains information about the features and capabilities of a particular device (for example, what paper sizes and media types are supported). The printer driver reads the information in the PPD file and presents the information to you in the form of options you select in the Print dialog box. The PPD file for the Fiery PRO80 includes information about the features of both the printer and the Fiery PRO80. For information about the specific print options for the Fiery PRO80, see the tables that begin on page 81. PRINT OPTIONS 79 Setting print options Print options give you access to the special features of your printer and the Fiery PRO80. You can specify print options in these areas: • Setup Some settings are specified during Setup by the administrator. For information about the current default server settings, contact the administrator or the operator. • Applications With the printer drivers provided, you can specify job settings when you print a job. For more information, see “Setting print options and printing from Windows applications” on page 59 and “Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X applications” on page 30. • Color Setup Set the default CMYK/Grayscale Source, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method, RGB/Lab Source, Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source, Output Profile, RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, Spot Color Matching, Gray (CMYK), Gray (RGB), Black Text and Graphics, and Black Overprint settings. For information about using Color Setup, see Color Printing. • Hot Folders Assign a group of print options to a Hot Folder. When you specify print options for a Hot Folder, the print options are assigned to all jobs sent through that Hot Folder. These print options override any default options. For information, see Hot Folders Help. • Overrides in Command WorkStation To change job settings from Command WorkStation, double-click a job to display the Properties dialog box. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Print option override hierarchy The override hierarchy is as follows: • A user’s printer driver settings override the Fiery PRO80 Setup settings. • Settings assigned to Hot Folders override the user’s printer driver settings. • Settings made from the job management tools (Command WorkStation Job Properties) override the user’s printer driver settings. PRINT OPTIONS 80 Print options and default settings If you do not use the printer driver interface to configure a particular option, the Fiery PRO80 prints the job with the default setting. For options that the administrator configures, choosing Printer’s default results in the Fiery PRO80 printing the job with the factory default. For options that cannot be configured in Setup, the Fiery PRO80 prints the job with a preconfigured Printer’s default setting. When you select the printer driver for US, the default Document Size is Letter or for International, the default Document Size is A4. For more information, see the following tables. To determine the current Setup defaults, print the Configuration page from Command WorkStation. For information about how to print a Configuration page, see Configuration and Setup. Note: A job uses the Fiery PRO80 default settings (unless otherwise specified) at the time it is processed for printing, and not at the time it is sent to the Fiery PRO80 Hold queue. The print option tables are organized according to the printer driver icons (tabs). For quick access, use the following links: Printer driver icon See Quick Access (shortcuts) page 30 or page 66 Job Info page 81 Media page 83 Layout page 85 Color page 94 Image page 98 Finishing page 100 Variable Data Printing (VDP) page 102 Stamping/Watermark page 103 PRINT OPTIONS 81 Job Info options Option Information Copies The maximum number of copies is 9999. Print Range Specify the page range or odd/even pages to print. For VDP jobs, a range of Records can be selected for printing. For imposed VDP jobs, a range of Records & Sheets can be printed. For imposed jobs, a range of Sheet IDs can be selected for printing. This option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Schedule Printing Specify if you want to perform advance print scheduling based on date and time. If you select On, select the date and time for the print job. The job is printed based on the date and time set on the Fiery PRO80, not the client workstation. NOTE: If multiple jobs are selected and defined with the same date and time setting, job order is based on alphabetic order of the file names. User Authentication: User Name If User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80, specify your User Name to print a job. Type your user name or domain\user name for user authentication. User Authentication: Password If User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80, specify your User Password to print a job. Type your local password or domain password for user authentication. NOTE: When the internal authentication of the printer is used and the Enhanced Security mode is set on the printer, it is not necessary to enter the password. User Authentication: Use Windows Login If you are logged on to your Windows computer, select Use Windows Login for user authentication. This option appears when you log on to your domain on your Windows computer. For more information, see Configuration and Setup. User Authentication: I’m a Guest Select On to allow guest printing. Guest printing must be set to On at the Fiery PRO80. In Command WorkStation, the management of jobs is determined by how you log on to the Fiery PRO80. Notes Specify information about the job. This field has a 31-character (alphanumeric and special characters) limit. Instructions Specify instructions for the operator about the job. This field has a 127-character (alphanumeric and special characters) limit. Secure Print Use the Secure Print feature when printing sensitive or confidential documents. Specify an arbitrary password and re-enter it when you are present at the copier. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your copier. Account Name Enter up to eight characters (alphanumeric) for account tracking purposes. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies your printer. PRINT OPTIONS 82 Account Password Enter up to eight characters (alphanumeric) for account tracking purposes. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies your printer. Print Queue Action Select the job action associated with a published queue. Select Print to send the file directly to printing. Select Print and Hold to save the raster file after printing. Select Process and Hold to RIP (process), but not print a job. This option is invalid if your job is sent to the Direct connection. Control Bar Specify On to print a Control Bar (for print job identification) in the margin. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. Progressives Specify On to enable the Progressives feature, a diagnostic tool used to show toner separations. This feature uses the Progressives values specified in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: The Progressives and Postflight features cannot be used at the same time. Postflight Specify whether or not you want to use the Postflight feature, a diagnostic tool that allows you to analyze how data is processed by the Fiery PRO80. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: The Progressives and Postflight features cannot be used at the same time. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 83 Media options Option Information Paper Catalog Click Select to access the Paper Catalog utility, which retrieves all paper information from the printer. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see page 122. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. Access to Paper Catalog requires Two-Way Communication. For information about establishing Two- Way Communication, see printer driver Help. Paper Color If you are using color media for your print job, specify Non-White. NOTE: Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. Input Tray Specify the paper tray to use for your job. NOTE: Paper size, 9x11, is a special size to make 8.5x11 tab size. After you print the job on 9x11, 8.5x11 tab size can be made by using an index cutter to cut on the marks. NOTE: Two-sided tab (index) printing of 9x11 paper size is not supported. Auto Tray Select automatically uses the tray containing the paper size specified for the job. This setting also allows the printer to automatically switch between trays, if the current tray becomes empty, while continuing to print. NOTE: If you enable tray alignment, Input Tray cannot be set to Auto Tray Select. Paper Weight Specify the weight of the paper used for your print job. For a list of the supported paper weights, see the documentation that accompanies your printer. NOTE: Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. Document Size Document Size is the page size defined in your application’s Print setup (or Page setup) dialog box. In cases when printing one document page per sheet of paper, Document Size is usually the same as Paper Size. However, it may differ when printing booklets or imposing multiple document pages on a single sheet. Document Size may also differ from Paper Size when you use the Scale or Scale to Fit options, in which case the document page size is scaled at a given percent to fit a certain paper size. The following sizes are handled as standard sizes in the printer driver, but possibly as custom sizes on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer: ISO B4, ISO B5, ISO B5S, and ISO B6S. You can, however, contact your service representative. To change Document size, Orientation, and Mirror print option settings, click the Document Setting tab in the Windows printer driver’s Printing Preferences dialog box. NOTE: The default is Letter in the U.S. and A4 elsewhere. For more information about Document size and Paper size, see page 115. For information about Scale and Scale to fit, see page 124. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. Paper Type Specify the type of paper used for your print job. NOTE: Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. PRINT OPTIONS 84 Punched Paper Specify Punched when you insert pre-punched media. NOTE: Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. Tray Alignment Select On to enable Tray Alignment, a feature that adjusts the placement of text and images so that they are properly aligned for duplex printing. For information about using Tray alignment, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: If you enable tray alignment, Input Tray cannot be set to Auto Tray Select. Paper Size Paper Size defines the size of the sheet of paper on which your job prints. It is the size of the physical sheet of paper in the printer tray. To assign Paper Size, do one of the following: • Select the size from the available list • Click Custom to select a non-standard paper size. • Select Same as document size to print one document page per sheet of paper. The following sizes are handled as standard sizes in the printer driver, but possibly as custom sizes on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer: ISO B4, ISO B5, ISO B5S, and ISO B6S. You can, however, contact your service representative. The default size is Letter in the U.S. and A4 elsewhere. For information about Paper size and Document size, see page 115. Mixed Media Use Mixed Media to specify different media types, paper source, and chapter-based finishing for pages, or ranges of pages, within a print job. For more information, see page 119. For information about using Mixed Media in Command WorkStation, see Utilities. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 85 Layout options The Driver has four layout modes: • Normal: use these options for printing standard documents, from 1 to 16 document pages per sheet (page 85). • Gangup: use these options for speed printing imposition modes (page 86). For additional information, see page 118. • Booklet: use these options for printing documents in booklet layout (page 87). For additional information, see page 105. • Impose: use imposition layouts for custom printing, binding, and trimming (page 93). Normal Option Information Scale Specify an increase or decrease in the scale of your print job. When using the manual Scale option, you cannot specify Scale to Fit. For more information, see page 124. Scale to Fit Specify whether to scale your job to fit to a paper size. When using the Scale to Fit option, you cannot use the manual Scale option. For more information, see page 124. Duplex Specify whether a job is printed single-sided or double-sided (duplex), by selecting a binding method. For more information, see page 116. Rotate 180 (check box) Specify On to rotate the pages of a job 180 degrees. Orientation Override Depending on the application you are using, a landscape job might print with the incorrect orientation. If this occurs, use this option to correct the orientation for your job. This option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Print Border Select On to print borders around each page in your print job. Pages per Sheet Specify the number of document pages per sheet of paper for your print job. NOTE: This option is invalid if your job is sent to the Direct connection. Page Order Specify the layout direction when the Pages per sheet option is set to 2-up or greater. PRINT OPTIONS 86 Gangup options Option Information Gangup Select On to specify options for speed printing imposition modes. Gang-up type Select Step & repeat to speed print a job by printing two document pages on each sheet. When the printed sheets are cut in half, the result is two complete sets of the same document. Select Cut & stack to speed print a job by printing two document pages side by side. When the printed sheets are cut in half and stacked together, the result is one complete set of the document (in faster printing time). For more information, see page 118. Paper Size Paper Size defines the size of the sheet of paper on which your job prints. It is the size of the physical sheet of paper in the printer tray. To assign Paper Size, do one of the following: • Select the size from the available list. • Choose Select From Paper Catalog to access a dynamic database that stores the media attributes of any paper available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. • Select Custom Paper Size to select a non-standard paper size. • Select Same as document size to print one document page per sheet of paper. The default size is Letter in the U.S. and A4 elsewhere. For information about Paper size and Document size, see page 115. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see Utilities. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. Shrink to fit Shrink to fit automatically scales down or reduces the document page size to fit the imageable area of the selected paper size specified from the Paper size menu. Shrink to fit does not scale up or enlarge. When Shrink to fit is set to Off, page contents print at 100%. Increase gutter by 0/-50–50 mm (0.1 mm increments) 0/-1.969–1.969 in (.001 inch increments) Increase gutter by controls the amount of space between adjacent pages on a sheet to adjust for trimming or other finishing options. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between adjacent pages. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between adjacent pages. Duplex Select Off for simplex (single-sided) printing. Specify Right and Left Bind for duplex (double-sided) printing with both sides using the same top edge. For more information, see page 116. PRINT OPTIONS 87 Booklet options NOTE: You can use the Booklet Maker Wizard to specify your booklet options by clicking Launch Wizard. Option Information Booklet Select On to specify options for printing documents in booklet layout. Click Launch Wizard to specify how to arrange the pages of the job in special layouts for folding or cutting after printing. Booklet Type Booklet Type is a combination of binding method, which determines how the signatures of the booklet are folded and imposed, and binding edge, which determines the location of the spine of the booklet. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. For information about 1-up Perfect binding booklet options, see page 90. Paper size: Paper Size for 2-up Paper Size for 2-up defines the size of the sheet of paper (unfolded) on which a booklet is printed. To select a Paper size for a booklet, do one of the following: • Select from the list of available sizes. • Choose Select From Paper Catalog to access a dynamic database that stores the media attributes of any paper available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. • Select Custom Paper Size to create a non-standard Paper size. • Select Same as document size to print one document page per sheet of paper. The default Paper Size is Letter in the U.S. and A4 elsewhere. For information about Paper size and Document size in booklets, see page 115 and Booklet Maker Help. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see Utilities. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. Paper size: Shrink to fit Shrink to fit automatically scales down or reduces the document page size to fit the imageable area of the selected paper size specified from the Paper size menu. Shrink to fit does not scale up or enlarge. When Shrink to fit is set to Off, page content prints at 100%. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. The Shrink to fit option is available only in Advanced mode. Subset Size: Number of sheets in a subset (saddle) When Nested Saddle is selected, use this option to specify the number of sheets in each subset. This option appears only when Nested Saddle is selected. Page alignment: Align pages Align pages positions page content in relation to the center of one-half the paper size or the spine, the center of the sheet where the fold occurs. At the center positions page content in the center of one-half the specified paper size. At the spine aligns page content with the spine or center fold of your booklet. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. PRINT OPTIONS 88 Page alignment: Increase gutter by 0/-50–50 mm (0.1 mm increments) 0/-1.969–1.969 in (.001 inch increments) Increase gutter by controls the amount of space between adjacent pages to adjust for binding or other finishing options. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between adjacent pages. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between adjacent pages. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Page alignment: Compensate creep Compensate creep for adjusts the position of the page content to counteract the shift that occurs when sheets are folded to create Saddle and Nested Saddle booklets. Select Plain when printing Saddle or Nested Saddle booklets with a large number of pages. Select Thick when printing Saddle or Nested Saddle booklets on heavyweight paper. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Cover: Content input Select Front & Back Separately to include cover content (individual pages in your document) as part of your booklet print job. Select Pre-Printed (use insert) to insert a pre-printed cover that will be added to the body pages from an inserter tray. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Cover: Front Cover When Front & Back Separately is selected, use the Front Cover option to define how the content of the front cover is printed. Select Print on outside to print only on the outside of the front cover (the inside of the front cover will be blank). Select Print on inside to print only on the inside of the front cover (the outside of the front cover will be blank). Select Print on both sides to print on both the inside and outside of the front cover. Select Do not print if you do not want any content printed on the front cover. When you add a cover, blank pages may be inserted depending on the allocation of pages to signatures. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 89 Cover: Back Cover When Front & Back Separately is selected, use the Back Cover option to define how the content of the back cover is printed. Select Print on outside to print only on the outside of the back cover (the inside of the back cover will be blank). Select Print on inside to print only on the inside of the back cover (the outside of the back cover will be blank). Select Print on both sides to print on both the inside and outside of the back cover. Select Do not print if you do not want any content printed on the back cover. When you add a cover, blank pages may be inserted depending on the allocation of pages to signatures in the job. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Cover: Define Cover Click Define Cover to specify the following cover options: Booklet cover source (Saddle only), Color mode, Media, Paper color, Punched paper, Paper type, and Paper weight. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you set the Booklet cover source option. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 90 1-up Perfect Binding Booklet options Option Information 1-up Perfect Binding The 1-up Perfect binding method prints single body pages that are stacked together, so that the edges may be trimmed (if desired) and glued, and then wrapped by a cover sheet. To print a 1-up Perfect binding booklet, your printer must be equipped with an advanced finisher that supports Perfect binding. Specify Left Binding for a book that reads from left to right, with the spine (binding edge) at left. Specify Right Binding for a book that reads from right to left, with the spine (binding edge) at right. Specify Top Binding for a book that reads from top to bottom, with the spine (binding edge) at the top. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Units Specify the units for the booklet. Body Paper Size Body Paper Size defines the paper size for the body pages of the booklet. To select a Body Paper Size for your booklet, do one of the following: • Select from the list of available sizes in the Body Paper Size menu. • Choose Select From Paper Catalog to access a dynamic database that stores the media attributes of any paper available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. • Select Custom Paper Size to create a non-standard paper size, using the Custom Page Size width (feed edge) and height dimensions. • Select Same as Document Size to print one document page per sheet of paper. The default Document size is Letter in the US and A4 elsewhere. Select Edit to define media attributes for the body paper size, such as Color mode, Input tray, Paper type, and Paper weight. For information about Paper size and Document size in booklets, see page 115 and Booklet Maker Help. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see Utilities. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. PRINT OPTIONS 91 Cover Paper Size Specify the paper size for the booklet cover. To select a Cover Paper Size for your booklet, do one of the following: • Select from the list of available sizes in the Cover Paper Size menu. • Choose Select From Paper Catalog to access a dynamic database that stores the media attributes of any paper available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. • Select Custom Paper Size to create a non-standard paper size, using the Custom Page Size width (feed edge) and height dimensions. The default Document size is Letter in the US and A4 elsewhere. Select Edit to define media attributes for the cover paper size, such as Booklet cover source, Color mode, Paper type, and Paper weight. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you set the Booklet cover source option. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see Utilities. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. Cover Content: Content input Specify Front & Back Separately to include cover content (individual pages in your document) as part of your booklet print job. This is the default setting. Specify Front & Back Together to include cover content as part of the booklet in a custom document size larger than that of the body pages. Specify Pre-printed to insert a pre-printed cover that will be merged with the body pages of your booklet, which print separately. For information about Cover options, see Booklet Maker Help. Cover Content: Front Cover The following options allow you to quickly decide whether your front cover prints duplex, singlesided, or both sides blank, without needing to add blank pages in your original document. Specify Print on outside to print the cover content only on the outside of the front cover (the inside of the front cover will be blank). This is the default setting. Specify Print on inside to print the cover content only on the inside of the front cover (the outside of the front cover will be blank). Specify Print on both sides to print on both the inside and outside of the front cover. Specify Do not print if you do not want any content printed on the front cover. When you add a cover, blank pages may be inserted depending on the allocation of pages to signatures. For information about cover options, see Booklet Maker Help. NOTE: The front cover content pages must be specified as the first and second pages within the source document. NOTE: This option is available when the Content input option is Front & Back Separately. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 92 Cover Content: Back Cover Specify Print on outside to print the cover content only on the outside of the back cover (the inside of the back cover will be blank). This is the default setting. Specify Print on inside to print the cover content only on the inside of the back cover (the outside of the back cover will be blank). Specify Print on both sides to print on both the inside and outside of the back cover. Specify Do not print if you do not want any content printed on the back cover. When you add a cover, blank pages may be inserted depending on the allocation of pages to signatures. For information about cover options, see Booklet Maker Help. NOTE: The back cover content pages must be specified as the second to last and last pages within the source document. NOTE: This option is available when the Content input option is Front & Back Separately. Cover Content: Spine Width Specify the value for the spine width of the booklet. The spine width value is used to determine the trim amount, and cover paper size. When the Cover input option is Front & Back Separately, the spine width value is used to determine the distance between the front and back cover content. When the Cover input option is Front & Back Together or Pre-printed, the cover content has already been printed or included in the document source, therefore the spine width does not alter the cover layout. Cover Content: Spine Content Specify None if you wish to not print on the spine of the booklet. This is the default setting. Specify Document Page to print content on the spine of the booklet. Printing of the spine is achieved by using the last document page as the spine. For top binding, the spine content is rotated 180 degrees to ensure the spine content is in the correct orientation for reading. NOTE: This option is available when the Content input option is Front & Back Separately. Body Position: Booklet Scaling Specify Shrink to Body Size to automatically scale down the document page to fit the paper size specified from the Body Paper Size menu. Specify None when booklet scaling is not necessary. This is the default setting. Body Position: Align Pages Align Pages positions page content in relation to the center of one-half the paper size or the spine, the center of the sheet where the fold occurs. At the spine aligns the body page content flush against the binding edge. This is the default setting. At the center aligns the body page content horizontally and vertically centered within the body page. You can fine tune the alignment of the page content vertically (parallel to the spine) or horizontally (perpendicular to the spine) by specifying values. For information about centering adjustments, see Booklet Maker Help. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 93 Impose options The Impose option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Body Position Custom Adjustment Vertically 0.00 (-50.0-50.0mm) (-1.969 to 1.969 in.) You can fine tune the alignment of the body page content vertically (parallel to the spine) by specifying a value. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between the body pages and the binding edge. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between the body pages and the binding edge. Body Position Custom Adjustment Horizontally 0.00 (-50.0-50.0mm) (-1.969 to 1.969 in.) You can fine tune the alignment of the body page content horizontally (perpendicular to the spine) by specifying a value. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between the body pages and the binding edge. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between the body pages and the binding edge. Cover Position 0.00 (-50.0-50.0mm) (-1.969 to 1.969 in.) Specify the placement of the cover content to be centered vertically and horizontally within the cover sheet. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between the cover pages and the spine. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between the cover pages and spine. Option Information Option Information Impose Select On to specify an imposition layout for the job. Templates Specify an imposition layout template for the job. The available templates are Default Template, 1-up full Bleed, 2-up perfect, 2-up saddle, 3-up trifold brochure, 4-up gate fold, 4-up head to head, 4-up z fold. PRINT OPTIONS 94 Color options . Option Information Color Mode Specify the color mode for the current print job. Select CMYK for a full-color document. Select Grayscale for a grayscale or black-and-white document. Choose Basic Settings to specify color print options and settings. Choose Expert Settings to edit other color print options and settings, including Black Overprint, Black Text and Graphics, Gray (CMYK), and Gray (RGB). For information about Expert Settings, see page 95. Auto Trapping Specify whether the job should automatically reduce white gaps for text and graphics. Setting this option to On may result in graphics or text surrounded with borders. For more information, see page 105. Black Detection When printing jobs with both black-and-white and color pages, use this option to detect black-andwhite pages before the job prints. Select Off if the job contains a significant number of color pages. Select On if the job is predominantly black and white. For more information, see Color Printing. Composite Overprint Select On to overprint objects that are specified in the source PostScript or PDF file. Design applications are typically set to knock out objects. To overprint, you must first change the settings in the source application. When the Composite Overprint option is then set to On, the overprinting commands specified in the source application take place, provided the output is composite and consistent with the separations output. For more information, see Color Printing. Combine Separations When printing separations from supported desktop publishing applications: Select On to combine separations on a single page. Select Off to view separations as four individual black-and-white pages, each representing one color plate. For more information, see Color Printing. Substitute Colors Select On to use the Substitute Color Values defined in the Spot-On module. For more information, see Color Printing. 2-Color Print Mapping Specify if you want to replace spot colors with generic colors when you are creating a print job. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. PRINT OPTIONS 95 Expert Settings options To access the following options, click Expert Settings. Expert Settings has three modes: • Color Input: use these options for color printing (page 95). • Gray & Black Processing: use these options for grayscale or black & white printing (page 97). • Output: specify the output profile to use for printing document (page 97). Color Input Option Information CMYK/Grayscale Source Specify the simulation goal to be used for the current print job. For more information, see Color Printing. CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method Specify the simulation method for CMYK print jobs. Select Full (Source GCR) for a more complete and accurate simulation. Full (Source GCR) applies colorimetric transformations that adjust hue as well as output density and produces output that maintains the same amount of black as the source document. Select Full (Output GCR) to apply the same simulation method as Full (Source GCR), except that the output produced contains a black amount determined by the Output Profile. Select Quick to use one-dimensional transfer curves to adjust density output of individual color channels. For more information, see Color Printing. Paper Simulation Specify to adjust the color according to the shade of the paper stock used as printable CMYK values in the output color space. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. RGB Source Specify a source color space definition for printing RGB images, objects, and text. For more information, see Color Printing. PRINT OPTIONS 96 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent Specify a default CRD (color rendering dictionary) for color conversion when printing RGB images, objects, and text. Select Presentation to print files with artwork, graphics and text. The result is similar to Photographic, with well-rendered flesh tones and more saturated colors. Select Photographic to print photographs, including scanned and digital camera images. The result is less saturated than Presentation style. Select Relative Colorimetric when color matching is important, but you also want to print white as paper white. The white point transformation eliminates borders between blank spaces and white objects. Select Absolute Colorimetric when exact colors are required and visible borders are not distracting. There is no white point transformation. For more information, see Color Printing. Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source Select for RGB jobs when you want to simulate an output device other than the device to which you are printing. For more information, see Color Printing. Spot Color Matching Select Off to print specified PANTONE colors in your job using the current CMYK/Grayscale Source and CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method. Select On to activate the PANTONE Lookup Table. The Fiery PRO80 prints specified PANTONE colors in your job by matching the CMYK print blend to the same color from the PANTONE library. For more information, see Color Printing. PDF/X Output Intent Specify On to enable the PDF/X Output Intent feature to use the embedded output intent for PDF/X compliant print jobs. To use PDF/X Output Intent, you must set the RGB/Lab Source to None. For information about the PDF/X Output Intent feature, see Color Printing. This option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 97 Gray & Black Processing Output Option Information Gray (CMYK) Select these settings to print a CMYK job using black toner instead of process black. This option renders the selected object types (Text/Graphics or Text/Graphics/Images) in grayscale using black only, when C=M=Y=0 and K=n, where n is not zero. Graphics refer to vector graphics and Images refer to raster images. This option is designed to use black efficiently, by using only black toner (rather than four-color process black). For more information, see Color Printing. Gray (RGB) Select these settings to print an RGB job using black toner instead of process black. This option renders the selected object types (Text/Graphics or Text/Graphics/Images) in grayscale using black only, when R=G=B. Graphics refer to vector graphics and Images refer to raster images. This option is designed to use black efficiently, by using only black toner (rather than four-color process black). For more information, see Color Printing. Black Text and Graphics Select Normal to print black text and graphics as a four-color black using C, M, Y, and K toner, and to use normal PostScript rendering. Select Pure Black On to print black text and graphics as a one-color black, using black toner only. Select Rich Black On to print black text and graphics as richer looking black, by layering a small amount of Cyan toner underneath the black toner to make the black even darker. This option is automatically set to Pure Black On if the Black Overprint option is enabled. For more information, see Color Printing. Black Overprint (for pure black) Select Text to overprint black text. Select Text/Graphics to overprint black text and graphics. For more information, see Color Printing. Option Information Default Output Profile Specify the output profile to use for the current print job. For information about output profiles, see Color Printing. PRINT OPTIONS 98 Image options For information about options specified in Setup, see Configuration and Setup. Option Information Halftone Simulation Specify a halftone screening method for your print job. Select Application Defined to use the screening set by the application. Select Newsprint for a look similar to that of a newspaper. Select User Defined 1-3 to use the screening set by the Fiery PRO80. The User Defined Screen 1-3 settings reflect the setting specified in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Brightness Select 85% for a substantially lighter image, 115% for a substantially darker image, or use one of the settings in between. Image Smoothing Select On to minimize pixilation output when printing low-resolution images. Image Quality Specify the type of image quality for the job. The Image Quality option affects the fineness of images in the job; there is a trade-off with processing speed. Resolution Specify the resolution of the print job (specified in dots-per-inch). Glossy Specify to set printing to gloss an image to reflect light like a photograph. This option is available only for the 70-60C-KM printer. Image Halftone Screen Specify if you want to switch between line or dot screens for the image. If Stochastic is selected, then set the Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement option to OFF and the Resolution option to 600dpi. If Resolution is set for 1200dpi, specify the same setting for this option and the Text and Graphics Halftone Screen option. When Dot1, Dot2, Line1, or Line2 is specified for a job and the job is printed, you must select Permission in the Image Quality Setting screen on the printer touch panel. In order to use these line screen options, they must be installed. For information about installable options, see printer driver Help. Text and Graphics Halftone Screen Specify if you want to switch between line or dot screens for text and graphics. If Resolution is set for 1200dpi, specify Same as image for this option. When Dot1, Dot2, Line1, or Line2 is specified for a job and the job is printed, you must select Permission in the Image Quality Setting screen on the printer touch panel. In order to use these line screen options, they must be installed. For information about installable options, see printer driver Help. PRINT OPTIONS 99 Toner Reduction Select On to reduce all CMYK output values by a copier-specified percentage. Select Draft Mode to conserve toner and significantly lighten the entire image. NOTE: This option is designed to protect the copier’s fuser. It is typically used for thin paper (for example, 64-74 gsm) printed with heavy toner coverage, which may jam the copier fuser. Use maximum CMY density This option is designed to create solid, saturated colors. It is typically used to print text and graphics, not photographic images. Select On to print 100% C, M, Y (or R, G, B) at the maximum density that the printer is capable of printing, regardless of calibration. C, M, Y (or R, G, B) values less than 100% still print at the calibrated density value. For best results, set the CMYK/Grayscale Source or RGB/Lab Source to None. If you set Toner Reduction to On, you override this setting. Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement Select On to sharpen the contrast of thin text printed against a color or black-and-white background. When you select this option, thin text becomes bolder. For more information, see page 126. Text Smoothing Enhancement Select On to smooth the edges of text and graphics. This option can be set only at 600dpi. For more information, see page 126. Halftoned Text Enhancement Select On to sharpen text by adding an outline to the edge of halftone text and graphics. For more information, see page 126. Apply enhancements to: Text and graphics Text, graphics and images Choose the objects to apply the enhancements to. This option controls whether the edge enhancement options are applied to the objects such as text and graphics, or text, graphics, and images. When Text and graphics is specified, the raster image is not specified. When Text, graphics and images is specified, the bitmap character is specified also. This option applies to the three outline enhancement options: • Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement • Text Smoothing Enhancement • Halftoned Text Enhancement Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 100 Finishing options Option Information Pile Allow Specify On for jobs that are both stacked and printed so that the printer allows continuous printing of the job to one of the Stacker Main Trays. If Stacker Auto is specified for the Output Tray option, the Stacker Main Tray is selected automatically even if this option is set to Off. Sorter Mode Specify how to output multiple-page/multiple-copy jobs. For more information, see page 124. Staple Specify whether and how to staple the job. For more information, see page 125. NOTE: To arrange your job in Booklet layout with saddle stitching, specify Center with the Booklet Maker Saddle option specified. In order to use this option, a staple finisher must be installed. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. Output Tray Specify the output tray to use for your print job when a Finisher is installed. When the Output Tray is set to Auto, jobs with booklet and finishing options specified are sent to the appropriate output tray. Other jobs are sent to the Sub Tray near the printer. In order to specify Stacker Auto, the Stacker + Stacker finisher must be installed on the printer. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. When the Stacker + Stacker finisher is installed, two Stacker Main Trays are automatically selected. When two Stacker Main Trays are full, refer to the printer touch panel for further instructions. Fold Specify how you want your job to be folded. For more information, see page 117. NOTE: When you select a Fold option, Output Delivery is automatically set to Face Down - Normal Order. It is not possible to print a folded job face up or in reverse order. A finisher must be installed to use this option. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. Print Side Specify whether the pages of your folded job print with the imageable area on the inside or outside of the folded sheet. For more information, see page 117. Punch Specify the position of the hole punch for your print job. To specify the number of holes, use the separate Punch Holes option. A finisher must be installed to use this option. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. For more information, see page 123. PRINT OPTIONS 101 Saddle Stitch Trimming Specify if you want to enable the trimmer for saddle-stitch booklets. A finisher must be installed to use this option. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. Output Delivery Select Face down - normal order to print your document on the bottom of the sheet of paper (the document outputs from the printer with the text facing down) in normal (1-N) order. Select Face up - normal order to print your document on the top of the sheet of paper in normal (1-N) order. Select Face down - reverse order to print your document on the bottom of the sheet of paper (the document outputs from the printer with the text facing down) in reverse (N-1) order. Select Face up - reverse order to print your document on the top of the sheet of paper in reverse (N-1) order. NOTE: When you select a Fold option, Output Delivery is automatically set to Face down-normal order. NOTE: For more information, see page 121. Punch Holes Specify the number of holes for your print job. To specify the position of punched holes, use the separate Punch option. A finisher must be installed to use this option. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. The number of holes differs depending on the finisher configuration: For US, 2-holes, 3-holes (default) or Multi Punch For EU, 2-holes, 4-holes (default) or Multi Punch For more information, see page 123. Image Shift Adjust an image for duplex printing by shifting the image horizontally, in the direction of paper travel, relative to the leading edge. For more information, see page 119. Perfect Binder Trim Specify to use the Perfect Binder Trim for the job. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 102 Variable Data Printing (VDP) options The Fiery PRO80 is compatible with the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm and FreeForm 2 • Personalized Print Markup Language (PPML) • Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) When creating VDP documents, the following settings for the master document and variable document must match: • Color Mode • Combine Separations • Duplex • Paper Size • Staple The following setting for the variable document overrides the corresponding settings in the master document: • Output Tray • Page Order • Paper Type • Sorter Mode Option Information Create Master To create a FreeForm master from this job, specify a number to assign to the FreeForm master file. Command WorkStation allows you to select up to 100 FreeForm Masters. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Use Master For variable data print jobs, specify a FreeForm master number to be used for the job. Command WorkStation allows you to select up to 100 FreeForm Masters. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Preview Master Click to generate a low-resolution image of your master page. Print Master Use this option to verify or confirm your Master page. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. Remove White PPT Background Select On when using PowerPoint to create variable data in conjunction with FreeForm. PRINT OPTIONS 103 Stamping/Watermark options File Search Path Some PPML and other types of jobs do not contain all of the variable data job resources in a single file. In these cases, on a job per job basis, specify the location of the variable data job external resources so that the Fiery PRO80 can access them. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Pages Per Record Use this option to define record-based (rather than job-based) finishing, based on the number entered. This option is used with the Define Record Length option. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Define Record length This feature allows you to process a PDF or PostScript file like a variable data print job, and to apply record-based finishing. This option is used in connection with the Pages Per Record option. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Use PDF XObjects Specify On to use PDF XObjects, a feature that recognizes objects (text, images, vectors) within a PostScript or PDF file and caches the image, reducing the need to reRIP (re-process) image data for faster printing. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. This option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Option Information Option Information Watermarks Select standard text for your watermark from the pull-down menu. To create your own watermark, click New. To modify a standard watermark, select from the pull-down menu and click Edit. To remove a watermark from the list, select from the pull-down menu and click Delete. For more information about using watermarks, see printer driver Help. Print Watermarks: First Page Only Use this option to print watermarks on only the first page. For more information about using watermarks, see printer driver Help. PRINT OPTIONS 104 Overriding print option settings Print option settings that were specified in the printer driver can be overridden in Command WorkStation Job Properties. TO OVERRIDE JOB PROPERTIES 1 In Command WorkStation, right-click a held job in the Job Center view. 2 Choose Properties from the pop-up menu. 3 Specify the number of copies to print, and then click Print. You can override most print options in the printer driver and Command WorkStation Job Properties. Exceptions are listed in the following table: Printer driver tab Option Driver Win Driver Mac CWS JOB INFO Print Range X Print Queue Action X X Secure Print X X Account Name X X Account Password X X User Authentication: Username X X User Authentication: Password X X User Authentication: Use Windows Login X User Authentication: I’m a Guest X MEDIA Document Size X LAYOUT: Normal Rotate 180 (check box) X EXPERT SETTINGS PDF/X Output Intent X X IMAGE Toner Reduction X X VARIABLE DATA PRINTING Preview Master X X Use PDF XObjects X STAMPING/WATERMARK Watermarks X X Print Watermarks: First Page Only X X PRINT OPTIONS 105 Additional information The following sections provide additional information about print options. For more information about options, see the tables that begin on page 80. Auto Trapping Trapping is a technique to print some objects slightly larger or smaller than specified in an application, in order to prevent white edges around the objects. These white edges, or “halos,” can be caused by factors such as misregistration, the physical properties of the toners, and the stiffness of the media. The Auto Trapping feature provides you with advanced trapping settings and gives you full control over their values. For more information, see Color Printing. Booklet Maker Booklet Maker is the imposition tool that allows you to quickly print documents in booklet format, without the need for more involved page imposition programs. Booklet Maker provides advanced settings, while streamlining the booklet-making process by displaying only the options and controls relevant to your selections. Booklet Maker is capable of imposing jobs from nearly any application. Booklet Maker can be accessed in the printer driver when you print a job, or in Command WorkStation Job Properties, where you can modify a job’s properties. NOTE: Mixed media jobs, and variable data jobs are not supported when using Booklet Maker. PRINT OPTIONS 106 The following booklet layouts are available: Saddle binding: In Saddle binding, signatures are folded together as a group, and then stapled or stitched along the center fold, which forms the spine of the booklet. Nested Saddle binding: The Nested Saddle binding method combines saddle and perfect binding methods by stacking two or more saddles (also called “groups” or “subsets”) together along the common fold, then gluing them together at the fold to form the spine. Perfect binding: In Perfect binding, separate folded pages are printed and stacked in booklet order. Finished pages are stitched adjacent to one another for trimming or gluing. For Booklet Maker options and available settings, see the table that begins on page 87. For information about using Booklet Maker options, see Booklet Maker Help. Saddle (left) binding Saddle (right) binding 1 Saddle (top) binding 1 1 Nested Saddle (left) binding Nested Saddle (right) binding Nested Saddle (top) binding Front Back Perfect booklet PRINT OPTIONS 107 Booklet Maker in the printer driver You can choose to work with Booklet Maker in the printer driver in two ways: • Using the Booklet Maker wizard Recommended for first-time or novice users • Specifying settings in the main Booklet Maker dialog box Recommended for experienced or advanced users For Booklet Maker options and available settings in the printer driver, see the table that begins on page 87. To use Booklet Maker to print a booklet from the printer driver, use one of the procedures below. TO ACCESS BOOKLET MAKER FROM THE WINDOWS PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, and then click Properties. 3 In the printer driver, click the Layout icon, and select the Booklet option. For information about using Booklet Maker options, see Booklet Maker Help. TO ACCESS BOOKLET MAKER FROM THE MAC OS X PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, and then choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. 3 Click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane. 4 In the printer driver, click the Layout icon, and select the Booklet option. For information about using Booklet Maker options, see Booklet Maker Help. PRINT OPTIONS 108 Booklet Maker in Job Properties You can choose to work with Booklet Maker in Job Properties in two ways: • Using the Booklet Maker wizard Recommended for first-time or novice users • Specifying settings in the main Booklet Maker dialog box Recommended for experienced or advanced users To access Booklet Maker from Command WorkStation Job Properties, use the following procedure. TO ACCESS BOOKLET MAKER FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 Double-click your print job in the Active Jobs window, or right-click the job and select Properties from pull-down menu. 2 Select the Layout icon in the Job Properties window. 3 Select the Booklet option. 4 Click the Basic tab to access the Booklet Maker wizard, or click the Advanced tab to access all of the Booklet Maker settings in one dialog box. For information about using Booklet Maker options, see Command WorkStation Help. About Booklet Maker imposition Imposition is the process of printing multiple pages on single sheets of paper. When the imposed sheets are folded together as signatures, the pages follow in sequential or reading order. Booklet Maker is designed for 2-up imposition, which imposes four individual pages from your document on a single sheet that is printed duplex. The 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer is equipped with an advanced finisher, that also allows 1-up Perfect Binding. For more information, see “Booklet Maker: 1-up Perfect binding” on page 113. The order in which pages are imposed is determined by the binding method you select. PRINT OPTIONS 109 Booklet Maker and Impose Booklet Maker settings are supported by Impose, if enabled. You can open a job with Booklet Maker settings in Impose to preview the imposition layout or further modify the imposition layout, if necessary. Impose translates and maps all Booklet Maker settings to Impose commands. NOTE: When a job with Booklet Maker settings has been edited in the Impose window, the job can no longer be edited in Booklet Maker. Impose offers more settings that cannot be mapped to Booklet Maker settings. For more information about Impose, see Utilities. Main Booklet Maker window In the Booklet Maker main window, Booklet Maker dynamically displays all of the controls applicable to creating a booklet. TO CREATE A BOOKLET 1 Select a Booklet Type: Saddle, Nested Saddle, or Perfect. For 1-up Perfect binding, see “Booklet Maker: 1-up Perfect binding” on page 113. 2 Select a binding edge: Left, Top, or Right. 3 Specify a Paper size. 4 Select Shrink to Fit, if required. 5 Specify Page Alignment. 6 Specify Creep compensation, if required. Creep compensation is available for Saddle and Nested Saddle booklets. 7 Specify cover settings, if you selected a Saddle booklet in step 1. NOTE: Cover settings are only available for Saddle booklets. For more information, see “Adding a cover” on page 111. 8 Click OK to save your settings, Cancel to cancel the job, or Print to print your job. PRINT OPTIONS 110 Booklet Maker wizard In the Booklet Maker wizard, accessed by clicking Launch Wizard, the windows display the steps in the booklet-making process. TO NAVIGATE THE WIZARD • To advance from one window to the next, click Next. • To return to previous windows, click Back. • To cancel settings and exit Booklet Maker, click Cancel. TO CREATE A BOOKLET USING THE WIZARD 1 Click Launch Wizard. 2 Specify the Booklet Type (binding method) and Binding edge, and then click Next. 3 If Saddle was selected for Booklet Type, specify cover and content settings, and then click Next. 4 Specify Paper size for the body, and then click Next. If Saddle was selected for Booklet Type and Cover was selected, specify the paper setting for the cover, and then click Next. 5 If Nested Saddle was selected for Booklet Type, specify number of sheets in a subset. 6 Specify Page alignment and gutters, and then click Next. If Saddle or Nested Saddle was selected for Booklet Type, specify Creep compensation. 7 View the settings summary. 8 Click Finish to save your booklet, Back to change any settings, or Cancel to cancel the job. PRINT OPTIONS 111 Adding a cover Covers are an option for Saddle booklets only. TO INSERT A PRE-PRINTED COVER 1 In the main Booklet Maker window, select Saddle for Booklet Type and a binding edge. 2 Specify the required settings for Paper Size and Page Alignment for the body of the booklet. 3 Specify Pre-Printed from the Cover Content input menu. 4 Click Define Cover and specify media and paper size from the Media menu, and the source tray from the Booklet Cover Source menu. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you set the Booklet cover source option. 5 Click OK. TO SPECIFY AN INLINE COVER 1 In the main Booklet Maker window, select Saddle for Booklet Type and a binding edge. 2 Specify the required settings for Paper Size and Page Alignment for the body of the booklet. 3 Choose Front & Back Separately from the Cover Content input menu. 4 Specify the Front Cover and Back Cover settings. 5 Click Define Cover and specify media and paper size from the Media menu, and the source tray for the inline covers from the Booklet Cover Source menu. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you set the Booklet cover source option. 6 Click OK. NOTE: When you print an inline cover with top-edge binding, the outside back cover automatically rotates 180 degrees to match the orientation of the front cover. PRINT OPTIONS 112 Cover options For Saddle only, Booklet Maker includes two cover options, either pre-printed or inline, for which you can specify media. You can specify additional options for an inline cover. • Content Input: Select from Front and Back Separately or Pre-Printed. • Front and Back Separately: Select this option to specify an inline cover that prints the cover pages and body pages as a single job. Separate pages from your document are imposed on a single sheet that forms the cover of your booklet. You can specify an inline cover when your original document includes the cover pages and/ or cover artwork for your booklet. The cover content may be the first and last pages of your document, or the first two and last two pages of your document, or any combination. If you select this option, you can specify the Front Cover and Back Cover options below. • Pre-Printed: Select this option to insert a pre-printed cover that will be merged with the body pages of your booklet, which print separately. If you select this option, the Front Cover and Back Cover options below are disabled. • Front Cover and Back Cover: These options allow you to quickly decide whether your front and back covers print duplex, single-sided, or both sides blank, without needing to add blank pages in your original document. With top-edge binding that includes a cover, the outside of the back cover automatically rotates 180 degrees to match the orientation of the front cover. • Define Cover: This option allows you to select a media and size for your cover pages, which may be trimmed. You can also specify the Booklet Cover Source tray for the cover media. This option is available for both pre-printed and inline covers. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you specify the Booklet cover source tray. Printing Booklet Maker jobs Booklet Maker does not support jobs sent to the Direct queue. Booklet Maker print jobs must be sent to the Print queue or Hold queue. TO CHANGE THE UNIT OF MEASUREMENT FOR A BOOKLET 1 In Command WorkStation, go to Edit > Preferences. 2 Click the Size tab. 3 Select the unit of measurement (millimeters, points, or inches). 4 Click OK. Changes are not effective until the next time Command WorkStation is started. PRINT OPTIONS 113 Booklet Maker: 1-up Perfect binding The 1-up Perfect binding method prints single body pages that are stacked together, so that the edges may be trimmed (if desired) and glued, and then wrapped by a cover sheet. You can access the 1-up Perfect binding method from the printer driver or Command WorkStation Job Properties. NOTE: If the printer is equipped with an advanced finisher, such as a Perfect binder, the option of 1-up Perfect binding may be available. When you print a 1-up Perfect booklet, the printer will calculate the spine width based on the number of sheets and the thickness of the paper. After the job has printed, go to Command WorkStation, open Job Properties for the job, and click the Layout icon. Job Properties will show the actual spine width that was measured by the printer as “Detected Value” under the Spine width option. The actual measured spine width number can be used for preparing the accurate cover paper size for subsequent printing of the same 1-up Perfect booklet. NOTE: Do not print anything on the inner side of the cover sheet (the area glued to the book block). Doing so can prevent the cover sheet and book block from adhering properly. For 1-up Perfect binding print options and available settings, see the table that begins on page 90. To print a 1-up Perfect booklet, you must select 1-up Perfect as the booklet type. TO ACCESS BOOKLET MAKER FROM THE PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, and then click Properties. Mac OS X: Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then click the Layout icon. Windows: Click the Layout icon. 3 Select the Booklet option. 4 Choose 1-up Perfect for the Booklet Type. 5 Specify a binding edge: Left, Top, or Right. Perfect binding method PRINT OPTIONS 114 6 Specify the booklet print options, such as cover page content, body position, and cover position. NOTE: If you are using the simplex print mode for the body set, click Edit for Body Paper Size, and then select Off for Duplex in the Media dialog box. 7 Specify Auto or Perfect Binder Main Tray for Output Tray under the Finishing icon. 8 Click OK in the Properties dialog box. 9 Click Print in the Print dialog box. TO PRINT A 1-UP PERFECT JOB FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 Send a job to the Held queue of Command WorkStation. 2 Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Mac OS) the job in the Job Center view and choose Properties. 3 In the Job Properties dialog box, click the Layout icon. 4 Select the Booklet option. 5 Click Start Wizard to use the Booklet Maker wizard to specify the booklet properties. 6 Choose 1-up Perfect for the Booklet Type. 7 Specify a binding edge: Left, Top, or Right. 8 Specify the booklet print options, such as cover page content, body position, and cover position. NOTE: If you are using the simplex print mode for the body set, click Edit for Body Paper Size, and then select Off for Duplex in the Media dialog box. 9 Specify Auto or Perfect Binder Main Tray for Output Tray under the Finishing icon. 10 Click Print in the Job Properties dialog box. PRINT OPTIONS 115 Document size and Paper size Document size is the page size defined in your application’s Print setup (or Page setup) dialog box. Paper size is the size of the actual sheet of paper on which your job is printed. It may be useful to think of Document size as digital input (the page size defined in your original document) and Paper size as the physical output (the actual size of the paper in the printer tray). In cases when you print one document page per sheet of paper, Document size is usually the same as the Paper size. However, Document size may differ from Paper size when you print booklets or impose multiple document pages on a single sheet. The following illustrations show examples of possible relationships between Document size and Paper size. Note that the orientation of all pages shown is Landscape. Document size may also differ from Paper size when using the Scale or Scale to Fit options. The Scale option reduces or enlarges the document page at a specified percent. The Scale to Fit option automatically reduces or enlarges the document image to fit the selected Paper size. For information about Scale and Scale to Fit, see page 124. For information about Document size and Paper size in booklet printing, see Booklet Maker Help. Document size (input) Paper size (output) Document size is the same as Paper size. Scaling is 100%. Letter Letter Tabloid Document size scaled to fit on Letter Paper size. Scaling is 50%. Tabloid 11x17 Letter A4 Document size scaled to fit on A3 Paper size. Scaling is 141%. A4 A3 A A A A A A PRINT OPTIONS 116 Duplex printing TO PRINT DUPLEX (DOUBLE-SIDED) PAGES 1 In your application, choose File > Print and do one of the following. Mac OS X: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then select Normal on the Layout tab. Windows: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, click Properties, and then click the Layout icon. 2 Choose one of the Duplex settings: Right and Left Bind: Prints the top of the image on Side 1, on the same edge of the page as the top of the image on Side 2. Top Bind: Prints the top of the image on Side 1, on the opposite edge of the page from the top of the image on Side 2. The following table shows how the Duplex settings correspond to printed output. 3 Print the job. Right and Left Bind Top Bind Portrait Landscape 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 PRINT OPTIONS 117 Fold options The following types of fold are supported: NOTE: When you select a folding option, Output Delivery is automatically set to Face downnormal order. It is not possible to print folded jobs face up or in reverse order. The Print Side option allows you to specify whether text/images print on the inside or outside of the folded sheet. Tri-Fold-in/Multi-Tri-Fold-in supports one sheet only. Special finishers must be installed to use the Fold options. For information about finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. Half-Fold Tri-Fold-in/Multi-Tri-Fold-in Gate Fold Tri-Fold-Out Z Fold Double Parallel Fold Multi Half Fold PRINT OPTIONS 118 Gang-up printing The Fiery PRO80 includes two speed-printing options: Step & repeat: Select this option to speed print a job so that the first page of your document is printed twice on the first sheet. The next sheet duplicates the data on the second page, the next sheet duplicates the data on the third page, and so on. When the printed sheets are cut in half, the result is two complete sets of the same document. Cut & stack: Select this option to speed print a job so that when the sheets are stacked and cut from the central position, the job is numbered in order and separated as two stacks. The print order is such that when the sheets are cut in half, you can combine them to form a single complete set of the document, in faster printing time. For available options and settings, see the table on page 86. TO ACCESS GANG-UP PRINT FROM THE WINDOWS PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. 3 In the printer driver, click the Layout icon and select the Gangup option. TO ACCESS GANG-UP PRINT FROM THE MAC OS X PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer and choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. 3 Click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane. 4 In the printer driver, click the Layout icon and select the Gangup option. Front only Front Back Single-sided Duplex (double-sided) Front only Front Back Single-sided Duplex (double-sided) PRINT OPTIONS 119 Image Shift Image Shift allows you to specify how much the image on each page should be shifted relative to the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) axis. Moving the job content in this manner enables you to allow for various finishing options, such as stapling and binding. Image Shift prevents the image from being clipped. NOTE: This option is available in the printer drivers or Command WorkStation. NOTE: This option is effective only for jobs in which Pages per sheet is set to 1-up. TO DEFINE IMAGE SHIFT FOR A PRINT JOB 1 In your application, choose File > Print and do one of the following. Mac OS X: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then click the Finishing icon. Windows: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, click Properties, and then click the Finishing icon. 2 Expand the Image Shift option and click Image Shift. 3 Select the units of measurement. 4 Type the Front and Back image shift settings in the X and Y axis fields. You can also use the arrow buttons to shift the image settings. NOTE: The maximum value for both X and Y axes is 999.99 points/13.89 inches/352.77 mm. 5 To align front and back images proportionately, select Align front and back images. 6 Click Apply to save your settings, and then click OK. Mixed Media The Mixed Media feature allows you to define the chapter divisions of a print job and to print certain pages, or ranges of pages, on varying types of media. For example, you can use this option to add blank pages or to specify duplex pages within a single print job. You can also use Mixed Media to specify chapter-based finishing options, which treat each chapter as a separate finishing or duplexing set. You can access Mixed Media from Command WorkStation or the printer driver. Instructions for accessing and using Mixed Media are provided in the Command WorkStation online Help. Features specific to the Fiery PRO80 are described in Utilities. The following procedure describes how to access and print using Mixed Media from the printer driver. PRINT OPTIONS 120 TO ACCESS MIXED MEDIA FROM THE PRINTER DRIVER 1 Select Print from your application. Mac OS X: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then click the Media icon. Windows: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, click Properties, and then click the Media icon. 2 Expand the Mixed Media option to specify settings. 3 Select from the following options: Chapter Start Page(s): Use this option to designate chapter divisions, using comma-separated values (for example: 4,9,17) to designate the start of each new chapter. NOTE: It is not necessary to type the first page; page numbers refer to the numbering of the original document. Define Each Chapter As A Separate Finishing Set: Select this option to apply finishing options (such as stapling or sorting) or double-sided printing to each chapter created with the Chapter Start Page(s) option. For double-sided printing, using this option forces each starting page to use a right-side page, adding a preceding left-sided blank, if necessary. NOTE: If you use the Chapter Start Page(s), Define Cover, or Define Each Chapter As A Finishing Set, all media specified in the Paper Size per chapter must share the same dimensions (for example, all Letter, all Tabloid, or all A4). Define Cover: Use this option to assign page attributes (Color mode, Duplex, Glossy, Tab shift, Paper color, Punched paper, Paper type, Paper weight, Paper size, and Input tray) to front and back cover pages. New Page Range: Use this option to assign page attributes (Color mode, Duplex, Glossy, Tab shift, Paper Color, Punched paper, Paper type, Paper weight, Paper size, and Input tray) to specific pages, or ranges of pages. After you set page attributes, select Add Definition to save your settings. New Insert: Use this option to assign page attributes (Paper color, Punched paper, Paper type, Paper weight, Paper size, and Input tray) to blank pages. 4 After you set page attributes, click Add Definition (for Page Range) or Insert (for Blank pages). 5 Click OK. NOTE: You can save up to 100 different settings for the Selection List in the Mixed Media dialog box. The way you define Mixed Media in the Windows and Mac OS X printer drivers is similar to the way you define it in Command WorkStation. For more information and detailed procedures, see Utilities. PRINT OPTIONS 121 Output Delivery Output Delivery allows you to specify how the stack of copies is delivered in the output tray. Select Face up for sheets delivered into the output tray with copies facing up, with Normal order for the first sheet on the top of the stack, or Reverse order for the first sheet on the bottom of the stack. Select Face down for sheets delivered into the output tray with copies facing down, with Normal order for the first sheet on the top of the stack, or Reverse order for the first sheet on the bottom of the stack. NOTE: When using a finisher that reverses the order of the stack, you can specify Reverse order so that when the stack is fed through the finisher, the pages are delivered in the correct order. 1 Face up - normal order 2 Face up - reverse order 1 2 1 Face down - normal order 2 Face down - reverse order 1 2 PRINT OPTIONS 122 Paper Catalog Paper Catalog is a system-based paper warehouse database that stores the attributes of any media that is available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. After the media types have been added at the printer touch panel, you can select media from those listed for your job. The following procedure describes how to access Paper Catalog from the printer driver. TO ACCESS PAPER CATALOG FROM THE PRINTER DRIVER 1 Establish Two-Way Communication between your computer and the Fiery PRO80 by entering the IP Address or DNS name in Properties. For information about establishing Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 2 Select Print from your application. Mac OS X: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then click the Media icon. Windows: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, click Properties, and then click the Media icon. 3 Select the required media from the Paper Catalog pull-down menu. 4 Click Select Media to view the entire database and the full descriptions of paper attributes. For information about accessing Paper Catalog from Command WorkStation, see Utilities. For information about using Hot Folders, see Utilities. PRINT OPTIONS 123 Punch and Punch Holes Punch positions vary according to paper size, paper type, number of pages, and feed direction. The number of holes differs depending on the finisher destination: • US, 2-Holes, 3-Holes, or Multi Punch, with 3-Holes the default • EU, 2-Holes, 4-Holes, or Multi Punch, with 4-Holes the default The following table illustrates the number of holes and punch positions. NOTE: Multi Punch is supported only on Letter for US and A4 for International paper sizes. For information about configuring the printer driver for finishers and other installed options, see printer driver Help. Punch setting Portrait Landscape Left Right Top Left Right Top 2-Holes 3-Holes 4-Holes Multi Punch PRINT OPTIONS 124 Scale The operator can specify a scaling override in Command WorkStation, but the override is applied to any scaling value already set in the active job. For example, if a user sends a job with a scaling value of 50% and the operator specifies a Scale override of 300%, the job is printed at 150% of the original document size, that is, 50% of 300%. Scale to Fit The Scale to Fit option allows you to scale a job to a Paper size different from the Document size. When you set this option to On, the image is increased or reduced in size to fit the imageable area of the paper size you select from the Paper Size menu. When you set this option to Off, the original document size is printed without any scaling, even if you select a larger paper size. Sorter Mode Sorting and collating is supported on the printer with a finisher attached. Sort: Copies of a complete job are collated and output in the same direction, arranged in this page order: 1-2-3, 1-2-3, 1-2-3. Group: Copies of a complete job are output in the same direction, arranged in this page order: 1-1-1, 2-2-2, 3-3-3. Offset Sort: Copies of a complete job are output in the same direction, arranged in this page order: 1-2-3, 1-2-3, 1-2-3. This option includes offset stacking. Offset Group: Copies of a complete job are output, arranged in this page order: 1-1-1, 2-2-2, 3-3-3. This option includes offset stacking. Document size Letter Paper size 11 x17 Scale to Fit set to On Scale to Fit set to Off PRINT OPTIONS 125 Staple option Stapling is supported on the printer with the Staple Finisher attached. Off: Disables the stapler. Left Corner: The job is stapled with one staple along one corner of the left page edge. Right Corner: The job is stapled with one staple along one corner of the right page edge. Left 2 Position: The job is stapled with two staples along the left side page edge. Right 2 Position: The job is stapled with two staples along the right side page edge. Top 2 Position: The job is stapled with two staples along the top side page edge. Center: The job is printed like a booklet with staples in the center of the page. When you specify Left Corner, Right Corner, or Center stapling, you can select a different heavy media (paste board) for the cover pages of your print job. For information about installing optional finishers, see printer driver Help. Left Corner Right Corner Left 2 Position Right 2 Position Top 2 Position Center A A A A A A A PRINT OPTIONS 126 Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement When Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement is set to On, the printer performs a reversed text enhancement that slims and defines text with an outline. Select On to sharpen the contrast of thin text printed against a color or black-and-white background. NOTE: In general, with white text against dark background, thin text will become bolder. Halftoned Text Enhancement When Halftoned Text Enhancement is set to On, the printer adds a gray-text outline to the edge of halftone text and graphics to reduce the appearance of jagged edges. Text Smoothing Enhancement When Texts Smoothing Enhancement is set to On, the printer smooths the edges of text and graphics to reduce the appearance of jagged edges. Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement OFF Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement ON Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement OFF Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement ON Halftoned Text Enhancement OFF Halftoned Text Enhancement ON Text Smoothing Enhancement OFF Text Smoothing Enhancement ON PRINT OPTIONS 127 User Authentication If Users and Groups user authentication has been enabled in the Fiery PRO80 Setup, you must enter a valid user name and password to send a print job to the Fiery PRO80. In Command WorkStation, the management of jobs is determined by how you have logged on to the Fiery PRO80. For Mac OS X: Select the Job Info icon and type logon information in the User Name and Password fields. Use Windows Login: Choose this option if you are already logged on to a Windows computer. Otherwise, type your Windows network logon information in the Username and Password fields. Validate: Click to validate user authorization and to confirm printing privileges. To validate, Two-Way Communication must be activated. For information on establishing Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. I’m a guest: Choose this option to activate guest printing privileges. By default, guest printing is permitted. For information about enabling Users and Groups user authentication in the Configure WebTool, see Configuration and Setup. INDEX 129 Numerics 1-up Perfect binding method 90 Align Pages option 92 Back Cover option 92 Body Paper Size option 90 Body Position Custom Adjustment Horizontally option 93 Body Position Custom Adjustment Vertically option 93 Booklet Scaling option 92 Content input option 91 Cover Paper Size option 91 Cover Position option 93 Front Cover option 91 Spine Content option 92 Spine Width option 92 units 90 1-up Perfect booklets 113 2-Color Print Mapping option 94 A Account Name field 32, 61 Account Name option 81 Account Password field 32, 61 Account Password option 82 Align Pages option 92 AppleTalk connection, Mac OS X 18, 22, 24 Auto Trapping option 94, 105 automatic rotation 111 B Back Cover option 92 binding method 87, 90 binding options 109 Black Detection option 94 Black Overprint option 97 Black Text and Graphics option 97 Booklet layout mode 87 Booklet Maker 1-up Perfect binding method 90 1-up Perfect booklets 113 Align pages option 87 Back Cover option 89 binding method 87 Cover Content option 88 Creep compensation 88 Define Cover option 89 Front Cover option 88 Gutter option 88 Increase gutter by option 88 Nested Saddle booklets 106 Page Alignment 87 Paper size 86 Paper size for 2-up 87 Shrink to fit option 87 Booklet Maker settings 109 Booklet Maker wizard 107, 108, 110 Booklet option 105 Booklet Scaling option 92 Booklet type 1-up Perfect binding 113 binding method 87 Brightness option 98 C CMYK mode 94 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 95 CMYK/Grayscale Source option 95 Color mode 94 Color print options setting 33, 61 Color Setup, job overrides 79 Combine Separations option 94 Command WorkStation, printing files from 27 Composite Overprint option 94 Control Bar 82 Copies option 81 INDEX INDEX 130 cover inline 111 pre-printed 111 selecting media for 112 Cover Content Input option 88, 91 Cover Position option 93 cover settings 109, 111 Create Master option 102 Creep compensation 88 custom page size, see defining a custom page size, printing a custom page size D Default Browser connection 16, 20 Default Output Profile option 97 default print options 30, 65 Define Record Length 103 defining a custom page size Windows 67 defining Image Shift 119 Docs tab in WebTools 27, 58 Document Size option 83, 104 Downloads tab in WebTools 12, 42 Duplex (double-sided) option 86, 116 Duplex option 85 duplex printing 108, 112 duplex printing see Duplex (double-sided) option E E-mail Service about 70 Manage print jobs 72 Expert Color Settings Advanced Edit dialog box 35, 63 F Fiery Features 31 Fiery Software Uninstaller Utility deleting 14 installing and using 14 on User Software DVD 9 File port, saving files to 67 File Search Path 103 finishing options 108 first-time use 107, 108 Fold option 100, 117 FreeForm Preview Master option 104 Print Master option 102 Front Cover option 91 FTP Printing 74 G Gang-up print Cut & stack 118 Gang-up type 86 Gutter option 86 Increase gutter by option 86 Shrink to fit option 86 Step & repeat 118 Gang-up type 86 Gangup layout mode 86 Glossy option 98 Gray (CMYK) option 97 Gray (RGB) option 97 Gray Text Outlining option 99 Grayscale mode 94 gutters 86, 88 H Halftone Simulation 98 Halftoned Text Enhancement option 99 Hot Folders 27 job overrides 79 I I’m a Guest 81, 104, 127 Image Halftone Screen option 98 Image Quality option 98 Image Shift option 101 Image Shift, defining 119 Image Smoothing option 98 Impose layout mode 93 imposition 108 Input Tray option 83 installable options configuring 57 configuring for Windows Vista 57 installing Job Monitor 69 printer driver from User Software DVD 44 printer drivers from server 43 printer drivers using Point and Print 40 virtual printers using Point and Print 47 installing printer drivers 13 Instructions field 32, 81 IP Printer connection 17, 21 IPP connection 55 INDEX 131 J Job Batching 77 Job Info icon 60 Job Monitor configuring connection 69 installing 69 on User Software DVD 9 using 69 job overrides 2-Color Print Mapping option 94 Auto Trapping option 94 Black Detection option 94 Black Overprint option 97 Black Text and Graphics option 97 Brightness option 98 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 95 CMYK/Grayscale Source option 95 Combine Separations option 94 Composite Overprint option 94 Duplex option 85 Fold option 100 Glossy option 98 Image Halftone Screen option 98 Image Quality option 98 Image Shift option 101 Image Smoothing option 98 Input Tray option 83 Output Delivery option 121 Output Tray option 100 Paper Simulation option 95 Paper Size option 115 PDF/X Output Intent 96 Perfect Binder Trim option 101 Pile Allow option 100 Print Queue Action option 82, 104 print settings 79 Punch Holes option 101 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option 96 RGB/Lab Source option 95 Saddle Stitch Trimmer option 101 Scale to Fit option 85 Schedule Printing option 81 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option 96 Staple option 100, 125 Stapler Mode option 100 Substitute Colors option 94 Text and Graphics Halftone Screen option 98 Use Windows Login option 81, 104 L Language folders 11 Layout option see Pages per sheet Line Printer Daemon - LPD 17, 21 LPD/LPR connection, Mac OS X 25 LPR connection 51 M Mac OS X AppleTalk connection 18, 22, 24 Default Browser connection 16, 20 deleting printer driver files 14 Fiery Software Uninstaller utility 14 IP Printer connection 17, 21 Line Printer Daemon - LPD 17, 21 LPD/LPR connection 25 PPD 27 printer driver installation 10 printer driver setup 15 selecting printers 28 Mac OS X applications, printing from 27 Manage print jobs with e-mail commands 72 managing print jobs 72 measurement units specifying 112 Mixed Media 84, 119 N Nested Saddle booklets 106 Notes field 32, 60 Notes option 81 O Orientation Override option 85 OSX Installer 11, 27 Output Delivery 101 Output Delivery option 121 Output Tray option 100 overrides, of job settings 79 overriding Printer Setup settings 64 INDEX 132 P Page Order option 85 Page Setup dialog box 30 Pages Per Record 103 Pages per sheet option 85 Paper Catalog 83, 122 Paper Color option 83 Paper Simulation option 95 Paper Size option 84, 115 Paper Type option 83 Paper Weight option 83 Password 81, 104 PDF/X Output Intent 96 Perfect Binder Trim option 101 Perfect booklet setting 106 PIle Allow option 100 Point and Print 40 Postflight 82 PostScript fonts 9 PostScript Printer Description file, see PPD PostScript printer description files, see PPDs PostScript printer driver deleting 49 download using WebTools 42 installing from User Software DVD 44 installing using Point and Print 40 PostScript printer drivers, explained 78 PPD Mac OS X 27 overview 9 Windows 45 PPDs (PostScript printer description files) options 79 Preview Master option 102, 104 Print Border option 85 Print dialog box 30 Print Master option 102 print options 59 in Full Properties of Quick Access window 32 setting 30 Print Queue Action option 82, 104 Print Range option 81 Print Side option 100 printer default settings, where to set 79 Printer Delete Utility 49 on User Software DVD 9 printer drivers downloading with WebTools 12 installing 10 setting up 15 Printer Setup Utility 11 Printer’s default 64 printing from an application 59 from Mac OS X applications 27 to File port 67 using an E-mail client 70 printing a custom page size Windows 67 printing connections, supported types 50 printing duplex pages 85 Prntdrve.exe file 42 Progressives 82 Punch Holes option 101, 123 Punch option 100, 123 Punched Paper option 84 Pure Black see Black Text and Graphics Q Quick Access window, customizing 31 R reading layout 108 Remove White PPT Background option 102 Resolution option 98 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option 96 RGB/Lab Source option 95 Rich Black see Black Text and Graphics RIPping 78 rotation automatic 111 S Saddle Stitch Trimmer option 101 Sample Print 76 Scale option 85, 124 Scale to Fit option 85, 124 Schedule Printing option 81 Section Name option 104 Section Password option 104 Secure Print field 32 Secure Print option 81, 104 Secured Print option 75 INDEX 133 selecting printers Mac OS X 28 Separate RGB/Lab to CYMK Source option 96 sheet 108 Shrink to fit 86, 87 single-sided printing 112 SMB printing completing connection 50 setup 41 Sorter option 100, 124 speed printing see Gang-up print Spine Content option 92 Spine Width option 92 Spot Color Matching option 96 Standard Booklet setting 106 Staple option 100, 125 Stapler Mode option 100 Step & repeat 118 subset 110 Substitute Colors option 94 T TCP/IP connection 51 Text and Graphics Halftone Screen option 98 Text Smoothing Enhancement option 99 Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement option 99 Toner Reduction option 99, 104 top binding with a cover 112 Tray Alignment option 84 trays, copier 83 trimming Saddle Stitch 101 Two-Way Communication 38, 48, 67 U USB device 73 automatic printing 73 printing files from 73 Use Master option 102 Use Maximum CMY density option 99 Use PDF XObject 103, 104 Use Windows Login 127 Use Windows Login option 81, 104 User Authentication 60, 127 for Mac OS 127 I’m a Guest 127 Password 127 Password option 81, 104 password option 32 Use Windows Login 127 Use Windows Login option 81, 104 User Name option 81 user name option 32 Username 127 Username option 104 User Software DVD installing printer driver files from 10, 11 Username option 81, 104 Users and Groups user authentication 127 V Variable Data Printing Define Record Length 103 Pages Per Record 103 Variable Data Printing (VDP) Create Master option 102 Preview Master option 102, 104 Use Master option 102 Use PDF XObjects 103, 104 virtual printers installing using Point and Print 47 setting up 47 W Watermarks option 103 First Page Only setting 103 WebTools Docs tab 27, 58 Downloads tab 12, 42 Windows IPP connection 55 LPR or Port 9100 connection 51 printer driver, installing from User Software DVD 44 TCP/IP connection Fiery® Print Server Variable Data Printing © 2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45087237 1 September 2009 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 5 Terminology and conventions 5 About this document 6 OVERVIEW 7 Overview of variable data printing 7 Variable data job components 8 Print Server variable data printing 9 Compatible variable data printing languages 9 Print Server core features for variable data printing 10 PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 12 Printing variable data documents using FreeForm 12 How FreeForm works 12 Creating the master document 13 Creating the variable document 14 Combining the FreeForm master with the variable document 15 Guidelines 16 Previewing master documents in the Windows printer driver 21 Printing variable data documents with FreeForm 2 21 Imposing variable data jobs 23 Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose 23 Imposing FreeForm 2 jobs with Impose 24 Imposing other variable data jobs with Impose 24 INDEX 25 INTRODUCTION 5 INTRODUCTION This document provides information about variable data printing (VDP) and describes the variable data printing features that may be supported by the Print Server, including: • Compatible variable data printing languages such as FreeForm and FreeForm 2 • Imposing variable data jobs with Impose NOTE: For information about supported variable data languages and features, see Printing. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Copier The copier or printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information Important information Important information about issues that can result in physical harm to you or others INTRODUCTION 6 About this document The document covers the following topics: • Basic concepts of variable data printing • Supported Print Server features and compatible variable data printing languages • Instructions for printing variable documents with FreeForm and FreeForm 2 • Instructions for printing and submitting other variable data job formats, such as PPML and Creo VPS. NOTE: For detailed information about printing variable data jobs using third-party variable data printing applications, see the documentation that accompanies the application. For example scenarios of popular variable data printing workflows, see Workflow Examples. OVERVIEW 7 OVERVIEW This chapter describes variable printing technology and discusses the components that may be supported with your Print Server that allow you to create variable data print jobs. NOTE: For information about supported variable data languages and features, see Printing. For specific variable data printing scenarios and workflows, see Workflow Examples. Overview of variable data printing Variable data printing is typically used for personalized mailings, such as direct-mail advertising. It involves combining a set of master elements that are common across copies of a document (reusable data) with a set of variable elements that change from copy to copy. When you use variable data printing, you create personalized communications with elements that have special appeal to your targeted audience. An example of variable data printing is a brochure that greets customers by name and may include other personal information about the customer obtained from a marketing database. Background elements, illustrations, and text blocks that do not change across copies of the brochure are master elements. The customer’s name and other customer-specific information are variable elements. In its simplest form, you can use variable data printing as a basic mail merge. However, you can also dynamically assemble images, charts, text, and other objects to create attractive, highly customized documents. Variable data printing uses digital printing technology that customizes communication by linking databases that contain the content for printed documents to a print device, such as the copier. The customized communication includes rules that specify the selection of content from the database and the placement of that content in the document. The following two variable data printing technologies describe how reusable data is specified within a variable data printing language. Page-based technology describes static, reusable data (the master element) in terms of entire pages. Each page element is called a master page. Page-based languages are more suitable for simple, predictable layouts. FreeForm is a page-based language. For more information about FreeForm, see “Printing variable data documents” on page 12. Element-based technology describes static, reusable data in terms of elements or objects. Element-based technology allows you to use many separate objects within a page as static elements or variable elements individually. OVERVIEW 8 Element-based variable data jobs use reusable objects for the variable elements in the job, such as images. Because these elements are frequently accessed, they are stored on the Print Server and cached as a group. Variable data job components A typical variable data print job includes the following major components: • Content Content includes the text, images, or photographs placed in different areas of your document. You can create static or variable content using a variety of applications, such as Adobe Photoshop or Microsoft Word. • Database A database is a table containing all the changeable or variable elements in a printed document, such as text, graphics, and photographs. You can use a database created in popular desktop programs, such as Microsoft Excel or FileMaker Pro. The data must be organized into records and fields (categories) for each record. For example, in a database about people, a person is a record and the information about that person, such as name, address, and phone number, is a field. • Business rules Business rules, created in a variable data printing application, specify what variable content to use and where to place it within your document. According to these predefined rules, which are described by “if ” and “then” statements, the variable data application uses particular elements from databases to create personalized pages and documents that contain different text and images for a specific audience. For example, you can set up a rule to print specific content for a specific age range. • Layout Layout encompasses the design or page layout of your document in any desktop publishing or word processing application. The layout must accommodate space for variable text and images. • Variable data print applications Variable data print applications combine master elements and variable information and prepare the document for printing. For FreeForm, you do not need a dedicated variable data print application. • Print device The print device is the output device that turns digital files into hardcopy documents. This can be any printer, copier, or digital press that supports variable data printing. OVERVIEW 9 The following diagram shows the variable data printing components. Print Server variable data printing The Print Server combines variable data printing languages, third-party variable data printing applications, and Print Server core features to integrate into many existing workflows. For more information about variable data printing workflows, see Workflow Examples. Compatible variable data printing languages The Print Server is compatible with the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm and FreeForm 2 FreeForm and FreeForm 2 are used with variable data solutions. FreeForm technology reusable data is RIPped only once, enabling the copier to run faster. FreeForm supports the creation of master elements and variable data from any desktop application or computer platform. Within the application, the master page is assigned a number from 1 to 100. FreeForm options are found in the driver and job management tools. For more information about FreeForm, see “Printing variable data documents” on page 12. FreeForm 2 expands FreeForm technology by allowing you to determine page conditions and rules for printing a job containing multiple master pages. It also allows you to define the boundaries of each record in the data stream. This means defining a start and end for each record. Unlike FreeForm, FreeForm 2 requires a variable data printing application (for example, PrintShop Mail) that specifically supports FreeForm 2. For more information about FreeForm 2, see “Printing variable data documents” on page 12. 1 Layout 2 Database 3 Business rules 4 Content 5 Variable data application 6 Print device 1 2 3 4 5 6 OVERVIEW 10 • Personalized Print Markup Language (PPML) version 2.2 PPML, an XML- based language developed by PODi, is considered an industry standard. PPML allows the copier to store text elements and graphic elements and reuse them as needed, making variable data jobs print faster. The Print Server accepts zipped and non-zipped PPML jobs. To print documents in PPML format, use a third-party software application that is compatible with PPML format, such as Pageflex Persona. Send the PPML job to the Print Server or download the PPML file using Command WorkStation or Hot Folders. NOTE: PPML version 2.2 files were created using either the IMPOSITION or PRINT_LAYOUT commands specified from the PPML application are not supported on the Print Server. Instead, specify these options from Command WorkStationusing Impose. • Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) Creo VPS is an extension of the PostScript language developed by Creo. A Creo VPS file consists of a Header section and a Booklet section. The Header section contains the global objects for the entire job. The Booklet section contains one copy of a personalized document. Page elements are reusable objects as defined in the Creo VPS format. All of the page elements must be packaged inside of the Creo VPS file. To print, you must have an application that emits the Creo VPS data stream, such as Atlas PrintShop Mail or Creo Darwin Desktop. You can download a Creo VPS file using Command WorkStation or Hot Folders. Print Server core features for variable data printing By integrating variable data support into the Print Server’s core features, such as Impose and Mixed Media, you can create custom layouts and apply different media and finishing options to your variable data jobs. You can also manage reusable objects for a variable data job using VDP Resources. Impose with variable data printing imposition The Print Server is compatible with variable data printing imposition with Impose for the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm and FreeForm 2 variable data jobs • PPML • Creo VPS For information about imposing a variable data job, see “Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose” on page 23. For more information about imposition layouts, see Command WorkStation Help. OVERVIEW 11 Hot Folders with variable data printing imposition You can impose a variable data job using Hot Folders when you submit it to the Print Server. You must set up a proper variable data printing imposition template for the specific Hot Folder in the Hot Folders application. For information about imposing a variable data job with Hot Folders, see Hot Folders Help. For information about variable data imposition options, see Command WorkStation Help. Mixed media with variable data printing You can apply Mixed Media settings to all variable data printing jobs, including imposed variable data jobs.When using Mixed Media settings, the Print Server recognizes each variable data record as a separate job. For a variable data job that is not imposed, the Mixed Media settings are applied to all records of the variable data job. For an imposed variable data job, the Mixed Media settings are applied to the output sets of the variable data job. For more information about setting Mixed Media for a job, see Utilities. VDP Resources Reusable objects are required images that you must download to the Print Server for variable data jobs that contain variable elements. These reusable objects are stored on the Print Server and cached as a group. The VDP Resources feature available from Command WorkStation allows you to manage disk space on the Print Server by viewing the list of the reusable objects and deleting them, or allowing them to reside for future variable data jobs. VDP Resources is compatible with the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm • PPML • Creo VPS For more information about using VDP Resources, see Command WorkStation Help. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 12 PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS With FreeForm technology, you can use print options to define master documents and assign them to variable data jobs sent to the Print Server. This chapter explains how to do the following: • Print documents with FreeForm • Create a master and variable document • Print documents with FreeForm 2 using a third-party variable data application • Print other variable data formats • Impose a variable data job NOTE: For information about supported variable data languages and features, see Printing. Printing variable data documents using FreeForm You can use FreeForm to print variable data documents. This section provides an overview of FreeForm and describes how to create and combine master and variable elements. Guidelines and tips are discussed at the end of the section. How FreeForm works FreeForm variable data printing sends the master-element data for the job to the Print Server and rasterizes it separately from the variable-element data. The master-element data is stored on the Print Server in rasterized form as a FreeForm master, and can be used as often as required with multiple sets of variable-element data. Because the FreeForm master job is preRIPped and stored on the Print Server, the only RIP time required for variable data print jobs is the time necessary to RIP the variable-element data. You can use FreeForm masters for any fixed-element data you might combine with different data from day to day. For example, you can store a letterhead template as a FreeForm master and use it repeatedly as the background for different letter content (the variable-element data). FreeForm allows you to create the master and variable documents using any application. You can create the two documents using different applications or computer platforms. To create the master document, use a page layout or graphics application. To create the variable document, use a word processing application that has a mail merge feature, a page layout application that supports scripting, or a database application. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 13 You control FreeForm functions with the Create Master and Use Master print options. Set these options in the printer driver when you send a job, or instruct the operator to set them with job overrides from Command WorkStation. After the master document is RIPped, it appears in VDP Resources in the Device Center from Command WorkStation. You can also use Command WorkStation to monitor and manage all the FreeForm masters stored on the Print Server. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Creating the master document Before you can use FreeForm, you must create a master document and a variable document. This includes creating the layout for the combined document, as well as individual elements. In a page layout or graphics application, arrange the master elements (text and graphics that do not change) on one or more pages, leaving space for the variable elements. After you finalize the design of the master document, print it to the Print Server and specify that a FreeForm master be created from the job (see page 18). Master document 1 Space for variable elements 2 Unchanging master elements 1 2 PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 14 Creating the variable document You can create the variable document with a word processing application that provides a mail merge function, a database application, or a page layout application that supports scripting. In all cases, information is taken from a list or database and merged into an existing document that is designed to accept the information. Each application has different controls for this function. For detailed instructions, see the documentation that accompanies the application. Before you add variable elements to the master document, format them to conform to the layout of the master document. To do this, create a document with the correct formatting, and then add the variable information in the appropriate places. NOTE: You must create a variable document with the same page count as the master page document. For example, if a master document has a record length of four pages, all the variable documents must have a record length of four pages. Add empty pages to the last record of the variable document, if necessary. After you create a variable document, print it to the Print Server and specify that it be combined with the corresponding FreeForm master (see page 18). Variable document 1 Variable element 1 1 1 1 PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 15 Combining the FreeForm master with the variable document When you print a variable document to the Print Server, specify the FreeForm master created from your master document with the Use Master print option. The Print Server combines the raster data of the variable document with the previously RIPped FreeForm master, creating a new raster data file. A master document can include more than one page. When you print a variable document and specify a FreeForm master that contains multiple pages, the variable pages are combined with the master pages in a cyclical fashion. The following example illustrates how a variable document combines with a two-page master document. Combined document PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 16 Pages 1 and 2 of the variable document are combined with Pages 1 and 2, respectively, of the master document. The cycle of master pages then starts over, and Pages 3 and 4 of the variable document are combined, respectively, with Pages 1 and 2, again, of the master document. This pattern continues for each subsequent set of pages in the variable document. Guidelines This section provides some suggestions to help you print variable data jobs correctly. • Ask your administrator or operator about how FreeForm master numbers are assigned at your site. • You cannot specify the Use Master option and Create Master option in the same job. • Single page FreeForm Masters are limited to single-sided output. You cannot duplex a singe page FreeForm Master. • Do not send your variable printing jobs to the Direct connection. If you send a variable data job to the Direct connection, the job does not process. • Use the Notes and Instructions fields to communicate instructions about your job to the operator. Combined document PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 17 • Give your jobs unique and descriptive names. You and the operator must be able to easily identify your jobs if there are many jobs in the queues, the FreeForm master numbers are reassigned, or you must refer to another job in the Notes or Instructions fields. The Create Master and Use Master options do not allow the use of the following special characters when you specify a name: |, /, \, *,?, “, ', `,:, <, >, or special control characters FreeForm 2 master names cannot begin with “form” or “formU”. Character length for FreeForm 2 master names is limited to 64 characters. • Consider the restrictions on Print Options when using FreeForm. The master file and the variable file must use identical paper size and orientation settings. Each job is limited to a single paper size, even when mixed media is applied. Finishing options and paper tray selection, as specified in the variable data file take precedence over master job settings, if these settings are different. Only FreeForm supports the Create Master and Use Master settings in the Command WorkStation and printer driver Job Property window. For more information about these restrictions, see Printing. • You cannot designate an imposed job (.dbp) to be a Master for any type of FreeForm job. • Only the variable data file needs to be imposed for FreeForm and FreeForm 2. • FreeForm 2 jobs require record boundary settings, as produced by the application, for use with VDP imposition and record-based finishing. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 18 TO PRINT VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS USING FREEFORM 1 Create a master document. The following example illustrates one page of a master document for a tri-fold brochure created with a page layout application. 2 Print the master document to the Print Server with the Create Master print option set to one of the FreeForm Master numbers. You can also set the Create Master option to None and instruct the operator to use overrides from Command WorkStation to create a FreeForm master from this job. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. To print your FreeForm master to ensure that it is correct before you merge it with variable data, enable the Print Master feature after the file is sent to the Print Server (see Printing). PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 19 3 Create the variable document. You can create the variable document using a different file, a different application, or a different computer platform than you used to create the master document, but some print options must be the same (for details, see page 17). The following example illustrates one page of the variable document for the tri-fold brochure. The data in this document can be as simple as a name and address, or as complex as multiple, graphics and photographic elements. NOTE: To impose the job, see “Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose” on page 23. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 20 4 Print the variable document to the Print Server with the Use Master print option set to the appropriate FreeForm master number. The FreeForm master number can be one you set when you send the master document or one assigned by the operator. To preview the master page, click Preview Master from the printer driver to generate a low-resolution image of the master page. FreeForm master numbers can be overridden from Command WorkStation. Consult the operator to make sure that the FreeForm master number you specify is the correct one for the FreeForm master you want to use. To check the job before it prints, instruct the operator to Process and Hold the job so that you can preview it from Command WorkStation. The following example illustrates the FreeForm master and variable document combined. The variable data is overlaid on the master document. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 21 Previewing master documents in the Windows printer driver After a master document is created, you can preview it from the Windows printer driver. This feature allows you to conveniently select your master document when you print using FreeForm. TO PREVIEW MASTER DOCUMENTS IN THE WINDOWS PRINTER DRIVER 1 Choose Print in your application. 2 Select the Print Server as your printer and click Properties. 3 Click the Fiery Printing tab. 4 Click the VDP icon. 5 Click Update to retrieve the list of FreeForm master names from the Print Server. The FreeForm master numbers and names appear in the Create Master and Use Master options. NOTE: You must enable Two-Way Communication to retrieve the list of FreeForm master names. To enable this feature, see the printer driver help. 6 Select the master document that you want to preview from the Use Master option and click Preview Master. The FreeForm Master Preview window appears. 7 Click Close. Printing variable data documents with FreeForm 2 FreeForm 2 extends the functionality of FreeForm. FreeForm 2 requires a third-party variable data printing application that supports FreeForm 2, such as PrintShop Mail. Using the thirdparty printing application and FreeForm, you can create multiple page masters, allowing more personalization and customization to your documents. You can still use another master created in any application, and then use a third-party application that supports FreeForm 2, such as PrintShop Mail, to combine the design and database information. FreeForm 2 and the third-party variable data printing application allow you to specify page conditions that determine rules for individual master pages. These rules, described by “if ” and “then” statements in each master page, allow you to skip or print pages within a master file. For more information about creating page conditions, see the documentation that accompanies your third-party variable data printing application. FreeForm 2 also provides the option to delete a specified FreeForm master from the Print Server hard disk after its corresponding variable data job has been successfully RIPped and printed. You can set this feature in a third-party application that supports the clearing of FreeForm masters. For more information about deleting FreeForm masters, see the documentation that accompanies the third-party printing application. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 22 TO PRINT A VARIABLE DATA JOB USING FREEFORM 2 1 Open the variable document in the third-party variable data printing application that supports FreeForm 2, such as PrintShop Mail. NOTE: To impose the job, see “Imposing FreeForm 2 jobs with Impose” on page 24. 2 Select FreeForm 2 when you send the variable document. For more information about creating a variable data job or printing variable data jobs, see the documentation that accompanies your third-party application. 3 Print the document. When you send a PPML or Creo VPS job to the Print Server and you must reference external resources, the Print Server automatically searches for the global images using File Search Paths created in Setup. For more information, see Configuration and Setup. If you know the path location, you can also search for external resources on a job by job basis. Before you print the job, indicate the File Search Path. TO SEARCH FOR EXTERNAL RESOURCES FOR CREO VPS OR PPML JOBS USING THE FILE SEARCH PATH 1 Download the Creo VPS or PPML job to the Print Server using a third -party variable data application that supports the variable data printing language. 2 In Command WorkStation, select the Creo VPS or PPML job and right-click to choose Job Properties. 3 Click the VDP icon and enter the File Search Path location. NOTE: The File Search Path server must be set up by the administrator. For more information, see Configuration and Setup. 4 Process the Creo VPS or PPML job. NOTE: If the Print Server cannot find the reusable objects for the job, the job does not process. Make sure that you enter the correct File Search Path location. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 23 Imposing variable data jobs If variable data Imposition is enabled on the Print Server, you can impose FreeForm and FreeForm 2 jobs, as well as jobs using other supported variable data languages. You can impose a variable data job using Hot Folders. For more information, see Hot Folders Help. When you submit a variable data job to Command Workstation, open Impose to impose the job. The printed job merges and imposes the variable and master file. When you impose a variable data job, you can choose a single record imposition scheme or a multiple records imposition scheme. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose You can select Imposition settings for a FreeForm variable data job. Imposition must be enabled on the Print Server. TO IMPOSE A FREEFORM JOB 1 Download any PS or PDF file as a master job to the Print Server. 2 Open Command WorkStation, select the master job, and then click Properties. 3 Select the Create Master print option, and assign the master job a number. 4 Send the master job to Print or to Process and Hold. 5 Download the variable data file to the Print Server. 6 In Command WorkStation, select the variable data file, and then click Properties. 7 Select the Use Master print option and select the master job number. 8 Select the variable data file and click Impose. Select Imposition settings for the variable data job. For more information about Imposition settings, see Command WorkStation Help. 9 Process the variable job. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 24 Imposing FreeForm 2 jobs with Impose You can select Imposition settings for a FreeForm 2 variable data job. Imposition must be enabled on the Print Server. TO IMPOSE A FREEFORM 2 JOB 1 Download the master job using a third-party variable data application that supports FreeForm 2. 2 Open Command WorkStation and process the master job. 3 Download the variable job to the Hold queue using a third-party variable data application that supports FreeForm 2. 4 Select the variable job and choose Impose. Select Imposition settings for the variable data job. For more information about Imposition settings, see Command WorkStation Help. 5 Process the variable job. Imposing other variable data jobs with Impose You can select Imposition settings for other variable data jobs. Imposition must be enabled on the Print Server. TO IMPOSE OTHER VARIABLE DATA PRINTING JOBS 1 Download the Creo VPS or PPML job to the Print Server using a third-party variable data application that supports the variable data printing language. 2 Select the job and click Impose. Select Imposition settings for the variable data job. For more information about Imposition settings, see the Command WorkStation Help. 3 Process the variable data printing job. INDEX 25 B business rules component 8, 9 C content component 8, 9 Create Master option 13 Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) compatibility with Impose 10 described 10 jobs, imposing 24 searching for external resources with File Search Path 22 D database component 8, 9 E element-based technology 7 F File Search Path 22 FreeForm creating a master document 13 creating a variable document 14 described 9, 12 jobs, imposing with Impose 23 master document combining with variable document 14 previewing from the printer driver 21 printing guidelines 16 variable data documents 12 FreeForm 2 creating multiple page masters with 21 described 9 jobs, imposing with Impose 24 printing using third party printing application 22 variable data documents 21 FreeForm2 described 21 H Hot Folders 11 described 11 imposing variable data jobs with 11 I Impose feature 10 imposing Creo VPS jobs 24 FreeForm 2 jobs 5, 24 FreeForm jobs 23 PPML jobs 24 J job management tools 9 defined 10 L layout component 8, 9 M master documents adding variable elements to 19 creating 18 master elements 7 Mixed Media settings, applying 11 P page-based technology 7 PPML (Personalized Print Markup Language) compatibility with Impose 10 described 10 searching for external resources with File Search Path 22 printing FreeForm 2 jobs 21 FreeForm jobs 12 R reusable data 7 reusable objects 8 INDEX INDEX 26 T terminology 5 U Use Master option 13 V variable data jobs element-based 8 imposing 23 FreeForm 23 FreeForm 2 24 major components 8 printing FreeForm 18 FreeForm 2 21 variable data printing languages Creo VPS 10 FreeForm and FreeForm 2 9 Print Server Setup Roadmap [Title] User Documentation PDF User Documentation disc Print Server User Software disc(s) Welcome Welcome Configuration and Setup Configuration and Setup Welcome Utilities Printing Printing See the Configuration page for the server name or IP address. Part Number: 45082475 ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. All rights reserved. LEGEND Minimum (printer driver only): Set up a TCP/IP port (Windows user computers). Install the printer driver from the User Software disc(s). Update the printer driver to include Print Server options. Full (printer driver and utilities): Install user software from the User Software disc(s) on user computers. User software can also be downloaded from the Downloads WebTool. Install user software on user computers (choose Minimum or Full user software installation). Print a sample document from a user computer. Install user documentation on user computers. Print a Configuration page. 4 1 2 3 5 Effectuez la configuration du serveur d’impression. Dans la plupart des cas, la configuration par défaut suffit. Il peut être nécessaire de configurer le périphérique d’impression; voir Configuration et installation. Remarque : Si vous modifiez la configuration par défaut du serveur d’impression, imprimez une autre page de configuration. [Titre] ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Tous droits réservés. LÉGENDE Minimale (pilote d’imprimante uniquement) : Configurez un port TCP/IP (ordinateurs Windows). Installez le pilote d’imprimante à partir du ou des disques des Logiciels utilisateur. Mettez le pilote d’imprimante à jour pour qu’il comprenne les options du serveur d’impression. Complète (pilote d’imprimante et utilitaires) : Installez les logiciels utilisateur à partir du ou des disques des Logiciels utilisateur sur les différents ordinateurs. Les logiciels utilisateur peuvent également être téléchargés à partir du WebTool Téléchargements. Imprimez une page de configuration à partir du serveur d’impression. Utilisez ce résumé de configuration si : • votre serveur d’impression a été déballé puis branché par un technicien de maintenance et se trouve sous tension. • votre serveur d’impression a été intégré à un réseau TCP/IP qui comprend des postes utilisateur fonctionnant sous Windows®. Résumé de configuration du serveur d’impression Disque(s) Logiciels Disque de la documentation utilisateur utilisateur PDF de la documentation utilisateur Serveur d’impression Installez la documentation utilisateur sur les différents ordinateurs. Installez les logiciels utilisateur sur les différents ordinateurs (choisissez l’installation minimale ou complète). Bienvenue Configuration et installation Bienvenue Configuration et installation Impression Imprimez un document test à partir d’un poste utilisateur. Voir la page de configuration pour connaître le nom du serveur ou l’adresse IP. Bienvenue Impression Utilitaires 4 1 2 3 5 Führen Sie die unten skizzierten Schritte aus, wenn… • Ihr Druckserver aufgestellt und von einem Servicetechniker eingerichtet wurde und eingeschaltet ist. • Ihr Druckserver einem TCP/IP-Netzwerk mit Anwendercomputern unter Windows® hinzugefügt wurde. Konfigurieren Sie den Druckserver (Setup). In vielen Fällen ist die Standardkonfiguration ausreichend. Eventuell muss auch das Ausgabegerät konfiguriert werden (siehe Konfiguration und Setup). Hinweis: Drucken Sie nach einer Änderung an der Standardkonfiguration des Druckservers eine neue Konfigurationsseite. Druckserver - Setup-Übersicht ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Installieren Sie die Anwenderdokumentation auf den Client- Computern. Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite des Druckservers. Installieren Sie die Anwendersoftware auf den Client- Computern (Installationstyp Minimal oder Vollständig). Minimal (nur Druckertreiber): Richten Sie (auf dem Windows Computer) einen TCP/IP-Port ein. Installieren Sie den Druckertreiber von der CD-ROM bzw. DVD. Aktualisieren Sie im Druckertreiber die installierbaren Optionen. Vollständig (Druckertreiber und Dienstprogramme): Installieren Sie die Anwendersoftware von der CD-ROM bzw. DVD. Die Anwendersoftware steht auch als Download bereit (über Komponente Downloads der WebTools). Senden Sie vom Client-Computer ein Testdokument an den Druckserver. Einführung und erste Schritte Dienstprogramme Drucken Einführung und erste Schritte Konfiguration und Setup Konfiguration und Setup Servername und IP-Adresse sind auf der Konfigurationsseite vermerkt. PDF-Datei der Anwenderdokumentation Datenträger mit Anwendersoftware Druckserver Datenträger mit Anwenderdokumentation Drucken [Titel] Einführung und erste Schritte LEGENDE 4 1 2 3 5 Eseguire la configurazione del server di stampa. Nella maggior parte dei casi, le impostazioni predefinite di configurazione sono sufficienti. Potrebbe essere necessario configurare l’unità di stampa; vedere Configurazione e impostazione. Nota: Se si cambia la configurazione predefinita del server di stampa, stampare un’altra pagina di configurazione. ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Tutti i diritti riservati. [Titolo] Guida alla configurazione del server di stampa Disco della documentazione per l’utente PDF della documentazione per l’utente Disco del software utente Server di stampa Usare questo roadmap se… • il server di stampa è stato disimballato e collegato da un tecnico dell’assistenza ed è acceso. • il server di stampa è stato aggiunto a una rete TCP/IP che include computer Windows®. Installare la documentazione per l’utente sui computer. Stampare la pagina di configurazione dal server di stampa. Installare il software utente sui computer (selezionare l’installazione Minima o Completa del software utente). Minima (solo driver di stampa): Configurare una porta TCP/IP (computer Windows). Installare il driver di stampa dal disco (o dai dischi) del software utente. Aggiornare il driver di stampa in modo da includere le opzioni del server di stampa. Completa (driver di stampa e programmi di utilità): Installare il software utente dal disco (o dai dischi) del software utente. È possibile scaricare il software utente anche mediante Scaricamenti di WebTools. Il nome del server o l’indirizzo IP sono riportati sulla pagina di configurazione. Stampare un documento campione da un computer. Guida introduttiva Stampa Programmi di utilità Stampa Guida introduttiva Configurazione e impostazione Configurazione e impostazione Guida introduttiva LEGENDA 4 1 2 3 5 Realice la Configuración del servidor de impresión. En la mayoría de los casos, la configuración por omisión es suficiente. Es posible que sea necesaria la configuración del dispositivo de impresión; consulte Instalación y configuración. Nota: Si cambia la configuración del servidor de impresión por omisión, imprima otra página Configuración. ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Reservados todos los derechos. [Título] Instrucciones de configuración del servidor de impresión LEYENDA Disco de documentación del usuario PDF de documentación del usuario Disco(s) de software del usuario Servidor de impresión Utilice estas Instrucciones si... • su servidor de impresión ha sido desembalado y conectado por un técnico de servicio y está encendido. • su servidor de impresión ha sido agregado a una red TCP/IP que incluye computadoras de usuario Windows®. Instale la documentación del usuario en las computadoras de usuario. Imprima una página Configuración desde el servidor de impresión. Instale el software de usuario en las computadoras de usuario (seleccione la instalación de software del usuario Mínima o Completa). Mínima (sólo controlador de impresora): Configure un puerto TCP/IP (computadoras de usuario Windows). Instale el controlador de impresora desde los discos de software del usuario. Actualice el controlador de impresora para inclir las opciones del servidor de impresión. Completa (controlador de impresora y utilidades): Instale el software del usuario desde los discos de software del usuario. El software del usuario también puede descargarse desde Descargas de WebTools. Bienvenida Utilidades Impresión Consulte la página Configuración para ver el nombre del servidor o la dirección IP. Imprima un documento de ejemplo desde una computadora de usuario. Impresión Instalación Bienvenida y configuración Instalación y configuración Bienvenida 4 1 2 3 5 Bem-vindo Utilitários Impressão Impressão ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Todos os direitos são reservados. LEGENDA [Título] Guia de configuração do Servidor de impressão Formato PDF da documentação do usuário Disco(s) do software do usuário Servidor de impressão Utilize este Guia se... • o servidor de impressão foi desembalado e conectado por um técnico de manutenção e está ligado. • o servidor de impressão foi adicionado a uma rede TCP/IP que inclui computadores de usuários de Windows®. Instale a documentação do usuário nos computadores deles. Imprima uma Página de configuração no servidor de impressão. Execute uma Configuração para o servidor de impressão. Na maioria dos casos, a Configuração padrão é suficiente. Pode ser necessário configurar o dispositivo de impressão; consulte Configuração e instalação. Se você alterar a definição padrão de Configuração do servidor de impressão, imprima outra Página de configuração. Instale o software do usuário nos computadores deles (selecione a instalação do software do usuário Minima ou Completa). Minima (somente o driver da impressora): Configure a porta TCP/IP (computadores de usuários do Windows). Instale o driver da impressora a partir do(s) disco(s) do software do usuário. Atualize o driver da impressora para incluir as opções do servidor de impressão. Completa (driver da impressora e utilitários): Instale o software do usuário a partir do(s) disco(s) do software do usuário nos computadores deles. Também é possível fazer o download do software do usuário com o WebTool Download. Consulte a Página de configuração para obter o nome do servidor ou endereço IP. Imprima um documento de amostra a partir do computador do usuário. Configuração Bem-vindo e instalação Configuração e instalação Bem-vindo Disco de documentação do usuário 4 1 2 3 5 Gebruik deze roadmap als... • uw afdrukserver door een servicemonteur uitgepakt en aangesloten is en ingeschakeld is. • uw afdrukserver toegevoegd is aan een TCP/IP-netwerk met Windows®- gebruikerscomputers. Voer de setup van de afdrukserver uit. In de meeste gevallen volstaat de standaard setupconfiguratie. Mogelijk zijn instellingen voor het afdrukapparaat nodig. Raadpleeg Configuratie en instellingen. Opmerking: Als u de standaardconfiguratie met instellingen voor de afdrukserver wijzigt, moet u een nieuwe configuratiepagina afdrukken. ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Alle rechten voorbehouden. [Titel] Setupgids voor de afdrukserver Druk vanaf een gebruikerscomputer een voorbeelddocument af. Minimaal (alleen printerstuurprogramma): Stel een TCP/IP-poort in (Windowsgebruikerscomputers). Installeer het printerstuurprogramma vanaf de schijven met gebruikerssoftware. Update het printerstuurprogramma met de opties voor de afdrukserver. Volledige (printerstuurprogramma’s en hulpprogramma’s): Installeer de gebruikerssoftware vanaf de schijven met gebruikerssoftware op de gebruikerscomputers. U kunt de gebruikerssoftware ook downloaden met de WebTool Downloads. Raadpleeg de configuratiepagina voor de servernaam of het IP-adres. Installeer de gebruikersdocumentatie op de gebruikerscomputers. Druk de configuratiepagina van de afdrukserver af. Schijf met gebruikersdocumentatie PDF met gebruikersdocumentatie Schijf of schijven met gebruikerssoftware Afdrukserver Welkom Welkom Configuratie en instellingen Configuratie en instellingen Welkom Hulpprogramma’s Afdrukken Installeer de gebruikerssoftware op de gebruikerscomputers (kies een Minimale of Volledige installatie van de gebruikerssoftware). Afdrukken LEGENDE 4 1 2 3 5 Ställ in skrivarservern. I de flesta fall räcker det med standardinställningskonfigurationen. Utskriftsenheten kanske behöver ställas in, se Konfiguration och inställning. Obs! Om du ändrar utskriftsserverns standardkonfiguration bör du skriva ut en ny konfigurationssida. ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Med ensamrätt. TECKENFÖRKLARING Skriv ut ett provdokument från någon användares dator. Minimal (endast skrivardrivrutin): Ställ in en TCP/IP-port (användare med Windows-datorer). Installera skrivardrivrutinen från skivan/skivorna med användarprogram. Uppdatera skrivardrivrutinen så att den innehåller skrivarserveralternativ. Fullständig (skrivardrivrutin och hjälpprogram): Installera användarprogrammet från skivan/skivorna med användarprogram på användarnas datorer. Det går även att hämta användarprogrammet från WebTool Downloads. Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Utilities © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093745 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 8 About this document 9 About Help 9 INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 10 Preparing for installation on Windows computers 10 Installing user software on a Windows computer 11 Installing user software on a Mac OS computer 13 Uninstalling user software on a Mac OS computer 14 Uninstalling user software on a Windows computer 14 COMMAND WORKSTATION 15 Command WorkStation utilities 16 Installing Command WorkStation 17 Configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80 17 Using Command WorkStation 19 About Help 19 Additional features 20 Mixed Media 20 Insert Tabs 25 Soft Proofing 28 ImageViewer 28 Troubleshooting 29 Command WorkStation cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 29 Command WorkStation does not respond 29 CONTENTS 4 FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 30 About SeeQuence Suite Kits 30 Installing and enabling Fiery SeeQuence Suite 31 Installing SeeQuence software 31 Enabling SeeQuence software 31 About Help 33 PAPER CATALOG 34 Installing Paper Catalog 34 Tray Association and Paper Catalog 34 Specifying Paper Catalog media for jobs 35 Changing or deleting a Paper Catalog entry 37 REMOTE SCAN 38 Installing and configuring Remote Scan 38 Installing Remote Scan 38 Configuring Remote Scan 39 Using Remote Scan 40 Initiating a scan 40 Specifying scan settings 40 Retrieving scans using Docs 40 Scanning to Mailboxes 41 FIERY BRIDGE 42 Installing Fiery Bridge 42 Using Fiery Bridge 42 HOT FOLDERS 43 Installing Hot Folders 43 Upgrading from a previous version of Hot Folders 43 Using Hot Folders 44 CONTENTS 5 WEBTOOLS 45 Setting up WebTools 45 Accessing the WebTools home page 46 Using WebTools 47 Home 47 Downloads 47 Docs 47 Configure 47 INDEX 49 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION The Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server media pack includes a set of software utilities that allow you to manage the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server, as well as the print workflow and content of jobs on the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server. This document provides an overview of how to install, configure, and use the following Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server utilities: • Command WorkStation • Fiery SeeQuence Suite – Fiery SeeQuence Preview – Fiery SeeQuence Impose – Fiery SeeQuence Compose • Paper Catalog • Remote Scan • Fiery Bridge • Hot Folders • WebTools INTRODUCTION 8 Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. INTRODUCTION 9 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Command WorkStation monitors and manages the print workflow of jobs on the Fiery PRO80. • Fiery SeeQuence Suite integrates document preparation activities at both the sheet level and page level in one visual interface. – Fiery SeeQuence Preview provides a pre-RIP soft proof of each sheet surface of a job. Changes dynamically to display any changes made in preparing documents for printing. – Fiery SeeQuence Impose applies imposition layouts to jobs for custom printing, binding, and cutting purposes. – Fiery SeeQuence Compose defines the chapter divisions of a job, printing ranges of pages on varying types of media, inserting blank media between pages, and tab media containing text labels. • Paper Catalog defines and stores the attributes of printing media in a system-based paper warehouse database. • Remote Scan initiates and retrieves a scan on the printer from a remote computer on the network. Includes the Scan TWAIN plug-in module. • Fiery Bridge accesses scanned documents in your Fiery PRO80 mailbox directly from a client Windows computer. • Hot Folders stores frequently used print options when printing PostScript and PDF files on the Fiery PRO80. • WebTools manages your Fiery PRO80 remotely from the Internet or your company’s intranet. For information about using color management, see Color Printing. About Help Detailed instructions on using most Fiery PRO80 utilities are provided in the online Help. Wherever appropriate, this document refers you to Help for additional information and explains how to access Help for each utility. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 10 INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE This chapter describes the installation of Fiery PRO80 user software on Windows and Mac OS computers. You can install Fiery PRO80 user software in the following ways: • From the User Software DVD • From the Fiery PRO80, using the Internet or intranet • From the Fiery PRO80 directly, over the network If you have previously installed any Fiery PRO80 user software on your computer, the Installer allows you to uninstall those applications during the process. Preparing for installation on Windows computers Before installing Fiery PRO80 software on a Windows computer, be sure to complete the following: • To use Fiery PRO80 user software on a Windows computer, you must install the Sun Java file, Java Runtime Environment (JRE), provided in the Common Utilities folder on the User Software DVD. If the correct Sun Java file is not installed, the Fiery User Software Installer installs it automatically before installing the Fiery PRO80 software. NOTE: The recommended version of Sun Java JRE is provided on the User Software DVD. • To install the Fiery PRO80 software, you must install Service Pack 2 on a Windows XP computer. If not, a warning message alerts you to install the Service Pack. After you install Sun Java JRE, a Java Web Start shortcut is created on your computer desktop. The shortcut is not intended for use with Fiery PRO80 software and can be deleted. Different versions of Sun Java JRE can be installed on your computer. The Fiery PRO80 software automatically finds the correct version, so you do not need to uninstall other versions of Sun Java JRE required for third-party applications. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 11 Installing user software on a Windows computer All installation of user software on a Windows computer is done through the Fiery User Software Installer. The following procedures describe installing from the User Software DVD, over the network, or over the Internet, and modifying the user software. The only applications that are not installed by the Fiery User Software Installer are Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop, for use with Fiery SeeQuence Suite. For more information, see “Installing and enabling Fiery SeeQuence Suite” on page 31. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive of the computer. The Installer Welcome screen appears. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions. Do not attempt to install user software by opening the individual folders for the applications. To modify or remove user software after you have installed it on your computer, use the User Software DVD and the following procedure. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 12 TO MODIFY USER SOFTWARE USING THE USER SOFTWARE DVD INSTALLER 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive of your computer. 2 On the window that appears, select Add/Remove, Repair, or Remove. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. If your computer does not have a DVD drive, you can install the user software from the Fiery PRO80 over the network. Ask your network administrator for the IP address or the DNS server name of the Fiery PRO80. You can also install the user software from the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet. Ask your network administrator for the IP address. Use your Internet browser to access WebTools. For complete information about browser and system requirements, see Welcome. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER OVER THE NETWORK 1 Click Start, choose Run, and then type the IP address or DNS server name of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Type the user name and password, if required. Ask your network administrator if a password is required. 3 Double-click the PC_User_SW directory. 4 Double-click the Master Installer icon. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER USING WEBTOOLS 1 Start your Internet browser. 2 Type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 home page appears. If the home page for the printer appears instead of the WebTools page, click the WebTools link. 3 Click the Downloads tab. 4 Click the link for the software that you want to install. 5 Choose Run to open the file or Save to save it to your computer. If you choose Run, proceed to step 8. If you choose Save, proceed to step 6. 6 Browse to the location where you want to save the USERSWMI.exe file and click Save. The file is downloaded from the Fiery PRO80. 7 Double-click the USERSWMI.exe file. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 13 8 Type the Fiery PRO80 URL, http://, when prompted. 9 Follow the on-screen instructions. For complete instructions on how to use Downloads, see WebTools Downloads Help. For more information about WebTools and Downloads, see page 45. Do not attempt to install user software by opening the individual folders for the applications. Always use the Fiery User Software Installer. Installing user software on a Mac OS computer Installation of user software on a Mac OS computer is done separately for each application. If necessary, you can uninstall the user software using the Fiery Software Uninstaller. The following procedures describe installing and uninstalling user software. For information about installing printer drivers, see Printing. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive of your computer. 2 Browse to the OSX folder. 3 Double-click the Installer icon for the application that you want to install. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. You can also install the user software from the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet. Ask your network administrator for the IP address. Use your Internet browser to access WebTools. For complete information about browser and system requirements, see Welcome. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER OVER THE NETWORK 1 Choose Connect to Server from the Go menu. 2 Type smb:// followed by the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. If you cannot locate the Fiery PRO80, contact your network administrator. 3 Type the user name and password, if required. Ask your network administrator if a password is required. 4 Select the smb shared volume that you want to connect to. 5 Select Mac_User_SW and click OK. 6 Open the OSX folder. 7 Double-click the Installer icon for the application that you want to install. 8 Follow the on-screen instructions. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 14 TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER OVER THE INTERNET 1 Start your Internet browser. 2 Type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 home page appears. 3 Click the Downloads tab. 4 Click the link for the software that you want to install. The osxutils.dmg file is downloaded to your computer. and a virtual disk appears on your desktop. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions. For complete instructions on how to use Downloads, see WebTools Downloads Help. For more information about WebTools and Downloads, see page 45. Uninstalling user software on a Mac OS computer To remove user software after you have installed it on your Mac OS computer, use the Fiery Software Uninstaller utility and the following procedure. TO UNINSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive of your computer. 2 Browse to the OSX folder. 3 Click the icon for the Fiery Software Uninstaller. 4 Select the software that you want to uninstall and follow the on-screen instructions. Uninstalling user software on a Windows computer To remove user software after you install it on your Windows computer, use the Fiery User Software Installer. See “To modify user software using the User Software DVD Installer” on page 12. COMMAND WORKSTATION 15 COMMAND WORKSTATION Command WorkStation enhances the user experience and improves productivity. The crossplatform application allows operators to manage jobs on the Fiery PRO80 and administrators to configure the Fiery PRO80 for printing. Command WorkStation includes the Job Center for job management, Device Center for server management, and Fiery SeeQuence Suite for preparing jobs for printing. In the Job Center and Device Center views, the Server List shows all of the Fiery PRO80 servers that you are connected to. You can switch between servers, and add or remove them from the list. Information about consumables on the printer, tray association status, and errors and alerts is available. • Job Center displays the tools for managing jobs in the print queues and previewing processed jobs. The status of jobs is shown. You can search for jobs and access features from the customizable toolbar. • Device Center gives you access to all the resources of the Fiery PRO80. From the Device Center, you can access Setup and tools such as Calibrator and Backup and Restore. You can perform Color Setup, configure virtual printers, and create Paper Catalog entries. Command WorkStation allows you to perform the following tasks: • View the print status of jobs on the Fiery PRO80 • Hold, process, and print jobs • Override user-assigned print option settings • Preview the page content of a job • Reorder pages in a job and combine pages from different jobs • Create and use FreeForm master files for variable data printing • Archive job files • View job logs of recent print activity • Define virtual printers • Manage fonts • Access Fiery SeeQuence Suite • Merge jobs • Access color management settings COMMAND WORKSTATION 16 Command WorkStation utilities Command WorkStation provides access to the following utilities: • Backup and Restore • Booklet Maker • Calibrator • Color Management • Configure • Fiery JDF • Job Properties • Paper Catalog • Quick Doc Merge • Tray Alignment • Tray Association • Fiery SeeQuence Suite (option) • Fiery SeeQuence Impose (option) • Fiery SeeQuence Compose (option) COMMAND WORKSTATION 17 Installing Command WorkStation Install Command WorkStation on a Windows or Mac OS computer with a network connection to the Fiery PRO80. For a complete list of system requirements, see Welcome. The installer for Command WorkStation is provided on the User Software DVD as part of the Fiery User Software Installer (Windows) or as a separate application (Mac OS X). To install Command WorkStation, see “Installing user software” on page 10. Configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80 The first time you start Command WorkStation, you are prompted to configure the connection to the Fiery PRO80. You can also edit the configuration whenever there is any change to your Fiery PRO80 or network, such as a changed server name or IP address. If you change Fiery PRO80 Setup information, do so before you reconfigure the connection. BEFORE YOU BEGIN • Print the FieryPRO80 Configuration page. For instructions on printing the Configuration page, see Configuration and Setup on the User Documentation CD. The Fiery PRO80 Configuration page contains information you need when configuring the connection, such as the IP address of the Fiery PRO80. For TCP/IP installations, you can use the DNS name instead of the IP address. Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is registered in a Domain Name Server (DNS) on your network. For more information, contact your network administrator. TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION FOR COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 Start Command WorkStation: Windows: Programs > Fiery > Fiery Command WorkStation 5 Mac OS: Applications: Fiery: Command WorkStation 5: Command WorkStation 2 Type the DNS name or IP address and click Add to add the server to the Disconnected Servers list. If no Fiery PRO80 is found, click the icon, search by a range of IP addresses or by the IP address and subnet mask, and then click Go. Or, select Auto Search. COMMAND WORKSTATION 18 All available servers appear in the Available Servers list. To search for a particular server in the Available Servers list, type the server name in the Filter by keyword field. Select the Fiery PRO80 that you want to use, click Add, and then click Connect. The Login dialog box appears. 3 Select Administrator, Operator, or Guest and type the appropriate password, if required. Ask your administrator for passwords for the Fiery PRO80 that you want to connect to. For information about setting passwords and the default Administrator password for the Fiery PRO80, see Configuration and Setup. 4 Click Log In. Command WorkStation is now connected to the Fiery PRO80. For information about managing and connecting additional Fiery PRO80 servers, see Command WorkStation Help. COMMAND WORKSTATION 19 Using Command WorkStation After you install and configure Command WorkStation, you can begin using it to monitor and manage jobs on the Fiery PRO80. About Help For instructions on using Command WorkStation features, see Command WorkStation Help. The Help menu offers access to the following kinds of Help: • Online Help provides procedural information. • How To accesses the EFI web page, which provides demo scripts and sample files. • What’s New describes the new features of Command WorkStation. TO ACCESS COMMAND WORKSTATION HELP 1 Start Command WorkStation. Select the Fiery PRO80 from the Server List dialog box and log on to the server. For information about setting passwords and the default Administrator password for the Fiery PRO80, see Configuration and Setup. 2 Choose Help, How To, or What’s New from the Help menu. COMMAND WORKSTATION 20 Additional features The following sections describe how to use additional features of Command WorkStation that are not discussed in Command WorkStation Help. Mixed Media The Mixed Media feature allows you to define the chapter divisions of a job, print ranges of pages on varying types of media, insert blank media between pages, and insert tab media containing text labels (if the printer supports tab printing). The following guidelines and restrictions apply to Mixed Media settings: • The Mixed Media window restricts you from specifying settings that conflict with any media, page size, or finishing settings that have been specified for the job in the Job Properties dialog box or printer driver. • When two or more Mixed Media settings are in conflict with each other, the Mixed Media window highlights the setting names in red, signaling you to resolve the conflict. • When you specify print options (in the Job Properties dialog box or printer driver) after specifying Mixed Media settings, certain print options may conflict with the page-specific Mixed Media settings. You must resolve the conflict by choosing different print options or removing certain Mixed Media specifications. • Mixed Media settings affect the use of output color profiles when the “Use media defined profile” option is selected in Color Setup. For more information, see Color Printing. • If counters are configured for the printer, blank media inserted between pages count as printed pages. Basic instructions for accessing and using Mixed Media are provided in Command WorkStation Help. Features specific to the Fiery PRO80 are described in the following procedures. COMMAND WORKSTATION 21 TO DEFINE MIXED MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS 1 Select or right-click a spooled/held job in the Job Center view and choose Properties from the Actions menu, or double-click a job. 2 Click the Media icon and scroll down to Mixed Media. The Mixed Media window lists any previously defined media settings and includes buttons for defining, modifying, and removing settings. 3 For Chapter Start Page(s), type the page numbers on which you want to start new chapter sections. Type page numbers as comma-separated values (for example: 4,9,17) to designate the start of each new chapter. This feature forces each starting page to use a right-side page, adding a preceding left-sided blank, if required. NOTE: It is not necessary to type the first page, and page numbers refer to the numbering of the original document. If you use the Chapter Start Page(s) feature, all media specified in the Paper menu per chapter must share the same dimensions (for example, all Letter, all Tabloid, or all A4). COMMAND WORKSTATION 22 4 To apply finishing options (for example, stapling or sorting) to each chapter created using the Chapter Start feature, select the “Define Each Chapter As A Separate Finishing Set” option. NOTE: Not all finishing options can be applied to chapters that contain mixed sizes of media (for example, Letter and A4). 5 To define properties for front and back covers, click Define Cover. For more information, see “To define cover media settings” on page 23. 6 To define properties for individual pages or page ranges, click New Page Range. For more information, see “To define media for specific pages” on page 24. 7 To insert tab media, click New Tab. The Insert Tab dialog box appears. For information about defining tab settings, see page 25. NOTE: The Insert Tab feature is not available for imposed jobs. 8 To insert blank pages, click New Insert. For more information, see “To insert blank pages” on page 25. 9 To modify or delete a current definition, select it in the Mixed Media Definition list, and click Edit or Remove. If you click Edit, enter new settings for the definition and click Modify. 10 After you finish defining Mixed Media settings, click OK to close the Mixed Media dialog box and Job Properties. The Mixed Media settings are applied to the job. NOTE: You can save up to 100 different settings for the Selection list in the Mixed Media window. COMMAND WORKSTATION 23 TO DEFINE COVER MEDIA SETTINGS 1 In the Mixed Media window, click Define Cover. The Cover Media dialog box appears. 2 To define identical front cover and back cover media, select the “Apply the same settings for both front and back cover” option. To define media settings for the front or back cover individually, select the Front Cover or Back Cover option. 3 Choose other settings, as required, from the pull-down menus. 4 Choose the required media from the Media menu. To select media from Paper Catalog, choose Choose from Paper Catalog from the Media menu. The media that you selected appears in the main Cover Media window. For more information about Paper Catalog, see page 34. 5 Click OK to return to the Mixed Media window. Cover Media settings override settings defined in the Page/Page Range Media dialog box. COMMAND WORKSTATION 24 TO DEFINE MEDIA FOR SPECIFIC PAGES 1 In the Mixed Media window, click New Page Range. The Page/Page Range Media dialog box appears. 2 Type pages and page ranges as comma-separated values (for example: 3,9–14,18). 3 Choose other settings, as required, from the pull-down menus. If you assign a new media type to the back side of a duplexed sheet, a blank page is inserted to force the assigned page content to the front side of the next sheet. 4 Choose the required media from the Media menu. To select media from Paper Catalog, select Choose from Paper Catalog from the Media menu. The media that you selected appears in the main Page Range window. For more information about Paper Catalog, see page 34. 5 Click Add Definition after each media setting that you define. 6 Click Close to return to the Mixed Media window. COMMAND WORKSTATION 25 TO INSERT BLANK PAGES 1 Click New Insert in the Mixed Media window. The Insert Blank dialog box appears. 2 Indicate whether to insert the blank before or after the target page. Define the target page as the first or last page in the document, or as a specific numbered page. 3 Choose other settings, as required, from the pull-down menus. 4 Choose the required media from the Media menu. To select media from Paper Catalog, select Choose from Paper Catalog from the Media menu. The media that you selected appears in the main Insert Blank window. For more information about Paper Catalog, see page 34. 5 Click Insert after each blank page that you define. 6 Click Close to return to the Mixed Media window. Insert Tabs The Insert Tabs feature allows you to automatically insert tab pages throughout a job. This feature accommodates various sizes and types of tab media stock. You can insert the tab text and override text attributes on a per-job basis. NOTE: When you configure counters for the printer, printed tab pages count as black-andwhite pages, provided colors are calibrated to use pure black toner. Expelled tabs are not counted as printed pages. NOTE: If installed, the Stacker Main Tray can be selected for tab paper in the Insert Tabs feature from Command WorkStation. However, the Stacker Main Tray must be set up by the Service Technician, otherwise you cannot print a tab size document from the Stacker Main Tray. You cannot use the sorter with tab paper from the Stacker Main tray. COMMAND WORKSTATION 26 TO INSERT TAB PAGES 1 Select or right-click a spooled/held job in the Job Center view and choose Properties from the Actions menu, or double-click a job. 2 Click the Media icon and scroll down to Mixed Media. 3 Click New Tab in the Mixed Media window. The Insert Tab dialog box appears. 4 Type the number of tab positions included in a complete tab set in the “Number of tabs in a set” field. This specification ensures that tab text is printed in the correct tab positions. For example, tab positions in a set consisting of ten tabs are distinct from tab positions in a set consisting of five tabs. 5 Specify other settings, as required, for the tab stock. Paper Size values refer to the dimensions of the stock, including the tabbed portion. 6 Choose the required media from the Paper Catalog menu. You can also click the Select button to open the Paper Catalog window, select the required media, and then click OK. The media that you selected appears in the main Insert Tab window. For more information about Paper Catalog, see page 34. COMMAND WORKSTATION 27 7 To specify attributes for the tab text, type the number of tabs in the “Number of tabs to insert” field, and then click Insert. Use the following procedure to define the tab text. TO SPECIFY TAB TEXT 1 In the Tabs Text dialog box, select the “Apply the same text attributes for all tabs” option if you want all the tabs to use the same text attributes. 2 Click Insert. 3 Click Text Attributes. Specify the rotation, alignment, font, and size attributes of the tab text, and then click OK. 4 Indicate where you want each tab inserted in the document. • In the Page field, type the page number where you want the tab inserted. • Select Before to insert the tab before the page number, or clear this check box. NOTE: If you define a tab to be inserted between an odd-numbered page and an evennumbered page in a duplex job, the tab is inserted after the odd-numbered page on the first sheet, and the even-numbered page is printed on the next sheet. 5 Type the desired tab text for each tab in the Tab Text field. To define text attributes for each tab individually, click Text Attributes for that tab. 6 After you type the tab text, click OK to close the Insert Tab dialog box. The Mixed Media window displays the current tab settings in the Mixed Media Definition list. 7 To modify media settings for the tabs, select the tab description in the Mixed Media Definition list, and then click Edit. 8 To apply your Insert Tab settings to the document, click OK to close the Mixed Media window and Job Properties. COMMAND WORKSTATION 28 Output Tray for Unused Tabs Unused tabs can be sent to a specific output tray. For example, if you print a three-tab job and are using tab paper that has five tabs in a set, the fourth and fifth tabs are unused. To select the output tray for unused tabs, click New Tab in the Mixed Media window, select Output Tray to Kick Out Unused Tabs, and then choose the output tray from the drop-down menu. From Insert Tab, specify: • Number of tabs in the set of tab paper that you are using • Tab positions • Page number of tabs NOTE: Output Tray to Kick Out Unused Tabs is only available when you print multiple copies for your tab job. You cannot specify a finisher for the unused tab paper output tray if that finisher is not used for your job. If a paper jam occurs, note the position of the tab on the last page of output, and load the tab paper starting with the next tab position. Soft Proofing Soft Proofing allows you to view accurate color previews of print jobs on a monitor. This feature is available only if you have the Graphic Arts Package installed and enabled on the Fiery PRO80. For information about using Soft Proofing, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. ImageViewer If the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is installed and enabled on the Fiery PRO80, you can use ImageViewer to preview and adjust colors on a job that has been processed and held. For information about using ImageViewer, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: When available, ImageViewer replaces the standard full-screen preview window described in Command WorkStation Help. COMMAND WORKSTATION 29 Troubleshooting When troubleshooting basic connection and software problems with Command WorkStation, see the following sections. For additional troubleshooting information, see Command WorkStation Help. Command WorkStation cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 If you cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 or locate the Fiery PRO80 from your computer, contact the network administrator. The administrator may need to troubleshoot your network connections and check settings on the servers that you print to. If settings have changed, it may be necessary to reconfigure the Fiery PRO80 (see Configuration and Setup). If you can connect to the Fiery PRO80 with another utility, you may need to reconfigure the Command WorkStation connection to the Fiery PRO80 (see page 17). If you configured the Fiery PRO80 and set up client computers and network servers according to the instructions in Configuration and Setup, print a Test Page. If you can print the Test Page, but still cannot print a document from a remote computer, ask your network administrator to troubleshoot the network connection. If you cannot connect and cannot print a Test Page, check the printer touch panel for error information. Command WorkStation does not respond If Command WorkStation is unresponsive, use the following troubleshooting guidelines. IF THE COMMAND WORKSTATION WINDOWS DO NOT UPDATE 1 Log off and then quit Command WorkStation. 2 Restart Command WorkStation or restart the computer. If the Command WorkStation windows do not update or no jobs are displayed, and the mouse has no effect (you cannot select a job or a window, use a right mouse command, or select a menu item), the Fiery PRO80 is offline or network communication has failed. TO FORCE AN EXIT FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 On a Windows computer, press Ctrl-Alt-Delete and use the Program Manager to close Command WorkStation. On a Mac OS X computer, choose Apple menu > Force Quit, select Command WorkStation, and then click Force Quit. Or, press Command+Option+Esc, select Command WorkStation, and then click Force Quit. 2 At the Fiery PRO80, disconnect and reconnect the network cable, and then try printing a Test Page or Configuration page. 3 If printing fails, restart the Fiery PRO80. FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 30 FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE Fiery SeeQuence Suite is an integrated job preparation tool, which offers the following modes, depending on what (if any) client dongle is available: • Preview provides a pre-RIP job preview. • Fiery SeeQuence Compose allows you to define the chapter divisions of a job, print ranges of pages on varying types of media, insert blank media between pages, and insert tab media containing text labels (if the printer supports tab printing). • Fiery SeeQuence Impose applies imposition layouts to jobs for custom printing, binding, and trimming. Also applies impositions to variable data jobs and saves imposed jobs as PDF files. • Fiery SeeQuence Suite integrates Impose and Compose features in the Preview window. About SeeQuence Suite Kits Fiery SeeQuence Suite software is available in the following optional kit configurations: • Fiery SeeQuence Impose kit (includes the Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD and a dongle) • Fiery SeeQuence Compose kit (includes the Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD and a dongle) • Fiery SeeQuence Suite kit, which includes both SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose (includes the Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD and a single dongle) SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose are supported on both Windows and Mac OS computers. For information about system requirements, see Welcome. NOTE: SeeQuence Suite, SeeQuence Impose, and SeeQuence Compose are optional upgrade kits for Command WorkStation. You must have the software kit-specific dongle installed on your computer to use the full functionality of the optional software. If you do not have the dongle installed, SeeQuence runs in Demo mode. In Demo mode, imposed jobs print with a watermark, and you can save imposed jobs in .dbp format to the Fiery PRO80. You can save imposed jobs in Adobe PDF format to a hard drive and the Fiery PRO80 when you are in Demo mode, but they are saved with a watermark. FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 31 Installing and enabling Fiery SeeQuence Suite The following Fiery SeeQuence options kits are available for purchase for use with Command WorkStation: • SeeQuence Impose (includes a dongle) • SeeQuence Compose (includes a dongle) • SeeQuence Suite, which includes both SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose (includes a single dongle) The following sections describe how to install and enable SeeQuence Suite. Installing SeeQuence software SeeQuence Suite software is installed with Command WorkStation software. For information about installing Command WorkStation software, see pages 10 and 17. Enabling SeeQuence software SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose are dongle-protected features of Command WorkStation that work in conjunction with Adobe Acrobat and the Enfocus PitStop plug-in. You must install a special dongle on each computer that runs the SeeQuence software. This section explains how to install the dongle and the required software. You will need the following items: • Dongle: A USB dongle included in one of the following option kits: – Fiery SeeQuence Impose kit – Fiery SeeQuence Compose kit – Fiery SeeQuence Suite kit, which includes both SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose (includes a single dongle) NOTE: If you purchased an earlier version of Impose or Compose, use the dongles that you already own to enable SeeQuence Impose or SeeQuence Compose. • Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD: Included in the SeeQuence Suite option kits. Contains installers for Adobe Acrobat version 9 and Enfocus PitStop, a plug-in module for Acrobat, for both Windows and Mac OS X. NOTE: Acrobat must be installed on the same computer as the SeeQuence software to preview .ps files. You do not need Acrobat or PitStop to preview .pdf files. Installing Command WorkStation installs the core SeeQuence software. If it is not already installed, you must install Command WorkStation (see page 17). FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 32 To enable SeeQuence software on a computer (or the Fiery PRO80, if it supports and is equipped with a monitor, keyboard, and mouse), do the following: • If not already installed—Install Command WorkStation from the Fiery Command WorkStation version 5 DVD for this Fiery PRO80. • Install the dongle provided in your kit directly on the computer. One dongle is required for each client computer. • Install Acrobat and PitStop from the installer DVD (Windows or Mac OS) provided in this kit. NOTE: If you are enabling SeeQuence software on the Fiery PRO80, the following procedures assume that you have logged on to the Fiery PRO80 with Administrator privileges and typed the appropriate password. To ensure network security, the system administrator may change this password frequently. Ask your administrator for the password. TO INSTALL THE DONGLE 1 If Command WorkStation is installed and running on the client computer, exit Command WorkStation. NOTE: If Command WorkStation is running, the dongle installation (described in step 2) will fail. 2 Unpack the dongle and install it directly into the computer’s USB connector. Insert the dongle into the USB connector of the computer. Make sure that the dongle is securely installed in the connector. Install Acrobat and PitStop, as described in the following procedure. TO INSTALL ACROBAT AND PITSTOP 1 If the latest versions of Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop are not installed, uninstall the current versions of Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop that are resident on the computer. NOTE: SeeQuence supports Acrobat 7, 8, and 9 on Windows computers and Acrobat 8 and 9 on Mac OS computers. • Close all open applications. • Follow the instructions for your computer for removing programs. • After you finish uninstalling earlier versions of Acrobat and PitStop, restart the computer. 2 Close all software applications that are currently running on the computer. FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 33 3 Insert the Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD (Windows or Mac OS) into the DVD drive. 4 If the Installer does not start automatically, navigate to the root level of the DVD and double-click Setup.exe (Windows) or Setup.app (Mac OS). 5 On Mac OS X, click Install and follow the on-screen instructions. On Windows, select the language and click Next. The SeeQuence software option that you purchased is now fully enabled. About Help SeeQuence Suite Help is part of Command WorkStation Help. For instructions on using SeeQuence Impose and Compose, see Command WorkStation Help. The Help menu offers access to the following kinds of Help: • Online Help provides procedural information. • How To accesses the EFI web site that provides demo scripts and sample files. • What’s New describes the new features of Command WorkStation. • Go Online accesses the EFI website where you can find out more about Command WorkStation features. TO ACCESS COMMAND WORKSTATION HELP 1 Start Command WorkStation. Select the Fiery PRO80 from the Server List dialog box and log on to the server. (See “Configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80” on page 17.) 2 Choose Help, How To, or What’s New from the Help menu. Or press F1 when the cursor is in an area of the main Command WorkStation window. PAPER CATALOG 34 PAPER CATALOG Paper Catalog is a system-based paper warehouse database that stores attributes of any media available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. Paper Catalog allows you to define custom catalog entries based on any combination of attributes you desire. You can customize any of the media attributes that are available for a catalog entry. You can then select media for your job from those listed. Installing Paper Catalog Paper Catalog is installed by default with Command WorkStation. For information about installing Command WorkStation, see page 15. For information about configuring Command WorkStation, see “Configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80” on page 17. For instructions on how to use the standard Paper Catalog features, see Command WorkStation Help. For instructions on how to access Command WorkStation Help, see page 19. Tray Association and Paper Catalog When using Tray Association with Paper Catalog, note the following restrictions. If a tray is loaded with a standard size, for example, A4, Tray Association lists both the standard letter size and the custom size closest to A4, but in Paper Catalog, you can only select a media entry with the standard paper size. If a tray is loaded with a custom size paper, in Paper Catalog you can select a media with that custom size or another custom size paper for the job, but you cannot select a standard paper size, even one that is close to the custom paper size. PAPER CATALOG 35 Specifying Paper Catalog media for jobs This section describes how to specify Paper Catalog media for use with a print job. You can specify Paper Catalog media from the following interfaces: • Command WorkStation • Job Properties in Command WorkStation • Mixed Media Setup in Command WorkStation • Hot Folders • SeeQuence Impose • SeeQuence Compose • Printer driver (for instructions, see Printing) NOTE: The following procedures assume that one or more Paper Catalog entries have already been defined by an administrator. For information about how to define Paper Catalog entries, see the Paper Catalog section of Command WorkStation Help. TO ACCESS PAPER CATALOG FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION • To open Paper Catalog from Command WorkStation, choose Paper Catalog from the Server menu or click the Paper Catalog icon on the toolbar. TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM JOB PROPERTIES 1 Select a job in the Job Center and choose Properties from the Command WorkStation Actions menu. 2 Click the Media icon in Job Properties. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu, and choose the required media from the Paper Catalog menu. NOTE: If you specify a paper catalog entry and then use Job Properties to change the page size (or another attribute associated with the paper catalog entry), the paper catalog assignment is canceled. Job Properties subsequently displays “none defined” for Paper Catalog. PAPER CATALOG 36 TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM MIXED MEDIA SETUP 1 Select or right-click a spooled/held job in the Job Center and choose Properties from the Actions menu, or double-click a job. 2 Click the Media icon in Job Properties and scroll down to Mixed Media. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu in the Cover Media, Page Range, or Insert Blank windows, and choose the required media from the Paper Catalog menu. If Insert Tab is supported, choose from the Paper Catalog menu in the Insert Tab dialog box. For more information about Mixed Media Setup, see the Mixed Media section of Command WorkStation Help. TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM SEEQUENCE COMPOSE 1 Select a spooled/held job in the Job Center and choose Compose from the Actions menu. 2 Select a page, or pages, in the Page View pane of the Compose window, and choose Assign Media from the Actions menu. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu and select the required media. For information about using Compose, see the Compose section of Command WorkStation Help. Compose Help also includes information about how to apply Paper Catalog entries to your job. TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM SEEQUENCE IMPOSE 1 Select a spooled/held job in the Job Center and choose Impose from the Actions menu. 2 Click the Edit button beside the Sheet menu. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu and select the required media. For information about using Impose, see the Impose section of Command WorkStation Help. Impose Help also includes information about how to apply Paper Catalog entries to your job. TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM HOT FOLDERS 1 Select Job Settings and click Define in the Folder Properties dialog box. 2 Click the Media icon in Job Properties. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu, and choose the required media from the Paper Catalog menu. 4 Click OK to return to Hot Folders Properties. PAPER CATALOG 37 Changing or deleting a Paper Catalog entry If a Paper Catalog media entry is selected for a job in the Held or Printed list, the Paper Catalog entry is locked, and you cannot modify or delete the entry. To make changes to the Paper Catalog entry, you must delete the job from the list, or change the Paper Catalog setting in Job Properties. REMOTE SCAN 38 REMOTE SCAN Remote Scan is a collection of software components that allow you to scan documents from the printer glass or through the printer’s automatic document feeder (ADF) and send the scanned images to specific destinations. Remote Scan consists of the following components: • Remote Scan (which includes the TWAIN plug-in module) allows you to remotely initiate and retrieve a scan from a printer. • Scan to E-mail allows you to send the scan file by e-mail as an attachment or URL. • Scan to FTP allows you to send the scan file to an FTP server. • Scan to Mailbox allows you to send the scan to a mailbox on the Fiery PRO80, from which it can be retrieved. • Scan to Disk allows you to scan directly to any hard disk on the network, such as your local hard disk. • Scan to Hold queue allows you to scan to the Fiery PRO80 Hold queue, for document merging and editing. • Docs WebTool allows you to retrieve scanned jobs from mailboxes on the Fiery PRO80. Installing and configuring Remote Scan You can use the Remote Scan TWAIN plug-in module with the following applications: • Adobe Acrobat v8.0/9.0 • Adobe Photoshop CS2/CS3 • PaperPort Pro v10.0/11.0 (Windows only) • Omnipage Pro v16.0 (Windows only) The following sections describe how to install and configure Remote Scan. Installing Remote Scan To install and use the Remote Scan plug-in module, you must have a Windows or Mac OS computer with a network connection. For detailed system requirements, see Welcome. The installer for Remote Scan is located on the User Software DVD. To install Remote Scan, see “Installing user software on a Windows computer” on page 11 and “Installing user software on a Mac OS computer” on page 13. REMOTE SCAN 39 Configuring Remote Scan The first time you start Remote Scan, you must configure the connection to the Fiery PRO80. Before you configure the connection, you must have the correct IP address. Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is registered in a Domain Name Server (DNS) on your network. When you open Remote Scan, the Scan Configuration dialog box appears. For instructions on configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80 for the first time, see page 39. For complete instructions on configuring and modifying the connection to the Fiery PRO80, see Remote Scan Help. If you previously configured a connection to the Fiery PRO80, it appears in the main Remote Scan window, and you can immediately initiate a scan, retrieve scans initiated at the printer touch panel, and use Remote Scan Help. TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION TO THE FIERY PRO80 1 When you start Remote Scan the first time, the Configuration window appears. In the Server Name or IP Address fields, type the DNS name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Select Use Nickname to enter another name to distinguish the Fiery PRO80. This name does not have to match the actual Server Name of the Fiery PRO80. 3 Type the name of the device connected to the Fiery PRO80. You can specify any name for the device name, but the field must be populated. 4 Click the green arrow to add the Fiery PRO80 to My Fiery List. 5 Click OK. If the administrator has enabled LDAP, you must enter the LDAP server account name and password when prompted. TO ACCESS REMOTE SCAN HELP 1 Start Remote Scan or open the Remote Scan plug-in module. 2 Click Help. 3 Use the Contents, Index, or Search panes to navigate to the Remote Scan Help topics. REMOTE SCAN 40 Using Remote Scan With the Remote Scan application and Remote Scan TWAIN plug-in module, you can initiate and retrieve scan files remotely by accessing a mailbox, which is set up at the printer control panel. All scans are stored on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk and retrieved through the network. You can open the scan file in a host application, such as Photoshop, and send it to the Fiery PRO80 Hold queue, an e-mail address, or an FTP server, or save it to any hard disk on the network. You can then retrieve files using Remote Scan, the Docs WebTool, or Command WorkStation. Initiating a scan The Fiery PRO80 uses a scan to hard disk drive (HDD) feature that allows you to use the Fiery PRO80 Control Panel to scan an image from the printer glass (platen) or automatic document feeder (ADF) into Fiery PRO80 memory, and save it in a Mailbox. You can then retrieve the image from the Mailbox with Remote Scan or the Docs WebTool. For more information, see “Scanning to Mailboxes” on page 41. When scanning a job at the printer control panel, you can also scan to e-mail or FTP. For information about initiating a scan or creating an address book from the printer touch panel, see the documentation that accompanies your scanner. Additionally, you can scan a job directly to the Hold queue, so that you can use the document merging and editing features of Command WorkStation. For more information about using these features, see Command WorkStation Help. Specifying scan settings When you initiate a scan, specify scan settings. Scan settings are printer specific options. For specific scan settings, see the documentation that accompanies your scanner. Retrieving scans using Docs You can retrieve scan jobs in the Fiery PRO80 Mailboxes to your remote workstation using the Docs WebTool. To access Mailboxes, you must set a predefined user name and password. For instructions on using Docs, see page 47. For additional information about setting up Mailboxes, see the following section. REMOTE SCAN 41 Scanning to Mailboxes You can only scan to a Mailbox if the Mailbox has been created in advance. Ask the Fiery PRO80 administrator to create a Mailbox for you or advise you of what Mailboxes are available. You can create Mailboxes on the Mailbox web page, or in the Users and Groups setup in WebTools Configure. To access the Mailbox web page, open your web browser and type the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 in the Address field. On the Mailbox web page, you can create a Mailbox without creating a user account. Once a mailbox has been created, it appears as a group in the Users and Groups page of WebTools Configure. In WebTools Configure, when you create an account in Users and Groups and assign it scan privileges, a Mailbox of the same name as the account is created. NOTE: The Mailbox name cannot exceed 16 characters. In WebTools Configure, you can use a maximum of 72 characters for the name of an account. If you use more than 16 characters for a Mailbox name or an account for scan users, the Mailbox is not recognized. Do not exceed 16 characters, whether you create the name on the Mailbox web page or in WebTools Configure. FIERY BRIDGE 42 FIERY BRIDGE Fiery Bridge is an application that allows you to access scanned documents in your Fiery PRO80 mailbox directly from a client Windows computer. Fiery Bridge makes your mailbox accessible as if it were a standard network drive, allowing you to browse its contents using Windows. You can open a scanned document from an appropriate application on your computer, just as you would open any file on your computer. Fiery Bridge is an alternative to transferring scanned documents from a Fiery PRO80 using Remote Scan or WebTools and can simplify your scanning workflow. You can even use Fiery Bridge in combination with Hot Folders to create an automated workflow. Installing Fiery Bridge Install Fiery Bridge on a Windows computer that has a network connection to the Fiery PRO80. The installer for Fiery Bridge is provided on the User Software DVD. Before you install the utility, read the guidelines described in “Preparing for installation on Windows computers” on page 10. To install Fiery Bridge, see “Installing user software on a Windows computer” on page 11. Using Fiery Bridge TO START FIERY BRIDGE • Choose Start > All Programs > Fiery > Fiery Bridge or double-click the Fiery Bridge shortcut on your desktop. For complete instructions on how to use the standard Fiery Bridge features, see Fiery Bridge Help. TO ACCESS FIERY BRIDGE HELP 1 Start Fiery Bridge. 2 Choose Help > Help. HOT FOLDERS 43 HOT FOLDERS Hot Folders is a utility that allows you to store and reuse frequently used print options when printing PostScript and PDF files on the Fiery PRO80. With Hot Folders, you can do the following: • Create special folders (hot folders) that assign specific print settings and print queues to jobs • Print jobs to the Fiery PRO80 by dragging and dropping them onto hot folders on your computer’s desktop • Monitor the status of jobs sent to hot folders Installing Hot Folders The Hot Folders installer is located on the User Software DVD. Before installing the utility, make sure that you complete the preliminary procedures described on page 10. To install Hot Folders on a Windows computer, see page 11. To install Hot Folders on a Mac OS computer, see page 13. Upgrading from a previous version of Hot Folders Hot Folders includes a migration assistant that detects the previous version of Hot Folders and upgrades any existing Hot Folders settings to work in the latest version. The migration takes place only once during the installation of Hot Folders or Command WorkStation. The Migration Assistant summary window indicates whether or not a Hot Folder transferred successfully to the new version, and in case of failure, allows you to retry once during installation without exiting the Migration Assistant. HOT FOLDERS 44 TO MIGRATE FOLDER SETTINGS FROM AN EARLIER VERSION OF HOT FOLDERS 1 Install Hot Folders and allow the migration assistant to detect the previous version. NOTE: The Migration Assistant window only appears if there is a previous version of Hot Folders already installed. (Previous versions include: on Windows, all 2.x versions; on Mac OS, all 1.x versions.) 2 Click OK and follow on-screen instructions. NOTE: Do not click Cancel when migration is in progress. Cancelling the operation may cause permanent damage to the Hot Folders being upgraded. 3 Check the Migration summary in the Migration Assistant window. If migration is successful, you will see the successful icon ( ) next to each Hot Folder. If migration fails, or only partially succeeds, you will see the failed icon ( ) next to the Hot Folders that failed to migrate, with any details highlighted in the lower pane. 4 In case of failure, click Retry to attempt migration again before exiting the Migration Assistant. NOTE: Retrying will generate a new summary, checking only the files that failed. 5 Click OK. Using Hot Folders For complete instructions on how to use the standard Hot Folders features, see Hot Folders Help. If the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is installed and enabled on the Fiery PRO80, you can use additional file format filters with Hot Folders. For information about using these file format filters, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. TO ACCESS HOT FOLDERS HELP 1 Start Hot Folders. 2 Choose Help > EFI Hot Folders Help. WEBTOOLS 45 WEBTOOLS WebTools allow you to manage your Fiery PRO80 remotely from the Internet or your company’s intranet. The Fiery PRO80 has its own home page, where you can select the following WebTools: • Home provides current information about the jobs processing and printing on the Fiery PRO80. • Downloads allows remote users to download installers (for drivers, PPDs, and other software) directly from the Fiery PRO80. • Docs allows remote users to access jobs on the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet or intranet. • Configure allows the Fiery PRO80 administrator to view and modify Setup options remotely from a Windows computer. Setting up WebTools WebTools are accessed through the home page of the Fiery PRO80 web site and do not require special installation. However, WebTools do require initial Setup by the Fiery PRO80 administrator. To enable network users to access and use WebTools, the administrator must set specific options in Network Setup and Printer Setup. For information about these specific Setup options, see Configuration and Setup. The administrator also must prepare each user’s computer to communicate with the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet or intranet. WEBTOOLS 46 TO SET UP CLIENT COMPUTERS TO USE WEBTOOLS 1 Enable TCP/IP networking. 2 Make sure that the workstation has a valid, unique IP address. 3 Make sure that a supported Internet browser is installed on the computer. For more information on supported browsers, see Welcome. 4 Make sure that Java is enabled in your Internet browser. In addition, make sure that you have completed the preliminary procedures described on page 10. NOTE: If the client computer is running Windows XP with Service Pack 2 (SP2) installed, Pop-up Blocker is turned on by default. With this function turned on, a warning message appears when you access WebTools, and your access to WebTools is denied. To gain access, do one of the following: • Change the Pop-up Blocker setting by clicking the warning message and choosing from one of the selections that appears. • Turn off Pop-up Blocker in Internet Explorer from the Tools menu or in Internet Options. For more information, see Internet Explorer Help, or the documentation that accompanies your Windows system. Accessing the WebTools home page Use your Internet browser to access WebTools. For complete information about browser and system requirements, see Welcome. 1 Start your Internet browser. 2 Type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 home page appears. If the home page for the printer appears instead of the WebTools page, click the WebTools link. 3 Click the tab for the WebTool that you want to use. WEBTOOLS 47 Using WebTools The following sections describe how to use the WebTools. Home Home lets you view jobs that are currently processing and printing on the Fiery PRO80. Printing and processing information is updated every 30 seconds. For complete instructions on how to use Home, see Home Help. Downloads The Downloads WebTool allows you to download installers (for drivers, PPDs, and other Fiery PRO80 software) directly from the Fiery PRO80. For complete instructions on how to use Downloads, see Downloads Help. Docs Docs allows you to access jobs on the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet or intranet. You can: • Manage and distribute jobs in your mailbox. Mailboxes are set up in the Configure WebTool. • Control and modify jobs. • Submit jobs to the Fiery PRO80. For complete instructions on how to use Docs, see Docs Help. Configure Configure allows the Fiery PRO80 administrator to view and modify Setup options remotely from a Windows computer. For information about using Configure, see Configuration and Setup. Before using Configure, make sure you have completed the Configure preparation procedure described on page 10. For complete instructions on how to use Configure, see Configure Help. INDEX 49 A accessing Help 19 for Command WorkStation 19 for Fiery Bridge 42 for Hot Folders 44 for Remote Scan 39 for SeeQuence Suite 33 ADF (automatic document feeder) 38 Administrator login 18, 19 Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop description 31 installing 32 B blank pages, inserting 22 C chapter definition for jobs 21 color management 9 Command WorkStation accessing Help 19 Device Center 15 Job Center 15 Compose, about 30 Configuration page description 17 printing 17 Configure WebTool 47 configuring connection 39 server 47 WebTools 45, 46 configuring connection to server for Command WorkStation 17 Remote Scan 39 conventions 8 cover media 23 cover settings 22 D Device Center 15 Docs WebTool 47 Domain Name Server (DNS) 17 dongle for SeeQuence Compose 30 for SeeQuence Impose 30 for SeeQuence Suite 30 downloading software 47 Downloads WebTool 47 drag-and-drop printing 43 E EFI ImageViewer 28 enabling SeeQuence Suite 31 F Fiery Bridge accessing Help 42 description 42 installing 42 using 42 Fiery User Software Installer 11, 13 Fiery utilities, configuring the connection to server 39 file format filters 44 full-screen preview 28 G graphic arts features file format filters 44 Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition ImageViewer 28 INDEX INDEX 50 H Help for Command WorkStation 19 for Fiery Bridge 42 for Hot Folders 44 for Paper Catalog 34 for Remote Scan 39 for SeeQuence Suite 33 for WebTools 47 Home WebTool 47 Hot Folders accessing Help 44 description 43 installing 43 using 44 I icons, in documentation 8 ImageViewer 28 Impose, about 30 imposing jobs 30 imposition layouts 30 Insert Tabs 26 inserting blank pages 22 tabs 26 installing Compose 31 Fiery Bridge 42 Hot Folders 43 Impose 31 Paper Catalog 34 SeeQuence Suite 31 user software 10 installing on Mac OS 13 IP address 17 J Java 46 Java file 10 installing 10 Java runtime Environment (JRE) 10 Job Center 15 jobs chapter definitions 21 cover media 23 mixed media definitions 20 VDP 30 L logging in to the server 18 M Mailbox name 41 Mailboxes, scanning to 41 media definitions 20 media settings cover 22 Mixed Media 20 P Paper Catalog accessing from Command WorkStation 35 changing or deleting an entry 37 description 34 installing 34 specifying media from Compose 36 from Hot Folders 36 from Impose 36 from Job Properties 35 from Mixed Media 36 Paper Catalog, specifying media from 26 paper definitions 20 preview window 28 printing with frequently used print options 43 product names terminology 8 R Remote Scan accessing Help 39 configuring connection to server 39 description 38 using 40 remote setup 47 S scan settings, specifying 40 scans initiating 40 retrieving from Mailboxes 41 retrieving from WebTools 40 SeeQuence Compose See Compose 30 SeeQuence Impose See Impose 30 INDEX 51 SeeQuence Suite accessing Help 33 description 30 kits 30 SeeQuence Suite See Impose and Compose 30 server setup 47 servers. searching for 17 Sun Java JRE 10 T tab insertion 26 media 26 tab printing 22, 25 text attributes 27 tab text, specifying 27 tabs, unused 28 terminology 8 terminology for product names 8 text attributes on tabs 27 text on tabs, specifying 27 troubleshooting Command WorkStation 29 U user software for SeeQuence Suite 31 installing from media 10 installing on Mac OS 13 installing on Windows 11 installing over the Internet 10 installing over the network 10 modifying on Windows 12 V VDP jobs imposing 30 W WebTools Configure 47 configuring 46 Docs 47 Downloads 47 Home Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Welcome © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093713 29 July 2010 WELCOME 3 WELCOME This Welcome document provides system requirements and an overview of how to set up the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server so that you can begin printing. It describes the initial tasks you must perform and points you to sections in the user documentation where the procedures are described in detail. This document also provides a description of the user documentation on the User Documentation CD and instructions on printing documents. This document assumes that you have already installed the printer components. Detai